2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31iso4217:GBP2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31iso4217:GBPxbrli:shares2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:MergerReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112023-12-312138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:MergerReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-01-012024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:MergerReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112024-12-312138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:MergerReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-01-012025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:IssuedCapitalMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:SharePremiumMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:MergerReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:CapitalRedemptionReserveMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:ReserveOfCashFlowHedgesMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31ifrs-full:RetainedEarningsMember2138004WZUPWV53KWV112025-12-31
2025
Annual Report
& Accounts
ANNUAL REPORT
& ACCOUNTS
2025
6 Group Overview and Highlights
10 Chair’s Statement
12 Strategic Review
16 Our Commitment to Section 172(1)
18 Chief Executive’s Operating Review
24 Financial Review
28 Sustainability Statement
50 Principal Risks and Uncertainties
60 Directors and Officers
62 Directors’ Report
69 Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities
in Respect of the Financial Statements
70 Corporate Governance Report
84 Audit Committee Report
91 Nomination Committee Report
94 Directors’ Remuneration Report
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Inside
this
report
2 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
118 Independent Auditor’s Report
127 Consolidated Income Statement
128 Consolidated Statement of
Comprehensive Income
129 Consolidated Statement of Changes
in Shareholders’ Equity
130 Consolidated Balance Sheet
131 Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
132 Statement of Significant Accounting
Policies
144 Notes to the Consolidated Financial
Statements
178 Company Statement of Changes in
Shareholders’ Equity
179 Company Balance Sheet
180 Statement of Significant Accounting
Policies
182 Notes to the Company Financial
Statements
191 Financial Calendar
192 Notice of Annual General Meeting
204 Directors and Advisors
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
3
4 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
6 Group Overview
and Highlights
10 Chair’s Statement
16 Our Commitment
to Section 172(1)
18 Chief Executive’s
Operating Review
24 Financial Review
50 Principal Risks
and Uncertainties
28 Sustainability
Statement
12 Strategic Review
5
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
6 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
We have a strong balance sheet with
a highly cash generative model, so are
well placed to capitalise on appropriate
opportunities as they arise.
Progressive
dividend
policy
Latest £55.0m
share buyback
programme
completed in
January 2026
Margin
improvement on
track for target
of at least 14% in
2026
Our employees
are the foundation
of our business,
with a continued
focus on delivering
outstanding
customer service
We continue to
prioritise the
identification
of earnings
enhancing
acquisition
opportunities
6 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
GROUP OVERVIEW
AND HIGHLIGHTS
7
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
We have entered 2026 as
a strongly invested business
with a resilient business
model and a proven ability to
navigate periods of economic
uncertainty.
Productivity
improvements,
as a result of our
ongoing targeted
investment in the
business, helped to
offset cost inflation
Strong balance
sheet and cash
generation with
capacity for further
investment
Opening of
new HORECA
site in Crawley
The Board
remains
confident about
the growth
opportunities
available to the
Group
7
Successful
transition from
AIM to the Main
Market of the
London Stock
Exchange
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
8 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
GROUP OVERVIEW
AND HIGHLIGHTS
Repositioned as a Dedicated Textile
Services Provider
53%
26%
21%
2012 REVENUE
Revenue previously derived from three distinct
sources…now derived from one focused business
Textile Services
Drycleaning
Facilities
Management
22%
78%
2012 REVENUE
Source of revenue within Textile Services significantly changed
HORECA
Workwear
100%
72%
2025 REVENUE
73%
2025 REVENUE
27%
9
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Price increases, together with productivity improvements
as a result of our ongoing targeted investment in the
business, helped to offset cost inflation
Group Overview and Highlights
Notes
1. All figures are from Continuing Operations.
2. “Adjusted Operating Profit” refers to operating profit before amortisation of
intangible assets (excluding software amortisation), goodwill impairment and
exceptional items.
3. Adjusted Profit Before Taxation” refers to Adjusted Operating Profit less
finance costs.
4. “Adjusted Diluted Earnings per Share” refers to diluted earnings per share
calculated based on adjusted profit after taxation and, in 2021, 2022 and 2023,
excludes the benefit of the capital allowances super deduction which offered
130% first year relief on qualifying spend.
“Our strong earnings growth and improved margin, in line with market expectations, reflects our
continued focus on operational efficiencies, tight cost control and service excellence.”
REVENUE (£m)
1
ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT MARGIN (%)
1
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
ADJUSTED OPERATING PROFIT
m)
1,2
OPERATING PROFIT (£m)
1
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
ADJUSTED PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION (£m)
1,3
PROFIT BEFORE TAXATIONm)
1
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024
2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024
2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
20252025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
ADJUSTED DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE
(p)
1,4
DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE (p)
1
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
2025
2025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
271.4
385.7
465.3
513.4
12.7
41.2
50.5
9.4
38.2
44.5
1.7
7.2
7.7
4.7
10.7
10.9
8.4
33.3
43.6
5.1
30.3
37.6
1.6
6.5 6.4
2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2024
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2021 2022 2023 2021 2022 2023
2024
2021 2022 2023
62.3
54.8
10.1
2024
2024
2024 2021 2022 2023
54.7
47.2
8.4
2024
2024
2024
12.1
535.4
2025
2025
72.5
64.5
12.1
2025
2025
2025
58.8
50.8
9.2
2025
2025
2025
13.5
Dear Shareholder
I am pleased to report that the Group has delivered a strong
performance for the financial year ended 31 December 2025,
establishing a solid platform for sustainable, long-term growth.
This outcome reflects the strength and resilience of our business
model, the depth of our operational expertise, the quality of
our relationships with our customers and suppliers, and above
all, the dedication and commitment of our people. Under the
strong and energetic leadership of Peter Egan, our CEO, and the
executive team, our colleagues continue to drive our success.
On behalf of the Board, I extend my sincere appreciation to
all employees for their exceptional contributions, and to our
stakeholders for their continued confidence and support.
A significant milestone, this year, was the Group’s successful
transition from AIM to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies)
Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct
Authority and to trading on London Stock Exchange plc’s Main
Market for listed securities, a step that reflects the maturity of
our business and enhances our profile with a broader base of
investors. In addition, in October 2025, after more than 40 years
with the Group, including 17 years as Chief Financial Officer,
Yvonne Monaghan stepped down from the Board as Chief
Financial Officer ahead of her retirement in February 2026. The
Board is deeply grateful for Yvonne’s exceptional dedication
and leadership over many years, which have been instrumental
in strengthening the Group’s financial foundations and driving
sustained growth. Yvonne is succeeded by Ryan Govender,
who brings strong experience and capability to the role. We
are delighted to welcome Ryan as Chief Financial Officer and
are confident that his appointment will ensure continuity and
support the Group’s next phase of development.
As we enter 2026, the Board remains focused on executing our
growth strategy and seizing the growth opportunities ahead.
We are also pleased to announce that, as part of our succession
planning, Lysanne Gray will join the Board as an Independent
Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June 2026 and will
succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair following the
announcement of the Group’s interim results for the six-month
period ended 30 June 2026. In addition, Nicola Keach, who
has served as an Independent Non-Executive Director of the
Company since June 2022, will succeed Chris Girling as Senior
Independent Director with effect from 1 June 2026.
Financial Results
As explained in the Chief Executive’s Operating Review on
page18, total revenue for the year to 31 December 2025
increased by 4.3% to £535.4 million (2024: £513.4 million). This
increase delivered an adjusted profit before taxation of
£64.5million (2024: £54.8 million). This strong performance is the
result of sustained effort across the Group, expertly guided by
the dynamic leadership of the Group’s Executive Directors and
their management team. While volatility and macro-economic
uncertainty have remained a constant backdrop, the Group
has continued to focus on meeting the needs of our customers
and supporting our people in line with our purpose. These
foundations position the Group well to create long-term value
for Shareholders. Further details of our operational and financial
performance can be found on pages 18 to 27.
Chair’s Statement
10 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & AccountsJohnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & AccountsJohnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Jock Lennox
Chair
I am pleased to
report that the Group
has delivered a
strong performance
for the financial year
ended 31 December
2025, establishing
a solid platform for
sustainable, long-
term growth.
11
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Dividend
As determined by our progressive dividend policy, an interim
dividend of 1.6 pence per share was paid on 4 November 2025.
The Board is pleased to recommend a final dividend of 3.2 pence
per share, which reflects the Board’s confidence in the prospects
of the business. Together with the interim dividend this takes
the total dividend for the year to 4.8 pence per share and, as the
Board previously committed to do, maintains cover at 2.5 times.
A Strong Capital Base
The Group maintains a strong balance sheet and is well
positioned to continue to invest in the business to support our
long-term growth prospects. The Group’s objective is to employ
a disciplined approach to investment, returns and capital
efficiency to deliver sustainable compounding earnings growth
whilst also maintaining a strong balance sheet and increasing
ROCE.
Our capital allocation policy remains unchanged and considers
maintaining a strong balance sheet, ongoing capital investment
in our estate, accretive acquisitions, a progressive dividend
policy and distributing any surplus cash to Shareholders. Further
details of our capital allocation policy are provided on pages26
and 27 and further details of the share buyback programmes can
be found on page 27.
Share Buyback and Investment
In the period since September 2022, we have undertaken a
number of share buyback programmes returning £90.3 million
to Shareholders, established a presence in the Republic of
Ireland, through the £27.1 million acquisition of Harkglade
Limited, established our Johnsons Luxury Linen business, through
the £5.8million acquisition of Regency Laundry Limited and
the £20.6million acquisition of Empire Linen Services Limited,
invested in the opening of a new site in Crawley and undertaken
significant capital investment across many of our other sites.
Even after taking into consideration these investments, the return
of funds to Shareholders, including the payment of dividends,
the Group remains well funded, is highly cash generative and
has significant headroom with respect to its leverage target of
1.0 to 1.5 times. Accordingly, the Board will continue to pursue
investment opportunities, both organic and inorganic, and
actively review its options for further share buybacks throughout
2026.
Governance and the Board
Companies today are rightly judged not only by their financial
performance but also by their integrity and trustworthiness.
As Chair, one of my key responsibilities is to ensure the highest
standards of governance across the Group. I am fortunate to be
strongly supported in this by my fellow Board members and by
our General Counsel & Company Secretary, whose collective skills
and experience complement the talents of our management
teams.
The Board conducted a Board evaluation within the Company
in the final quarter of 2025. Further details of the evaluation are
set out within the Corporate Governance Report on page81.
The 2025 evaluation concluded that the performance of the
Board and its Committees continued to be effective in dealing
with both day-to-day and ongoing strategic issues and that the
Board and Committee structure ensured that the governance
requirements of the business were met. Overall, the feedback
from Board members was positive, indicating a desire to
continue the Board’s focus in 2026, primarily, on: strategic
development and succession planning; whilst effectively
exploiting the growth opportunities that are available to
the Group; delivering on the Group’s sustainability aims; and
continuing to develop and encourage our people.
The Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer engage
regularly with institutional investors to discuss the Group’s
strategy and present its financial results. As in previous years,
I met with a number of our major Shareholders during the
year to gain a fuller understanding of their perspectives and
to provide an opportunity for dialogue outside the Company’s
normal investor relations programme. I intend to continue this
engagement in 2026.
In 2025, I also led a consultation with major Shareholders in
advance of the Company’s proposed transition from AIM to the
Main Market. This process reflected the Board’s commitment to
meaningful Shareholder engagement and ensured that investor
feedback was carefully considered and informed the Board’s
decision to proceed with the transition to the Main Market. We
were pleased to welcome new Shareholders to the register,
replacing those investors whose mandates did not permit
continued investment following the move to the Main Market,
and were encouraged by the support of existing Shareholders
who have increased their holdings since the transition.
Sustainability
We strongly believe that embedding a best-in-class
sustainability programme throughout our operations will help
position us as a leader in responding to the challenges faced
by the textile services industry and prove to be a differentiator
for our customers. Following the launch of ‘The Johnsons Way’,
our group-wide approach to sustainability, we continue to
make excellent progress, refining and executing our strategy
around the four ‘Pillars’ of ‘Our Family’, ‘Our World, ‘Our Integrity’
and ‘Our Communities, publishing our fourth Sustainability
Report and achieving a Silver Medal in our inaugural EcoVadis
rating assessment. Further details are set out in the report on
Sustainability on pages 28 to 49.
Summary and Outlook
Looking ahead, we are confident in the Group’s ability to
continue expanding both organically and through disciplined
incremental and strategic acquisitions, driving further revenue
and profit growth, enhancing operational efficiency, and
delivering sustainable returns to shareholders. While we remain
mindful of global economic and geopolitical uncertainties, our
scale, strategic focus, and commitment to operational excellence
– supported by ongoing investment in our people – provide a
strong platform for future success. As we move into 2026, whilst
we are mindful of the current economic uncertainty, particularly
the impact of significantly increased labour and premises costs
on some of our end customers, we expect to deliver another year
of growth across the Group.
Jock Lennox
Non-Executive Chair
2 March 2026
12 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
The Strategic Report
The Strategic Report comprises the Group Overview and
Highlights, the Chair’s Statement, the Strategic Review,
Our Commitment to Section 172(1), the Chief Executive’s
Operating Review, the Financial Review, the report on
Sustainability (including the Group Non-Financial and
Sustainability Information Statement) and the Principal
Risks and Uncertainties.
Principal Activities and Business
Overview
Johnson Service Group PLC (the ‘Company’) is incorporated
and domiciled in the UK, its registered number is 523335
and the address of its registered office is Johnson House,
Abbots Park, Monks Way, Preston Brook, Cheshire, WA7
3GH. The Company is a public limited company and, with
effect from 1 August 2025, has all of its ordinary shares
admitted to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies)
Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct
Authority and London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market
for listed securities, having previously had all of its
ordinary shares listed and admitted to trading on the AIM
division of the London Stock Exchange.
The Company and its subsidiaries (together, the ‘Group’)
provide textile rental and related services to the Hotel,
Restaurant and Catering (‘HORECA’) and Workwear
sectors throughout the UK and Republic of Ireland.
Within our HORECA division, ‘Johnsons Hotel Linen’, our
high-volume linen business, primarily serves group and
independent large hotel customers, ‘Johnsons Hotel,
Restaurant and Catering Linen’ provides premium linen
services to restaurant, hospitality and corporate event
customers whilst ‘Johnsons Luxury Linen’ provides bespoke
linen predominantly to four- and five-star luxury hotels.
Also, within HORECA, ‘Johnsons Ireland’ serves both
hospitality and healthcare customers. Our Workwear
division comprises solely of ‘Johnsons Workwear’, which
predominantly provides workwear rental, protective wear
and laundry services to UK businesses across a wide range
of sectors including food manufacturing and industrial.
Strategic
Review
12 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
13
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Our Purpose
Our purpose sets out why
we do what we do:
We do our job, so our customers can do theirs
Our purpose is to be an exceptional textile services provider to thousands of businesses every day, delivering
sustainable growth and value to all our stakeholders.
Our Vision
Our vision sets out where
we want to be:
We want to be number one
Our vision is to be recognised as the home of exceptional quality and sustainable textile services, where our people
are integral to our success and where we lead the industry, setting the standards against which others aspire to.
Our Mission
Our mission sets out what
we do and how it will
contribute to achieving our
vision:
We do textile services
Our mission is to provide valuable textiles services by building strong partnerships with our customers and
providing exceptional service, quality products and technology enabled sustainable innovation that shapes the
future of our industry.
Our Values
Our values set out what we
collectively believe in and
guide our behaviours – they
act as our moral compass
as a company:
Delivering exceptional service
We take pride in providing a professional, efficient, reliable and friendly service to our customers.
We are committed to disciplined management of our operations to deliver consistent standards of exceptional
quality and to provide a service that our customers can trust.
Championing our people
We embody a culture that recognises and respects the diversity and contribution of all our people and where
everyone feels valued.
We promote a work environment where the health, safety and wellbeing of our people is a priority and which
provides opportunities and support for everyone to grow and succeed.
Caring for our environment
We care about our impact on the environment and consider ways to protect and enhance it.
We minimise the use of natural resources where possible and make sustainable purchasing choices so that we
can leave a positive legacy.
Acting in a responsible way
Operating from a resilient financial platform, we act with professionalism, integrity and the highest ethical
standards in everything that we do.
We expect all our relationships to be based on honesty, respect, fairness and a commitment to openness and
transparency.
Supporting our communities
We collaborate with our neighbours and wider communities to create strong, long-lasting relationships.
We take part in programmes and activities that directly and indirectly support our communities to grow and
thrive.
Further information covering the activities of the business during the year are set out within the Chair’s Statement and the
Chief Executive’s Operating Review.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Our Business Model and Strategy
The Board’s strategy has been to focus the Group on our
core businesses, increase the scale of our business both
organically and through targeted strategic and ‘bolt-on’
acquisitions and to be the market leader in textile services in
all geographies in which we operate.
The Group’s business model, which supports this strategy and
aims to increase both profitability and shareholder value,
focuses on delivering exceptional customer service across all
of our businesses in order to increase customer satisfaction
and loyalty and attract new customers.
Like many businesses, we continue to operate against
a backdrop of external cost pressures including those
stemming from the challenging macroeconomic environment
and the well-documented inflationary and operating
pressures within the hospitality sector. However, in the
ordinary course our business model seeks to generate
efficiencies in order to mitigate those pressures and to allow
us to maintain divisional margin over the medium term. Such
efficiencies include:
investing in the latest machinery technology in order to
increase capacity and productivity whilst at the same
time reducing energy costs and water consumption;
taking advantage of operational synergies, for example,
redistributing the processing of customer work across
our estate of sites in order to take advantage of reduced
distribution costs;
in alignment with our approach towards a circular
economy, identifying opportunities for end-of-life textile
management, including exploring new technologies and
partnerships to help develop innovative solutions for
textile recycling; and
diligently and proactively managing our cost base.
Key to this is our biggest asset, our highly capable employees,
who are the face of our business. The investment we make
in the training and development of our employees supports
our business model and we seek the views and opinions of
employees, at all levels, to continuously develop the way we
operate such that we support our people and the operations
of the Group.
The scale and geographic coverage of our business, together
with our focus on customer service, cost control, sustainability
and efficiencies, give us a competitive advantage. We
can provide our customers with the best value in terms of
quality, cost and service and this helps drive long term and
sustainable organic revenue growth.
We continue to identify opportunities to grow the business
organically and actively pursue strategic and ‘bolt-on’
acquisition opportunities which will broaden our services
and geographic spread, add value for Shareholders and
complement our position as a market leader in textile
services.
Customer
Service
Cost
Management
Sustainability
Organic
Growth
Strategic
Acquisitions
Targeted
Investment
Operational
Synergies
14 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Strategic Review
Continued >
15
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)
The Group refers to certain KPIs to assess the performance of the
Group as a whole, and of the various businesses. Further details
of the KPIs are set out within the Financial Review.
Viability Statement
The Board is acutely aware that an understanding of the future
prospects of the Group is of vital importance to all stakeholders
and, as such, a statement, on behalf of the Board, is set out below
on the future prospects of the Group.
The Directors confirm that, based upon the information and
knowledge of which they can be reasonably expected to be
aware, they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will
be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they
fall due for a period of not less than 36 months from the balance
sheet date.”
The Directors acknowledge the heightened uncertainty of
the Group’s strategic plans in the current macro-economic
environment and, as a result, have considered a range of
different scenarios. Financial forecasts are reviewed and
approved by the Board, with involvement throughout from the
Group CEO, Group CFO and the Group Management Board. Part
of the Board’s role is to consider the appropriateness of key
assumptions, considering the external environment, business
strategy and business model of the Group.
Whilst the Directors expect the future prospects of the Group
to extend beyond the 36-month period referred to above, this
period has been selected, for the purpose of this statement, as:
it is concurrent with the most recently available financial
modelling for the Group;
the situation with respect to the UK and ROI current macro-
economic environment remains uncertain and is likely to
continue impacting the Group in the medium term;
it is consistent with the average contract life of key
customers, which provide stable revenue streams, being
approximately 36 months;
the Group’s committed banking facilities, which are due to
expire in August 2027, are expected to be refinanced with
existing lenders for a tenure extending to at least the end of
the 36-month period referred to above; and
projections looking out further than 36 months become
significantly less meaningful in the context of the Group’s
operations and markets.
The Directors have a reasonable expectation, having taken into
consideration the principal risks and uncertainties facing the
Group (as set out on pages 50 to 56) and, inter alia, the points set
out below, that the trading performance and cash generation of
the Group will not be materially adversely affected within that
time frame, as:
our diversified customer base, the majority of which have a
formal contract in place with varying expiry dates of up to
five years, provides a secure future income stream whilst at
the same time ensuring that the loss of any single customer
would not materially impact the Group’s future trading
performance and cash flows;
the diverse and unrelated nature of the Group’s customer
base limits concentration of credit risk;
the Group has prepared financial modelling, covering
a three-year period, which has been approved by the
Board. Prior to approving the financial modelling, the
Board reviewed, challenged and stress tested the financial
projections and assumptions contained within the forecasts.
The stress tests were designed to determine the performance
level that would result in a reduction in headroom against
the Group’s committed facilities to nil or a breach of
covenants. The Directors did not consider such a reduction
in performance to be likely and hence were able to conclude
that there were no indications of a significant threat to the
future prospects of the Group;
the Group continuously strives to seek out and invest in plant
and equipment that will help drive operational efficiencies;
a significant number of the Group’s key processing sites are
owned on either a freehold or long leasehold basis thereby
providing security of tenure;
the wide geographic spread of processing sites mitigates
the effect of a loss of any single processing facility (as
demonstrated during 2020, following serious fire damage
at one of our sites and flood damage at another of our
sites, and, more recently, in 2025, following a fire at a small
industrial workwear processing unit) and, furthermore,
appropriate insurance cover is in place such that the
increased cost of working following a loss of processing
capacity may, in some circumstances, be recovered; and
the Group continuously reviews the adequacy and strength
of its management teams to ensure that appropriate
experience and training is given and develops succession
planning as part of the development programmes for our
people.
Although the Board is confident of the future prospects of the
Group, there remain a number of risks and uncertainties, which
are often beyond the control of the Directors, which could mean
that actual results and events may differ from those budgeted.
Strategic Report Approval
The Strategic Report, outlined on pages 6 to 56, incorporates
the Group Overview and Highlights, the Chair’s Statement,
the Strategic Review, Our Commitment to Section 172(1), the
Chief Executive’s Operating Review, the Financial Review, the
report on Sustainability (including the Group Non-Financial and
Sustainability Information Statement) and the Principal Risks
and Uncertainties.
The Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 2 March
2026.
By order of the Board.
Christopher Clarkson
Company Secretary
2 March 2026
16 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Our Commitment to Section 172(1)
Our Stakeholders
The success of our strategy is reliant on the support and commitment of all our stakeholders. Their interests are important to us
and we are committed to maintaining strong, positive relationships with them, built on a foundation of mutual respect, trust and
understanding. Our key stakeholders are our people, the communities in which we do business, our customers, our suppliers, our
shareholders, non-government organisations as well as Government organisations and regulators. We work hard to ensure that
we provide the right resources, energy and focus to meet the expectations of all of our stakeholders. The table below provides a
high-level overview of how we engage with our stakeholders. Further details are then provided within the report on Sustainability
on pages 28 to 49.
Description Areas of focus Why we engage How we engage
People Our employees who
work in our business
health and wellbeing
diversity and inclusion
recognition and careers
remuneration
Our people are at the heart
of our business and key to our
ongoing success. We want our
people to thrive in a fair and
inclusive work environment.
There are many ways we engage,
including engagement surveys,
employee focus groups, site
meetings, internal social media
and newsletters.
Communities The people who live in
the local communities
around our sites and
operations
fair employment and equal
opportunities
local causes and issues
health and wellbeing
To build trust by operating
responsibly and sustainably
and addressing issues
that are material to our
communities. To provide
employment opportunities to
local people to help support
the community.
We operate many local
employment programmes to
recruit and develop people to
work in our sites. We partner
with charities and organisations
to raise awareness and donate
funds to help local causes.
Customers The businesses and
organisations to
whom we provide
goods and services
working within defined
sectors, we provide solutions
to match specific market and
customer requirements
sustainable customer
relationship initiatives
technology and innovation
to support customer
requirements
By understanding what is
important to our customers,
we ensure that our services
are tailored to support their
individual business objectives.
We aim to have open and
transparent relationships
that are based on honesty
and respect. We conduct
independent customer surveys
which measure satisfaction
levels.
Suppliers Our trusted partners
who source and
supply products and
services to us
workplace health and safety
supply chain integrity
human rights
sustainable products
To develop mutually beneficial
and lasting partnerships
aimed at addressing shared
challenges in responsible
and sustainable sourcing and
to communicate our supply
chain standards, expectations
and commitments.
We regularly communicate
with our suppliers and we
have also hosted multi-
supplier conferences. We
aim to pay suppliers within
agreed contractual terms
and endeavour to work in a
collaborative manner with them
in order to resolve any disputes
that may arise.
Shareholders Individuals or
institutions
that own shares in
Johnson Service
Group PLC
financial performance
competitive positioning
strategy and outlook
ethical business practices
and sound governance
leadership and succession
planning
debt and liquidity
sustainability
Our philosophy is to engage in
regular, open and transparent
dialogue with our existing
and prospective shareholders.
We value their thoughts
and opinions which are
shared with the Board. The
Board reviews the feedback
and, where relevant, takes
appropriate actions to
address any concerns.
We engage with our existing
investors through one-to-one and
group meetings, presentations,
conference calls and at our AGM.
The Group CEO, Group CFO and
Chair dedicate significant time
to engaging with our major
shareholders.
Non-
Governmental
Organisations
(NGOs)
NGOs support us
with knowledge
and expertise on
key industrial, social,
environmental and
economic issues
human rights
climate change
social issues
To ensure we stay up to date
and develop effective action
plans so we can have a
positive impact on key social,
environmental and economic
issues.
We engage with NGOs through
regular communications,
interactions and meetings
as well as through industry
association memberships and at
forums and conferences.
Government
& Regulators
Regional and
national government
bodies and agencies
which implement and
enforce applicable
laws across our
industry
public health policies
workplace health and safety
human rights
climate change
legal and regulatory
compliance
To communicate our views to
those who have responsibility
for implementing policy, laws
and regulations relevant to
our businesses.
We engage through a series of
industry consultations, forums
and conferences.
17
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Our Commitment to Section 172(1)
Section 172(1) Statement – Duty to Promote
the Success of the Company
Section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006 (the ‘Act’) requires the
directors of a company to act in a way that they consider, in
good faith, would be most likely to promote the success of the
company for the benefit of its members as a whole, and in doing
so have regard (amongst other matters) to:
a) the likely consequences of any decision in the long term;
b) the interests of the company’s employees;
c) the need to foster the company’s business relationships with
suppliers, customers and others;
d) the impact of the company’s operations on the community
and the environment;
e) the desirability of the company maintaining a reputation for
high standards of business conduct; and
f) the need to act fairly between members of the company.
As part of their induction, a Director is briefed on their duties
and they can access professional guidance on these, either
from the Company Secretary or, if they judge it necessary, from
an independent adviser. In addition, the Company’s financial
adviser and external lawyers are available to the Board to
provide training updates on directors’ duties and any relevant
legislative changes.
The Board confirms that, during the year, the Board and its
individual members have acted in a way that would be most
likely to promote the success of the Company, for the benefit
of its members as a whole, in the decisions made by the Board
during the year. The Directors confirm that the deliberations of
the Board, which underpin its decisions, incorporate appropriate
regard to the matters detailed in section 172(1) of the Companies
Act 2006. During the year, the Board considered information
from across the Group’s businesses and received presentations
from management, reviewed papers and reports and took part
in discussions which considered, where relevant, the impact of
the Company’s activities on its key stakeholders. These activities,
together with direct engagement by the Board and individual
Directors with the Company’s stakeholders, helped to inform the
Board in its decision-making processes.
Further details as to how the Directors have fulfilled their duties,
together with references to relevant areas within this Annual
Report, are set out below. Specific examples of how the Board
considered the interests of stakeholders in its principal decision-
making are provided on pages 74 to 75.
The Board acknowledges that balancing the needs and
expectations of stakeholders is important, but it often has to
make difficult decisions based on competing priorities where the
outcome of any decision it makes will not necessarily result in a
positive outcome for all of the Group’s stakeholders. Decisions
are not taken lightly and the decision-making process has
been structured to enable directors to evaluate the merit of
proposed business activities and the likely consequences of its
decisions over the short, medium and long term, with the aim of
safeguarding the Company so that it can continue in existence,
fulfilling its purpose and creating value for future generations of
stakeholders. By considering the Company’s purpose, vision and
values, together with its strategic priorities and having a process
in place for decision-making the Board does, however, aim to
make sure that its decisions are consistent and predictable.
Risk Management
It is vital that we effectively identify, evaluate, manage and
mitigate the risks we face as a business. For details of our
principal risks and uncertainties, and how we manage our risk
environment, please see pages 50 to 56. The Board is also aware
that an understanding of the future prospects of the Group is
of vital importance to all stakeholders – a statement as such,
together with further explanatory information, is set out within
our Viability Statement.
Our Employees
The Group is committed to being a responsible employer. For
our business to succeed we need to manage our people’s
performance and develop and bring through talent while
ensuring we operate as efficiently as possible. We recognise
that our people are key to the success of the Group and we
value the contribution of each and every one of our employees.
We strive to create an inspiring working environment where
everyone is engaged and motivated. We must also ensure we
share common values that inform and guide our behaviour
so we achieve our goals in the right way. The Board receives
updates on key elements of the people strategy which provides
insight into a variety of areas including culture, diversity and
inclusion, succession planning, future capabilities and employee
engagement. For further details on our employees and equality,
diversity and inclusion initiatives within the Group, please see
pages36 to 37.
Business Relationships
Our strategy prioritises growth, both organically and through
acquisition. Organic growth is driven through up-selling services
to existing clients as well as bringing new customers into the
Group. To do this, we need to develop and maintain strong
customer relationships. We value all of our suppliers and have
multi-year contracts with our key suppliers. For further details
on how we work with our customers and suppliers, please see
pages40 to 41.
Community and Environment
The Group’s approach is to use our position of strength to create
positive change for the people and communities with which we
interact, giving back wherever we can. We want to leverage our
expertise and enable our people to support the communities
around us. We recognise our responsibilities to achieve good
environmental practice and to continue to strive for improvement
in areas of environmental impact. We are committed to
energy efficiency improvement and continue to take steps in a
continuous improvement strategy. For further details on how
we interact with communities and the environment, please see
pages32 to 35 and pages 38 to 39.
Culture and Values
The Board recognises the importance of having the right
corporate culture. Our long-term success depends on achieving
our strategic goals in the right way, so we look after the best
interests of our employees, customers and other stakeholders.
Further details on our purpose, mission, vision and values are
set out on page 13 whilst details of our corporate culture can be
found on page 65.
Shareholders
The Board is committed to openly engaging with our
Shareholders, as we recognise the importance of a continuing
effective dialogue, whether with major institutional investors,
private or employee Shareholders. It is important to us that
Shareholders understand our strategy and objectives, so these
must be explained clearly, feedback heard and any issues or
questions raised, properly considered. For further details on how
we engage with our Shareholders, see pages 75 to 76.
Chief Executives
Operating
Review
…the Board expects
to deliver another year
of growth across the
Group and we remain on
track towards achieving
our targeted adjusted
operating margin of at
least 14.0% in 2026.
Peter Egan
Chief Executive Officer
Basis of Preparation
Throughout this statement, and consistent with
prior years, a number of alternative performance
measures (‘APMs’) are used to describe the Group’s
performance. APMs are not recognised under
UK-adopted international accounting standards.
Whilst the Board uses APMs to manage and assess
the performance of the Group, and believes they
are representative of underlying trading, facilitate
meaningful year on year comparisons and hence
provide useful information to stakeholders, it
is cognisant that they do have limitations and
should not be regarded as a complete picture of
the Group’s financial performance. APMs, which
include adjusted operating profit, adjusted
profit before taxation, adjusted EBITDA, adjusted
earnings per share, adjusted diluted earnings
per share and net debt excluding IFRS 16 lease
liabilities, are defined within note 1 (Basis of
Preparation) and are reconciled to statutory
reporting measures in notes 2, 5, 8 and 17 of the
Financial Statements.
Financial Overview
Financial Results
Total revenue for the year increased by £22.0
million, or 4.3%, to £535.4 million (2024: £513.4
million). Whilst price increase and renewal
discussions continued to be challenging during
2025, we remain focused on delivering excellent
service which is commensurate with our pricing
levels. On an organic basis, revenue in HORECA
increased by 1.0% over 2024 and Workwear
increased by 2.4%.
18 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts18 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts18 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
19
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
We have continued to proactively manage ongoing input cost
inflation pressures, particularly in relation to labour following the
significant increases to UK National Insurance, the UK National
Living Wage and, within the Republic of Ireland, the National
Minimum Wage, through a combination of price increases
and capital investment, which delivers increased operational
efficiencies and lowers energy and water usage. Energy, as a
percentage of revenue, has continued to reduce but remains a
higher cost than has been experienced historically. Our stated
policy of proactively forward fixing energy prices for the coming
months to obtain and manage some degree of certainty over the
cost of supply is being maintained, giving us visibility of a further
reduction, as a percentage of revenue, in 2026. Labour costs, as a
percentage of revenue, are expected to remain relatively stable
into 2026.
Adjusted operating profit increased by 16.4% to £72.5 million
(2024: £62.3 million) whilst adjusted operating profit margin
improved by 140 basis points to 13.5% (2024: 12.1%), reflecting
strong operational control and the benefit of efficiencies through
our targeted investment in the business.
Adjusted EBITDA increased by 9.3% to £166.8 million (2024:
£152.6 million) giving an increased margin of 31.2% (2024: 29.7%).
Adjusted profit before taxation increased by 17.7% to £64.5 million
(2024: £54.8 million).
The exceptional charge of £6.0 million (2024: £0.4 million)
represents £1.7 million of costs in relation to our move to the Main
Market, £3.4 million of reorganisation costs, including £1.4 million
relating to the closure of our Lancaster Workwear site, £0.5
million in relation to business acquisition activity and £0.4 million
of costs incurred in respect of the fire at the Bristol Workwear
site.
Statutory operating profit increased to £58.8 million (2024: £54.7
million) whilst statutory profit before taxation, after amortisation
of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation) of £7.7
million (2024: £7.2 million) and the exceptional items referred to
above, increased to £50.8 million (2024: £47.2 million).
Adjusted diluted earnings per share increased by 19.8% to 12.1
pence (2024: 10.1 pence).
Dividends
An interim dividend of 1.6 pence (2024: 1.3 pence) per share was
declared at the time of announcing our interim results. We are
pleased to recommend a final dividend of 3.2 pence per share,
taking the full year dividend to 4.8 pence (2024: 4.0 pence) per
share. This year-on-year increase of 20.0% reflects the Board’s
confidence in the future performance of the Group. Dividend
cover remains at 2.5 times.
Share Buyback Programme
In the period since September 2022, we have returned £90.3
million to Shareholders through share buyback programmes. In
line with our capital allocation policy, the Board will continue to
actively review its options on further share buybacks throughout
2026, taking into account the cash generation profile of the
Group and the level of headroom available under its committed
bank facilities. Further details are set out within the Financial
Review.
Operational Review
Our Businesses
The Group provides textile rental and related services
throughout the UK and Republic of Ireland.
Within our Hotel, Restaurant and Catering (‘HORECA’) division,
Johnsons Hotel Linen’, our high-volume linen business, primarily
serves group and independent large hotel customers, ‘Johnsons
Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen’ provides premium
linen services to restaurant, hospitality and corporate event
customers whilst ‘Johnsons Luxury Linen’ provides bespoke
linen predominantly to four and five-star luxury hotels. Also,
within HORECA, ‘Johnsons Ireland’ serves both hospitality and
healthcare customers. Our Workwear division comprises solely of
Johnsons Workwear, which predominantly provides workwear
rental, protective wear and laundry services to UK businesses
across a wide range of sectors including food manufacturing
and industrial.
The impact of significantly increased labour and premises costs
is being felt by some of our end customers, particularly within
the hospitality market, making price increases and renewals
more challenging. Whilst the market remains competitive, we
remain focused on consistently delivering excellent service that
aligns with our pricing levels and investing in our estate to drive
continued operational efficiencies.
Energy Cost Management
Energy costs (comprising gas, electricity and fuel) have remained
elevated throughout the year and continue to be so. Costs
for 2025 represented 7.4% of revenue, a reduction from 8.8% of
revenue in 2024 but significantly higher than in 2019 where the
cost was 6.2% of revenue.
20 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
production efficiencies resulting from more predictable volumes
and the benefits of capital investment together with lower
energy costs. Adjusted EBITDA for the year increased to £122.9
million (2024: £110.5 million) with an improved margin of 31.5%
(2024: 29.8%).
Johnsons Hotel Linen
Volumes within Johnsons Hotel Linen were in line with our
expectations, with new business coming from a combination of
successful sales team activity and new build hotels or extensions
with existing customers. We remain easy to do business with
and continue to provide solutions to customers’ challenges, with
excellent on time and in full service levels. Installations of new
business continued to be well organised and efficient, often with
very short lead times, and our externally facilitated customer
satisfaction survey resulted in a high score of 88%, similar to
the prior year. We received excellent feedback relating to our
service team’s partnership approach and they continue to build
excellent customer relationships. Testament to our reputation
for delivering excellent service levels, in 2025 Johnsons Hotel
Linen agreed a five-year contract renewal with one of its largest
customers.
As in previous years, capital investment focused on driving
operational efficiency and increasing capacity whilst reducing
our carbon emissions. At Edinburgh and Pwllheli, we replaced
sorting systems and automatic dryers whilst our Reading,
Chester and Cardiff sites benefitted from the installation of
new boilers and the replacement of older ironers for newer
models. A number of stand-alone washing machines were also
upgraded across the estate and we have continued to invest in
our vehicle fleet, resulting in excellent reliability and a reduction
in emissions.
As part of continually improving our sustainability credentials,
plastic wrapping of clean, delivered product has been removed
from our Birmingham, Chester, Clacton and Pwllheli sites. Instead,
linen is now delivered in reusable, washable bags which can also
be used for linen storage at customers’ premises. Roll out across
the estate will continue in 2026.
Johnsons Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen
Against a difficult hospitality market backdrop, the effect of
significantly increased business costs has particularly impacted
some of the customers served by Johnsons Hotel, Restaurant
For many years, our policy in
the UK has been to fix energy
prices on a rolling basis, building
a position so that the upcoming
months are largely fixed. This
provides certainty but also means
that costs do not immediately reflect
falls, or increases, in spot prices. We have
continued this policy of proactively fixing
energy prices and, as at the end of February 2026,
we had fixed some 90% of our anticipated electricity usage and
some 95% of our anticipated gas usage for the first half of 2026
and approximately 75% and 85%, respectively, for the second half
of 2026. In addition, we have hedged approximately 70% of our
anticipated diesel requirement across 2026.
Looking further ahead, we currently have, based on our
anticipated usage, approximately 55% electricity and
approximately 70% gas at fixed prices for 2027, with reducing
amounts into 2028 and 2029, and will continue to lock in prices as
opportunities allow.
Labour
Labour remains the biggest cost of our operations. In the year to
31 December 2025 labour, as a percentage of revenue, increased
140 basis points to 46.0%, significantly higher than the 44.6%
in the year to 31 December 2024 and the 43.0% in the year to 31
December 2019.
The higher percentage above is reflective of increases in
National Minimum Wage and Pay Related Social Insurance
in January 2025 in the Republic of Ireland and increases in
the National Living Wage and National Insurance in the UK in
April 2025. The annualised impact of the increase in employer
National Insurance contributions in the UK alone is some £6.0
million, which we have mitigated and managed through price
increases, operational efficiencies and other measures. Labour
costs, as a percentage of revenue, are expected to remain
relatively stable into 2026.
HORECA Division
Revenue within HORECA increased to £389.8 million (2024:
£371.2 million) whilst adjusted operating profit increased to
£59.8 million (2024: £49.4 million), giving a margin of 15.3% (2024:
13.3%). This significant increase in profitability reflects, in part,
Chief Executives Operating Review
Continued >
21
and Catering Linen, with price increases and renewals becoming
more challenging. In addition, whilst new sales activity has
remained broadly consistent with prior periods, market churn,
particularly within the independent hotel and restaurant sector,
has increased in recent months, resulting in a decline in volumes
in some regions.
Whilst the market remains competitive, we are focused
on continuing to deliver an excellent level of service to our
customers, as reflected in our annual customer survey results
where an improved overall score of 89% was achieved, with
several sites achieving a world class score of over 90%.
The significant cost increases being experienced across UK
businesses are encouraging some of our smaller, independent
competitors to review their business strategy and, as a result, we
added customer contracts with an annualised revenue of some
£4.9 million to the division during 2025. We anticipate that further,
similar, opportunities will continue to arise.
Many of our existing customers located in London and the
Southeast region have now been successfully transferred
into our new Crawley site, which began processing in March
2025. This, in addition to new business wins, resulted in peak
processing volumes during the year building to some 50% of
capacity, in line with our expectations. The Crawley laundry
process is designed to consume significantly less energy than
a traditional laundry, provides significant water recycling
opportunities, utilises renewable energy sources and undertakes
deliveries using vehicles powered by HVO, which provides for a
significant reduction in vehicle emissions.
Investment in the wider estate has also continued, with
replacement boilers, water recycling systems, ironers and
garment finishing equipment having been installed across
several of our sites. All new investments have a pre-requisite to
reduce carbon emissions against our 2030 targets and improve
production efficiency.
Johnsons Luxury Linen
Johnsons Luxury Linen experienced strong volumes in 2025,
aided by both high retention levels and a number of high-profile
customer wins. The sales pipeline is encouraging and supports
our growth ambitions in securing additional five-star luxury hotel
customers.
The site in Tottenham, acquired in September 2024, has been
successfully integrated into the Group, with local management
now working collaboratively with colleagues in both Corsham
and across the wider Group, sharing knowledge, experience and
best practice methodologies.
Both sites have benefitted from strategic investment in plant
and equipment. In particular, the £1.3 million investment in plant
and machinery at our Corsham site at the end of 2024, which
increased processing capacity there by almost 20%, is now being
utilised as the site achieved record volumes and efficiencies
in 2025. Plans for increasing processing capacity are being
developed to further expand this part of our business.
Johnsons Ireland
The rollout of our Johnsons Ireland rebranding is now complete,
with Johnsons Celtic Linen in the south and Johnsons Belfast in
the north supplying customers across the entire island of Ireland.
Our vehicles and sites have been rebranded and we have
launched our new website.
In hospitality, volumes were as expected albeit with some
regional variations. Healthcare volumes have continued to rise,
with an increase in day procedures performed by hospitals.
Overall, our end markets remain competitive with any customer
attrition often due to the customer seeking pricing levels which
are not commensurate with the level of service we provide. We
continue to concentrate on our proven track record of providing
a high quality and reliable service to our customers, easy and
available access to our team and consistent communication.
Similar to the UK, increasing labour costs in the Republic of
Ireland remain a challenge following the 6.3% increase in
minimum wage and the increase in Pay-Related Social Insurance
(‘PRSI’), both of which were effective on 1 January 2025. As part of
the overall mitigation plan, we are working to continue improving
efficiencies and processes, helped by the capital investment
programme across the estate.
The capital investment of £6.3 million in Wexford and Naas, which
started in 2024, has been completed. This investment includes the
installation of a state-of-the-art sortation system, a high-speed
ironer line, a continuous batch washer system, additional drying
capacity and a new automated chemical dosing system. These
new pieces of equipment help to optimise washing throughput
and energy efficiency and have increased capacity in Wexford
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Chief Executives Operating Review
Continued >
22 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
The relocation of operations from Lancaster to Manchester, and
the subsequent closure of the Lancaster site, was successfully
completed during the year with no disruption to service delivery.
The cost of the project was £1.4 million and has been charged to
exceptional costs.
At the end of June 2025, our small industrial workwear processing
unit in Bristol suffered a fire which rendered that part of the site
inoperable. Work continues to be processed at our sites in Exeter
and Treforest and, importantly, there has been no disruption to
customer service. Business interruption insurance is in place and
we expect to finalise the claim with insurers in 2026 however, a
£0.4 million charge has been recognised within exceptional items
during 2025.
Sustainability
The Board has overall responsibility for environmental and social
matters and we recognise our duty to stakeholders to operate
the business in an ethical and responsible manner. We remain
committed to further developing our environmental and social
responsibility agenda, recognising that it plays a major part in
leading and influencing our people and operations.
In June 2025, we published our fourth Sustainability Report which
set out the progress we have made and the targets we have set
ourselves. We have continued to build on the foundations of our
sustainability strategy with communication and involvement of
employees at all levels being a key focus.
Further details of our achievements during 2025 and our targets
for 2026, ongoing initiatives and actions for the future are set out
within the Sustainability Statement.
Employees
We place great importance on the contribution that each of our
employees make to the success of the Group. Our employees are
key in our ability to deliver customer service levels which exceed
our customers’ expectations. The Board would like to thank them
for their support and hard work during 2025.
Ensuring employees achieve their full potential remains a key
focus of the Group. Providing a range of training, education,
apprenticeship and development programmes for employees
allows them to take advantage of career progression
opportunities within the Group and helps to build a workforce for
the future.
by some 20% and in Naas
by some 40%. In addition to
installing new processing
equipment, we have also
upgraded employee welfare
facilities and offices.
Workwear Division
Revenue for the Workwear division
increased by 2.4% to £145.6 million (2024:
£142.2 million). Adjusted EBITDA was £52.1
million (2024: £49.4 million) with an increased
margin of 35.8% (2024: 34.7%). Adjusted operating profit was
£21.0 million (2024: £20.3 million), resulting in an improved margin
of 14.4% (2024: 14.3%), reflecting the implementation of price
increases throughout the year to offset input cost inflation.
Our sales team had a successful year in acquiring new business.
They have confidence in our ability to deliver excellent service
and focus on this when participating in new commercial
opportunities and tenders. Similarly, the service team secured
significant contract renewals with multiple key customers, often
identifying opportunities for expansion within those accounts.
Customer retention is now 94% (2024: 93%) and trending
towards historic levels, validating the strength of our customer
relationships, the consistent delivery of our service and our
responsiveness to evolving customer needs. The renewal rate
also reflects the effectiveness of our proactive engagement
strategy, built around personalised account management and
ongoing customer interaction.
The externally facilitated satisfaction survey for existing
customers saw us achieve a result of 84%, whilst the new
customer satisfaction survey achieved a robust score of almost
86%. These results reflect our commitment to delivering high
quality service, building trusted relationships and continually
improving the customer experience.
Capital expenditure in the year included investment in forty new
commercial vehicles, laundry processing equipment and boiler
systems at several sites, all of which help deliver operational
resilience and assist in reducing our carbon footprint.
Chief Executives Operating Review
Continued >
23
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Employee engagement activity remains ongoing, supporting our
people and providing safe, clean and enjoyable environments to
work in. The scores from our employee engagement surveys were
outstanding, reflecting the commitment and enthusiasm of our
employees across all of our operating locations.
Board Changes
As previously announced, Ryan Govender was appointed to the
Board as Chief Financial Officer (‘CFO’) in succession to Yvonne
Monaghan, with effect from 1 October 2025. Yvonne retired from
the Board on the same date, having served seventeen years as
CFO. The Board would like to thank Yvonne for her significant
input and unwavering support during her time with the Group.
As separately announced, Lysanne Gray will join the Board as
an Independent Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June
2026 and will succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair
following the announcement of the Group’s interim results for the
six-month period ended 30 June 2026. In addition, Nicola Keach,
who has served as an Independent Non-Executive Director of
the Company since June 2022, will succeed Chris Girling as Senior
Independent Director with effect from 1 June 2026. Chris will
continue to serve as an Independent Non-Executive Director until
he steps down and retires from the Board on 31 December 2026.
Forthcoming Investor Activities
We are committed to clearly communicating our strategy
and activities to our stakeholders, in order that they receive
a balanced and complete view of our performance. An audio
recording of the sell-side analysts’ meeting, which was on
3March 2026, will be made available on the Group’s website
(www.jsg.com).
Outlook
Our successful admission to the Main Market in August 2025
marks a significant milestone in our growth journey. The move
reflects our confidence in the Group’s future, our commitment to
delivering long-term value for all stakeholders and positions us
well for the next phase of growth.
We have entered 2026 as a strongly invested business with a
resilient business model and a proven ability to navigate periods
of economic uncertainty. Whilst the challenges created by the
significantly increased cost of labour in both the UK and the
Republic of Ireland remain difficult to predict, in part due to the
impact on customer behaviour, we remain focused on delivering
excellent service which is commensurate with our pricing levels.
Our scale and depth of expertise give us the capability not only
to mitigate potential challenges through continued operational
efficiencies and disciplined cost management, but also to move
decisively when appropriate opportunities arise.
We have continued to fix a proportion of our future energy costs
and improve the efficiency of our sites to help offset cost inflation
and stabilise our cost base and we are continuing to engage
with our customers regarding the pricing of our services as we
advance through 2026. New sales across the business are a focus,
particularly in the regions where we have added capacity.
We have a strong balance sheet and a highly cash generative
model, so are well placed to capitalise on appropriate
opportunities as they arise. We are continuing to focus on
expanding the Group through targeted investment in our existing
sites and identifying further earnings enhancing opportunities
to deploy capital. In line with our capital allocation policy, the
Board will continue to actively review its options on further share
buybacks throughout 2026.
Entering 2026, the regional and sector variations in HORECA
volumes experienced in 2025 continued. Notwithstanding this,
and recognising normal seasonality driving stronger trading
over the summer months, the Board expects to deliver another
year of growth across the Group and we remain on track towards
achieving our targeted adjusted operating margin of at least
14.0% in 2026.
Peter Egan
Chief Executive Officer
2 March 2026
Chief Executives Operating Review
Continued >
24
Financial Results
Total revenue for the year to 31 December 2025 increased 4.3% to £535.4 million (2024: £513.4 million).
Adjusted EBITDA was £166.8 million (2024: £152.6 million) giving an improved margin of 31.2% (2024: 29.7%) and, in-line with our
expectations, improving from the 29.3% margin achieved in the first half of 2025.
Segmental revenue, adjusted operating profit and adjusted operating profit margin are as follows:
2025 2024
Revenue
£m
Adjusted
Operating
Profit
£m
Margin
%
Revenue
£m
Adjusted
Operating
Profit
£m
Margin
%
HORECA 389.8 59.8 15.3 371.2 49.4 13.3
Workwear 145.6 21.0 14.4 142.2 20.3 14.3
Central Costs (8.3) (7.4)
Group 535.4 72.5 13.5 513.4 62.3 12.1
Financial
Review
the Group remains well funded,
is highly cash generative and has
significant headroom with respect
to its leverage target of 1.0 to
1.5times. Accordingly, the Board
will continue to pursue investment
opportunities, both organic and
inorganic, and actively review its
options on further share buybacks
throughout 2026.
Ryan Govender
Chief Financial Officer
Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
25
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Statutory operating profit was £58.8 million (2024: £54.7 million)
whilst adjusted operating profit, which increased by 16.4%, was in
line with market consensus at £72.5 million (2024: £62.3 million).
The total finance cost increased to £8.0 million (2024: £7.5 million)
and included £5.6 million (2024: £5.2 million) of bank interest, £2.6
million (2024: £2.3 million) of interest in respect of IFRS 16 lease
liabilities and a credit of £0.2 million (2024: £nil) in respect of
notional interest on pension liabilities.
The exceptional charge of £6.0 million (2024: £0.4 million)
represents £0.5 million in relation to business acquisition activity,
£3.4 million of reorganisation costs, including £1.4 million relating
to the closure of our Lancaster Workwear site, £1.7 million of costs
in relation to the Company’s ordinary shares being admitted
to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies) Category of the
Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on
the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange and £0.4 million
of costs incurred relating to the fire at the Bristol Workwear site.
Adjusted profit before taxation was £64.5 million (2024: £54.8
million) whilst statutory profit before taxation, after amortisation
of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation) of £7.7
million (2024: £7.2 million) and the exceptional charge outlined
above, was £50.8 million (2024: £47.2 million).
Adjusted diluted earnings per share increased by 19.8% to 12.1
pence (2024: 10.1 pence).
Financing
Bank debt at the end of the year was £112.4 million (December
2024: £68.6 million) reflecting capital investment across our
estate of £35.9 million, the impact of a £54.7 million cash outflow
during the year in respect of share buybacks and the payment
of £17.4 million of dividends, offset by the improved trading
performance. Including IFRS 16 liabilities, net debt at December
2025 was £159.2 million (December 2024: £115.6 million).
The Group remains well funded, with access to a committed
revolving credit facility of £135.0 million which matures in August
2027. Whilst the existing facility provides sufficient liquidity for
current commitments, we have commenced discussions with our
existing lenders to refinance the facility, having regard to the
future deployment of capital and our target leverage of 1.0 to 1.5
times, and to extend its tenure.
Bank covenants comprise leverage and interest cover tests.
Leverage is calculated as adjusted EBITDA compared to total
net debt, including IFRS 16 liabilities. The agreed covenant is
for the ratio to be not more than three times and the ratio at 31
December 2025 was 0.95 times. Interest cover compares adjusted
operating profit to total interest cost, with a minimum covenant
ratio of four times. Our current scenario planning provides
significant headroom against the covenants.
Interest payable on bank borrowings is based upon SONIA or,
in the case of Euro denominated borrowings, EURIBOR, plus a
margin, linked to our leverage covenant, which ranges from 1.45%
to 2.45%. The current margin is 1.45%.
Return on Capital Employed (‘ROCE’)
ROCE, calculated as rolling 12-month adjusted operating profit
divided by the average of opening and closing Shareholders’
equity, net debt and post-employment benefits for the same
12-month period, increased to 17.1% (2024: 15.5%).
Investment Appraisal
Prior to undertaking any major investment, be it a significant
capital project or an acquisition opportunity, the Board, as part
of its evaluation of the investment opportunity with reference
to the factors set out in Section 172(1) of the Companies Act
2006, diligently assesses the associated strategic opportunities
available to the Group together with the cost, return, risk and
reward of each project before deciding whether or not to
proceed. Relevant financial considerations include discounted
cash payback, ROCE, projected profitability and impact on
margin.
Following the acquisition of Empire Linen Services Limited
(‘Empire’) in 2024, and with the benefit of a full year’s trading
throughout 2025, the Board considered the extent to which
the original hurdle rates, as agreed at the time of approving
the acquisition, have been met. It was determined that Empire
continues to trade at least in line with the Board’s original
expectations and that it has remained a successful acquisition
for the Group.
Taxation
The tax rate on adjusted profit before taxation was 24.2% (2024:
23.2%). The rate is below the headline corporation tax rate in
the UK of 25.0% due to the combined effect of expenses not
deductible for taxation, prior year over provisions and the impact
of the lower tax rate of 12.5% in the Republic of Ireland.
Corporation tax paid in the year amounted to £6.6 million (2024:
£2.7 million) and it is anticipated that whilst tax payable in 2026
will be higher, it will remain lower than the 2026 tax charge due
to the availability of capital allowances and brought forward tax
losses.
26 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Dividend
The Board declared an interim
dividend of 1.6 pence (2024: 1.3
pence) per share in September
2025. The proposed final dividend
of 3.2 pence (2024: 2.7 pence) per
share brings the total dividend for 2025
to 4.8 pence (2024: 4.0 pence) per share, an
increase of 20.0%.
The final dividend, if approved by Shareholders, will be paid on
15 May 2026 to those Shareholders on the register at close of
business on 17 April 2026. The ex-dividend date is 16 April 2026.
Dividend cover, based on adjusted EPS, was 2.5 times (2024: 2.5
times).
Cash Flow
Free cash flow in the year (calculated as net cash generated
from operating activities, less net spend on textile rental items,
less the capital element of leases) was £69.1 million compared to
£74.6 million in 2024. The reduction compared to 2024 reflects, in
the main, an £8.4 million working capital outflow, increased tax
payments and increased investment in textile rental items offset
by the improved trading performance.
Investment in Textile Rental Items
Spend on textile rental items amounted to £65.8 million (2024:
£63.2 million). The increase reflects the growth of the Group,
both organically and through acquisition. We have long term
relationships with our garment and linen suppliers and we
continue to work collaboratively to ensure continuity of supply of
quality products at the best price.
Capital Investment and Acquisitions
We have continued to invest in our estate in order to expand
capacity, increase water, energy and operational efficiencies
and improve employee welfare facilities, spending £35.8 million
in the year on property, plant and equipment. The cost increases
being experienced across UK businesses continue to encourage
some of our smaller, independent competitors to review their
business strategy and, as a result, we added contracts with an
annualised revenue of some £4.9 million to our HORECA division
during 2025, at a cost of £3.6 million. We anticipate that further
opportunities will continue to arise.
Defined Benefit Pension Scheme (‘Scheme’)
On an IAS 19 basis, the Scheme surplus as at 31 December 2025
was £4.9 million (2024: £3.8 million). Scheme assets reduced by
£2.4 million to £130.3 million, after paying out benefits of £10.0
million during the year, whilst Scheme liabilities reduced by
£3.5 million to £125.4 million. The improved position reflects
higher than expected asset returns, allowances for the results
of a decrease in long-term inflation expectations and for the
reduction in the Scheme’s PIE factors over the year offset by
actual short-term inflation being higher than previously assumed
and lower mortality rates.
As a result of the surplus at 31 December 2025, the estimated
net notional interest credit in 2026 will be £0.3 million (2025: £0.2
million).
The Scheme continues to have a significant portion of assets
invested to hedge against movements in liabilities, thereby
reducing overall volatility, with the hedged target having
increased to 85% in July 2025. The Scheme’s asset allocation
remains under constant review to ensure it aligns with the
medium-term objective of a buy-out of Scheme liabilities.
The triennial actuarial valuation of the Scheme, as at 30
September 2025, is currently underway and should be completed
later this year. In view of the Scheme surplus shown at the
previous valuation date, we have agreed with the Trustee to
cease deficit recovery contributions to the Scheme at least until
the results of this valuation are finalised.
Capital Structure
The Group’s medium to long-term intention is to maintain a
capital structure such that we target leverage of 1.0x – 1.5x, other
than for short-term specific exceptions. Under this framework, our
capital allocation policy remains unchanged and will continue
to take into account the following criteria as part of an ongoing
review of capital structure:
Financial Review
Continued >
27
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
maintaining a strong balance sheet;
continuing capital investment to increase processing
capacity and efficiency;
appropriate accretive acquisitions;
operating a progressive dividend policy; and
distributing any surplus cash to Shareholders.
In August 2025, the Group completed a share buyback
programme totalling £30.0 million, originally announced in March
2025 and extended in June 2025. The Group then announced a
further £25.0 million share buyback programme in September
2025, which subsequently completed in January 2026. This
brings the total amount returned to Shareholders through
buybacks since 2022 to £90.3 million. In that same period we
have established a presence in the Republic of Ireland, through
the £27.1 million acquisition of Harkglade Limited, established
our Johnsons Luxury Linen business, through the £5.8 million
acquisition of Regency Laundry Limited and the £20.6 million
acquisition of Empire Linen Services Limited, invested in the
opening of a new site in Crawley and undertaken significant
capital investment across many of our other sites.
Even after taking into consideration these investments and
the return of funds to Shareholders, including the payment
of dividends, the Group remains well funded, is highly cash
generative and has significant headroom with respect to its
leverage target of 1.0 to 1.5 times. Accordingly, the Board will
continue to pursue investment opportunities, both organic
and inorganic, and actively review its options on further share
buybacks throughout 2026.
Going Concern
After considering the monthly cash flow projections, the stress
tests and the facilities available to the Group and Company, the
Directors concluded that there was a reasonable expectation
that the Group and Company have adequate resources for
their operational needs, will remain in compliance with the
financial covenants set out in the bank facility agreement and
will continue in operation for at least the period to 30 June 2027.
Accordingly, and having reassessed the principal risks and
uncertainties, the Directors considered that it was appropriate
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the Group and
Company financial statements.
Key Performance Indicators (‘KPIs’)
The main KPIs used as part of the assessment of performance of
the Group, and of each segment, are growth in revenue, adjusted
EBITDA, adjusted operating profit and adjusted operating profit
margin. Adjusted diluted earnings per share and ROCE are also
used as part of the assessment of performance of the Group.
Non-financial KPIs, as referred to within the Chief Executive’s
Operating Review, include our employee and customer survey
results and customer retention statistics.
Summary
The focus of the Group continues to be to expand our Textile
Services business through targeted capital investment, to allow
organic volume growth, and through acquisition.
Ryan Govender
Chief Financial Officer
2 March 2026
Financial Review
Continued >
28 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Sustainability
Statement
At Johnsons, sustainability is more than a regulatory
requirement. It’s a leadership responsibility that shapes
how we operate and create value for our customers.
Peter Egan
Chief Executive Officer
Introduction
The sustainability reporting landscape in the UK and Republic
of Ireland is evolving rapidly, bringing increased responsibilities
and opportunities for the Group. The UK’s Sustainability
Disclosure Requirements (SDR), incorporating the International
Sustainability Standards Board (ISSB) climate and sustainability
standards, are expected to shape future corporate reporting
for the Group, with a growing focus on consistent, useful and
comparable disclosures aligned to a global baseline.
Alongside this, the UK Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT) has
established a framework for credible climate transition
planning. For the Group, this means demonstrating how strategy,
operations and governance support the transition to a lower-
carbon and more climate-resilient business model.
Looking ahead, the Group will continue to strengthen
governance, build internal capability and improve data
foundations to meet the evolving expectations of regulators,
investors and customers, while positioning the business to
respond to emerging risks and opportunities.
Scope of Sustainability Statement
For the financial year ended 31 December 2025, the Corporate
Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) did not apply to
the Group. For the financial year ended 31 December 2025,
the Group’s operations in Ireland did not meet the relevant
applicability thresholds and based on the proposed changes set
out in the European Union’s Omnibus Package, it remains unlikely
that these thresholds will be reached without a significant
expansion of the Group’s European operations and revenues. The
Group will continue to monitor developments in EU sustainability
legislation.
Notwithstanding the above, the Group has chosen to voluntarily
align certain disclosures with relevant aspects of the CSRD where
these are considered to represent emerging best practice and to
support enhanced transparency for stakeholders.
The Sustainability Statement has been prepared primarily in
accordance with the Global Reporting Initiative (GRI) Standards,
which remain the Group’s principal sustainability reporting
framework. In addition, the structure and governance of the
Sustainability Statement have been informed by the forthcoming
UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (UK SRS), in anticipation
of future mandatory requirements expected under the UK
Sustainability Disclosure Requirements. Relevant aspects of
the European Sustainability Reporting Standards (ESRS) have
also been taken into account on a voluntary basis where they
represent emerging best practice. For more information on
sustainability reporting framework alignment, please view
page43.
Double Materiality Assessment
During 2025, we conducted a Double Materiality Assessment
(DMA) to identify and prioritise the environmental, social and
governance topics that are most relevant to our activities, value
chain and stakeholders. The assessment was undertaken in line
with the ESRS and applied their double materiality logic, under
which a topic is considered material where, in the opinion of
the Group, it represents a significant impact on people or the
environment and/or a significant sustainability-related risk or
opportunity that could affect the Group’s financial position,
performance or cash flows.
29
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Scope
The scope of the DMA covered JSG’s own operations in the UK and Ireland, as well as key elements of its upstream and downstream
value chain. This included the sourcing of fibres and chemicals, and the use and end-of-life phases of the Group’s textile products.
Methodology
The DMA was carried out in close collaboration with a specialist
independent external partner and combined both top-down
and bottom-up perspectives to ensure that the outcomes were
strategically relevant and evidence-based.
The top-down approach drew on our business model, sector
context and internal expertise to identify an initial set of impacts,
risks and opportunities (IROs). Topics considered evidently
material or non-material were discussed during a kick-off
workshop with the management team and through initial
consultations with individual managers.
The bottom-up approach involved additional internal and
external consultations to support a qualitative assessment of
all identified IROs. Where materiality could not be confidently
assessed through stakeholder input alone, further desk research
and targeted scoring were applied. In line with ESRS and
European Financial Reporting Advisory Group (EFRAG) guidance,
sustainability impacts were assessed based on severity or
magnitude and, where relevant, likelihood, while financial risks
and opportunities were assessed based on magnitude and
likelihood.
Stakeholder consultations involved representatives from major
business lines, HR and procurement teams, as well as key
business partners. These discussions considered IROs linked to
one or more sustainability topics using the same severity and
likelihood logic.
Results
The assessment identified a total of 103 relevant IROs across the
Group’s operations and value chain. Of these, 62 were assessed
as material, comprising 31 negative impacts, four positive
impacts, 17 financial risks and 10 financial opportunities. The
remaining 41 IROs were assessed as non-material.
The material IROs were grouped across eight sustainability
topics and 21 sub-topics. Of the topics included in the ESRS
topical standards, only biodiversity and consumers and
end-users were not linked to any material IROs based on the
assessment results.
The DMA identified material IROs across environmental topics
including climate change, pollution, water and marine resources,
and resource use and circular economy; social topics relating
to the Group’s own workforce, workers in the value chain and
affected communities; and governance topics relating to
business conduct, supplier management and whistleblowing
and grievance mechanisms.
For further detail on the DMA, including the full list of the material
and non-material IROs identified through the DMA, please view
the full disclosure document at www.jsg/about-us/sustainability/.
Use of the DMA results and forward looking priorities
The outcomes of the DMA provide an important evidence base
and understanding of our operations, risk profile and long-term
strategic priorities. The assessment has helped to clarify which
sustainability topics are most significant and where current
approaches and disclosures are well developed, as well as areas
where further enhancement will be required to support evolving
regulatory and stakeholder expectations.
The results will also inform the continued refinement of our
sustainability strategy, governance and reporting. Looking
ahead, we expect to refocus on enhancing our approach to
climate transition planning, social value, workforce-related
metrics and water stewardship. This will include developing more
structured frameworks, improving data quality and governance,
and ensuring that sustainability considerations are increasingly
embedded within strategic decision-making and operational
planning.
DownstreamUpstream (supply chain) Own activities
Fiber
production
Cotton
Flax/linen
Synthetic
fibers
Others
Manufacturing
of fabrics
Yarn
production
Weaving,
knitting,
tufting
Finishing
Supplier of other goods and services
Chemical distributors: chemicals and
detergents
Suppliers of machinery
Maintenance services
Software suppliers
Energy
Manufacturing
of garments
and linen
Johnson Service Group
(JSG)
Textile services: washing,
drying, sorting, repair,
customisation
Customers
Hotels, restaurants,
catering
Food processing
Industrial sector:
manufacturers
Hospitals
Collection and
redistribution
Pick-up and delivery
Recycling
Waste
30 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts30 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
General Information
Governance
Our approach to sustainability is underpinned by a robust
governance framework, which ensures effective oversight of
our strategy and its implementation, supported by policies and
processes embedded throughout the Group.
In 2025, we introduced an enhanced governance structure for
sustainability through the formation of a Carbon Steering Group
and two project teams, further details of which are set out below.
As our approach has matured, a more structured governance
framework and clearer focus on key sustainability topics has
been required to support effective oversight and accountability.
The Group’s sustainability focus for the coming year centres
on climate change and decarbonisation, preparing for
emerging sustainability-related regulation, and strengthening
sustainability resilience and supply chain engagement.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
Roles and responsibilities
Policies and Additional Resources
Our sustainability governance framework is supported by relevant sustainability
policies and guidance. Further information is available at jsg.com/about-us/
sustainability/.
JSG Group Board
Sustainability Team and Department Leads
Group
Management
Board
Audit
Committee
Sustainability
Committee
Remuneration
Committee
Regulatory Compliance
Project Team
Carbon Steering Group
Supply Chain and
Ratings Project Team
Our
World
Our
Communities
Our
Family
Our
Integrity
Our Integrity
JSG Group Board
Sustainability is managed at the highest level of the organisation. The Board endorses the sustainability strategy
and receives updates from the Sustainability Committee.
Sustainability
Committee
Assists the Board
through the
provision of advice
on sustainability
strategy, compliance
and performance. It
sets the sustainability
strategy and considers
the associated costs,
risks and opportunities.
Group Management
Board
Monitors
implementation of the
Board’s sustainability
strategy; and monitors
operational and
financial performance,
business development
and projects relating
to sustainability.
Remuneration
Committee
Assesses and makes
recommendations
to the Board
regarding
remuneration
policy including,
where relevant,
appropriate
sustainability
targets linked to
remuneration.
Carbon Steering
Group and Project
Teams
These working groups
guide decision-making
and prioritisation
across the business
and support the
coordination and
implementation
of sustainability
initiatives and action
plans.
Sustainability Team and Department Leads
The sustainability team provides day-to-day leadership on sustainability across the Group. It supports the
development of policies and frameworks and works with the business to enhance sustainability data and reporting.
Department leads are responsible for managing sustainability-related matters within their areas of responsibility
and contribute to the delivery of the Group’s sustainability objectives through operations, projects and activities.
Sustainability
Pillars
The Sustainability
Pillars provide the
framework that
underpins the
Group’s approach
to sustainability
and set out its long-
term vision.
Audit Committee
Reviews any
changes to the
Company’s risk
profile, including
in respect of
sustainability and
climate-related
risks.
UN Sustainable Development Goals (‘SDG’) Framework
Our Sustainability Pillars align most closely with five SDGs, reflecting areas where
we have the greatest impact through our operations, value chain and
stakeholders.
31
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
31
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
The Johnsons Way Sustainability Strategy
We have clear, measurable sustainability objectives aligned to our core business strategy, recognising that our long term business
success and sustainability are interdependent. We track these goals with performance indicators and regularly assess our progress.
The Johnsons Way provides a long term strategic approach to managing the Group’s social and environmental impacts and
responsibilities.
Our Family Our World Our Integrity Our Communities
By taking care of our Johnsons
family and ensuring everyone
feels that they belong, we will
deliver a first-class employee
experience every day.
By reducing our natural
resource consumption and
completing the transition to
a fully circular approach for
our operations, we will protect
and enhance our environment.
By continuing to demonstrate
our integrity and commitment
to responsible business
practices, we will position
the organisation for future
stability and growth.
By further understanding
the communities impacted
by what we do, we can
form better collaborative
partnerships to support them
as they grow and develop.
Vision 2030 Goals and Progress
An Effective ED&I programme.
Developing the Johnsons
Futures programme to provide
life-long learning and career
paths.
Reduce Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
e
emissions intensity by 40%.
Reduce water consumption
intensity by 25%.
Reduce waste to landfill by
75%.
Eliminate single use plastics.
Fully sustainable core
products as the preferred
offerings.
Ethical Business Conduct
(internal and external).
Increase our social value
spend as a % of revenue.
Since 2022, mandatory
ED&I training has been
rolled out across the
Group alongside business-
level ED&I action plans.
Employees have completed
sustainability-related training,
supporting the integration of
sustainability into job roles.
Work to develop the Johnsons
Futures programme remains
ongoing.
Since 2022, the Group has
made measurable progress
in reducing its environmental
impact. Scope 1 and 2 CO
2
e
emissions intensity reduced by
14%, while water consumption
intensity has decreased by
20%. Since 2023, total single-
use plastics purchased has
reduced by 23% and 94% of
waste has been diverted from
landfill.
Internal employee and
supplier Code of Conducts
have been implemented.
During 2025, the Group
implemented supplier
sustainability management
through the EcoVadis
platform. We also increased
the availability of sustainable
products, including recycled
content and responsibly
sourced cotton.
Since 2022, the Group has
increased its social value
contribution as a percentage
of revenue by 8%, reflecting
continued support for local
communities through a
combination of volunteering,
in-kind support and financial
contributions.
32 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Our
World
2025 HIGHLIGHTS
14%
reduction in carbon intensity compared to 2022
20%
reduction in water intensity compared to 2022
23%
reduction in single-use plastics purchased
compared to 2022
94%
ofwaste diverted from landfill in 2025
89%
of end-of-life textiles recycled in 2025
B
in CDP Climate Disclosure
B
in CDP Water Disclosure
32 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
The environmental impacts of our activities
predominantly arise from waste disposal,
water and energy consumption and carbon
emissions. We are placing greater emphasis
on our environmental responsibilities and are
committed to minimising resource use and
emissions where feasible.
Changes to baseline
During the year, we undertook a comprehensive re-baselining
of our carbon emissions and water data to ensure that our
environmental reporting accurately reflects the current Group
structure and aligns with recognised best practice. The baseline
year remains 2022; however, the baseline data for that year
was recalculated to reflect a number of acquisitions and the
expansion of the Group’s operating footprint in 2023 and 2024,
including Johnsons Ireland and Johnsons Luxury Linen within the
organisational boundary.
In accordance with the Greenhouse Gas (GHG) Protocol, which
recommends re-baselining where there are material changes to
organisational boundaries or emissions profiles, we recalibrated
the 2022 baseline to maintain the credibility and comparability
of our disclosures. The revised baseline now provides a more
complete and accurate view of the Group’s environmental
impact across Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions and
incorporates additional emissions sources, including fugitive
emissions, that were not previously captured.
Although water consumption data had previously been reported
using the same baseline year, the 2022 water baseline was also
recalculated to reflect the updated Group composition and to
ensure consistency across all environmental metrics.
Climate Change
Energy consumption and carbon emissions
In 2025, we strengthened our approach to climate change and
decarbonisation through the introduction of an enhanced
sustainability governance framework. The Sustainability
Committee established a new Carbon Steering Group to provide
oversight of decarbonisation activities and to advise on strategic
direction, progress and performance. Business and department
leads support delivery through dedicated sub-topic project
teams.
In addition to the comprehensive re-baselining work described
above, we began exploring alternative emissions reduction
targets, including Scope 3, and progressing the development of
a climate transition plan, in alignment with the Science-Based
Targets initiative (SBTi) and the goals of the Paris Agreement to
limit global warming to 1.C. In parallel, we are transitioning to
a centralised digital environmental reporting system to support
consistent data collection across carbon, energy, water, plastic
and waste. The system was implemented in December 2025
and is being rolled out on a phased basis across the business,
including user training and process integration, during early
2026.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
Environmental
Information
33
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
GHG Emissions and Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting (SECR)
As mandated by UK legislation, the series of tables below present the Group’s energy consumption and greenhouse gas emissions for
2022 (original and re-baselined), 2024 and 2025, prepared in accordance with UK SECR requirements and the GHG Protocol.
JSG has voluntarily included data relating to the Group’s operations within the Republic of Ireland. While we are only required to
disclose data for our UK-based operations, the table includes both our UK and Ireland operations for the 2025 reporting year.
Energy Consumption (kWh)
Energy Source
2022
(Original baseline)
2022
(Re-baselined) 2024 2025
2025 Variance
vs 2022
(Re-baselined)
Natural Gas 356,837,711 409,940,528 399,993,359 413,367,918 1%
Gas/Fuel/Burning Oils 181,984 735,699 1,118,618 1,303,164 77%
Electricity 43,227,996 49,213,441 50,530,422 52,288,034 6%
Commercial Fleet 84,276,308 86,000,271 91,267,230 92,403,009 7%
Company Cars 2,610,185 2,653,118 1,960,276 1,912,276 (28%)
Grey Fleet 585,243 807,741 934,120 916,438 13%
Total Energy Consumption (kWh) 487,719,427 549,350,798 545,804,025 562,190,840 2%
Carbon Emissions (tCO
2
e)
Scope Emission Source
2022
(Original baseline)
2022
(Re-baselined) 2024 2025
2025 Variance
vs 2022
(Re-baselined)
Scope 1 Company Facilities 76,290 75,171 73,443 75,923 1%
Company Vehicles 25,904 21,241 20,674 19,584 (8%)
Scope 2
(Location-Based)
Electricity (Buildings and EV
Charging)
9,124 9,529 10,508 10,876 14%
Scope 3
(Upstream)
1 Purchased goods and services 82,110 25,090 87,013 6%
2 Capital Goods 285 10,832 1,491 423%
3 Fuel and Energy Related
Activities
21,090 17,562 18,025 (15%)
4 Upstream Transportation and
Distribution
2,543 925 4,650 83%
5 Waste Generated in
Operations
3,978 678 597 (85%)
6 Business Travel 162 396 236 451 14%
Scope 3
(Downstream)
15 Investments 17 115 576%
Total Carbon Emissions (tCO
2
e)
1
111,480 216,361 159,948 218,725 1%
Total Carbon Emissions (tCO
2
e) (SECR) 111,480 106,337 104,861 106,834 <1%
Total Carbon Emissions by Scope (tCO
2
e)
Scope
2022
(Original baseline)
2022
(Re-baselined) 2024 2025
2025 Variance
vs 2022
(Re-baselined)
Scope 1 102,194 96,412 94,117 95,506 (1%)
Scope 2 Location-Based 9,124 9,529 10,508 10,876 14%
Scope 2 Market-Based 18,993 21,873
Scope 3 162 110,419 55,323 112,342 2%
Intensity Metrics
Metric
2022
(Original baseline)
2022
(Re-baselined) 2024 2025
2025 Variance
vs 2022
(Re-baselined)
Revenue (£m) 368.0 368.0 496.0 533.3 45%
tCO
2
e per £m 302.9 287.9 211.4 199.5 (31%)
Tonnes Processed 277,122 312,641 346,613 366,452 17%
tCO
2
e per tonnes processed 0.402 0.339 0.302 0.290 (14%)
2030 Target (tCO
2
e per tonnes processed): 0.203
Note 1: Tables above may not cast due to rounding.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
34 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Methodology
1. The 2030 target is a 40% reduction in Scope 1 and Scope 2
emissions intensity against the 2022 baseline.
2. The Group has adopted an operational control approach to
define its emissions boundary and scope.
3. The carbon reporting year covers the period from 1 October
to 30 September.
4. Weights processed and revenue data used to calculate
intensity metrics have been adjusted to reflect this reporting
period and may therefore differ from figures presented
elsewhere in the Annual Report.
5. The data has been prepared in accordance with the UK
Government’s Environmental Reporting Guidelines (2019).
6. Greenhouse gas emissions have been calculated in
accordance with the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting
and Reporting Standard, using the UK Government GHG
Conversion Factors for Company Reporting (2024).
7. Scope 3 emissions are calculated using a spend-based
approach, with emissions calculated using UK 2022 SIC
Code Emission Factors. For spend based emission factors,
the spend year is 2025 and the emission factor year is 2022,
therefore inflation adjustments to spend data have been
applied. The most recent available World Bank Inflation
Database (Annual HCPI - April 2025) is used in absence of
full set of data for 2025.
8. From 2024 onwards, the Group has formalised its market-
based Scope 2 disclosure in line with GHG Protocol
guidance. Market-based emissions are calculated by
applying supplier-specific or residual-type emission factors
to electricity consumption, with renewable electricity
backed by contractual arrangements reported at zero
emissions where applicable.
Performance Overview
The inclusion of both a 2022 original baseline and a 2022 re-
baselined position reflects our commitment to transparent and
consistent reporting. The original baseline was established prior
to changes in the Group’s operating footprint and no longer
provided a fully representative basis for comparison. In line with
the GHG Protocol, we therefore recalibrated our baseline to
better reflect the Group’s organisational boundary.
Presenting both baselines enables us to distinguish the impact
of structural change from underlying performance trends. The
re-baselined 2022 figures provide a consistent reference point for
assessing progress in subsequent years.
Our 2030 target is to achieve a 40% reduction in Scope 1 and
Scope 2 emissions intensity (tCO
2
e per tonne processed) against
our 2022 re-baselined position. Based on the 2025 reporting
year, emissions intensity has reduced from 0.339 tCO
2
e per tonne
processed in 2022 (re-baselined) to 0.290 tCO
2
e per tonne in 2025,
representing a reduction of 14%.
During the year, the Group implemented a number of operational
initiatives that delivered improvements in energy efficiency
and reduced fuel consumption as part of broader asset
management. A key area of focus was the upgrade of plant
and equipment. This included the replacement of end-of-life
boilers, dryers and other energy-intensive assets as part of
routine capital investment and maintenance programmes.
These initiatives contributed to a 5% reduction in commercial
fleet emissions and a 4% reduction in carbon emissions intensity,
measured against weights processed.
Several sites also implemented process efficiency improvements,
including optimisation of heat recovery systems, installation of
new heat exchangers and adjustments to wash and finishing
processes to reduce energy losses. In addition, working in
partnership with specialist suppliers, a number of operations
introduced updated wash chemistry and process controls during
the year. These changes enabled lower wash temperatures and
shorter cycle times while maintaining required hygiene and
quality standards.
Energy Saving and Opportunities Scheme
(ESOS)
In 2024, the Group completed its required submission to the UK
Government portal in compliance with ESOS. The audits and
analysis undertaken as part of the ESOS process identified a
range of energy efficiency opportunities across the Group’s
operations.
In line with ESOS requirements, the Group published an action
plan setting out its approach to managing the identified
opportunities on the UK Government portal in March 2025.
Progress against the action plan was updated as required in
December 2025. The Group will continue to use the outputs of the
ESOS process to support improvements in energy performance.
Circular Economy and Resource Use
The Group recognises the importance of circular economy
principles and responsible resource use in reducing
environmental impacts and supporting long term business
resilience. While this is an area of emerging focus, elements
of circularity are inherent within aspects of our operating
model, particularly through the ongoing use, maintenance and
management of textile products across their lifecycle.
The repeated use, laundering, repair and, where appropriate,
reuse of products helps to extend product life and maximise the
value derived from materials in use. As the Group’s sustainability
approach continues to mature, greater emphasis will be placed
on developing a clearer understanding of resource use and
circularity across operations and the value chain. The outcomes
of the Group’s DMA have reinforced this as an area for further
development. For more information on our Sustainable Product
Content and textile resource inflows, please view page 41.
Waste and Circularity
The Group generates waste including plastics, packaging,
general waste, end-of-life textiles and other industrial materials.
Robust processes are in place to ensure waste is managed in
compliance with relevant regulations and in line with the waste
hierarchy, prioritising prevention, reuse, recycling and recovery,
with landfill used only as a last resort.
Waste management represents a more mature area of
environmental performance for the Group, supported by
established data collection and assurance processes. Building
on this foundation, the Group has increased its focus on
understanding the end of life outcomes of textile products as
part of its emerging circular economy approach. Tracking end
of life textiles by destination provides improved visibility over
material outflows and establishes a baseline to support future
circular economy initiatives.
End-of-life textiles by destination
End-of-life
destination 2024 2025
Variance vs
Baseline
Reused (%) 5 6 20%
Recycled (%) 94 89 (5%)
Energy Recovery (%) 1 4 300%
Landfill (%)
Table above may not cast due to roundings.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
35
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Managing our waste
Waste Disposal 2024 2025
Variance vs
Baseline
Waste to landfill (%) 7 6 (14%)
Waste diverted from
landfill (%) 93 94 1%
Total Waste (kg) 5,641,229 5,256,766 (7%)
Total Non-Hazardous
Waste (kg) 5,446,545 5,165,886 (5%)
Total Hazardous Waste
(kg) 194,684 90,880 (53%)
2030 Target: Reduce waste to landfill by 75% by 2030
Methodology
1. The waste reporting year covers the period from 1 January
to 31 December.
2. The waste reporting baseline year is 2024.
3. End-of-life textiles represent a subset of the Group’s overall
waste streams.
Plastic
In 2025, aligned with its longer-term ambition to eliminate
unnecessary single-use plastics by 2030, the Group set a target
to reduce single-use plastics purchased by 10%.
Single-use
Plastics Purchased 2023 2024 2025
% Variance
vs Baseline
Total Single-use
Plastic Purchased
(kg) 1,137,636 1,085,731 876,562 (23%)
Tonnes Processed 316,790 348,980 367,441 16%
Intensity Metric
(kg plastic purchased
per tonnes
processed) 3.011 3.111 2.386 (21%)
2030 Target: Eliminate single-use plastics by 2030
Methodology
1. The single-use plastics purchased reporting year covers the
period from 1 January to 31 December.
2. The single-use plastic purchased baseline year is 2023.
3. Single-use plastics are defined as: shrink film, shrink wrap,
plastic bags, plastic cage tags and pallet plastic wrap.
Cages, cage covers and any other hard reusable plastic are
excluded.
During the reporting period, the Group achieved a 19% reduction
in single-use plastics purchased compared to 2024 performance
and has now delivered a cumulative 23% reduction against the
2023 baseline year. This represents measurable progress towards
our 2030 ambition to eliminate unnecessary single-use plastics.
This progress was driven by a series of operational changes
delivered during 2025 as part of wider investment programmes.
Initiatives included the removal of plastic shrink wrap in favour
of paper banding at selected HORECA sites, Workwear achieved
a plastic-free despatch model for the majority of outbound
garments, consolidating items into reusable hamper bags rather
than individually bagged polythene, and the replacement of
plastic garment labels with FSC-certified paper alternatives
within the Luxury Linen business. In Ireland, investment enabled
the removal of plastic wrapping from towelling products,
supporting plastic-free deliveries for some customers. These
actions reflect the Group’s focus on eliminating unnecessary
single-use plastics while maintaining product quality.
Water
Water is a critical resource for the Group’s operations and an
essential component in delivering services to customers. The
Group sources water from a range of sources, including the mains
water network and private or leased boreholes, and discharges
effluent within permitted limits through approved methods.
Systems are in place across operations to monitor water
abstraction, use and discharge and to ensure compliance with
applicable legal requirements.
The outcomes of the Group’s double materiality assessment
have reinforced water stewardship as a priority area for further
development. Looking ahead, the Group intends to strengthen
its approach to water stewardship through the development
of a more structured framework. This will include improving the
consistency and quality of water data, enhancing governance
and oversight, and building a clearer understanding of water
related risks and dependencies across the business to support
more informed decision making and future reporting.
Water Use
2022
(Original
baseline)
2022
(Re-
baselined) 2024 2025
2025
Variance
vs 2022
(Re-
baselined)
Abstracted (m
3
) 2,219,845 2,481,294 2,337,597 2,411,655 (3%)
Tonnes
Processed 289,072 304,325 348,980 367,441 21%
Revenue (£m) 385.7 385.7 508.0 535.4 39%
Intensity Metric
(m
3
per £m
revenue) 5,755 6,433 4,603 4,504 (30%)
Intensity Metric
(m
3
per tonnes
processed) 7.679 8.153 6.698 6.563 (20%)
2030 Target (m
3
per tonnes processed): 6.115
Methodology
1. The water reporting year covers the period from 1 January
to 31 December.
2. The 2022 baseline and 2030 water intensity target were set
using water abstraction data, this metric is therefore used
to track performance over time.
Our 2030 target is to achieve a 25% reduction in water
consumption intensity (m³ per tonne processed) against our 2022
re-baselined position. Based on the 2025 reporting year, water
intensity has reduced from 8.153 m³ per tonne processed in 2022
(re-baselined) to 6.563 in 2025, representing a reduction of 20%.
During the year, the Group implemented a number of
initiatives that improved water efficiency as part of wider
process optimisation and operational improvement activities,
particularly within HORECA operations. These initiatives included
the introduction of water-efficient laundry chemistry and
process adjustments, which enabled reduced rinse volumes and
improved wash efficiency. As a result, water use per cycle was
reduced while maintaining required hygiene standards.
In addition, a range of site-level water saving projects were
delivered during the year. These included upgrades to continuous
batch washing systems, refurbishment of reverse osmosis and
water softening systems and improvements to water monitoring
and metering. We also updated process optimisation to reduce
unnecessary water consumption, and targeted maintenance
interventions to address leaks and inefficiencies. Together, these
actions have contributed to improved visibility of water use and
strengthened the Group’s ability to manage water consumption
more effectively across operations.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
36 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts36 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
We recognise that our people are key to the
Group’s success, and we value every employee’s
contribution. Our goal is to be the employer of
choice in our industry by delivering a first class
employee experience daily. The Johnsons Family
ensures that everyone feels included, valued,
and has a sense of belonging. We are committed
to providing equality of opportunity and
reward, supporting health and wellbeing, and
fostering a positive culture of open and honest
communication.
Own Workforce
Gender Equity, Diversity and Inclusion
We began monitoring our diversity in 2022. All new starters
complete a diversity survey as part of the onboarding process.
This helps us gain a better understanding of the unique
backgrounds within our workforce, allowing us to tailor our
support, engagement and development efforts to address the
specific needs of ethnic groups that may require additional
assistance.
Further information and datasets relating to diversity are also
included in the Corporate Governance section of the Annual
Report, on pages 78 to 79. These pages set out the Group’s
mandatory Board diversity disclosures in accordance with the UK
Listing Rules. The Sustainability Statement focuses on the Group’s
broader policies regarding and approach to equality, diversity
and inclusion across the entire workforce.
Gender Equality 2023 2024 2025
Gender Diversity of Board
(Female %)
43 50 33
Gender Diversity (Female %) 41 39 40
Gender Diversity of Supervisors
(Female %)
40 41 42
Senior Management Positions
(Female %)
27 21 25
Employees aged 50 and over (%) 23 21 24
Employees aged 34 and under (%) 26 31 28
UK Gender Pay Gap (%) 9.9 7.6 7.8
Ethnic Groups 2023 2024 2025
White (%) 47 42 47
Black, Black British, Caribbean or
African (%)
5 7 7
Asian or Asian British (%) 11 13 16
Mixed or multiple ethnic groups
(%)
2 3 1
Other ethnic groups (%) 4 1 3
Prefer Not to Answer (%) 31 34 26
Methodology
1. Data excludes Luxury Linen due to the timing of the survey
delivery and acquisitions.
2. Johnsons Ireland is included in the 2025 dataset for the first
time, covering gender diversity, ethnicity and age metrics.
3. Prefer Not to Answer’ refers to respondents who either
selected that option or left the field blank. The Gender
Equality table excludes ‘Prefer Not to Answer’ and ‘Other
categories.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
42,000
training courses completed
54%
of employees have over five years of tenure
40%
of employees are female
80
recognised nationalities
87%
of employees completed health and safety training
Social
Information
Our
Family
2025 HIGHLIGHTS
37
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
4. Senior management is defined as Directors, General
Managers and other senior managers.
5. UK Gender Pay Gap is the difference in the hourly rate of pay
(mean).
Currently, 27% of our workforce represents ethnic minority groups,
and 47% identify as White. In terms of senior management,
75% are White, which does not reflect the diversity of our
overall workforce. To address this, we are reviewing succession
planning processes and talent pipelines, including recruitment
approaches, to support more inclusive outcomes over time.
Our workforce also reflects a high level of international diversity.
Our diversity survey responses represent over 80 recognised
nationalities. The largest nationality group is British (45%),
with significant representation from employees of Irish, Polish,
Indian, Nepalese, Portuguese, Pakistani, Romanian, Lithuanian,
Ghanaian, Bulgarian, Nigerian and Ukrainian nationalities.
As part of our efforts to promote ED&I throughout the business
and build a culture that is inclusive to all, our businesses
launched ED&I action plans. We also delivered a mandatory
ED&I training course in 2024, which 93% of our employees have
completed. Training continued in 2025, to include new starters
and employees who had not completed the training in 2024.
The Group has a policy of ensuring that individuals with
disabilities, whether registered or not, are considered for
employment, training, career development, and promotion based
on their aptitudes and abilities. We have procedures in place to
ensure this commitment is upheld across our businesses. If an
employee becomes disabled during their employment with us, we
make every effort to retrain them according to their abilities.
We report our UK Gender Pay Gap on an annual basis and our
current and historical reports can be found on our website at
www.jsg.com/gender-pay-gap. Please also see pages 113 to 114 of
this report for more information.
Health, Safety and Wellbeing
The health, safety and wellbeing of employees, visitors and
others affected by the Group’s operations is a priority. Health
and safety is a standing agenda item at Group and subsidiary
Board meetings, with a regular summary report presented to
the Group Board, including statistics on accidents, incidents and
near misses.
The Group has established policies, procedures and standards
that are regularly reviewed to ensure compliance with legal
requirements and industry best practice. Annual health and
safety audits and risk assessments are conducted across
operations, with findings monitored and addressed to maintain
a high standard of safety performance.
Accident Investigation and Reporting
Metric 2023 2024 2025
RIDDOR frequency rate
(per 100,000 hours worked)
0.3 0.3 0.2
Accident frequency rate
(per 100,000 hours worked)
5.4 4.9 4.8
Near misses reported
2,534 2,402 2,887
Number of fatalities
The Group maintains a structured approach to accident
investigation and reporting, supported by its internal digital
Health and Safety Management System, T100. Accident, incident
and near-miss data is captured centrally and reviewed to
identify trends, causes and opportunities for improvement.
During 2025, the Group strengthened its safety reporting
framework through the introduction of a revised near-miss
reporting process, rebranded as Safety Spots, and fully
integrated into the T100 system. This has improved data quality
and employee engagement in identifying hazards.
Targeted accident investigation training workshops were
delivered across the majority of operational sites during the
year, supporting more consistent investigation practices and
improved learning from incidents. Training will continue into 2026
for a small number of sites where delivery was deferred due to
operational constraints.
Analysis of incident data indicates that most reported injuries
continue to be categorised as insignificant or minor. Cage
handling remains the most common cause of accidents,
alongside manual handling and struck-by incidents, and
continues to be a focus area for targeted intervention and
training. Governance was further strengthened through updates
to Group procedures and the establishment of a Group Safety
Steering Committee to support continued improvement from
2026.
Learning and Development
Learning and development supports the Group’s commitment
to safety, ethical conduct and an inclusive workplace. During the
reporting period, the Group continued to deliver mandatory and
role specific training programmes covering areas such as health
and safety, sustainability, equality, diversity and inclusion and
Code of Conduct. Alongside mandatory training, learning and
development activities are designed to support employees in
building skills and supporting career progression.
Health and safety training remains a core focus, with mandatory
and specialist programmes in place to support employees,
managers and technical personnel in understanding their
responsibilities and maintaining safe working practices.
Training Performance Summary
Training Area 2023 2024 2025
Training Courses Completed
34,509 46,257 42,172
Average Training hours per
employee
11.0 14.1 12.7
Sustainability training courses
completed
16,745 3,696
Health & Safety training courses
completed
27,973 21,172 26,449
% of employees completing Health &
Safety training
81 78 87
Methodology
1. Sustainability and Health & Safety Training represent a
subset of the Group’s overall total training.
Employee Engagement
The Group undertakes a formal employee engagement survey
on a biennial basis, delivered by an independent specialist to
ensure anonymity and confidentiality. The most recent survey
was conducted in December 2024 and included employees
across a wider range of locations, providing a robust insight into
engagement levels and employee experience across the Group.
The 2024 survey results indicated continued strong engagement,
with an overall engagement score of 86%, an enablement score
of 87% and an empowerment score of 91%. Areas of strength
included role clarity, teamwork and manager support, while
opportunities for improvement were identified in areas such as
communication, recognition and career development.
Following the survey, results have been reviewed at both Group
and local levels, with feedback shared through workshops and
discussions in a number of locations. During non-survey years,
the Group’s focus is on embedding actions arising from employee
feedback and maintaining ongoing dialogue with employees.
Further updates on actions taken in response to engagement
insights will be provided as these activities continue to develop.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
38 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Supporting our communities is integral to
The Johnsons Way’, with a strong tradition
of charitable activities like education,
volunteering, fundraising and sponsorship.
The Group recognises the need for meaningful
action and we maintained this ethos in 2025.
Affected Communities and Social Value
Social Value Performance
Social Value
Area 2022 2024 2025
2025
Variance
vs Baseline
(%)
Volunteering
Value (£) 4,000 24,000 28,000 600%
In-Kind
Donation
Value (£) 38,000 71,000 48,000 26%
Total
Donated by
JSG (£) 38,000 134,000 43,000 13%
Total Social
Value (£) 79,000 230,000 119,000 51%
Total Social
Value as a %
of Revenue 0.02% 0.05% 0.02% 8%
Methodology
1. Figures have been rounded to the nearest thousand (£).
2. Social value calculations are informed by the Social Value
TOMs Framework for volunteering and in-kind contributions.
3. Total Social Value as a percentage of revenue is rounded
to three decimal places for consistency. Variances are
calculated using the underlying unrounded percentage
figures.
Benefitting our Communities
Supporting communities affected by our operations is integral to
The Johnsons Way and forms part of the Group’s wider approach
to social value. During 2025, the Group provided support through
direct financial contributions and in-kind donations, alongside
employee led community activity. This support is intended to
contribute to positive outcomes for local communities and help
address identified needs across our operating footprint.
In 2025, the Group provided £43,000 in financial donations and
£48,000 in in-kind support. Financial donations supported a
broad range of community and charitable initiatives, including
health and wellbeing, youth and education, and community
resilience, with funding directed to both local organisations
and national charities. Larger individual contributions included
community sponsorships and event support, alongside recurring
local donations where the Group has long-standing community
relationships.
In-kind support reflects the nature of the Group’s services and
included the donation or provision of textiles, garments and
equipment, and service-based support such as cleaning or
laundering items for charitable use. In-kind contributions were
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
38 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
320
employee volunteers
£119,000
generated in social value
256
charities and organisations supported
1,965
employee volunteering hours delivered
£48,000
in-kind product and service donations
Social
Information
Our
Communities
2025 HIGHLIGHTS
39
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
directed to organisations supporting vulnerable groups and
community services, including homelessness support, healthcare
and hospice care, schools and youth groups, and humanitarian
causes. This approach enables the Group to provide practical,
needs led support.
Volunteering
The Group’s approach to volunteering is guided by its internal
Volunteering Policy and forms part of its approach to managing
and contributing to positive outcomes for affected communities
and creating positive social value. Volunteering activity is
delivered in partnership with Neighbourly, an established
engagement platform, which connects employees with local
community organisations. Neighbourly undertakes due diligence
on participating community organisations, including verification
of organisational status and safeguarding checks, providing
assurance that volunteering activities are directed towards
legitimate and appropriate causes.
In 2025, 320 employees volunteered across 80 community
events, contributing a total of 1,965 volunteering hours. Based
on average UK salary benchmarks, this equates to an estimated
£28,000 of social value delivered to local communities.
Volunteering activity supported 256 charitable and community
organisations, with an estimated 18,800 people benefitting from
this support.
Volunteering activities included practical support such as
environmental improvement projects, foodbank assistance and
refurbishment of community spaces, with several organisations
highlighting that volunteer support enabled projects to be
completed more quickly and to a higher standard than would
otherwise have been possible. From an employee perspective,
volunteering activity supports wellbeing, skills development and
engagement. Post-event feedback indicates that participation
contributed to increased motivation and a stronger sense of
connection to local communities. Looking ahead, the Group will
continue to develop its volunteering programme as part of its
wider social value approach.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
40 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Our World
40 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
We are committed to operating responsibly
through strong ethical practices, effective
governance and transparent decision making.
Integrity underpins how we do business
across the Group and guides decision making,
behaviour and accountability at all levels of
the organisation. Our approach is designed
to support sustainable growth, protect
our reputation and maintain trust with our
stakeholders.
Internal Business Conduct
The Group is committed to conducting business ethically,
responsibly and in compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations. Our approach to internal business conduct is
underpinned by a clear framework of policies and standards
that set out expected behaviours for employees across the
organisation.
Core to this framework is the Group’s Code of Ethics and Business
Conduct, which applies to all employees and addresses areas
including ethical decision making, anti-bribery and corruption,
conflicts of interest, data protection and responsible behaviour.
Supporting policies, including whistleblowing, fraud prevention
and anti-facilitation of tax evasion, provide mechanisms for
raising concerns and ensuring issues are investigated and
addressed appropriately.
Details of matters raised through the whistleblowing process
are reported to the Audit Committee and are investigated on
a proportionate basis, either by independent management
or, where appropriate, by an external party under committee
oversight. During the current and preceding financial years,
matters raised through the whistleblowing process have
primarily related to employee related grievances and were
investigated and addressed in accordance with internal
procedures. Future disclosures will seek to include additional
metrics, such as the number of cases raised, substantiated and
resolved, and average time to close.
Training and awareness programmes support the consistent
application of these standards and help promote a culture of
integrity, accountability and trust throughout the Group.
Information Security and Data Protection
The Group recognises information security and data
protection as key components of effective governance and
risk management. During 2025, the Group maintained a strong
cyber security and data protection framework, with cyber risks
monitored on an ongoing basis and 24/7 threat detection and
response capabilities in place.
The Group remains Cyber Essentials certified, compliant with
GDPR and subject to independent external audits. Employee
cyber security awareness training and phishing simulations
continue to support a culture of responsible data handling and
risk awareness across the organisation.
External Business Conduct
Managing our Supply Chain
The Group is committed to responsible sourcing practices and
to promoting ethical and sustainable behaviour across its
supply chain. To support this, suppliers are required to meet
clear standards covering labour practices, health and safety,
environmental responsibility and legal compliance.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
70%
of cotton purchases were Better Cotton Sourced
95%
of key suppliers completed sustainability
assessment
Awarded EcoVadis
Silver Medal
54%
of textile purchases derived from sustainable
content
Governance
Information
Our
Integrity
2025 HIGHLIGHTS
Our Integrity
41
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
A Sustainable Purchasing Policy and Guiding Principles of
Supplier Conduct are issued to new suppliers during onboarding,
setting out the Group’s expectations. Suppliers are required to
implement anti-slavery and anti-human trafficking policies and
to cascade these requirements through their own supply chains.
Standard contractual terms also require compliance with the
Modern Slavery Act 2015, including provisions relating to working
conditions, health, safety and wellbeing, the prohibition of child
and forced labour, non-discrimination, fair remuneration and
working hours.
Supplier Assessment
The Group enhanced its approach to supplier sustainability
assessment through the introduction of the EcoVadis platform
in 2024. EcoVadis provides an external, risk-based assessment
of supplier sustainability performance across key thematic
areas, including environment, labour and human rights, ethics
and sustainable procurement, benchmarked against a global
database of over 130,000 companies operating across more than
180 countries.
During 2025, the Group began onboarding suppliers to the
EcoVadis platform, prioritising an initial cohort of 20 key
suppliers representing the highest contributors to the Group’s
Scope 3 emissions and approximately 45% of total supply chain
spend. These suppliers were invited to complete a sustainability
assessment, supported by direct engagement to explain the
purpose of the exercise and the Group’s expectations. By the end
of the reporting period, 95% of invited suppliers had received an
EcoVadis rating, with no suppliers assessed as presenting low
performance across the core thematic areas. Specifically, no
suppliers received scores below 25 in Environment, Labour and
Human Rights, Ethics or Sustainable Procurement. Under the
EcoVadis methodology, scores below 25 fall into the ‘insufficient
category, indicating significant gaps in sustainability practices
and a higher-risk profile.
Looking ahead, the Group intends to extend the use of EcoVadis
across a broader range of suppliers. Our ultimate intention is
to have a full mapping of our supply base to enable us to make
more informed decisions and strengthen our supplier due
diligence in the long term. We also plan to introduce the EcoVadis
carbon module to support improved understanding of suppliers’
emissions reporting maturity and Scope 3 data over time.
Sustainable Product Content
The Group tracks the composition and sourcing of textile
materials to understand resource use and progress towards
increased sustainable content across its product range.
Sustainably sourced materials represent a significant proportion
of textile inputs. In 2025, 54% of total textile weight was derived
from sustainable content, comprising 51% sustainably sourced
biological materials, primarily cotton, and 3% secondary
resourced materials.
The Group is a member of the Better Cotton Initiative (BCI) and
supports the improvement of cotton farming practices globally.
Better Cotton is sourced through a recognised mass balance
chain of custody model, under which cotton is not physically
traceable to end products but farmers benefit from demand in
equivalent volumes. This approach has now been implemented
group wide, including Luxury Linen and Johnsons Ireland.
Better Cotton represents the largest component of our
sustainable textile inputs. While 28% of our textile suppliers (by
number) provided Better Cotton during the year, these suppliers
account for a substantial proportion of cotton volumes. During
the reporting period, Better Cotton represented approximately
70% of total cotton purchased by weight, equivalent to 51% of
total textile inputs by weight.
Textile Resource Inflows
Sustainable Content 2023 2024 2025
Total Weight of Textile
Products (tonnes) 4,792 4,777 6,749
% of total weight are
biological materials
sustainability sourced 40 49 51
% of total weight are
secondary resourced
materials 1 1 3
% derived from
sustainable content 41 50 54
During the year, the Group continued to progress its transition
towards more sustainable textile solutions. Within the Workwear
division, the rollout of processable and reusable hamper bags
for industrial garments continued following successful trials,
supporting the elimination of single-use packaging for these
garments.
In the Republic of Ireland, unwrapped linen deliveries continued
to be implemented with selected hospitality customers where
operational and hygiene requirements allow. In parallel, the
Group continued to work with suppliers to increase the
proportion of sustainable content within its textile offerings,
including the use of recycled materials and biopolymers,
supported by the ongoing development of a Sustainable Content
roadmap.
The increase in total textile weight in 2025 reflects expanded
textile coverage (including heavier items such as towel rolls and
mats) and the addition of Empire following its acquisition.
External Validation
We participate in a number of external sustainability ratings
and assessments, which provide independent benchmarks of
our environmental, social and governance practices. Across
the reporting period, the Group has seen consistent year on
year improvements in its external ratings and scores where
assessments have been updated:
External
Rating 2023 2024 2025
Sustainalytics Low Risk
rating
(score of 18)
Low Risk
rating
(score of 16.7)
Low Risk
rating
(score of 17.1)
CDP Climate
Change B-
Water C-
Climate
Change B
Water B-
Climate
Change B
Water B
EthiFinance
1
Low Exposure
rating
(score of 46)
Low Exposure
rating
(score of 49)
Low Exposure
rating
(score of 59)
EcoVadis Silver
1. EthiFinance ratings correspond to the 2022, 2023 and 2024 assessment
years respectively.
Following registration in 2024, the Group undertook its first
EcoVadis assessment and, in June 2025, was awarded a Silver
Medal. This places the Group in the top 15% of companies
assessed globally and the top 4% within its industry category.
EcoVadis assessments evaluate sustainability performance
across four areas: Environment, Labour and Human Rights, Ethics,
and Sustainable Procurement.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
42 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Group Non-Financial and Sustainability Information Statement
This section of the Strategic report constitutes the Group Non-Financial and Sustainability Information statement to comply with the
Companies (Strategic Report) (Climate Related Financial Disclosure) Regulations 2022.
The table below sets out the information that we disclose in line with the requirements under sections 414CA and 414CB Companies Act
2006 and where it can be found in this annual report (‘AR&A). Further disclosures, including Group policies and standards, can be found
on our website at www.jsg.com.
Reporting
Requirement
Policies and standards which govern our approach Relevant information necessary to understand our
business and its impact
JSG Employees Various HR related policies
Code of Ethics & Business Conduct
Group Health & Safety Policy
Group Bribery & Anti-Corruption Policy
Group Whistleblowing Policy
Group IT & Security Policy
Anti-Facilitation of Tax Evasion Policy
Fraud Prevention Policy
Group Sustainability Policy
Group Equity Diversity and Inclusion Policy
Board Diversity Policy
UK Gender Pay Gap Report
Group Anti-Sexual Harassment Policy
Share Dealing Code
Related Party Transactions Policy
Employee/Director Conflicts of Interest Policy
AR&A Pages 16 to 17
AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Social Matters Code of Ethics & Business Conduct
Group Sustainable Purchasing Policy
Group Employee Volunteering Policy
Group Sustainability Policy
Guiding Principles of Supplier Conduct
Guiding Principles of Customer Conduct
AR&A Pages 16 to 17
AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Human Rights Code of Ethics & Business Conduct
Group Bribery & Anti-Corruption Policy
Group Sustainable Purchasing Policy
Group Sustainability Policy
Modern Slavery Statement
Guiding Principles of Supplier Conduct
Guiding Principles of Customer Conduct
AR&A Pages 16 to 17
AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Anti-corruption
and anti-bribery
matters
Various HR related policies
Code of Ethics & Business Conduct
Group Bribery & Anti-Corruption Policy
Group Whistleblowing Policy
Anti-Facilitation of Tax Evasion Policy
Fraud Prevention Policy
Share Dealing Code
Employee/Director Conflicts of Interest Policy
AR&A Pages 16 to 17
AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Environmental
Matters
Group Health & Safety Policy
Group Sustainable Purchasing Policy
Group Sustainability Policy
AR&A Pages 16 to 17
AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Principal risks
and impacts on
business activity
N/A AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Description of
business model
N/A AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Non-financial
key performance
indicators
N/A AR&A Pages 28 to 49
Fourth Annual Sustainability Report
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
43
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Sustainability Reporting Framework Alignment
The table below provides a high-level overview of how the Group’s Sustainability Statement aligns with key sustainability reporting
frameworks. It is intended as a signposting tool and does not constitute a statement of full compliance.
Sustainability Topic Key disclosures covered GRI
(voluntary primary
framework)
UK SRS/IFRS S1 & S2
(voluntary readiness)
CSRD/ESRS
(voluntary alignment)
Governance and strategy Governance structure,
oversight, strategy and
policies
GRI 2, GRI 3 IFRS S1 – Governance,
Strategy
ESRS 2 (GOV, SBM)
Double materiality DMA scope,
methodology, results
and use
GRI 3 IFRS S1 – Identification
of sustainability-related
risks and opportunities
ESRS 1, ESRS 2
Climate change Energy use, GHG
emissions (Scopes 1-3),
targets and transition
planning
GRI 302, GRI 305 IFRS S2 – Climate ESRS E1
Water stewardship Water abstraction,
intensity metrics and
stewardship approach
GRI 303 IFRS S1 – Metrics and risk
management
ESRS E3
Waste and circular
economy
Waste metrics, landfill
reduction target,
circularity narrative
GRI 306, GRI 301 IFRS S1 – Metrics and
initiatives
ESRS E5
Own workforce Health and safety,
training, engagement,
diversity and inclusion
GRI 403, 404, 405 IFRS S1 – Human capital ESRS S1
Affected Communities
and Social Value
Community
engagement,
volunteering, donations
and social value
creation
GRI 413 IFRS S1 – Value chain
social impacts and
opportunities
ESRS S3
Supply chain and
sourcing
Supplier conduct,
assessments, due
diligence and
responsible sourcing
GRI 308, 414, 409 IFRS S1 – Value chain
risks
ESRS S2, ESRS G1
Business conduct and
ethics
Code of Conduct,
whistleblowing and
compliance
GRI 205, 206 IFRS S1 – Governance
and controls
ESRS G1
The Sustainability Statement has been prepared primarily in accordance with the Global Reporting Initiative Standards, which remain
the Group’s principal sustainability reporting framework. In anticipation of future expected mandatory requirements under the UK
Sustainability Disclosure Requirements, the content and structure of the Statement have also been informed by IFRS S1 and IFRS S2,
which are expected to be incorporated into the UK Sustainability Reporting Standards. Relevant aspects of the European Sustainability
Reporting Standards have been taken into account on a voluntary basis where they represent emerging best practice and where they
align with the material issues identified through the Group’s Double Materiality Assessment.
The alignment overview above is provided for signposting and transparency and does not represent a claim of full compliance with any
individual framework. A detailed standards cross-reference document is maintained internally and will support future alignment with
UK SRS once requirements are known and phased in.
Sustainability Related Risk
The Board is responsible for managing risks across the Group, including sustainability risks. Climate change and energy costs are key
risks, with mitigation measures such as site investments, energy efficient technologies and energy-saving initiatives in place.
As a business, climate change is critical for us and our stakeholders. We are committed to improving energy efficiency and reducing
greenhouse gas emissions. However, rising energy costs and potential levies remain concerns. Failure to move towards net zero
emissions could harm our brand and affect our ability to operate. Risks are identified and mitigated through the Group’s risk
management process as detailed on pages 50 to 56.
All operational sites follow ISO 14001 guidelines to manage environmental issues and ISO 9001 for quality management systems, with
44% production sites formally certified.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
44 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Task-force on climate-related financial disclosures (TCFD)
Statement of Compliance with TCFD Recommendations
(Section 414CB(2A) Companies Act 2006 and LR 6.6.6R(8))
For the financial year ended 31 December 2025, the Group has included climate-related financial disclosures within this Annual
Report that are consistent with the recommendations and recommended disclosures of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial
Disclosures (TCFD), except in respect of the specific areas set out below.
The Group’s climate-related disclosures are set out in this TCFD section on pages 44 to 47 and are structured around the four TCFD
pillars: Governance, Strategy, Risk Management, and Metrics and Targets.
Recommended Disclosures Not Fully Met
The Group has not yet fully met the following TCFD recommended disclosures:
Strategy (b) – the detailed quantitative assessment of the financial impacts of climate-related risks and opportunities on the
organisation’s businesses, strategy and financial planning; and
Strategy (c) – comprehensive resilience testing of the organisation’s strategy under multiple climate-related scenarios.
These disclosures have not been fully included in the current reporting period as the enhanced multi-scenario modelling and
associated financial quantification were not sufficiently developed at the reporting date to support robust and decision-useful
disclosure.
To address this, the Group has engaged an independent specialist consultancy to undertake enhanced quantitative climate
scenario modelling. The outcomes of this work are expected to be incorporated into the Annual Report for the financial year ending
31December 2026.
The Board remains committed to achieving full alignment with the TCFD Recommendations.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
45
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Overview of Climate-related Disclosures
In addition to the reporting alignment overview in the above, the Group continues to present climate-related disclosures with reference
to the recommendations of the TCFD, which remain relevant to the UK sustainability reporting framework. We are aware UK SRS will
supersede TCFD, however for this report we have prepared disclosures consistent with TCFD.
The below scenarios were developed using resources including the UK Climate Change Committee’s “The Adaptation Committee’s
Independent Assessment of UK Climate Risk (2021)”. A 1.C temperature rise is expected by the mid 2030s regardless of any mitigation
(IPCC 2023 Synthesis Report). It is expected this will lead to increasing extreme weather including precipitation and flooding. 2035
represents a realistic and reasonable limit for the Group’s long term risk scenario planning and so a temperature increase of 1.C by
2035 was considered for all scenarios below:
Risk Category Risk Description Potential Impact Response/Resilience/Opportunity
Acute Physical
Risk: Flooding
& Disruptive
weather events
17 JSG sites are potentially at an
increased risk of flooding from
coastal, fluvial, or precipitation
resulting in damage to site or
emergency relocation.
Damage to site, emergency
relocation, disruption to operations,
increased insurance cost.
We intend to implement processes
and procedures to ensure
that flood risk assessment and
extreme weather event
analysis is incorporated into all the
following processes:
Building lease renewals and
new site plans
Mergers and Acquisition
activity
Annual Facilities Risk
Assessments
Chronic Physical
Risk: Sea
Level Rise
Sea level rise projected between
0.14-0.18m by 2040, affecting JSG
sites below 0.1m above sea level.
Long-term risk to site integrity,
potential need for relocation,
operational disruptions, and
increased cooling requirements.
None of JSG’s UK sites would be
impacted directly from the sea
level rises, however, we are still to
complete the analysis for the
acquired sites in the Republic of
Ireland and Tottenham (UK). We
intend to ensure that relevant
processes and procedures are in
place across relevant business
activities which include sea level
rise risk assessment and extreme
weather event analysis, and that
these are incorporated into our risk
management approach.
Chronic
Physical Risk:
Temperature Rise
Rising temperatures expected to
increase energy consumption by
10%, mostly for cooling
requirements, over the next
10 years.
Increased operational costs due to
higher energy demand, and
requirements to upgrade cooling
equipment.
The financial cost has not yet
been fully assessed however we
anticipate this could be material if
it were to be implemented across
our entire estate. We intend to
continue conducting site energy
efficiency assessments and
planning any strategic equipment
upgrades.
Opportunity:
Renewable Energy
Supply
Opportunity: Decentralised, low
carbon energy supply: Investment in
plant equipment and transitioning
to renewable energy supply such as
Power Purchase Agreement (PPAs).
Opportunity: Reduction in Scope
1 and 2 emissions, lower long term
energy costs, future proofing
against rising energy costs and
carbon taxes.
The Group recognises the
opportunity for the business to
continue to promote our services as
a commercially viable alternative to
existing and prospective customers
who will be faced with similar
energy and carbon emissions
concerns.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
46 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
TCFD Recommended Disclosures
Governance
(a) Board oversight of climate-related risks and opportunities
The PLC Board retains ultimate responsibility for oversight of climate-related risks and opportunities. Oversight is delegated to the
Sustainability Committee, chaired by the Group CEO, which reports formally to the Board on a half yearly basis. Climate-related
matters are considered within principal risk discussions, strategic planning sessions and capital allocation decisions.
(b) Management’s role in assessing and managing climate-related risks and opportunities
Management is responsible for identifying, assessing and managing climate-related risks through the Group’s enterprise risk
management framework. The Head of Sustainability coordinates climate risk identification across operational sites, working with
Facilities, Procurement and Finance teams. Climate-related risks are reviewed through annual site risk assessments and escalated to
the Sustainability Committee where material. Progress against climate-related targets is monitored monthly by management and
reported to the Board at each scheduled meeting.
Strategy
(a) Climate-related risks and opportunities over short, medium and long term
The Group considers climate-related risks and opportunities across three time horizons:
Short term (1–5 years): energy price volatility, regulatory change, carbon taxation and insurance cost impacts.
Medium term (510 years): increased frequency and severity of extreme weather events affecting operational resilience.
Long term (to 2050): structural transition to a low-carbon economy, decarbonisation requirements and escalating physical climate
risks including sea level rise.
Physical risks identified include flooding, sea level rise and temperature increase. Transition risks include regulatory change, carbon
pricing and energy market volatility. Opportunities include renewable energy procurement, energy efficiency investments and
enhanced commercial positioning with customers facing similar decarbonisation pressures.
(b) Impact on business, strategy and financial planning
Climate-related risks and opportunities are incorporated into strategic planning and capital allocation decisions. Energy cost
projections influence procurement strategy and investment in plant and equipment. Investment in renewable energy supply and
energy-efficient technologies forms part of the Group’s medium-term capital programme. While qualitative impacts on operations and
cost structures are assessed, enhanced quantitative modelling of potential balance sheet and income statement impacts is currently
in development, as described in the Compliance Statement above.
(c) Resilience of strategy under different climate-related scenarios
During the reporting period, the Group undertook qualitative analysis under a 1.C pathway to 2035, focusing on near- and medium-
term physical risk exposure. Enhanced modelling across three temperature pathways (below 2°C, 2–3°C and business-as-usual) and
across defined time horizons (short-, medium- and long-term to 2050) is currently being undertaken by an external consultancy. Full
quantitative resilience disclosure will be provided in the FY2026 Annual Report.
Risk Management
(a) Processes for identifying and assessing climate-related risks
Climate-related risks are identified through:
Annual site-level risk assessments;
Facilities risk reviews;
Integration of climate considerations into lease renewals and acquisition due diligence; and
Strategic risk workshops.
Physical exposure is assessed using geographic risk indicators and external climate data sources. Risks are evaluated using the
Group’s enterprise risk scoring methodology, considering likelihood, operational disruption and financial impact.
(b) Processes for managing climate-related risks
Mitigation measures include:
Incorporation of flood and extreme weather analysis into lease and M&A decisions;
Energy efficiency upgrades and plant modernisation;
Renewable energy procurement through Power Purchase Agreements (PPAs); and
Ongoing monitoring of regulatory developments.
Identified risks are assigned to accountable management leads and reviewed by the Sustainability Committee.
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
47
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
(c) Integration into overall risk management
Climate-related risks are incorporated into the Group’s enterprise risk register and assessed alongside other principal risks. Where
material, these risks are reported to the Board and considered within principal risk disclosures and the Group’s viability assessment.
Climate-related risks are captured within the Principal Risks and Uncertainties disclosed within the Strategic Report on page 56.
Metrics and Targets
(a) Metrics used
The Group monitors Scope 1 and Scope 2 greenhouse gas emissions, energy consumption, and progress against its Vision 2030 targets.
(b) Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions
Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3 emissions are disclosed within the Sustainability section on page 33.
(c) Targets and performance
The Group has established Vision 2030 targets to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and transition plans towards renewable energy
supply. Performance against these targets is reviewed monthly by management and quarterly by the Board. Performance metrics are
disclosed in the Sustainability section on pages 32 to 35.
Future Enhancements
As noted in the TCFD Compliance Statement above, further work is required to enhance the quantitative financial assessment and
multi-scenario resilience analysis. While we have made significant strides in aligning our reporting with the recommendations of TCFD,
we recognise that the complexity of climate science and its economic implications requires a continuous evolution of our analytical
capabilities.
To ensure our strategy remains resilient under a range of potential futures, we have engaged a leading specialist third-party
consultancy to enhance our Climate Scenario Analysis. This strategic partnership marks a transition from a broad assessment to a
more granular, data-driven quantitative approach. By leveraging external expertise and sophisticated climate modelling tools, we aim
to eliminate blind spots in our current framework and ensure our disclosures reflect the latest scientific and economic consensus.
In the coming financial year, this consultancy will lead a comprehensive deep-dive assessment focused on three core areas:
Three Distinct Pathways: We will test our business model against three rigorous climate scenarios: a below 2°C (Proactive), a
2°C-C scenario (Reactive), and a ‘business-as-usual’ scenario (Inactive).
Defined Time Horizons: Recognising that climate impacts manifest over decades, the analysis will evaluate risks and opportunities
across short-term (1–5 years), medium-term (5–10 years), and long-term (up to 2050) horizons, aligning with our strategic planning
and capital expenditure cycles.
Operational and Financial Quantification: The primary objective of this engagement is to move beyond high-level risk identification.
We will conduct a forensic examination of potential impacts on our physical assets, supply chain stability, and market demand. This
will result in a more precise quantification of potential financial impacts on our balance sheet and income statement, including
possible shifts in operational expenditure.
The insights gained from this enhanced analysis will be fundamental to our strategic decision-making. They will inform our Risk
Management Framework, capital allocation priorities, and our ongoing decarbonisation roadmap. We look forward to sharing the full
results of this enhanced modelling in our next Annual Report, providing our stakeholders with a sophisticated and transparent view of
how JSG is positioned to thrive in an uncertain climate future.
48 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Baseline years note
Where relevant, baseline data has been recalculated to reflect changes in Group structure and organisational boundaries. Baseline
years remain unchanged unless otherwise stated. For the purpose of Sustainability Reporting, our baseline years are as follows:
Data Baseline Reporting Year Recent acquisitions not included in baseline year
People 2021 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Safety 2022 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Training 2023 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Engagement 2021 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Equity, Diversity and Inclusion 2022 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Water 2022
Waste 2024
Plastics 2023
Energy and Carbon Scope 1,2 2022
1
Scope 3 Emissions 2022
1
Sustainable Textile Content 2021 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Supply Chain 2022 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
Social Value 2021 Regency, Celtic Linen, Empire
1. Note: Calculation: 1 October 2021 to 30 September 2022
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
49
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Jacobs 2025 Assurance Statement
Independent Assurance Summary 2025
Jacobs U.K. Limited (‘Jacobs’) has conducted assurance of selected sustainability data from Johnson Service Group PLC’s (‘JSG’) annual
report and accounts for the financial year ended 31 December 2025.
The assurance was undertaken in accordance with two standards; limited assurance was provided using the International Auditing
and Assurance Standards Board’s International Standard on Assurance Engagements 3000 (ISAE 3000 (Revised)), and moderate
assurance was provided using AccountAbility’s AA1000 Assurance Standard (AA1000AS v3).
The Jacobs assurance team has identified no material concerns with the select baseline and 2025 sustainability performance data.
In addition, JSG has demonstrated adherence to the AA1000 Accountability Principles (2018) of Inclusivity, Materiality, Responsiveness,
and Impact.
The assurance statements detail the key findings and conclusions, scope and methodology, and can be found on JSG’s website.
Jacobs U.K. Limited
London
2 March 2026
Sustainability Statement
Continued >
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
R
i
s
k
Risk
Management
Process
R
e
v
i
e
w
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
R
i
s
k
A
s
s
e
s
s
R
i
s
k
I
d
e
n
t
i
f
y
R
i
s
k
Principal
Risks and
Uncertainties
“We believe that effective risk
management is critical to the
achievement of our strategic
objectives and the long-term
sustainable growth of our
business. The Board continues
to take a proactive approach to
recognising and mitigating risk
with the aim of protecting its
employees and customers and
safeguarding the interests of the
Group and its stakeholders.
50 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
51
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Risk Appetite
The Board interprets appetite for risk as the level of risk that
the Group is willing to take in order to meet its strategic goals.
The Board communicates its approach to, and appetite for, risk
to the business through the strategy planning process and the
internal risk governance and control frameworks. In determining
its risk appetite, the Board recognises that a prudent and robust
approach to risk assessment and mitigation must be carefully
balanced with a degree of flexibility so that the entrepreneurial
spirit which has greatly contributed to the success of the Group
is not inhibited. Both the Board and the Audit Committee
remain satisfied that the Group’s internal risk control framework
continues to provide the necessary element of flexibility without
compromising the integrity of risk management and internal
control systems.
Emerging Risks
The Board has established processes for identifying emerging
risks, and horizon scanning for risks that may arise over the
medium to long term. Emerging and potential changes to
the Group’s risk profile are identified through the Group’s risk
governance frameworks and processes, and through direct
feedback from management, including changing operating
conditions, market and consumer trends.
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
The principal risks and uncertainties affecting the Group are set
out below, together with details on how the Board takes action to
mitigate each risk. These risks and uncertainties do not comprise
all of the risks that the Group may face and are not necessarily
listed in any order of priority. The Group faces a number of
operational risks on an ongoing basis, such as litigation and
financial risks. Additional risks and uncertainties not presently
known to the Board, or which are considered to be remote or are
deemed to be less material at the date of this Annual Report,
may also have an adverse effect on the Group. For each principal
risk we have set out the risk rating that has been attributed
to each risk. Risk ratings are shown as ‘net’ i.e. the residual risk
rating taking account of the controls and mitigation in place.
In accordance with the provisions of the Financial Reporting
Council’s 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’),
the Board has taken into consideration the principal risks and
uncertainties in the context of determining whether to adopt
the going concern basis of preparation and when assessing the
future prospects of the Group.
Our approach to Risk Management
The Board takes a proactive approach to risk management,
aimed at protecting and safeguarding the interests of the
Company and its stakeholders in a constantly changing
environment. The Board has overall accountability for ensuring
that risk is effectively managed across the Group and, on behalf
of the Board, the Audit Committee coordinates and reviews the
effectiveness of the Group’s risk management process.
Risks are reviewed on an ongoing basis and are measured
against a defined set of likelihood and impact criteria. This is
captured in consistent reporting formats enabling the Audit
Committee to review and consolidate risk information and
summarise the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group.
Wherever possible, action is taken to mitigate, to an acceptable
level, the potential impact of identified principal risks and
uncertainties.
Risk Rating Risk Level Action
20+
Very High Risk Stop
12 to 16
High Risk Urgent Action
8 to 10
Medium Risk Action
4 to 6
Low Risk Monitor
1 to 3
Very Low Risk No Action
The Board formally reviews the most significant risks facing
the Group twice a year, or more frequently should new matters
arise. Throughout 2025, and other than as described below, the
overall risk environment remained largely unchanged from that
reported within the Group’s 2024 Annual Report.
Severe 5
Significant 4
Moderate 3
Minor 2
Insignificant 1
1 2 3 4 5
Improbable Remote Possible Likely Almost
Certain
LIKELIHOOD
IMPACT
52 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Continued >
Key
Increased risk Decreased risk Static risk
Risk Mitigation
ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL CONDITIONS
Risk Rating: High
Our business could be susceptible to adverse changes
in, inter alia, economic conditions, employment levels
and customer spending habits, all of which could
impact our profitability and cash flow.
Current macro-economic conditions could negatively
impact consumer spending and hence demand for our
services, particularly in HORECA.
Geopolitical tensions, such as those in the Middle
East and the ongoing Russia-Ukraine conflict or the
potential for US imposed tariffs, could have an impact
on the price, or availability, of inputs (e.g. energy) and
have heightened threats to national security.
Given the diversity of our customer base and the various industries which
we serve, it is generally possible to contain the impact of these adverse
conditions. Each business continually reviews its routes to market,
changes in customer demands and expectations and cost base so that it
can react appropriately to the impact of the wider economy.
Any adverse impact on cash flow could be mitigated in the short term by
controls over capital expenditure and other discretionary spend.
The Group has long standing relationships with its key suppliers and
aims to develop a strategic partnership approach. These relationships
mitigate, to a certain extent, the risk of a supplier not being able to
supply us. In the event that a supply was rationed, for example energy
blackouts at certain times, we would seek to adjust our shift and work
patterns accordingly.
As further detailed below within ‘Cost Inflation’, and in order to provide
protection from pricing volatility, the Group proactively forward
purchases certain of its energy requirements.
COST INFLATION
Risk Rating: High
Our objective is always to deliver the right level of
service in the most efficient way. An increase in the cost
of labour, together with associated taxation increases,
or supplies, for example, energy, could constitute a risk
to our ability to do this.
We seek to manage the impact of cost inflation by continuing to drive
greater efficiencies through supplier rationalisation, labour scheduling
and productivity improvements, the latter of which is evidenced by our
ongoing investment in state of the art, energy efficient machinery.
Cost indexation in certain of our contracts also gives us the contractual
right to review pricing with our customers.
Along with many other businesses, we are seeing significant inflationary
pressures on some of our costs, particularly in respect of labour,
however, our existing scale and focus on operational excellence means
we are well placed to address these challenges proactively without
compromising our market share opportunity. Furthermore, we are
protected to a large extent from the current volatility in prices with, at
the time of writing, some 90% of our 2026 anticipated gas requirement
and some 85% of our 2026 anticipated power requirement at fixed prices,
with reducing amounts fixed into 2027 and beyond. We are proactively
monitoring the market with the aim of entering into further fixed
arrangements when appropriate and have also continued to secure and
implement price increases across our customer base.
Trend:
Trend:
53
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Risk Mitigation
FAILURE OF STRATEGY
Risk Rating: High
Our current business model sets out our intentions
to expand the Group by actively pursuing strategic
acquisition opportunities within the textile services
market. Failure to identify suitable targets, or failure to
successfully integrate them, would adversely impact
our growth plans and potentially lead to lower investor
confidence.
There is considerable knowledge and expertise within the Group with
regard to acquisitions. An experienced acquisition team, together with
external advisors where appropriate, is involved in all acquisition activity
and we have a proven track record of successfully integrating businesses
into the wider Group.
Whilst the main challenge, particularly given the current macroeconomic
environment, is in identifying suitable targets and determining an
appropriate level of consideration on acceptable terms, our knowledge
of and relationships with other market participants leaves us well
positioned to take advantage of opportunities.
RECRUITMENT, RETENTION AND MOTIVATION OF EMPLOYEES
Risk Rating: High
As a service orientated Group, attracting, retaining
and motivating the best people with the right skills, at
all levels of the organisation, is key to the long-term
success of the Group.
Short term disruption could occur if a key member of
our team was unavailable at short notice, either on a
temporary or permanent basis. The current economic
conditions may increase the risk of attrition in critical
senior management positions.
The Group aims to mitigate this risk by targeted resource management
and has established training, development, performance management
and reward programmes to attract, retain, develop and motivate our
people.
The Group also undertakes employee engagement reviews, led by
an external consultant, and operates a number of well-established
initiatives in response to our people’s needs.
The Group regularly reviews the adequacy and strength of its
management teams to ensure that appropriate experience and training
is given such that there is not an over reliance on any one individual.
Furthermore, the Group has continued to develop succession planning
as part of the development programmes for our people. Succession
Planning is also now a regular agenda item at Board meetings.
LOSS OF A PROCESSING FACILITY
Risk Rating: High
The loss of a key processing facility could result in
significant disruption to our business.
A wide geographic spread of processing facilities mitigates, to an extent,
the effect of a temporary loss of any single facility as our estate provides
us the ability to relocate the processing of work. Detailed business
continuity plans are in place for the processing to be relocated quickly
and efficiently, as demonstrated in June 2025 following a fire at our small
industrial workwear processing unit in Bristol.
Furthermore, insurance cover is in place such that the increased
cost of working following a loss of processing capacity may, in some
circumstances, be recovered.
COMPETITION AND DISRUPTION
Risk Rating: High
We operate in a highly competitive environment.
Aggressive pricing from our competitors could cause a
reduction in our revenues and margins.
We aim to mitigate this risk by continuing to promote our differentiated
propositions and focusing on our points of strength, such as
transparency of our pricing, flexibility in our cost base, quality and value
of service and innovation.
Our diversified customer base and non-reliance on any one particular
customer mitigates this risk to an extent.
Trend:
Trend:
Trend:
Trend:
Trend:
54 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Risk Mitigation
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY FAILURES AND CYBER SECURITY
Risk Rating: High
The digital world presents many risks for a business
including, but not limited to, technology failures, loss
of confidential data, data privacy breaches and
damage to brand reputation through, for example, the
increased threat of cyber-attacks and the widespread
use and instantaneous nature of social media.
Disruption caused by the failure of key software
applications, security controls or underlying
infrastructure, or disruption caused by cyber attacks,
could impact day-to-day operations and management
decision making or result in regulatory fines, other
sanctions and/or third-party claims.
A combination of increased geopolitical tensions,
economic instability and accessibility of sophisticated
artificial intelligence (AI) enabled tools and
techniques have contributed to a significant increase
in the risk of phishing and malware attacks, including
ransomware, across all industries.
We seek to assess and manage the effectiveness of our security
infrastructure and our ability to effectively defend against current and
future cyber risks by using analysis tools and experienced professionals
to evaluate and mitigate potential impacts. We are currently working
alongside external consultants to review and, where appropriate,
strengthen our security infrastructure. Externally facilitated cyber
awareness training has been provided to senior management and
similar training is being rolled out further across the Group. Furthermore,
we continually increase our employees’ awareness of phishing and
malware attacks through the circulation of regular educational
materials and simulation training.
We also have in place appropriate and tested crisis management
procedures to handle issues in the event of our defences being breached.
This is supported by using industry standard tooling, experienced
professionals and partners and regular compliance monitoring to
evaluate and mitigate potential impacts.
We are focused on the need to maximise the effectiveness and security
of our information systems and technology as a business enabler and to
reduce both cost and exposure as a result. As such, we continue to invest
in technology and specialist resources in order to further strengthen our
platforms, controls and defences.
PANDEMIC OR OTHER NATIONAL CRISIS
Risk Rating: Medium
The Group’s operations were significantly disrupted
by the global COVID-19 pandemic and associated
containment measures. The Board is cognisant that
a future significant unexpected event, such as a
pandemic or other national crisis, could cause further
business risk and have a material impact on the Group.
Detailed business continuity plans are in place and, in response to
COVID-19, the Group demonstrated its ability to continue trading
throughout the pandemic through the implementation of action plans to
protect the liquidity of the Group, reduce the cost base and protect the
health, safety and wellbeing of our employees.
The Board will continue to keep the potential for a significant
unexpected event under review as part of its overall assessment of risk.
HEALTH AND SAFETY
Risk Rating: Medium
Health and safety in the workplace is an extremely
important consideration for an employer. Legislation
is complex and failure to ensure that our employees
remain safe at work may lead to serious business
interruption and could result in criminal and civil
prosecution, increased costs and potential damage to
our reputation.
The Group has policies, procedures and standards in place, which are
continuously updated, to ensure compliance with legal obligations
and industry standards. Regular health and safety audits and risk
assessments are undertaken across the Group. Regular training is
provided to our people to ensure they are clear on their role and
accountabilities with regards to health, safety and wellbeing practices.
Prompt incident reporting procedures are maintained and all employees
are encouraged to report ‘near misses’ in order that additional safety
procedures are implemented where applicable.
All Board and management meetings throughout the Group feature a
health and safety update as an agenda item.
Trend:
Trend:
Trend:
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Continued >
55
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Trend:
Risk Mitigation
COMPLIANCE AND FRAUD
Risk Rating: Medium
Ineffective management of compliance with
increasingly complex laws and regulations, or evidence
of fraud, bribery and corruption, anti-competitive
behaviour or other serious misconduct, could have
an adverse effect on the Group’s reputation and
could result in an adverse impact on the Group’s
performance and/or reputation if significant financial
penalties are levied or a criminal action is brought
against the Company or its Directors.
Operating across more than one jurisdiction elevates
this risk due to non-standard laws and regulations
applying to different territories.
The Group’s zero tolerance based Code of Ethics (the ‘Code of Ethics’)
governs all aspects of our relationships with our stakeholders and, in
conjunction with our dedicated Whistleblowing Hotline, is aimed at
promoting a strong culture of integrity throughout the Group. All alleged
breaches of the Code of Ethics, including any allegations of fraud, are
investigated and action taken where appropriate.
The Group’s procedures include regular operating reviews, underpinned
by a continual focus on ensuring the effectiveness of internal controls.
The Group undertakes a robust risk management assessment that helps
properly identify major risks and ensures the internal control framework
remains effective through regular monitoring, testing and review.
Emerging regulatory and compliance risks are included in this process to
enable visibility and planning to address them.
Regulation and compliance risk is also considered as part of our annual
business planning process.
Whilst operating across more than one jurisdiction does elevate this
risk, this is mitigated through the knowledge and experience of local
management and, where appropriate, through the use of professional
advisors.
CUSTOMER SALES AND RETENTION
Risk Rating: Medium
For our businesses to grow organically, we are
reliant on securing and retaining a diverse range of
customers. A reliance on any one particular customer
or group of customers may present a risk to the future
cash flows of the Group should they not be retained.
Similarly, increased competition could hinder the
Group in securing new, or retaining existing, customers.
Adverse economic conditions may lead to an increased
number of our customers and clients being unable to
pay for existing or additional products and services or,
in more extreme circumstances, an increase in business
failures and insolvencies.
We have strategies which strengthen our long-term relationships
with our customers based on quality, value and innovation. Regular
customer feedback surveys are undertaken across the Group and, where
applicable, appropriate action taken.
Our business model is structured so that we are not reliant on one
particular customer or group of customers.
The Group has limited concentration of credit risk with regard to trade
receivables given the diverse and unrelated nature of the Group’s
customer base.
Trend:
Trend:
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Continued >
56 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Risk Mitigation
CLIMATE CHANGE & ENERGY COSTS
Risk Rating: Medium
Climate change is increasingly becoming more
significant and we foresee that, over time, it may
have a greater impact on the Group’s operations. For
example, unpredictable weather patterns brought
about by climate change are leading to increasingly
more intense storms and flash flooding.
The industry we operate in is, by its very nature,
energy intensive. Climate change is important to us
as a business and to our stakeholders and we are
committed to energy efficiency improvement and
reducing our greenhouse gas emissions however, there
remains the potential for us to see increases in both the
cost of energy as well as the potential introduction of
associated levies or taxation.
Failure to appropriately demonstrate that as a
business we are committed and moving towards net
zero carbon emissions could negatively impact our
brand and also impact our ability to operate and/or
remain relevant to our customers and consumers.
Failure to remain up to date or comply with climate
change disclosure requirements could lead to material
financial, reputational or regulatory risks to the Group.
Detailed business continuity plans are in place for the processing of
work to be relocated quickly and efficiently. Furthermore, material
damage and business interruption insurance cover is in place such that
damage to property and the increased cost of working following a loss
of processing capacity may, in some circumstances, be recovered.
The Group seeks to minimise volatility and manage price risk through
hedging and forward buying arrangements for its diesel, electricity and
gas requirements.
Whilst we are unable to eradicate the risk of energy levies and/or taxes
being introduced, we seek to mitigate such risk by continually investing
in our sites and installing the latest technologically efficient machinery,
for example, water and heat recovery systems.
The launch of our refreshed Sustainability Strategy and Vision 2030
targets in 2022 demonstrates the commitments we are making in this
area. These commitments are further supported by sustainability targets
having been incorporated into Executive and senior management
remuneration targets since 2022.
We have a Sustainability Committee to oversee our environmental
commitments. The role of the Committee is to lend support, to monitor
progress and provide guidance on our priority areas, ensuring that our
targets are ambitious, realistic, and in the long-term interests of the
Group, our stakeholders and the environment.
The Group already complies with SECR reporting requirements and
has improved and increased its TCFD reporting year on year. In terms
of Scope 3 reporting, we are working alongside third party consultants
in order to further understand and develop our approach and
methodology. Further details in respect of SECR, TCFD and Scope 3
emissions are set out within our Sustainability report.
Trend:
Trend:
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
57
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
Continued >
60 Directors and Officers
62 Directors’ Report
69 Statement of Directors’
Responsibilities
in Respect of the
Financial Statements
70 Corporate Governance
Report
58 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
84 Audit Committee
Report
94 Directors’
Remuneration Report
91 Nomination
Committee Report
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
59
Peter Egan
Chief Executive Officer
Committee Memberships: Disclosure Committee Chair;
Sustainability Committee Chair
Skills & Experience
Peter was appointed as Chief Executive Officer on 1 January 2019 having
previously held the role of Chief Operating Officer since 1 April 2018. He
joined the Group in 1998 and has almost 30 years’ experience in the Textile
Services industry. Prior to his appointment to the Board, Peter was the
Managing Director of Johnsons Workwear, the Group’s workwear rental
business, having also previously held a number of senior roles within that
business. Peter is also a Board member of the European Textile Services
Association.
Ryan Govender
Chief Financial Officer
(Appointed 1 October 2025)
Committee Memberships: Member of the Disclosure Committee;
Member of the Sustainability Committee
Skills & Experience
Ryan was appointed as Chief Financial Officer and joined the Board of
Johnson Service Group PLC on 1 October 2025. Ryan is an experienced CFO
and brings extensive, listed, corporate finance and commercial expertise
to his role at JSG, having worked for over 20 years in senior finance roles
across global FMCG businesses, particularly in the food sector. Previously,
Ryan was CFO and Europe MD at Treatt Plc, a natural extracts and
ingredients manufacturer with operations in the UK, the USA and China.
Prior to his role at Treatt Plc, Ryan held several roles with Associated
British Foods (ABF’), the international food, ingredient and retail group,
most recently as CFO of SPI Pharma. Before that, Ryan held senior
finance and management roles within other ABF businesses, including
Speedibake, Germains Seed Technology, Illovo Sugar, and at ABF plc. Ryan
qualified as a Chartered Accountant at PwC in South Africa.
Jock Lennox
Non-Executive Chair
Key Committee Memberships: Nomination Committee Chair;
Member of the Remuneration Committee
Skills & Experience
Jock was appointed as Non-Executive Chair in May 2021. Jock, a Chartered
Accountant with extensive experience across a range of sectors, spent
30 years with Ernst & Young LLP (‘EY), holding a number of leadership
positions both in the UK and globally, including 20 years as a partner.
Since leaving EY in 2009, he has developed an active board career and is
currently the Chairman of Clarion Housing Group the UK’s largest not-for-
profit housing association. Jock was, most recently, Senior Independent
Director and Audit Committee Chair of Barratt Redrow plc until November
2025 and was, previously, Chair of Enquest PLC and Hill & Smith Holdings
PLC, having also previously served on the boards of Dixons Carphone PLC,
Oxford Instruments PLC and A&J Mucklow Group PLC.
Directors and
Officers
60 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
61
Chris Girling
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director
Key Committee Memberships: Audit Committee Chair; Member
of the Remuneration Committee; Member of the Nomination
Committee
Skills & Experience
Chris joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 29 August 2018. A
Chartered Accountant by training, he has a background in a variety of
sectors, including support services, distribution, construction and defence.
Since retiring from full time executive roles in 2007, where he spent the
last 16 years as Group Finance Director for two FTSE 250 support services
companies, Chris has pursued a non-executive career. In January 2024,
after a 16 year term, Chris stepped down as Chair of Trustees for the
Slaughter and May Pension Fund. Chris was previously a Non-Executive
Director and Chair of the Audit Committee of South East Water Limited,
before stepping down, after 8 years, in January 2023. Chris also served
as the Senior Independent Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit
Committee of Workspace Group PLC, prior to stepping down from the
Workspace Group PLC Board in January 2022.
Nicola Keach
Independent Non-Executive Director
Key Committee Memberships: Member of the Audit Committee;
Member of the Remuneration Committee; Member of the
Nomination Committee
Skills & Experience
Nicola joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 1 June 2022.
She has extensive experience across a range of sectors, having worked
within a number of B2B service organisations of scale. Most recently,
Nicola served as Chief Executive Officer of Tivoli Group, one of the largest
providers of Grounds Maintenance in the UK, having joined the company
in November 2021 with a remit to grow the business both organically and
through aggressive acquisition. In November 2024, Nicola led a successful
exit for Tivoli’s private equity owners through Tivoli’s acquisition by
Nurture Group. Prior to joining Tivoli, Nicola spent nearly a decade at
utilities company ENGIE, latterly as Chief Executive Officer for the UK
and Ireland. Nicola’s early career was with Serco, the FTSE 250 provider
of public services, where she quickly progressed to hold a number of
leadership roles, including National Operations Director for Healthcare
and Business Development Director for Healthcare.
Kirsty Homer
Independent Non-Executive Director
Key Committee Memberships: Remuneration Committee Chair;
Member of the Audit Committee; Member of the Nomination
Committee
Skills & Experience
Kirsty joined the Board as a Non-Executive Director on 1 August 2023 and
was appointed as the Company’s Remuneration Committee Chair and
designated Non-Executive Director for Workforce Engagement with effect
from 1 November 2024. Kirsty is a highly experienced HR practitioner
who is, currently, Group People Director for Blue Coast Capital and Chief
People Officer for River Island, the British based, multi-channel, fashion
brand and retailer. In February 2024 Kirsty was appointed as a Non-
Executive Director of The King’s Trust Trading Limited, the commercial
and events arm of The King’s Trust. Previously, Kirsty served as Group
HR Director for the Howden Joinery Group Plc group of companies
(“Howdens”). Prior to her role at Howdens, Kirsty served as Global People
& Governance Director for the Mothercare Plc group of companies during
its turnaround phase and restructure, helping to transform the business
into a successful global franchisor. Kirsty has also held senior HR roles
at Waitrose and John Lewis before being appointed Personnel Director
there in 2013.
Yvonne Monaghan
Former Chief Financial Officer
(Resigned 1 October 2025)
Skills & Experience
Yvonne has significant experience in the Textile Services industry having
joined the Group as Group Management Accountant in 1984 after
qualifying as a Chartered Accountant with Deloitte Haskins and Sells. She
was appointed as Company Secretary and Group Financial Controller
in 1985 and joined the Board as Chief Financial Officer on 31 August
2007. Yvonne is also the Senior Independent Non-Executive Director
and Chair of the Audit Committee of The Pebble Group PLC and, prior to
stepping down from their Board in September 2020, was also the Senior
Independent Non-Executive Director and Chair of the Audit Committee
of NWF Group PLC. On 1 October 2025 Yvonne stepped down from the
Board as Chief Financial Officer and resigned as an Executive Director
of the Company. Yvonne then remained employed by the Company
until 28 February 2026 (the “End Date”) to, initially, complete a handover
process with her successor as Chief Financial Officer, Ryan Govender, and,
thereafter, to be available to support the Company. Yvonne then ended
such employment with the Company and retired on the End Date.
Christopher Clarkson
General Counsel & Company Secretary
Skills & Experience
Chris was appointed General Counsel & Company Secretary on
5September 2022. Chris started his career at the international law firm
DLA Piper UK LLP where he qualified as a Solicitor in 2008. He joined
Brammer plc (now Rubix), the pan-European industrial distributor, in 2011
and was appointed Head of Legal there in 2017.
62 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
The Directors present their Annual Report and the audited
Consolidated and Company Financial Statements for the year
ended 31 December 2025.
This Report includes information required by the Companies
Act 2006 (‘Companies Act) and the UK Financial Conduct
Authority’s (‘FCA’) UK Listing Rules (‘UKLR) and forms part of the
management report as required by Rule 4 of the FCA’s Disclosure
Guidance and Transparency Rules (‘DTR’). Additional information
which is incorporated by reference into this Directors’ Report can
be located by reference to the table below. As permitted by the
Companies Act, the Directors’ Report includes the disclosures in
the Strategic Report on:
Subject Matter
Location
in Annual
Report (page)
Indication of likely future developments in the
business of the Company
6 to 56
Viability statement 15
Climate change emission reporting 32 to 35
Employee engagement 36 to 37
Directors who held office during the year 60 to 61
Stakeholder engagement 16 to 17
Financial risk management 88 to 89
The Strategic Report can be found on pages 6 to 56 and includes
details of important events and the Company’s business model
and strategy. In addition, the Corporate Governance Report on
pages 70 to 83, the report on Sustainability on pages 28 to 49
(including with regard to information about the employment of
disabled persons, employee involvement and share schemes),
and the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement on page 69 are also
incorporated into this Directors’ Report by reference.
Principal Activities and Business Overview
Johnson Service Group PLC (the ‘Company’) is incorporated and
domiciled in the UK, its registered number is 523335 and the
address of its registered office is Johnson House, Abbots Park,
Monks Way, Preston Brook, Cheshire, WA7 3GH. The Company
is a public limited company and has all of its ordinary shares
admitted to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies)
Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority
(FCA) and to trading on London Stock Exchange plc’s Main
Market for listed securities.
The Principal Activities and Business Overview of the Group are
set out within the Strategic Review.
The Company has no branches outside of the United Kingdom.
The Group’s activities in the Republic of Ireland are conducted
through subsidiaries incorporated and registered in that
jurisdiction. Details of subsidiary companies are provided on
pages188 to 189.
Results and Dividends
The Group’s retained profit after taxation for the year from all
operations amounted to £37.1 million (2024: £35.6 million).
The dividend comprises an interim dividend of 1.6 pence (2024:
1.3 pence) per Ordinary share and a proposed final dividend
of 3.2 pence (2024: 2.7 pence) per Ordinary share which will, if
approved by Shareholders at the AGM, be paid on 15 May 2026 to
shareholders on the register at the close of business on 17 April
2026. This total dividend of 4.8 pence per Ordinary share, subject
to the approval of Shareholders, will amount to a dividend
distribution for the year, based on the number of shares in issue
as at the date of this Report, of £18.4 million (2024: £16.5 million).
Details of the results for the year are shown on the Consolidated
Income Statement on page 127 and the business segment
information is given on page 144.
Generally, the trustee of the employee benefit trust, The Johnson
Service Group PLC Employee Share Trust (EST), which operates in
connection with the Company’s share incentive plans, waives its
right to receive dividends on any shares held by it. Further details
of the EST can be found on page 173. The value of the dividends
payable during the year ended 31 December 2025 that were
waived by the EST was £118 (2024: £289).
Share Capital
The Company has a single share class which is divided into
ordinary shares of 10 pence each. At the date of this Report,
377,792,229 ordinary shares of 10 pence each have been issued,
all of which are fully paid up or credited as fully paid. All of the
ordinary shares are admitted to the Equity Shares (Commercial
Companies) category of the FCA’s Official List and to trading on
London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market and may be traded
through the CREST system. The currency of the ordinary shares
is British pounds sterling. As at the date of this Report, the
Company held no ordinary shares in treasury.
The rights attaching to the ordinary shares are uniform in all
respects and they form a single class for all purposes, including
with respect to attendance and speaking and general meetings
of the Company, appointing proxies and exercising voting rights
and for all dividends and other distributions thereafter declared,
made or paid on the ordinary share capital of the Company.
As noted above, a waiver of dividend exists in respect of the
shares held by the EST as of 31 December 2025 and with respect
to future dividends. Details of the shares purchased by the EST
during the year are outlined in note 32 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements.
On a show of hands, every Shareholder who is present in person
or by proxy shall have one vote and, on a poll, every Shareholder
present in person or by proxy shall have one vote per ordinary
share provided that all sums due in respect of such share are fully
paid. The total number of voting rights attaching to the issued
ordinary share capital at the date of this Report is 377,792,229.
Directors’ Report
63
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
As the shares rank equally, none of them carry any special rights
with regards to control of the Company. Such equal rights apply
to shares acquired through any of the Company’s employee
share schemes and those shares so acquired carry no lesser
or greater rights than shares acquired in the Company in any
other way. Accordingly, provided that all sums due in respect
of such share are fully paid, there are no restrictions on voting
rights attaching to any shares, whether relating to the level of
shareholding or otherwise.
There are no specific restrictions on the transfer of securities
in the Company, other than as contained in the Articles of
Association, this paragraph and certain laws or regulations,
such as those related to insider dealing or market abuse, which
may be imposed from time to time. The Directors and certain
employees are required to obtain approval prior to dealing in
the Company’s securities. In addition, LTIP awards granted to
Directors in 2019 and thereafter are subject to a two-year post-
vesting holding period. During such holding period the recipient
may not normally dispose of any of the shares resulting from
the exercise of their LTIP award other than in certain limited
circumstances as set out in the LTIP scheme rules.
Changes in the Company’s share capital during 2025, including
the total issued share capital at the end of the year, details of
purchases and transfers by the EST during the year, together
with details of outstanding share options granted over unissued
capital, are set out in notes 29, 30 and 32 to the Consolidated
Financial Statements. Details relating to the Company’s share
buyback programmes in 2025 are set out below (Purchase of own
Shares).
Shareholders Authority for the Allotment of
Shares
Resolutions are sought at each AGM to permit the Company to
allot, subject to shareholder approval, new shares under specific
circumstances. They are a function of addressing funding or
share scheme needs and not a tool for employing anti-takeover
measures. Further details are given in the 2026 Notice of Annual
General Meeting.
Shareholders’ Authority for the Purchase by
the Company of its own Shares
At the 2025 Annual General Meeting, Shareholders authorised
the Company to make market purchases of up to a maximum
aggregate of 41,498,320 Ordinary shares, which represented
approximately 10% of the Company’s issued Ordinary share
capital on the latest practicable date prior to publication of
the 2025 Notice of Annual General Meeting. The minimum price
allowed for such purchases is 10 pence and the maximum is 105%
of the average of the middle market quotation of such shares
for the five business days immediately preceding the day of
purchase. Except for amending the maximum number of shares
subject to the authority, the Directors intend to seek renewal of
this authority, which is due to expire at the conclusion of the 2026
Annual General Meeting. Further details are given in the 2026
Notice of Annual General Meeting.
Purchase of own Shares
On 5 March 2025, the Company announced the commencement
of a share buyback programme with an aggregate market
value equivalent of up to £15.0 million (excluding expenses)
(‘March 2025 Share Buyback Programme’). Consistent with the
Company’s capital allocation policy, the purpose of the March
2025 Share Buyback Programme was to reduce the Company’s
share capital. Pursuant to the March 2025 Share Buyback
Programme, the Company entered into a non-discretionary
instruction with Investec Bank plc to purchase up to £15.0million
(excluding expenses) of the Company’s Ordinary shares of
10pence each and to make trading decisions under the March
2025 Share Buyback Programme independently of the Company
in accordance with certain pre-set parameters. On 4 June 2025,
the Company announced that it had extended the March 2025
Share Buyback Programme by a further £15.0 million (excluding
expenses), making £30.0 million in total (the ‘March 2025 Share
Buyback Programme Extension’).
The March 2025 Share Buyback Programme (as extended
pursuant to the March 2025 Share Buyback Programme
Extension) commenced on 5 March 2025 and ended on 28 August
2025 and, pursuant to which, during the year ended 31 December
2025, the Company bought back through market purchases
on the London Stock Exchange 21,074,153 Ordinary shares with
a nominal value of 10 pence each, representing 5.1 per cent of
the shares in issue prior to the commencement of the March
2025 Share Buyback Programme. The total consideration paid,
in connection with the March 2025 Share Buyback Programme
(as extended pursuant to the March 2025 Share Buyback
Programme Extension), including expenses, was £30.1 million,
all of which was expended during the financial year ended
31December 2025. All of the Ordinary shares bought back
pursuant to the March 2025 Share Buyback Programme were
cancelled.
On 2 September 2025, the Company announced the
commencement of another share buyback programme, with
an aggregate market value equivalent of up to £25.0million
(excluding expenses) (‘September 2025 Share Buyback
Programme’). Consistent with the Company’s capital allocation
policy, the purpose of the September 2025 Share Buyback
Programme was to reduce the Company’s share capital.
Pursuant to the September 2025 Share Buyback Programme,
the Company entered into a non-discretionary instruction with
Investec Bank plc to purchase up to £25.0 million (excluding
expenses) of the Company’s Ordinary shares of 10 pence each
and to make trading decisions under the September 2025
Share Buyback Programme independently of the Company in
accordance with certain pre-set parameters. The September
2025 Share Buyback Programme commenced on 2 September
2025 and ended on 7 January 2026. During the year ended
31December 2025, pursuant to the September 2025 Share
Buyback Programme, the Company bought back through market
purchases on the London Stock Exchange 17,219,208 Ordinary
shares with a nominal value of 10 pence each, representing
4.4 per cent of the shares in issue prior to the commencement
of the September 2025 Share Buyback Programme. The total
Directors’ Report
64 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
consideration paid, in connection with the September 2025
Share Buyback Programme, including expenses, was £25.1 million
of which £24.5 million was expended during the financial year
ended 31 December 2025. All of the Ordinary shares bought back
pursuant to the September 2025 Share Buyback Programme
were cancelled.
Substantial Shareholdings
The Company has received notifications of interests in its
ordinary share capital pursuant to Chapter 5 of the FCA’s
Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules (“DTR 5”). The
table below sets out the details contained in the most recent
notification received from each holder pursuant to DTR 5.1,
together with the date of that notification. The percentages
shown reflect the position as stated by the relevant holder in the
applicable notification.
Under DTR 5.1, a holder is required to notify the Company when
its holding of voting rights reaches, exceeds or falls below
specified notifiable thresholds (as defined in DTR 5.1). No further
notification is required unless and until a subsequent threshold
is crossed. Accordingly, the interests disclosed below may have
changed since the date of the relevant notification.
The table includes those holders who, based on the most recent
notifications received under DTR 5.1 and the Company’s analysis
of its share register as at 31 December 2025, are considered
to hold 3 per cent or more of the voting rights attaching to the
Company’s issued share capital. Where a holder has previously
notified the Company, pursuant to DTR 5.1, of an interest of 3 per
cent or more but the Company’s share register analysis indicates
that such holding has subsequently fallen below 3 per cent that
holder is not included in the table below.
Notifications received by the Company pursuant to DTR 5.1
are announced via a Regulatory Information Service and are
available on the Company’s website at www.jsg.com.
Shareholder
Number of
ordinary
shares
1
% of issued
share capital
2
Date of last
notification
Tweedy Browne
Company LLC 41,910,380 11.01 17/12/2025
Primestone
Capital LLP 43,356,269 10.95 10/09/2025
Artemis
Investment
Management
LLP 33,269,108 8.73 10/12/2025
FIL Limited 26,884,767 6.58 05/06/2025
Aberdeen
Group plc Below 5% Below 5 30/12/2025
BlackRock Inc 20,428,719 4.92 04/12/2024
Moneta Asset
Management
SAS 16,744,600 4.14 21/07/2025
Note 1: Represents the number of voting rights last notified to the Company by the
respective holder in accordance with DTR 5.1.
Note 2: Based on the total shares held in the Company as at the notification date.
In the period from 31 December 2025 up to and including 2 March
2026, being the latest date practicable before publication of this
Report, the Company has received the following notifications,
pursuant to DTR 5.1:
On the 12 January 2026, the Company received notification
from Moneta Asset Management SAS that the number
of ordinary shares they hold at the date of notification is
14,931,083 shares, being 3.95% of the issued share capital at
the time of notification.
On the 12 February 2026, the Company received notification
from Primestone Capital LLP that the number of ordinary
shares they hold at the date of notification is 37,733,221
shares, being 9.99% of the issued share capital at the time of
notification.
Employee Share Trust
The Johnson Service Group PLC Employee Share Trust (EST) was
established on 20 May 1997 in connection with the Company’s
share incentive plans. Details of employee equity incentive plans
are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 94
to 115. As at 31 December 2025, the trustees of the EST held 2,947
(2024: 9,024) shares of the Company.
Awards Under Employee Share Schemes
Details of awards made during the year and held by executive
directors as at 31 December 2025 are disclosed in the Directors
Remuneration Report on pages 108 to 110. Details of employee
equity incentive plans and grants made during the year ended
31 December 2025, and extant awards held by employees, are
disclosed in the consolidated financial statements in note30.
Significant agreements
The Company is not a party to significant agreements which
take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control
following a takeover bid apart from a number of credit facilities
with its existing lenders. The total amount owing under such
credit facilities as of 31 December 2025 is shown in note22 to
the Consolidated Financial Statements. These agreements
contain clauses such that, in the event of a change of control,
the Company and its lenders shall enter into negotiations for
no more than 30 days from the date of change of control of the
Company and if no agreement is reached by the end of such
30days, then five days later the total outstanding borrowings
shall become immediately due and payable.
The rules of the Company’s incentive plans contain clauses
relating to a change of control resulting from a takeover and,
in such an event, awards would vest early. The proportion of
the awards which would vest would be determined by the
Remuneration Committee taking into account, among other
factors, the extent to which any applicable performance targets
have been satisfied at that time and the proportion of the
normal vesting period that has elapsed. Details of employee
equity incentive plans and grants made during the year ended
31 December 2025, and extant awards held by employees, are
disclosed in the Consolidated Financial Statements in note30.
The Company is not aware of any other agreements with change
of control provisions that are considered to be significant in
terms of their potential impact to the business. There are no
significant agreements or contracts in place with any Group
Company and a Director of the Company or a major shareholder.
Directors’ Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
65
Acquisitions and Discontinued Operations
Details of acquisitions and discontinued operations during the
current and preceding year are given in notes 34 and 35 to the
Consolidated Financial Statements.
Post-balance Sheet Events
There were no events occurring after the balance sheet date
that require disclosing in accordance with paragraph 72A of
Schedule1 of the Large and Medium Sized Companies and
Groups Regulations.
Directors
The names of the members of the Board and their biographical
details are set out on pages 60 to 61. With the exception of (i)
Yvonne Monaghan, who stepped down as CFO of the Company
and retired from the Board on 1 October 2025; and (ii) Ryan
Govender, who was appointed as CFO of the Company and to the
Board on 1 October 2025, they all held office throughout the year
and up to the date of approving this Report.
The appointment and replacement of Directors of the Company
is governed by its Articles of Association, the UK Corporate
Governance Code, the Companies Act and related legislation.
Directors can be appointed by ordinary resolution at a general
meeting or by the Board. If a Director is appointed by the Board,
such Director will hold office until the next AGM and shall then
be eligible for election at that meeting. All Directors who wish to
continue to serve are subject to annual election by shareholders
at the AGM in line with the provisions of the UK Corporate
Governance Code.
The Directors are responsible for the strategic management of
the Company and their powers to do so are determined by the
provisions of the Companies Act, related legislation and the
Company’s Articles of Association.
Directors’ Interests
Share Capital
The terms of the Directors’ service agreements or letters of
appointment and the interests of the Directors who held office
during the financial year ended 31 December 2025, together
with the interests of their close family, in the shares and share
awards of the Company at the commencement or, if later, date of
appointment, and close of the financial year, in respect of which
transactions are notifiable to the Company and the FCA under
Article 19 of the UK Market Abuse Regulation, are disclosed in the
Directors’ Remuneration Report.
Details of the Company’s interest in its own shares are disclosed
in note 32 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Contracts
Other than the Directors’ service agreements or letters of
appointment, none of the Directors of the Company had a
personal interest in any business transactions of the Company or
its subsidiaries.
Conflicts of Interest
Under the Companies Act and the provisions of the Company’s
Articles of Association, the Board is required to consider
potential conflicts of interest. The Company has established
formal procedures and policies for the disclosure and review
of any conflicts, or potential conflicts, of interest, which the
Directors may have and for the authorisation of such conflict
matters by the Board. To this end, the Board considers and, if
appropriate, authorises any conflicts, or potential conflicts, of
interest as they arise. New Directors are required to declare any
conflicts, or potential conflicts, of interest to the Board following
his or her appointment. The Board believes that the procedures
established to deal with conflicts of interests are operating
effectively.
Directors’ Indemnity
In accordance with the Articles of Association and to the extent
permitted by law, the Directors are granted an indemnity
from the Company in respect of certain liabilities incurred in
connection with their office. In respect of those matters for which
the Directors may not be indemnified, the Company maintained
a directors’ and officers’ liability third party insurance policy
throughout the financial year and up to the date of approval
of these financial statements. Neither the indemnity nor the
insurance provides cover in the event that a Director is proven
to have acted dishonestly or fraudulently. No claim was made
under this provision during the year.
Articles of Association
The Articles of Association set out the internal regulation of the
Company and cover such matters as the rights of shareholders,
the appointment or removal of Directors and the conduct of the
Board and general meetings. Copies are available upon request
from the Company Secretary and are available at the Company’s
AGM. Subject to certain limited exceptions, the Company’s
Articles of Association may only be amended by Special
Resolution at a general meeting of the Shareholders.
Charitable Donations
Details of charitable donations during the current and preceding
financial year are set out within the report on Sustainability.
Political Donations
It is the Company’s policy not to make political donations. The
Directors confirm that no donations for political purposes were
made during the year (2024: £nil).
Independent Auditor
The external auditor to the Company, Grant Thornton UK LLP, has
indicated its willingness to continue in office. In accordance with
the recommendation of the Audit Committee, as disclosed on
page 88, and as required by Section 489 of the Companies Act,
a resolution to reappoint Grant Thornton UK LLP as the external
auditor to the Company will be proposed at the Annual General
Meeting.
Statement of Disclosure of
InformationtoAuditors
The Directors’ Responsibilities Statement (including the Directors
statement of disclosure of information to auditors) is on page60
and is incorporated into this Directors’ Report by reference.
Our People
Information about the Group’s employees, employment
of disabled persons policies and employment practices is
contained within the report on Sustainability on pages 36
to 37. With regard to existing team members and those who
may become disabled, the Group’s policy is to examine ways
and means to provide continuing employment under the
existing terms and conditions and to provide training and
career development, including promotion, where appropriate.
When considering recruitment, training, career development,
promotion or any other aspect of employment, we strive to
ensure that no colleague or job applicant is discriminated
against, either directly or indirectly, on the grounds of disability.
Directors’ Report
Continued >
66 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Report
Continued >
Information on the employee share schemes is in the Directors’
Remuneration Report on pages 108 to 110. The steps by the
Company taken to inform, engage and consult with employees is
outlined in page 37 and in the Section 172 statement on page 17.
Statement on Engagement with
Stakeholders
The success of our strategy is reliant on the support and
commitment of all our stakeholders. Their interests are important
to us and we are committed to maintaining strong, positive
relationships with them, built on a foundation of mutual
respect, trust and understanding. The Group’s culture, values
and behaviours support open and honest engagement with its
stakeholders. High standards of ethical behaviour and probity
are maintained in all the Company’s business dealings. The table
on page 16 and the section 172(1) statement on page 17 provide
a high-level overview of how we engage with our stakeholders.
For further information on how the Company fosters business
relationships and how the directors have had regard to
stakeholders’ interests in their principal decision-making
processes, see pages 74 to 75.
Policy on Payment to Suppliers
Prompt Payment Code
The Company and its subsidiaries fully support the standards
set out within the Prompt Payment Code (‘PPC’) in respect of all
suppliers. The PPC sets standards for payment practices and
best practice and is administered by the Chartered Institute
of Credit Management. The main features of the PPC are that
payment terms are agreed at the outset of a transaction and are
adhered to; that there is a clear and consistent policy that bills
will be paid in accordance with the contract; and that there are
no alterations to payment terms without prior agreement.
Payment Practice Reporting
Regulations made under Section 3 of the Small Business,
Enterprise and Employment Act 2015 introduced a requirement
on the UK’s largest companies to report on a half-yearly
basis their payment practices, policies and performance. The
requirement to report is based upon a company having annual
revenue of £36.0 million or more; the Parent Company has
revenue of £nil hence the Group has reported under its main
trading subsidiary, Johnsons Textile Services Limited.
Johnsons Textile Services Limited was required to publish
supplier payment information for the six months ended 30
June 2025 and for the six months ended 31 December 2025. The
average time taken to pay invoices in each of those periods was
55 days and 49 days, respectively. The comparative figures for
2024 were 54 days and 52 days, respectively. Johnsons Textile
Services Limited trades through a number of brands, each of
which have varying payment terms with their suppliers, however,
such terms typically range from 14 days through to 60 days.
Further information was published through an online
service provided by the Government and can be viewed by
visiting https://check-payment-practices.service.gov.uk/
company/00464645/reports.
Dispute Resolution Process
We seek to resolve any issues in the first instance between the
most relevant representatives of our Company and the supplier.
If the matter cannot be resolved, it may then be escalated to
senior members of both the supplier and ourselves. We are
very proud to have built up longstanding relationships with a
significant proportion of our suppliers and will always endeavour
to work in a collaborative manner with them in order to resolve
any disputes that may arise. Once resolved, we would aim to pay
the supplier within the agreed contractual terms between us
or, if the contractual due date has passed, at the next available
opportunity.
Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting
(SECR)
The Group is required to report, in accordance with the
Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships
(Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018, its energy use and
carbon emissions for the financial year ended 31 December 2025.
As allowed by the legislation, and in order to allow for sufficient
time to compile the data and complete the reporting, the annual
period used to calculate energy use and emissions was set as the
12 months ending 30 September 2025.
Relevant disclosures are provided on pages 32 to 35.
Energy Use and Greenhouse Gas emissions
(‘GHG)
Information about the Group’s energy use, GHGs and
methodologies used for the calculations are given in the report
on Sustainability pages 32 to 35.
Task Force on Climate-Related Financial
Disclosures (‘TCFD’)
The climate-related financial disclosures consistent with TCFD
recommendations are in the report on Sustainability on pages44
to 47.
Financial Risk Management
The Directors acknowledge that the Group’s activities expose it
to a variety of financial risks, including interest rate risk, credit
risk and liquidity risk. The Group’s overall risk management
programme focuses on the unpredictability of financial markets
and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s
financial performance. Risk management is carried out centrally
under policies approved by the Board. Further details are set out
within the Audit Committee Report on pages 88 to 89.
Half Yearly Reporting
The Company no longer publishes half yearly reports for
individual circulation to Shareholders. Information that would
normally be included in a half yearly report is made available on
the Company’s website at www.jsg.com.
Annual Report & Accounts and compliance
withUK Listing Rule (‘UKLR’) 6.6.4R
The Annual Report & Accounts is comprised of the following
sections: Strategic Report (pages 6 to 56); Corporate Governance
(including the Directors’ Report and Directors’ Remuneration
Report) (pages 60 to 115); Group Financial Statements (pages118
to 175); Company Financial Statements (pages178 to 189); and
Shareholder Information (including Notice of AGM) (pages191
to 204). The Strategic Report on pages 6 to 56 provides an
overview of the development and performance of the Company’s
business and its position at the end of the financial year ended
31December 2025. The Strategic Report also outlines any
important events since the end of the financial year and also
likely future developments in the business of the Company and
Group.
For the purposes of compliance with DTR 4.1.5 R (2) and DTR 4.1.8
R, the required content of the management report can be found
in the Strategic Report and the Corporate Governance section
of this Report (including this Directors’ Report), incorporated by
reference.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
67
Directors’ Report
Continued >
For the purposes of UKLR 6.6.4 R, the information required to be disclosed by UKLR 6.6.1 R can be found in the table below.
1. Amount of interest capitalised Not applicable
2. Any information required by UKLR
6.2.23R
Not applicable
3. Details of long-term incentive schemes Directors’ Remuneration Report (pages 94 to 115)
4. Details of any director’s waiver of, or
agreement to waive, any emoluments or
future emoluments
Not applicable
5. Details of any non-preemptive
allotments for cash of equity securities
Note 32 of the Consolidated Financial Statements
6. Information required by (5) above
for any unlisted major subsidiary
undertaking of the Company
Not applicable
7. Where the company is a subsidiary
undertaking, details of a parent
undertaking’s participation in any
placing made during the period under
review
Not applicable
8. Details of any contract of significance of
the Company or a subsidiary in which a
director is or was materially interested
or to which a controlling shareholder
was a party
Directors’ Report (Directors’ Interests) (page 65)
9. Details of any contract for the
provision of services to the company
or subsidiaries by a controlling
shareholder
Not applicable
10. Details of any arrangement where a
shareholder has waived or agreed to
waive any current or future dividends
Directors’ Report (Results and Dividends) (page 62)
11. Agreements with controlling
shareholders
Not applicable
Corporate Governance Statement
In compliance with the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules (DTR) 7.2.1, the disclosures required by the DTR are set out in
this Directors’ Report on pages 62 to 68, the Strategic Report on pages 6 to 56, and in the Corporate Governance Report on pages70 to
83 which are deemed to be incorporated into this section of the Directors’ Report by reference.
2026 Annual General Meeting
The Directors intend that the 2026 Annual General Meeting (the ‘Meeting’ or the ‘AGM) of Johnson Service Group PLC (the ‘Company’)
will be held at the DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel & Spa Chester, Warrington Road, Hoole, Chester, CH2 3PD on Thursday 7 May 2026 at
11:00am.
As we did last year, and in order to reduce the Company’s environmental impact, our intention is to once again remove paper from the
voting process as far as possible. As a result, Shareholders will not receive a hard copy form of proxy for the AGM but will instead be
able to register their vote electronically.
An explanation of the resolutions to be proposed at the Meeting, together with details on electronic voting, is included in the Notice of
Annual General Meeting accompanying this Annual Report.
Going Concern
Background and Summary
After careful assessment, the Directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing these financial statements. The process and
key judgments in coming to this conclusion are set out below. The going concern status of the Company is intrinsically linked to that of
the Group.
The Group’s business activities, together with details of the financial position of the Group, its cash flows, liquidity position and
borrowing facilities, are described in the Operating and Financial Reviews.
The Group’s business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and position are set out
in the Strategic Review, Chair’s Statement and Chief Executive’s Operating Review. The financial position of the Group, its cash flows,
liquidity position and borrowing facilities are described in the Financial Review. In addition, note 27 to the Consolidated Financial
Statements includes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing its capital, its financial risk management objectives,
details of its financial instruments and hedging activities, and its exposure to credit risk and liquidity risk.
68 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Going Concern Assessment
Cash Flows, Covenants and Stress Testing
For the purposes of the going concern assessment, the Directors
have prepared monthly cash flow projections for the period to
30 June 2027 (the assessment period). The Directors consider this
to be a reasonable period for the going concern assessment as
it enables us to consider the potential impact of macroeconomic
and geopolitical factors over an extended period. The cash
flow projections show that the Group has significant headroom
against its committed facilities and can meet its financial
covenant obligations.
The Group has also performed a reverse stress test against the
base monthly cash flow projections referred to above in order to
determine the performance level that would result in a reduction
in headroom against its committed facilities to nil or a breach
of its covenants. Headroom on the Group’s committed facilities
would reduce to nil in the event that adjusted operating profit
reduced to approximately 75% of 2025 levels. The Directors do not
consider this scenario to be plausible.
As a further stress test, the Group considered the impact of
increasing interest rates. The Directors do not consider the
magnitude of the increase in interest rates that would be
required in order for a covenant to be breached to be plausible.
The Group has also considered the impact of a more modest
increase in interest rates alongside the reduction required in
adjusted operating profit to cause a breach in the interest cover
covenant. Again, the Directors do not consider such a scenario to
beplausible.
Each of the stress tests assume no mitigating actions are
taken. Mitigating actions available to the Group, should they
be required, include reductions in discretionary expenditure,
particularly that of a capital nature, and ceasing dividend
payments.
Liquidity
The Group has access to a committed Revolving Credit Facility
of £135.0 million (the ‘Facility) which matures in August 2027.
Whilst the existing facility provides sufficient liquidity for current
commitments, we have commenced discussions with our existing
lenders to refinance the facility, having regard to the future
deployment of capital and our target leverage of 1.0 to 1.5 times,
and to extend its tenure.
Going Concern Statement
After considering the monthly cash flow projections, the stress
tests and the facilities available to the Group and Company, the
Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Group and
Company have adequate resources for their operational needs,
will remain in compliance with the financial covenants set out
in the bank facility agreement and will continue in operation
for at least the period to 30 June 2027. Accordingly, and having
reassessed the principal risks and uncertainties, the Directors
considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in
preparing the Group and Company financial statements.
Viability Statement
A statement on the future prospects of the Group is included
within the Strategic Review.
By order of the Board
Christopher Clarkson
Company Secretary
2 March 2026
Johnson Service Group PLC
Registered in England and Wales No.523335
Directors’ Report
Continued >
69
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities in Respect of the
Financial Statements
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Strategic Report,
Directors’ Report, the Directors’ Remuneration Report and the
financial statements in accordance with applicable law and
regulations.
Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial
statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors
have to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance
with UK-adopted international accounting standards and have
elected to prepare the Parent Company financial statements in
accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting
Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable
law) including FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’. Under
company law the Directors must not approve the financial
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair
view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Parent Company
and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period.
In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are required
to:
select suitable accounting policies and then apply them
consistently;
make judgments and accounting estimates that are
reasonable and prudent;
for the Group financial statements state whether applicable
UK-adopted international accounting standards have been
followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and
explained in the financial statements; and
for the Parent Company financial statements state whether
applicable UK accounting standards have been followed,
subject to any material departures disclosed and explained
in the financial statements.
The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting
records that are sufficient to show and explain the Group and
the Parent Company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable
accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and the
Parent Company and enable them to ensure that the financial
statements and Director’s Remuneration Report comply with the
Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for safeguarding
the assets of the Group and the Parent Company and hence
for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of
fraud and other irregularities.
The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity
of the corporate and financial information included on the
Group’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.
The Directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report in
accordance with applicable law and regulations. Having taken
advice from the Audit Committee, the Directors consider that the
Annual Report and the financial statements, taken as a whole,
provides the information necessary to assess the Group and the
Parent Company’s performance, business model and strategy
and is fair, balanced and understandable.
To the best of our knowledge:
the Group financial statements, prepared in accordance
with UK-adopted international accounting standards, and
the Parent Company financial statements, prepared in
accordance with UK accounting standards give a true and
fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit
or loss of the Parent Company and the undertakings included
in the consolidation, taken as a whole; and
the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report include a
fair review of the development and performance of the
business and the position of the Parent Company and the
undertakings included in the consolidation, taken as a
whole, together with a description of the principal risks and
uncertainties that they face.
The Directors confirm that:
so far as each Director is aware, there is no relevant audit
information of which the Group and the Parent Company’s
auditor is unaware; and
the Directors have taken all the steps that they ought to
have taken as a Director in order to make themselves aware
of any relevant audit information and to establish that the
Group and the Parent Company’s auditor is aware of that
information.
On behalf of the Board
Peter Egan Ryan Govender
Chief Executive Officer Chief Financial Officer
2 March 2026 2 March 2026
Directors’ Report
Continued >
70 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Legislative Overview
As a company having the whole of its ordinary shares admitted
to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies) Category of the
Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on
London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market for listed securities,
the Company is required to adopt and report the extent of
its compliance with the Financial Reporting Council’s 2024 UK
Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’).
The Code, which can be found on the Financial Reporting
Council’s website at www.frc.org.uk, is the product of extensive
consultation and places emphasis on businesses establishing
a corporate culture that is aligned with the company purpose
and business strategy and which promotes integrity and values
diversity. The Code is divided into five sections, as follows:
1) Board Leadership and Company Purpose
2) Division of Responsibilities
3) Composition, Succession and Evaluation
4) Audit, Risk and Internal Control
5) Remuneration
Each of the above sections contain an overriding set of
Principles’ supported by more detailed ‘Provisions’.
This Corporate Governance Report describes how the Company
has applied the Principles and complied with the relevant
Provisions as set out in the Code that were in force for the year
under review. To the extent necessary, certain information is
incorporated into this Report by reference.
Our Governance Structure
Membership comprises the
Non‑Executive Directors
Chair: Chris Girling
Key objectives:
management of the Group’s
system of internal control,
business risks and related
compliance activities
to review the activity and
performance of the internal
audit function and external
auditors
to provide effective governance
over the Group’s financial results
Audit Committee Nomination Committee Remuneration Committee
Group Management Board
Sustainability Committee Disclosure Committee
Membership comprises the Chair
and Non‑Executive Directors
Chair: Jock Lennox
Key objectives:
to ensure the Board comprises
individuals with the necessary
skills, knowledge and experience
to give consideration to
succession planning and the
leadership needs of the Group
Membership comprises the Chair
and Non‑Executive Directors
Chair: Kirsty Homer
Key objectives:
to assess and make
recommendations to the Board
on the policy of executive
remuneration
Membership comprises the two Executive Directors, divisional Managing
Directors and Group function heads
Chair: Peter Egan
Key objectives:
implementation of the Board’s strategy
monitoring financial and competitive performance
business development and projects
succession planning across the business
Key objectives:
leadership, operation and governance of
the Board
setting the agenda and direction for the
Board
Chair – Jock Lennox
Membership currently comprises the Chair, two Executive Directors and three
independent Non‑Executive Directors (including the Senior Independent Director)
Chair: Jock Lennox
Key objectives:
responsible for the overall conduct of the Group’s business
setting the Group’s strategy
The Board of Johnson Service Group PLC
Membership comprises the Group
Management Board and the Head
of Sustainability
Chair: Peter Egan
Key objectives:
to assist the Board in the
discharge of its duties relating
to the Group’s corporate and
societal obligations and its
reputations as a responsible
corporate citizen
Chair: Peter Egan
Key objectives:
review procedures, systems and
controls for identification and
treatment of inside information
determine, taking external
advice as necessary, when
information constitutes inside
information, decide on the need
and timing of announcements
(including any delays), and
ensure compliance with FCA
notification requirements
approve, monitor, and review
the Company’s disclosure policy,
procedures, and announcements
– including responses to
leaks, rumours, and market
developments
Chief Executive Officer
Peter Egan
Key objectives:
responsible for the overall
management of the business
responsible for the
implementation of strategy
and policy
Corporate Governance Report
“We are committed to high standards of corporate governance which we
consider are critical to business integrity and to maintaining investors’
trust in us. We expect all our directors, employees and suppliers to act
with honesty, integrity and fairness. Our business principles set out the
standards we set ourselves to ensure we operate lawfully, with integrity
and with respect for others.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
71
Compliance with the Code
The Company has applied the Principles and complied with the
Provisions of the Code that were in force throughout the year
ended 31 December 2025, other than in relation to the following:
Provision Explanation
36 Post-employment shareholding requirement
As at 31 December 2025, although the Company has,
for LTIPs granted in 2019 and thereafter, had in place a
two-year post-vesting holding period for LTIPs granted
to Executive Directors it had not introduced a formal
post-employment shareholding requirement for the
Executive Directors.
However, as part of the Company’s updated Directors
Remuneration Policy, the Company is introducing
a post-employment shareholding requirement for
Executive Directors. Upon stepping down from the
Board, Executive Directors will be required to maintain
a shareholding equivalent to:
100 per cent of their in-employment requirement
for the first year (or the shareholding upon
stepping down if lower); and
50 per cent of their in-employment requirement for
the second year (or 50 per cent of the shareholding
upon stepping down if lower).
This is in addition to the two-year post-vesting
holding period that has already been implemented.
Further details relating to the Company’s Directors’
Remuneration Policy can be found on pages 98 to 105.
39 Pensions
As at 31 December 2025, the Company had not yet
fully aligned the employer pension contribution rate
for all Executive Directors with the employer pension
contribution rate available to the majority of the
Group’s wider UK workforce. However, this alignment
was achieved with effect from 1 January 2026.
Throughout the financial year ended 31 December
2025, the CEO’s entitlement was capped at the
cash value of his 2019 entitlement such that, for
2025, this equated to an employer contribution
rate of 8.6 per cent of the CEO’s salary (2024:
8.8 per cent). With effect from 1 January 2026,
the CEO’s employer’s pension contribution was
reduced to 6% of salary in line with the rate
available to the majority of the Group’s wider UK
workforce (approximately 6% of salary).
Upon his appointment as CFO, on 1 October 2025,
the applicable employer pension contribution
rate for Ryan Govender was 6% of salary, being
immediately in line with the rate available to
the majority of the Group’s wider UK workforce
(approximately 6% of salary).
The employer pension contribution rate for the
former CFO, Yvonne Monaghan, reduced to 15 per
cent of base salary with effect from 1 January 2023;
then reduced to 12 per cent of base salary with
effect from 1 January 2024; and then reduced to 9
per cent of base salary with effect from 1 January
2025.
For all new executive appointments to the Board,
the employer pension contribution rate will be
aligned with that available to the majority of the
Group’s wider UK workforce (currently 6 per cent).
Section 1: Board Leadership & Company
Purpose
Principles
A. A successful company is led by an effective and
entrepreneurial board, whose role is to promote
the long-term sustainable success of the company,
generating value for shareholders and contributing
to wider society. The board should ensure that the
necessary resources, policies and practices are in place
for the company to meet its objectives and measure
performance against them.
B. The board should establish the company’s purpose,
values and strategy, and satisfy itself that these and its
culture are aligned. All directors must act with integrity,
lead by example and promote the desired culture.
C. Governance reporting should focus on board decisions
and their outcomes in the context of the company’s
strategy and objectives. Where the board reports on
departures from the Code’s provisions, it should provide
a clear explanation.
D. In order for the company to meet its responsibilities
to shareholders and stakeholders, the board should
ensure effective engagement with, and encourage
participation from, these parties.
E. The board should ensure that workforce policies and
practices are consistent with the company’s values
and support its long-term sustainable success. The
workforce should be able to raise any matters of
concern.
Overview of the Board
The Board comprises the Non-Executive Chair, two Executive
Directors and as at 31 December 2025 three Independent
Non-Executive Directors and has overall responsibility for the
performance and long-term sustainable success of the Group.
Operating in an effective and entrepreneurial spirit, the Board
is responsible for health and safety, leadership, agreeing the
strategic direction of the Group, sustainability, promoting high
standards of internal control, risk management and corporate
governance, setting the budget, overseeing performance and
discharging certain legal responsibilities. The Board also plays a
key role in developing and monitoring our culture, our values, our
brand and our reputation.
The Board has spent time in the business both collectively
and as individuals, exploring specific business areas through
presentations, meetings and dialogue with colleagues and our
stakeholders. Throughout the year, the Board, supported by its
Committees, has covered a broad range of topics to ensure that
we continually review and challenge matters of importance to
our stakeholders.
Further details on the Group’s mission, vision, values, targets and
culture, together with information on our strategy and business
model, are set out within the Strategic Report on pages 6 to 56.
Specific Responsibilities of the Board
The Board, in addition to routine consideration of both financial
and operational matters, determines the strategic direction
of the Group. The Board has a formal schedule of matters
specifically reserved for its decision which can only be amended
by the Board itself.
The specific responsibilities reserved for the Board include:
development and approval of the Group’s long-term
objectives, overall strategy, mission, vision, values and
targets;
Corporate Governance Report
72 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
health and safety matters;
sustainability matters;
approval of the annual budget;
monitoring of operational and financial performance against plans and budgets;
approval of major acquisitions, disposals and capital expenditure;
approval of any changes to the capital structure of the Group;
design and approval of dividend policy;
approval of appointments to the Board and of the Company Secretary;
consideration of succession planning for key members of the management team; and
determining the terms of reference for the Board committees.
Roles in the Boardroom
Non-Executive Chair Senior Independent Non-Executive Director
Jock Lennox
Leads the Board and ensures its overall effectiveness in
discharging its duties
shapes the culture in the boardroom and promotes
openness, challenge and debate
sets the agenda for Board meetings, focusing on
strategy, performance, value creation, risk management,
culture, stakeholders and accountability
chairs meetings ensuring there is timely information flow
before meetings and adequate time for discussion and
debate
fosters relationships based on trust, mutual respect and
open communication inside and outside the boardroom
leads relations with major shareholders in order to
understand their views on governance and performance
against strategy
Chris Girling
Provides a sounding board for the Chair and serves as an
intermediary for other directors and shareholders
provides the Chair with support in the delivery of objectives,
where necessary
works closely with the Nomination Committee, leads the
process for the evaluation of the Chair and ensures orderly
succession of the Chair’s role
acts as an alternative contact for shareholders, providing a
means of raising concerns other than with the Chair or senior
management
Independent Non-Executive Directors Executive Directors
Chris Girling
Nicola Keach
Kirsty Homer
Ensure that no individual or small group of individuals can
dominate the Board’s decision making
independent non-executive directors meeting the
independence criteria set out in the Code (excluding the
chair), currently comprise 50% of Board membership
provide constructive challenge, give strategic guidance,
offer specialist advice and hold executive management
to account
Peter Egan (CEO)
Ryan Govender (CFO) (Appointed 1 October 2025)
Yvonne Monaghan (Former CFO) (Resigned 1 October 2025)
Lead the implementation of the Group’s strategy set by the Board
the Group CEO is responsible for delivering the strategy and
the overall management of the Group
the Group CEO leads the Group Management Board and
ensures its effectiveness in managing the overall operations
and resources of the Group
the executive directors provide information and presentations
to the Board and participate in Board discussions regarding
Group management, financial and operational matters
Designated Non-Executive Director for Workforce
Engagement Company Secretary
Kirsty Homer
Provides an effective engagement mechanism for the Board
to understand the views of the workforce
brings the views and experiences of the workforce into
the boardroom
enables the Board to consider the views of the workforce
in its discussions and decision making
Christopher Clarkson
Supports the Chair and ensures directors have access to the
information they need to perform their roles
provides a channel for Board and committee communications
and provides a link between the Board and management
advises the Board on corporate governance matters and
supports the Board in applying the Code and complying with
other statutory and regulatory requirements
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
73
Key Board Activities in the Year
Key activities of the Board during 2025 included, inter alia:
ongoing monitoring of the Group’s Health and Safety
performance;
regular review, and formal approval in February and August,
of the Group’s risk assessment processes and principal risks
and uncertainties;
the review and approval of the half year and full year
financial statements;
the review and approval of major capital and investment
projects;
succession planning, including consideration and approval
of the appointment of Ryan Govender as the Chief Financial
Officer in succession to Yvonne Monaghan;
consideration and approval of banking facility upsize from
£120.0m to £135.0m;
consideration and approval of the change of the Company’s
listing venue from AIM to the Equity Shares (Commercial
Companies) Category of the Official List of the Financial
Conduct Authority and to trading on London Stock Exchange
plc’s Main Market for listed securities;
consideration and approval of the launch of a £30.0
million (excluding expenses) share buyback programme
in March and, subsequently, the launch of a further £25.0
million (excluding expenses) share buyback programme in
September;
consideration and recommendation of a final dividend, for
the financial year ended 31 December 2024, of 2.7 pence per
Ordinary Share, paid in May 2025;
consideration and approval of an interim dividend of 1.6
pence per Ordinary share, paid in November 2025; and
consideration and approval of the 2026 – 2028 Budget.
Insight into the Boardroom
The following is a summary of some of the significant matters
considered by the Board at certain of its meetings throughout
the year:
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
January February/March April/May
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and
Environmental matters
CEO’s trading and operational
review (incl. Business updates)
M&A and strategy update
Financial performance
Sustainability performance
update
Insurance programme review
Board Improvement Plan – Status
Update
Corporate Governance Code
Compliance Review
Investment Appraisals
Empire Linen – Accession to Bank
Facilities
Approval of Modern Slavery
Statement
Approval of Whistleblowing
Policy
Approval of Group Anti-Sexual
Harassment Policy
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and Environmental matters
CEO’s trading and operational review
(incl.Business updates)
M&A update
Sustainability matters (incl. FY24
performance and FY25 targets; FY24 Annual
Report disclosures (incl. Scope 3 and TCFD
Reporting); CSRD and decarbonisation)
Employee engagement
Financial performance (incl. FY24 results)
and appointment of sub-committee re: FY24
final results
Going concern and viability assessment
Listing venue
Share buyback
CFO Succession
Investor analysis
Biannual major risk assessment
Draft final results announcement
Draft Annual Report and Accounts
Draft Investor Presentation
Draft AGM Notice
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and Environmental
matters
CEO’s trading and operational review
(incl. Business updates)
Board Training (Legal & NOMAD
update)
Listing venue
M&A and strategy update
Employee engagement
Financial performance
Investor feedback and analysis
re:FY24 results
Provisional AGM Voting
Institutional Feedback
AGM
June July/August/September October
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and
Environmental matters
CEO’s trading and operational
review (incl. Business Updates)
Listing venue
Share buyback
M&A update
IT Strategy and Cyber Security
Investment Appraisal
Bank Facility limit extension
Employee engagement
Financial performance
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and Environmental matters
CEO’s trading and operational review
(incl.Business updates)
Transition to Main Market (incl. Prospectus
and transaction documents)
M&A and strategy update
Sustainability update and Sustainability
Report
Employee Engagement
Financial performance (incl. FY25
interim results and interim dividend)
and appointment of sub-committee re:
FY25interim results
Share buyback
Investor analysis
Biannual major risk assessment
Draft interim results announcement
Going concern assessment
Minutes/matters arising
Financial performance
Health & Safety and Environmental
matters
CEO’s trading and operational review
(incl. Business updates)
Succession planning
Capex approvals
M&A update
Strategy update
Board Performance Review Investor
analysis
74 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Consideration of Stakeholder Interests
The examples below give an insight into how the Board had regard for the interests of its stakeholders in certain of its principal
decision-making processes during the year:
Principal Decision: Sustainability and Climate Change
Stakeholders: Employees, Customers, Suppliers, Communities, Shareholders
The Board recognises the seriousness of the implications of climate change and sustainability matters for the Group, its stakeholders
and the planet, and has taken the decision to make this a central part of the Board’s deliberations and oversight. During the year, the
Board approved for publication the Group’s fourth Sustainability report. The Board firmly believes that embedding a best-in-class
sustainability programme throughout our operations will help position us as a leader in responding to the challenges faced by the
textile services industry and prove to be a differentiator for our customers.
Principal Decision: Change of Listing venue from AIM to Main Market
Stakeholders: Employees, Customers, Suppliers, Communities, Shareholders
On 4 March 2025, the Board announced that it was considering a move to the Main Market following engagement with the Company’s
largest Shareholders (the “Consultation”). On balance, the Consultation clearly showed support for JSG to proceed to a Main Market
listing from the majority of those Shareholders consulted. In addition to the Consultation, and being cognisant that AIM had served
the Company well over recent years, the Board considered, in detail, the rationale for a move-up from AIM to the Main Market,
including: access to deeper pools of capital and a broader range of investors, including more international funds, to support the
Group’s growth ambitions; a move-up to Main Market typically increasing liquidity in trading of the Company’s shares; the Main
Market being considered a higher profile trading venue; and as AIM was, and is, always intended to be a growth market and, given the
market capitalisation of the Company, a move-up to the Main Market being the natural progression. The Board also discussed that,
following admission to the Main Market, it was anticipated that the Company’s Ordinary Shares would meet the market capitalisation
and liquidity thresholds to be considered for inclusion in FTSE indices at FTSE’s September 2025 quarterly review. Following due and
careful consideration, and with reference to the factors set out in Section 172(1) of the Companies Act 2006, the Board concluded that
the proposed move to a Main Market listing would promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole.
Accordingly, on 4 June 2025, the Company announced its intention to move from trading on AIM to a Main Market listing and, following
this, on 1 August 2025, the Company’s ordinary shares were simultaneously admitted to trading on the Main Market and cancelled from
trading on AIM.
Principal Decision: Interim Dividend
Stakeholders: Shareholders
In September 2025, and in line with the Company’s progressive dividend policy, the Board approved an interim dividend of 1.6 pence
per Ordinary share which was paid on 4 November 2025. In reaching this decision, the Board carefully considered a number of factors
including the available profit, the importance of a dividend to the Company’s shareholders and the Board’s intention to maintain
dividend cover of 2.5 times and in line with the Company’s capital allocation policy.
Principal Decision: Share Buyback
Stakeholders: Shareholders
The Group’s objective is to employ a disciplined approach to investment, returns and capital efficiency to deliver sustainable
compounding growth whilst also maintaining a strong balance sheet. Against this backdrop, in March 2025, the Company announced
the launch of a share buyback programme of the Company’s Ordinary shares for up to a maximum aggregate consideration of,
initially, £15.0 million (excluding expenses) and then, subsequently, in June 2025, extending this by a further £15.0 million (excluding
expenses). In September 2025, following the conclusion of the £30.0 million (excluding expenses) share buyback programme, the
Company announced launch of a further £25.0 million (excluding expenses) share buyback programme. In reaching its decision, the
Board considered ongoing capital expenditure at current levels to fund organic growth, payment of dividends and acquisitions within
the M&A pipeline. After taking account of these factors, the Group had significant headroom under its committed facilities and target
leverage. Accordingly, the Board concluded that the share buyback programme is prudent, reflects the cash generative ability of the
Group, maintains a strong balance sheet consistent with its capital allocation policy and would therefore promote the success of the
Company for the benefit of its members as a whole.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
November/December
Minutes/matters arising
Health & Safety and Environmental matters
CEO’s trading and operational review (incl. Business updates)
M&A update
Strategy
IT & Cyber Security update
Sustainability update
Employee engagement
Financial performance
Share buyback
Consideration and approval of 2026-2028 Budget
Investor analysis
Annual review and approval of updates to Governance Policies
Approval of Tax Strategy
Review and approval of Committee Terms of Reference
Review of NED fees
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
75
Principal Decision: Increase of Bank Facility
Stakeholders: Employees, Customers, Suppliers,
Communities, Shareholders
As previously disclosed, an £85.0 million bank facility was
entered into for an initial three-year term on 8 August 2022. The
terms of the facility provide an option to extend the term for
up to a further two years and an option to increase the facility
by up to a further £50.0 million, both with bank consent. At the
request of the Company, the term of the bank facility has since
been extended twice such that the new facility end date is
8August 2027. In addition, the bank facility was upsized, with
effect from 18 October 2023, by £35.0 million to £120.0 million
and then, with effect from 14 July 2025, by a further £15.0 million
to £135.0million. In making its decision to seek bank consent for
these facility increases, the Board considered the requirement for
stable sources of finance in order for the Company to effectively
operate all facets of its operations, including the pursuit of the
Company’s sustainability agenda and the pursuit of acquisition
opportunities.
Board Committees
The Committees of the Board which met during 2025 are:
the Audit Committee;
the Nomination Committee; and
the Remuneration Committee.
Each Committee has written terms of reference, which are
available on the Group’s website. Separate reports for each of
these Committees are included in this Annual Report.
Linked to the launch of our refreshed sustainability strategy
an additional Committee of the Board, the Sustainability
Committee, was established in 2022. The Sustainability
Committee’s membership is comprised of the Group’s
Management Board (which includes the Company’s Executive
Directors) plus the Group’s Head of Sustainability and is
chaired by the Chief Executive Officer. Whilst not members
of the Sustainability Committee, the Non-Executive Chair of
the Company and the Independent Non-Executive Directors
of the Company are also entitled to attend meetings of the
Sustainability Committee. The Sustainability Committee’s
purpose is to assist the Board in the discharge of its duties
relating to the Group’s corporate and societal obligations
and its reputation as a responsible corporate citizen. Specific
responsibilities delegated to the Sustainability Committee
include, inter alia:
1. Review and recommend changes, as appropriate, to the
Group’s sustainability strategy.
2. Assess the impact of the Group’s activities on its
communities, people and the environment.
3. Determine appropriate targets that will further improve the
sustainability of the Group.
4. Ensure the sustainability policy is fully understood and
implemented by the Group’s business operations.
5. Ensure the Group’s programme on achieving sustainability
targets is regularly reported to the Board.
6. Review statements and reports to be published by the Group
on sustainability.
Further details relating to the work of the Sustainability
Committee during 2025 can be found on pages 28 to 49.
Group Management Board
The Group Management Board is chaired by the Chief Executive
Officer. Topics covered by the Group Management Board include:
health and safety;
sustainability;
an update by the Chief Executive Officer on the business and
business environment;
divisional Managing Director updates;
Group function heads’ updates;
procurement;
substantial business developments and projects;
employee welfare and engagement matters;
talent and succession planning;
competitor analysis; and
strategy.
Annually, the Group Management Board conducts a strategic
review to identify key issues, plans and objectives to be
presented to the Board. The agreed strategy is then used as
a basis for developing the upcoming financial budget and
operating plans.
Investor Relations
We are committed to communicating our strategy and activities
clearly to our Shareholders in order to ensure that they receive
a balanced and complete view of our performance. The Board
considers that the Preliminary Announcement, the Annual
Report, including the Chief Executive’s Operating Review and the
Financial Review which are contained therein, the Interim Report
and trading update statements made during the year present
a balanced and clear assessment of the Group’s position and
prospects.
Furthermore, we undertake an extensive investor relations
programme in order to maintain an active dialogue with our
investors. The programme includes:
formal presentations of full year and half-year results;
briefing meetings with major institutional Shareholders after
the half-year results, preliminary statement and at the time
of any other significant market update, to ensure that the
investor community receives a balanced and complete view
of our performance and the issues we face;
hosting institutional investor and sell-side analysts’ site
visits (e.g. in June 2025 at the Group’s new laundry facility in
Crawley);
regular meetings between institutional investors and
analysts and the Chief Executive Officer and the Chief
Financial Officer to discuss business performance;
hosting investor and analyst sessions at which senior
management from relevant businesses deliver presentations
which provide an overview of each of the individual
businesses and operations;
engagement with potential investors through roadshow
meetings; and
attendance by senior executives across the business at
relevant meetings throughout the year.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
76 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Feedback is provided to the Board on any issues raised at
these meetings. External brokers’ reports are circulated to the
Directors. The Shareholders’ views of the investor meetings
following the interim and final results are obtained by the Group’s
broker and circulated to the Board.
During 2025, Jock Lennox met with a number of major
Shareholders to support the Board’s ongoing understanding
of investor perspectives and to facilitate engagement outside
the Company’s investor relations programme. In addition, Jock
also led a structured consultation with major Shareholders in
advance of the proposed transition from AIM to the Main Market.
This process reflected the Board’s commitment to effective
Shareholder engagement and ensured that Shareholder views
were carefully considered and informed the Board’s decision to
proceed with the transition to the Main Market.
Jock will continue to offer meetings with major Shareholders
during 2026, and the Committee Chairs remain available to
engage with Shareholders on matters within their respective
areas of responsibility.
In addition to the investor relations programme, the Annual
General Meeting (‘AGM’), which is normally attended by
all Directors, provides the Board with the opportunity to
communicate with private and institutional investors and we
encourage their participation at the meeting. Shareholders
attending the AGM have the opportunity to meet and question
the Board to discuss appropriate topics either during the
meeting or with the Directors after the formal proceedings have
ended. Such dialogue provides the Board with valuable feedback
and helps them to understand the views of shareholders.
We also have a section of our website which is dedicated to
shareholders and analysts (www.jsg.com/investor‑relations/)
which includes all of our financial results presentations since
2010. In addition, with effect from the publication of the 2024
interim results in September 2024, a recording of the sell-side
analyst presentation is also published on the investor relations
section of the Company’s website shortly following each relevant
meeting.
Culture, Workforce Policies, Whistleblowing
& Workforce Engagement
Our Culture & Workforce Policies
Our corporate culture defines who we are, what we stand for and
how we do business. Our strong reputation has been built on the
solid foundation of an ethical culture, underpinned by a well-
defined and effective system of governance. The Board defines
the purpose of the Group, identifies the values that guide it and
remains committed to upholding the highest ethical standards,
operating on the principle that the tone at the top sets the
standard for the rest of the business.
Our employees are central to our business. We strive to create
an inspiring working environment where everyone is engaged
and motivated and we want our employees to use their skills,
combined with our support, to deliver a great service to our
customers. Our people strategy is summed up by our ambition to
be a brilliant place to work – that means making Johnson Service
Group PLC a place where our people feel engaged and inspired
to be at their best.
The employment policies of the Group embody the principles
of equal opportunity and are tailored to meet the needs of its
different businesses and the locations in which they operate. The
Group has a written code on business ethics (the ‘Code of Ethics’)
which sets out guidelines for all employees to enable the Group
to meet the highest standards of conduct in business dealings,
including those with overseas suppliers.
Further details of our culture and employment policies are set
out within the report on Sustainability.
Whistleblowing
The Code also provides for companies to create an environment
in which the workforce feels it is safe to raise concerns; the Board
wholly agrees that creating such an environment is a core part
of an ethical and supportive business culture. Appropriate
whistleblowing and anti-bribery and corruption policies are
therefore in place and employees are encouraged to raise
concerns about any wrongdoing or malpractice without fear of
victimisation, discrimination, disadvantage or dismissal. These
policies are reviewed and, where relevant, updated on a regular
basis. The Board conducted its most recent annual review and
approval of these policies in November 2025.
Further details are set out within our Audit Committee Report.
Workforce Engagement
Kirsty Homer is the Non-Executive Director responsible for
Workforce Engagement. Whilst the Board is aware of the three
methods of engagement specified in the Code, it is conscious
that the methods specified are not the only ways of engaging
with the workforce and that engagement through a range of
both formal and informal channels may be more appropriate.
Such additional or alternative channels may include, but not be
limited to:
meeting groups of elected workforce representatives;
meeting future leaders without senior management present;
visiting regional sites;
inviting colleagues from different business functions to board
meetings; and
surveys.
Further details, including how the Group engages with the
workforce, are set out within the report on Sustainability.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
77
Section 2: Division of Responsibilities
Principles
F. The chair leads the board and is responsible for its
overall effectiveness in directing the company. They
should demonstrate objective judgment throughout
their tenure and promote a culture of openness and
debate. In addition, the chair facilitates constructive
board relations and the effective contribution of all
non-executive directors, and ensures that directors
receive accurate, timely and clear information.
G. The board should include an appropriate combination
of executive and non-executive (and, in particular,
independent non-executive) directors, such that no
one individual or small group of individuals dominates
the board’s decision-making. There should be a clear
division of responsibilities between the leadership of the
board and the executive leadership of the company’s
business.
H. Non-executive directors should have sufficient time to
meet their board responsibilities. They should provide
constructive challenge, strategic guidance, offer
specialist advice and hold management to account.
I. The board, supported by the company secretary, should
ensure that it has the policies, processes, information,
time and resources it needs in order to function
effectively and efficiently.
Composition of the Board
As at 31 December 2025, the Board consisted of the Non-
Executive Chair (the ‘Chair’), three Independent Non-Executive
Directors and two Executive Directors. Yvonne Monaghan
stepped down as Chief Financial Officer and retired from the
Board on 1 October 2025. Yvonne was succeeded by Ryan
Govender, who was appointed to the Board as Chief Financial
Officer on 1 October 2025.
Taking into account the provisions of the Code, the Board has
determined that, during the year under review, none of the Non-
Executive Directors had any relationship or circumstance which
would affect their performance, and the Board considers all of
the Non-Executive Directors to be independent in character and
judgement. There is an effective policy procedure in place to
deal with conflicts of interest, which are dealt with by the Board
as and when they arise. Conflicts of interest are a standing item
on the Board agenda, in addition to being subject to an annual
review process.
Biographies of the Directors of the Company are shown on
pages60 to 61. With the exception of (i) Yvonne Monaghan,
who stepped down as an Executive Director of the Company
and retired from the Board on 1 October 2025; and (ii) Ryan
Govender, who was appointed as an Executive Director of the
Company and to the Board on 1 October 2025, they all held office
throughout the year and up to the date of approving this Report.
Date first
appointed
to the Board
Date first
elected
to the Board
Tenure since
appointment
(as at
31 December 2025)
Non-Executive Directors
Jock Lennox Non-Executive Chair 5 January 2021 5 May 2021 5 years
Chris Girling Senior Independent Non-Executive Director 29 August 2018 8 May 2019 7 years 4 months
Nicola Keach Independent Non-Executive Director 1 June 2022 4 May 2023 3 years 7 months
Kirsty Homer Independent Non-Executive Director 1 August 2023 1 May 2024 2 years 5 months
Executive Directors
Peter Egan Chief Executive Officer 1 April 2018 3 May 2018 7 years 9 months
Ryan Govender Chief Financial Officer 1 October 2025 3 months
Former Executive
Directors
Yvonne Monaghan
1
Former Chief Financial Officer 31 August 2007 17 June 2008 18 years 1 month
2
Note 1: On 1 October 2025 Yvonne Monaghan stepped down as Chief Financial Officer of the Company and retired from the Board.
Note 2: Tenure since appointment stated as at 1 October 2025, being the date on which Yvonne Monaghan retired from the Board.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
78
Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Tenure, Balance & Diversity
The charts below depict the tenure, balance and diversity of the Board as at the date of this report:
As referenced within Provision 23 of the Code, as at 31 December 2025, the Group Management Board, whose membership comprises
the Executive Directors, divisional Managing Directors and certain Group function heads, is comprised of eight males and three
females, a proportionate ratio of 73% to 27%.
The Board is committed to ensuring that recruitment into the Group is undertaken based on merit, regardless of age, disability,
marital or civil partner status, pregnancy and maternity, race, colour, nationality, ethnic or national origin, religion or belief, gender or
sexual orientation. The Board places significant emphasis on ensuring that greater diversity, in its broadest sense, is brought into the
workforce, to enhance the quality of debate and decision making through differing views and backgrounds.
For the purposes of the UK Listing Rules, gender identity and ethnic background of the Board, as at the reference date of 31 December
2025, are reported in the tables below. This information has been collated by questionnaire from each Board member or senior
manager.
Gender identity (as at 31 December 2025)
Number of
Board members
Percentage of
the Board
Number of
senior positions
on the Board
(Chair, CEO, CFO
and SID)
Number in
executive
management
1
Percentage
of executive
management
1
Men 4 67 4 8 73
Women 2 33 3 27
Not specified
Note 1: Under the UK Listing Rules, executive management is defined as the executive committee or most senior executive or managerial body below the board (or where there
is no such formal committee or body, the most senior level of managers reporting to the chief executive), including the company secretary but excluding administrative
and support staff. For JSG, this senior executive cohort is known as the Group Management Board.
Ethnic identity (as at 31 December 2025)
Number of
Board members
Percentage of
the Board
Number of
senior positions
on the Board
(Chair, CEO, CFO
and SID)
Number in
executive
management
1
Percentage
of executive
management
1
White British or other White 5 83 3 10 91
Mixed/Multiple Ethnic Group
Asian/Asian British 1 17 1 1 9
Black/African/Caribbean/Black
British
Other Ethnic Group
Not specified
Note 1: Under the UK Listing Rules, executive management is defined as the executive committee or most senior executive or managerial body below the board (or where there
is no such formal committee or body, the most senior level of managers reporting to the chief executive), including the company secretary but excluding administrative
and support staff. For JSG, this senior executive cohort is known as the Group Management Board.
Board
Tenure
Board
Balance
> 5 years 1-5 years < 1 year Male Female Chair Executive Directors
Independent Non-Executive Directors
Board
Diversity
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
17%
50%
33%
17%
50%
33%
33%
67%
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
79
As explained further in the Nomination Committee Report on pages 91 to 93, following the Company’s uplisting, in August 2025, from
AIM to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies) Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on
London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market for listed securities, the Board has continued to monitor and have regard to governance
developments and requirements relating to Board composition and diversity. In particular, the Board is mindful of the targets set
out in the FCA’s UK Listing Rules – namely that at least 40% of the Board should be women; at least one of the senior Board positions
(Chair, Chief Executive, Chief Financial Officer or Senior Independent Director) should be held by a woman; and that at least one Board
member should be from an ethnic minority background – as well as the objectives of the Parker Review and the FTSE Women Leaders
Review for FTSE 350 companies.
The Board notes that from 1 January 2025 until the retirement of Yvonne Monaghan as Chief Financial Officer on 1 October 2025, the
Company met the gender diversity targets under the UK Listing Rules and the FTSE Women Leaders Review, and had maintained
female representation in a senior Board position since 2007. As at 31 December 2025, the Board comprised 33% women and 67%
men, with 17% of the Board identifying as being from a minority ethnic background. Accordingly, at that date, the Company met the
UK Listing Rules and Parker Review target relating to ethnic diversity but did not meet the 40% gender representation target or the
requirement for a woman to hold one of the specified senior Board positions.
As previously disclosed, and in line with the Board’s diversity policy adopted in November 2025, the Board remains fully supportive of
the diversity targets set out in the UK Listing Rules, the FTSE Women Leaders Review and the Parker Review. The Board will continue
to promote diversity of gender, ethnicity, background and experience through its succession planning, taking account of the relevant
targets as vacancies arise and making appointments on merit against objective criteria. The Board recognises the competitive market
for diverse talent but remains committed to achieving alignment with the applicable targets over time.
In this regard, the Board is pleased to announce that, as part of its succession planning, Lysanne Gray will join the Board as an
Independent Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June 2026 and will succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair following the
announcement of the Group’s interim results for the six month period ended 30 June 2026. In addition, Nicola Keach, who has served as
an Independent Non-Executive Director of the Company since June 2022, will succeed Chris Girling as Senior Independent Director with
effect from 1 June 2026. As a result of these appointments, and assuming no further changes to Board composition, the Company will,
in addition to its current alignment with the UK Listing Rules and Parker Review target relating to minority ethnic representation, also
achieve alignment with the gender diversity targets set out in the UK Listing Rules and the FTSE Women Leaders Review – namely that
at least 40% of the Board will be women and that at least one of the specified senior Board positions will be held by a woman.
Division of Responsibility of Chair and Chief Executive Officer
The Code requires that there is a clear division of responsibility between the Chair and the Chief Executive Officer, each of which
has clearly defined roles. The Chair should be responsible for the effective running of the Board whilst the Chief Executive Officer is
responsible for operating the business and implementing the Board’s strategies and policies.
The role of the Chair is set out in writing and agreed by the Board. The Chair is responsible for:
the effective leadership, operation and governance of the Board;
ensuring the effectiveness of the Board;
setting the agenda, style and tone of Board discussions;
ensuring the directors receive accurate, timely and clear information; and
maintaining a close working relationship with the Chief Executive Officer.
The role of the Chief Executive Officer is set out in writing and agreed by the Board. The Chief Executive Officer is responsible for:
management of the Group’s business;
implementation of the Group’s strategy and policies;
maintaining a close working relationship with the Chair;
chairing the Group Management Board meetings; and
chairing the Sustainability Committee.
Board Meetings and Attendance
There were eight scheduled Board meetings during 2025 and, additionally, a further five unscheduled meetings in relation to, inter alia,
M&A activity, capital investment projects and other corporate activity, including in relation to the Group’s successful transition from AIM
to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies) Category of the official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on London
Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market for Listed Securities.
On the rare occasion that a Director is unavoidably unable to attend a meeting, they would generally hold a briefing with the Chair
prior to the meeting so that their comments and input can be taken into account at the meeting. The Chair would provide an update to
them after the meeting.
Individual attendance at the meetings, including Audit Committee, Nomination Committee and Remuneration Committee attendance,
is set out in the table below. Where n/a appears in the table, the individual is not a Committee member but may attend the meeting
at the invitation of the relevant Committee Chair. By way of example, the Chair, Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer were
each invited to attend, and did so attend, each meeting of the Audit Committee.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
80 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
In addition to the meetings set out above, the Chair and the
Independent Non-Executive Directors have met during the year
without the Executive Directors being present.
External Executive Search Consultants
Appointments to the Board involve a rigorous selection process,
led by the Nomination Committee, and external independent
executive search consultants are usually engaged. Further
information is set out within the Nomination Committee Report.
Induction, Training and Knowledge
Appropriate training is available to Directors upon appointment
and as required on an ongoing basis. Furthermore, on
appointment, Directors participate in a customised induction
programme to familiarise them with the Group.
The Directors have access to the advice and services of the
Company Secretary and it is acknowledged that individual
Directors may wish to seek independent professional advice in
connection with their responsibilities and duties. The Company
will meet reasonable expenses incurred in this regard, although
no Director felt it necessary to seek such advice in the year ended
31 December 2025.
Supply of Information
To assist the Board in performing its responsibilities, information,
appropriate in quality and timeliness, is received in an agreed
format for each scheduled Board meeting.
At the invitation of the Board, other members of the
management team attend Board meetings to present on
matters relating to their areas of responsibility, including
regulatory compliance, investor relations, sustainability, risk
management and internal control and information technology
and cyber security. The directors and management of operating
companies are also supported by the central function, which
includes finance, legal and sustainability.
Service Agreements
The service agreements of the Executive Directors and copies
of the letters of appointment of the Chair and the Independent
Non-Executive Directors are available for inspection during
business hours on any weekday (excluding Saturdays, Sundays
and public holidays) at the registered office of the Company and
will be available for inspection for fifteen minutes prior to, and
during, the Annual General Meeting.
External Appointments
The Board supports Executive Directors having a non-executive
directorship as part of their continuing development provided
they have sufficient time to balance their commitments to the
Group with any external role. Such positions must receive prior
Board approval. In accordance with the Code, full-time executive
directors would not ordinarily take on more than one non-
executive directorship in a FTSE 100 company.
The role of an Independent Non-Executive Director requires a
time commitment in the order of 20 days per year plus additional
time as necessary to properly discharge their duties. There is no
restriction on outside appointments provided that they do not
prevent the Directors from discharging their responsibilities to
the Company effectively. Prior to appointment, each prospective
Non-Executive Director must confirm that they will have sufficient
time available to be able to discharge their responsibilities to the
Company effectively and that they have no conflicts of interest.
The Board remains confident that individual members continue
to devote sufficient time to undertake their responsibilities
effectively. The commitments of each Executive Director are set
out on pages 60 to 61.
Section 3: Composition, Succession &
Evaluation
Principles
J. Appointments to the board should be subject to a
formal, rigorous and transparent procedure, and an
effective succession plan should be maintained for
board and senior management. Both appointments
and succession plans should be based on merit and
objective criteria. They should promote diversity,
inclusion and equal opportunity.
K. The board and its committees should have a
combination of skills, experience and knowledge.
Consideration should be given to the length of service
of the board as a whole and membership regularly
refreshed.
L. Annual evaluation of the board should consider its
composition, diversity and how effectively members
work together to achieve objectives. Individual
evaluation should demonstrate whether each director
continues to contribute effectively.
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
Board
(Scheduled)
Board
(Unscheduled)
Audit
Committee
Nomination
Committee
(Scheduled)
Nomination
Committee
(Unscheduled)
Remuneration
Committee
(Scheduled)
Remuneration
Committee
(Unscheduled)
Maximum Number
of Meetings 8 5 4 3 4 3 5
Jock Lennox 8/8 5/5 n/a 3/3 4/4 3/3 5/5
Chris Girling 8/8 5/5 4/4 3/3 4/4 3/3 5/5
Nicola Keach 8/8 5/5 4/4 3/3 4/4 3/3 5/5
Kirsty Homer 8/8 5/5 4/4 3/3 4/4 3/3 5/5
Peter Egan 8/8 5/5 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Ryan Govender
1
2/2 2/2 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Yvonne
Monaghan
2
6/6 3/3 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Note 1: Ryan Govender was appointed as Chief Financial officer and to the Board with effect from 1 October 2025. For the period 1 October to 31 December 2025, Ryan Govender
was present at all Board meetings that he was eligible to attend.
Note 2: Yvonne Monaghan stepped down as Chief Financial Officer and retired from the Board with effect from 1 October 2025. For the period 1 January 2025 to 1 October 2025,
Yvonne Monaghan was present at all Board meetings that she was eligible to attend.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
81
Nomination Committee
The role of the Nomination Committee is to, inter alia, monitor
the performance, appropriateness and future succession of the
Company’s executive and Board talent in order to ensure that
the Board comprises individuals with the right blend of diversity,
skills, knowledge and experience to maintain a high degree of
effectiveness in discharging its responsibilities. Appointments to
the Board are recommended, as appropriate, by the Nomination
Committee. Board appointments are subject to approval by the
Board as a whole. Further details are outlined in the Nomination
Committee Report, on pages 91 to 93.
Performance Evaluation
Each year, the Independent Non-Executive Directors conduct a
performance evaluation of the Chair, after taking into account
the views of the Executive Directors. The Chair also conducts an
appraisal of each member of the Board, Board composition and
the format and effectiveness of the Board meetings. In addition,
the Remuneration Committee regularly reviews the performance
of each Executive Director.
Following the formal, independent, externally facilitated,
evaluation of the Board and its Committees conducted in the
final quarter of 2024, the results of which were subsequently
reported in the Company’s annual report for the financial year
ended 31 December 2024, the Board conducted an anonymous
Board performance review within the Company during the year
which covered, inter alia:
performance of the Board (including consideration of how
the Board works together as a unit);
processes which underpin the Board’s effectiveness
(including consideration of the balance of skills, experience,
independence, diversity and knowledge of the persons on
the Board);
performance of the Audit, Nomination and Remuneration
Committees; and
individual performance (giving consideration to whether
each Director continues to contribute effectively and show
commitment).
The performance review also sought Director views on key
focus topics for the Board during 2025. In addition to regular
discussions that the Chair held with each Director throughout
the year, as part of the Board performance review process, the
Chair held individual discussions with each Director to discuss
the aggregated, anonymised, feedback in relation to the Board
performance review exercise. The results of those discussions
were summarised by the Chair and considered by the Board.
Overall, the feedback from Board members was positive,
indicating that the Board feels engaged and motivated, with
a belief that the Company can continue to be ambitious and a
leader in its markets. Accordingly, to maintain this, the Board
believes that it is important to consider the time and depth
given to the strategic and succession agendas as the Company
continues on its growth trajectory.
As a result of the above reviews and evaluations, it is considered
that the performance of each Director (and, collectively, the
Board and its Committees) continues to be effective, that each
Director demonstrates sufficient commitment to their role and
that the contribution of each Director continues to be important
to the Company’s long-term sustainable success
Re-election of Directors
Each year, all Directors will retire and offer themselves for
re-election, if they wish to continue serving and are considered
by the Board to be eligible. Accordingly, each current member
of the Board, as at the date of this Report, will be proposed for
re-election (or, for Ryan Govender, election) at this year’s Annual
General Meeting of the Company.
Biographical details of all the Directors are set out on pages
60 to 61 and are also available for viewing on the Company’s
website (www.jsg.com).
Section 4: Audit, Risk & Internal Control
Principles
M. The board should establish formal and transparent
policies and procedures to ensure the independence
and effectiveness of internal and external audit
functions and satisfy itself on the integrity of financial
and narrative statements.
N. The board should present a fair, balanced and
understandable assessment of the company’s position
and prospects.
O. The board should establish procedures to manage risk,
oversee the internal control framework, and determine
the nature and extent of the principal risks the company
is willing to take in order to achieve its long-term
strategic objectives.
Audit Committee
The Board has established an Audit Committee, comprising the
independent Non-Executive Directors, which is responsible for:
ensuring that formal and transparent policies and
procedures are in place to protect the interests of
Shareholders in relation to financial reporting, internal
control and risk management;
monitoring the financial reporting process and the integrity
of the annual and interim financial statements;
determining whether the Annual Report and Accounts,
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable,
and whether they provide the information necessary
for Shareholders to assess the Group’s position and
performance, business model and strategy;
considering, and ultimately approving for publication, any
formal announcements relating to the Company’s financial
performance;
reviewing and challenging, as necessary, the judgments
and actions of management in relation to the financial
statements;
monitoring, reviewing and concluding upon the system of
internal control;
ensuring the maintenance of a control environment and the
appropriate management of risk;
recommendation of appointment of, and liaison with, the
external auditor;
reviewing and setting the terms of engagement and the
remuneration of the external auditor;
annual review and monitoring of the external auditor’s
independence and objectivity and the effectiveness of the
audit process;
development and implementation of policy on the
engagement of the external auditor to supply non-audit
services;
reviewing the Group’s systems and controls for the
prevention and detection of fraud or bribery; and
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
82 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
reviewing arrangements under which employees may, in
confidence, raise concerns about possible improprieties in
matters of financial reporting or other matters ensuring
that arrangements are in place for the proportionate and
independent investigation and appropriate follow-up action.
The Audit Committee reports to the Board on how it has
discharged its responsibilities. Further details are outlined in the
Audit Committee Report, on pages 84 to 90.
Robust Risk Assessment
Throughout the year, and as described further within the
Audit Committee Report, the Board has carried out a robust
assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the
Group, including those that would threaten its business model,
future position, performance, solvency or liquidity. Details of the
principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group, together with
how the risks and uncertainties are being managed or mitigated,
are set out on pages 50 to 56.
Internal Assurance
The Group does not currently have a standalone, independent,
internal audit function. Instead, internal assurance activities
are undertaken, in the main, by a nominated resource within the
Group Finance function. Other members of the Group Finance
function may, on occasion, also perform internal assurance
activities. Internal assurance activities are overseen by the
Director of Group Finance, who reports functionally to the Audit
Committee and operationally to the Chief Financial Officer. The
Director of Group Finance, and the Group Finance function, are
independent of the business operations.
At its meeting in February, the Audit Committee will consider, and
approve, the annual internal assurance plan for the coming year.
Thereafter, the Audit Committee will receive regular updates at
each of its meetings on progress against the plan and details of
findings, together with management actions taken to address
recommendations, from the Director of Group Finance.
Whilst the Group does not have a standalone, independent,
internal audit function, both the Board and the Audit
Committee are satisfied that the current arrangements in
place are appropriate to monitor, and provide assurance
over, the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control and
risk management processes across the Group’s operations.
Furthermore, they are satisfied that internal assurance activities
are undertaken with the necessary objectivity and competency
and that those individuals performing the internal assurance
activities are free from management influence or other
restrictions.
Internal Control
The Board, with advice from the Audit Committee, is satisfied
that an effective system of internal controls and risk
management processes are in place which enable the Company
to identify, evaluate and manage key risks. These processes have
been in place since the start of the financial year and up to the
date of approval of the financial statements. Further details of
risk management frameworks and how the Audit Committee has
reviewed the effectiveness of the system of internal control are
described further within the Audit Committee Report.
The Audit Committee and Board is cognisant of the coming
into force, with effect from 1 January 2026, of Provision 29 of the
Financial Reporting Council’s 2024 UK Corporate Governance
Code and looks forward to reporting against the relevant
requirements, regarding, inter alia, the monitoring and review of
the Company’s risk management and internal control framework
and the effectiveness of material controls, in the Company’s
annual report and accounts for the financial year ending
31 December 2026. Significant preparatory work has already
been undertaken in this regard.
Going Concern
The Board considered the going concern review performed
by management, in particular, the appropriateness of key
judgments, assumptions and estimates underlying the financial
forecasts that underpin the review, together with a review of
the level of forecast available headroom against the Group’s
committed borrowing facilities and compliance with key financial
covenants.
Further details of the going concern assessment are provided on
pages67 to 68.
Future Prospects
The Board has assessed the future prospects of the Group in
accordance with Provision 31 of the Code. Based on the results
of this analysis, and having considered the nature and extent
of the Company’s principal risks and uncertainties, the Board
has a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to
continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due
over the 36-month period of its assessment, such 36-month
period commencing from the balance sheet date. Details of the
assessment performed by the Board, including an assessment of
those risks most likely to impact the Group’s future prospects, are
set out on pages 50 to 56.
Section 5: Remuneration
Principles
P. Remuneration policies and practices should be
designed to support strategy and promote long-term
sustainable success. Executive remuneration should be
aligned to company purpose and values and be clearly
linked to the successful delivery of the company’s long-
term strategy.
Q. A formal and transparent procedure for developing
policy on executive remuneration and determining
director and senior management remuneration should
be established. No director should be involved in
deciding their own remuneration outcome.
R. Directors should exercise independent judgment
and discretion when authorising remuneration
outcomes, taking account of company and individual
performance, and wider circumstances.
Remuneration Committee
In line with the authority delegated by the Board, the Committee
sets the Company’s Remuneration Policy and is responsible for
determining remuneration terms and conditions of employment
for the Chair of the Board, the Executive Directors and those
members of the Group Management Board whom are not
Executive Directors.
The Committee:
ensures that the Executive Directors are appropriately
incentivised to enhance the Group’s performance and
rewarded for their contribution to the success of the
business by designing, monitoring and assessing incentive
arrangements, including setting stretching targets and
assessing performance and outcomes against them;
reviews the remuneration arrangements for other senior
executives within the Group, namely those members of the
Group Management Board who are not Executive Directors;
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
83
in undertaking its responsibilities above, reviews and
monitors the remuneration and related policies and culture
applying to the wider workforce, taking these into account
when considering, developing and setting remuneration
policies and packages for Executive Directors and the Group
Management Board; and
maintains an active dialogue with Shareholders, ensuring
their views and those of their advisors are sought and
considered when setting executive remuneration.
The Committee regularly reports to the Board on how it has
discharged its responsibilities.
Further details of the Remuneration Committee’s responsibilities
and the Group’s Remuneration Policy, together with details of
how the policy has been applied in 2025 and how it is expected
to be applied in 2026, are outlined in the Directors’ Remuneration
Report, on pages 94 to 115.
Corporate Governance Report Approval
The Corporate Governance Report incorporates the Audit
Committee Report, Nomination Committee Report and Directors’
Remuneration Report, as well as the report on Sustainability.
The Corporate Governance Report was approved by the Board
on 2 March 2026.
By order of the Board.
Christopher Clarkson
Company Secretary
2 March 2026
Corporate Governance Report
Continued >
84 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Dear Shareholder.
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Audit Committee’s Report for the financial year ended 31 December 2025.
The Year in Review
The Audit Committee continued to fulfil its duties throughout the year, maintaining oversight of the integrity of the Company’s financial
reporting, key accounting judgments and related disclosures, and the robustness of the Group’s risk management and internal control
systems and framework. In discharging its duties, the Committee works to a structured agenda closely linked to the events in the
Company’s reporting cycle.
I am pleased to report that the Group’s risk and financial management structures have operated effectively during the year under
review. The continued support, constructive engagement and level of responsiveness of my Committee colleagues and management
have enabled the Committee to fulfil its role in providing effective scrutiny and challenge. In this regard, I would like to thank colleagues
across the Group who assisted the Committee during the year for their support.
As in previous years, the Committee’s primary focus was on the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting activities. In considering the
financial statements for 2025, the Committee concentrated on the key accounting judgments and disclosures relating to the financial
statements, with careful consideration given to the Group’s viability disclosures and its ability to continue as a going concern, with
particular scrutiny being given to the reports prepared and assumptions used by management to support those statements. The
Committee concluded that the Company had adopted an appropriate approach in all significant areas.
As was the case last year, certain of the Group’s non-financial sustainability related data in the 2025 Annual Report and Accounts
has received limited third-party assurance from an independent third party. The independent assurance statement can be found on
page49.
At the request of the Board, the Committee also considered the Group’s Principal Risks and Uncertainties disclosures for the financial
year ended 31 December 2025. The Committee is satisfied that the statements made by executive management on pages 50 to 56 of
this Annual Report are appropriate based on what is currently known to management as at the date of this Report.
In the pages that follow, we have sought to provide shareholders and other stakeholders with details of the work that was undertaken
by the Committee during the year. This has enabled the Committee to provide assurance to the Board on the effectiveness of the
internal controls framework and the integrity of the Group’s 2025 Annual Report and financial statements.
Evaluation of the Competence and Effectiveness of the Committee
Each year, as part of an overall review of the Board and its Committees, the Audit Committee critically reviews its own performance
and considers where improvements can be made. In so doing it considers, amongst other things, those matters discussed by the Audit
Committee, such as:
composition, structure and activities;
how well the Committee oversees the financial reporting process;
its review of the work of the external auditor;
the effectiveness of the process for raising concerns;
its monitoring of the management of risk;
how well it understands and evaluates the effectiveness and conclusions of internal control and the adequacy of the related
disclosures;
whether the Committee’s terms of reference are appropriate for the particular circumstances of the Company and comply with
prevailing legislation and best practice;
whether the number and length of time of Committee meetings are sufficient to meet the role and responsibilities of the Committee
and coincide with key dates within the financial reporting and audit cycle; and
identification of additional training needs for Committee members.
Overall, the performance of the Committee continued to be rated highly and the Committee was considered to have discharged its
duties effectively. By virtue of my former executive and non-executive roles (full details of which are set out on page 61), together with the
results of the above evaluation, the Board considers that I have recent and relevant financial experience. The Board further concluded
that the Committee, as a whole, has sufficient competence relative to the sector in which the Company operates.
The Year Ahead
The Audit Committee plays a central role in supporting the Board in safeguarding the integrity of the Group’s financial statements and
overseeing the effectiveness of the Group’s internal financial controls and risk management systems. The Committee remains focused
on ensuring that the Group’s internal control framework continues to operate effectively and evolves appropriately in response to the
changing environment in which the Group operates.
This responsibility will assume additional significance in 2026 in light of the requirements of Provision 29 of the Financial Reporting
Council’s 2024 UK Corporate Governance Code, particularly in relation to the monitoring and review of the Company’s risk management
and internal control framework and the effectiveness of material controls. The Committee’s composition, experience and commitment
position it well to meet these enhanced expectations and to discharge its responsibilities effectively in the year ahead.
I look forward to welcoming Lysanne Gray to the Board and to working closely with her to ensure a smooth and orderly transition ahead
of her succeeding me as Chair of the Audit Committee following the announcement of the Company’s interim results for the six months
ending 30 June 2026.
I hope that you find this report informative and can continue to take assurance from the work undertaken by the Committee this year.
We seek to respond to shareholders’ expectations in our reporting and, as always, welcome any feedback from shareholders or other
stakeholders.
Chris Girling
Chair, Audit Committee
2 March 2026
Audit Committee Report
Letter from Chris Girling, Chair of the Audit Committee
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
85
Responsibilities of the Audit Committee
The Board has established an Audit Committee (the ‘Committee’),
comprising the Independent Non-Executive Directors, to which
it has delegated day to day responsibility for, inter alia, the
following:
ensuring that formal and transparent policies and
procedures are in place to protect the interests of
Shareholders in relation to financial reporting, internal
control and risk management;
monitoring the financial reporting process and the integrity
of the annual and interim financial statements;
determining whether the Annual Report and Accounts,
taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable,
and whether they provide the information necessary
for Shareholders to assess the Group’s position and
performance, business model and strategy;
considering, and ultimately approving for publication, any
formal announcements relating to the Company’s financial
performance;
reviewing and challenging, as necessary, the judgments
and actions of management in relation to the financial
statements;
monitoring, reviewing and concluding upon the Company’s
risk management and internal control framework;
monitoring and reviewing the effectiveness of the Company’s
internal assurance arrangements;
ensuring the maintenance of a control environment and the
appropriate management of risk;
recommending the appointment of, and ongoing liaison with,
the external auditor;
reviewing and setting the terms of engagement and the
remuneration of the external auditor;
annual review and monitoring of the external auditor’s
independence and objectivity and the effectiveness of the
audit process;
development and implementation of policy on the
engagement of the external auditor to supply non-audit
services;
reviewing the Group’s systems and controls for the prevention
and detection of fraud or bribery; and
reviewing arrangements under which employees may, in
confidence, raise concerns about possible improprieties in
matters of financial reporting or other matters ensuring
that arrangements are in place for the proportionate and
independent investigation and appropriate follow-up action.
The Committee regularly reports to the Board on how it has
discharged its responsibilities. The full terms of reference of
the Committee are available on the Company’s website, or on
request to the Company Secretary.
Members of the Committee have continued to take an active
role including spending time with the operations teams and also
participating in key discussions on areas of financial judgment.
These actions have allowed the Committee to have an even
greater input and to develop greater awareness of the day-
to-day challenges that the business faces and the potential
consequences of such challenges.
This report sets out how the Committee has discharged its
responsibilities and describes the work of the Committee,
including in respect of meeting the relevant requirements of the
FRC’s Audit Committee Minimum Standard.
Composition of the Committee
The Committee meets at least four times per year and also
meets in private with the external auditor.
In accordance with Provision 24 of the Code, the Company
should establish a Committee of at least three independent non-
executive directors. Membership of the Committee at each of
its meetings during the year is shown below and is, therefore, in
accordance with the Code:
February August (1)
1
August (2)
1
November
Chris Girling
(Committee
Chair)
ü ü ü ü
Kirsty
Homer
ü ü ü ü
Nicola
Keach
ü ü ü ü
Note 1: There were two separate meetings of the Audit Committee held in August
2025.
What the Committee did in 2025
In 2025, the Committee discharged its responsibilities by:
reviewing the Group’s draft financial statements (for the year
ended 31 December 2024), preliminary announcement (for the
year ended 31 December 2024) and interim results statement
(for the six-month period ended 30 June 2025) prior to Board
approval and reviewing the external auditor’s reports
thereon;
reviewing and considering the significant matters in relation
to the financial statements, as further detailed on page 86;
reviewing the plan of the external auditor for the audit
of the Consolidated and Company Financial Statements,
confirmations of the auditor’s independence and proposed
audit fee and approving terms of engagement for the audit;
considering and agreeing the annual internal audit plan
together with any findings and recommendations arising
thereon;
considering, and approving, the annual internal assurance
plan for 2025 and then monitoring the progress and
effectiveness of performance against the plan, including the
consideration of findings, at each of its subsequent meetings;
considering the review of material business risks, including
reviewing internal control processes, material controls, and
the framework used to identify and monitor principal risks
and uncertainties;
reviewing the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’
expenses;
monitoring the reporting, and follow up of items reported, on
the employee whistleblowing hotline established in line with
the Code of Ethics;
reviewing the Committee’s composition and confirming that
there is sufficient expertise and resource for it to fulfil its
responsibilities effectively;
reviewing and assessing the performance, effectiveness and
independence of Grant Thornton UK LLP (‘Grant Thornton’) as
external auditor;
recommending that the Board propose to Shareholders the
reappointment of Grant Thornton as external auditor until
the conclusion of the AGM in 2026;
Audit Committee Report
Letter from Chris Girling, Chair of the Audit Committee
86 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
considered the preparation for, and the ongoing
workstreams in respect of, the reforms of the UK Corporate
Governance Code; and
approving the appointment of Jacobs U.K. Limited (‘Jacobs’)
as independent limited assurance provider in respect of
certain of the Group’s non-financial sustainability related
data in the 2025 Annual Report and Accounts.
Fair, Balanced and Understandable
At the request of the Board, the Committee has considered
whether, in its opinion, the 2025 Annual Report and Accounts are
fair, balanced and understandable, and whether they provide
the information necessary for Shareholders to assess the Group’s
position and performance, business model and strategy.
The Committee received a full draft of the report. Feedback
was provided by the Committee, highlighting the areas it was
felt would benefit from further clarity. The draft report was then
amended to incorporate this feedback ahead of final approval.
When forming its opinion, the Committee reflected on the
information it had received and its discussions throughout the
year. Following its review, the Committee was of the opinion that
the 2025 Annual Report and Accounts were fair, balanced and
understandable on the basis that:
the description of the business agrees with our own
understanding;
the risks reflect the issues that concern us;
appropriate weight has been given to the ‘good and bad’
news;
the discussion of performance properly reflects the ‘story’ of
the year; and
there is a clear and well-articulated link between all areas of
disclosure.
Significant Matters Considered in Relation to
the Financial Statements
The Committee has assessed whether suitable accounting
policies have been adopted and whether management has
made appropriate judgments and estimates. Throughout
the year, the Group Finance team has worked to ensure that
the business is transparent and provides the required level
of disclosure regarding significant issues considered by the
Committee in relation to the financial statements, as well as how
these issues were addressed, while being mindful of matters that
may be business-sensitive.
This section outlines the main areas of judgment that have
been considered by the Committee to ensure that appropriate
rigour has been applied. Accounting policies can be found in the
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies.
Impairment
As part of the year end process, management assessed whether
goodwill (in respect of the Group) and investments (in respect of
the Company) had suffered any impairment, in accordance with
the accounting policy stated within this Annual Report.
The Committee reviewed and challenged managements
overall impairment testing of goodwill and investments. The
Committee considered the appropriateness of key assumptions
and methodologies for both value in use models and fair value
measurements. This included challenging projected cash flows,
growth rates and discount rates. The Committee concluded that
the methodology and assumptions used by management were
reasonable.
Post-employment Benefits
The valuation of all post-employment benefits is based on
statistical and actuarial calculations, using various assumptions
including discount rates, inflation, life expectancy of scheme
members and cash commutations. The Committee reviewed the
actuarial assumptions underpinning the valuation and were
satisfied that all assumptions are within ranges considered
generally acceptable given the size, demographic and duration
of the Group schemes.
Accounting for Complex Customer Arrangements
As in previous years, the Group offers rebates to certain
customers based on agreed fixed rates relating to the volume
of services provided and goods purchased. The Committee does
not consider the Group’s rebates to be highly complex as: they
are predominantly volume related; there are generally written
agreements in place; and historical estimates of rebates have
been seen to be accurate. However, following FRC guidance this
has been highlighted as an area of focus. The Committee has
discussed any judgments made in accruing customer rebates
with management and the auditor. The Committee is satisfied
that the amounts accrued are appropriate.
Going Concern Assessment
The Committee reviewed in detail the going concern assessment
prepared by management, which comprised monthly cash
flow projections for the period to 30 June 2027 (the assessment
period), reflecting an initial set of assumptions around financial
projections and trading performance. Detailed explanations had
been provided by management with regard to the assumptions
used in the cash flow projections. The Committee carefully
studied the assumptions and considered that they were sensible
and appropriate to the circumstances.
The Committee also considered the stress tests that had been
performed by management, which reflected subdued trading
conditions and which were designed to stress test liquidity and
covenant compliance. Again, the Committee carefully studied the
assumptions used in the stress tests and considered that they
were sensible and appropriate to the circumstances.
After considering the monthly cash flow projections, the stress
tests and the facilities available to the Group and Company, the
Committee concluded that there was a reasonable expectation
that the Group and Company have adequate resources for
their operational needs, will remain in compliance with the
financial covenants set out in the bank facility agreement and
will continue in operation for at least the period to 30 June
2027. Accordingly, and having reassessed the principal risks
and uncertainties, the Committee considered, and reported to
the Board as such, that it was appropriate to adopt the going
concern basis in preparing the Group and Company financial
statements.
Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
Throughout the Annual Report and financial statements, we
refer to a number of APMs. APMs are used by the Group to
provide further clarity and transparency of the Group’s financial
performance. The APMs are used internally by management
to monitor business performance, budgeting and forecasting,
and for determining Directors’ remuneration and that of other
management throughout the business. The Committee is
aware that the APMs are non-IFRS measures and should not be
regarded as a complete picture of the Group’s performance.
APMs used by the Group are as follows:
adjusted operating profit or loss, which refers to continuing
operating profit or loss before amortisation of intangible
assets (excluding software amortisation)and exceptional
items;
adjusted profit or loss before taxation, which refers to
adjusted operating profit or loss less total finance cost;
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
87
adjusted EBITDA, which refers to adjusted operating profit
or loss plus the depreciation charge for property, plant and
equipment, textile rental items and right of use assets plus
software amortisation;
adjusted earnings per share, which refers to earnings per
share calculated based on adjusted profit or loss after
taxation; and
net debt excluding IFRS 16 liabilities.
The Committee considers that the APMs, all of which exclude the
effects of non-recurring items or non-operating events, provide
useful information for stakeholders on the underlying trends
and performance of the Group. Furthermore, the Committee is
content that where APMs are stated, they are presented with
equal prominence to the statutory figures. The Committee
also considered the accounting policy in respect of APMs and
noted that it referred to a number of limitations of APMs as well
as providing clear signposts to where APMs are reconciled to
statutory performance measures within the Annual Report and
financial statements.
Assessment of External Auditor
Effectiveness
The Committee annually reviews the performance of the external
auditor. In forming its conclusion as to the performance of the
external auditor, the Committee reviews amongst other matters:
feedback on the effectiveness and performance of the
external audit;
the external auditor’s fulfilment of the agreed audit plan in
respect of 2025;
reports highlighting the material issues, critical accounting
judgments and key sources of estimation uncertainty that
arose during the conduct of the audit;
the external auditor’s objectivity and independence during
the process, including its own representation about its
internal independence processes; and
the challenges raised by the external auditor during the
audit.
The Committee concluded that the audit process as a whole had
been conducted robustly, the external audit team selected to
undertake the audit had done so thoroughly and professionally,
and the external auditor had applied sufficient experience and
understanding of the Company’s industry, consulted with experts
as necessary, and is of sufficient size to conduct a national audit.
The performance of Grant Thornton UK LLP as external auditor
to the Company in respect of the year ending 31 December
2025 was, therefore, considered to be effective. In addition, the
Committee was satisfied that management had provided the
external auditor with appropriate access to its operations and
personnel, systems, records and supporting information, whilst
acting professionally and with appropriate challenge, enabling
the audit to be conducted effectively.
Assessment of External Auditor
Independence
The Company has adopted a policy on the independence of the
auditor which is consistent with the ethical standard published
by the Financial Reporting Council.
Independence Safeguards
The external auditor is required to adhere to a rotation policy
whereby the audit engagement partner is rotated after five
years. Grant Thornton were appointed in March 2021, five years
ago with Michael Frankish being the Senior Audit Partner for the
financial years ended 31 December 2021, 31 December 2022 and
31 December 2023. Jonathan Maile replaced Michael Frankish as
Senior Statutory Auditor for the audit process for the financial
year ended 31 December 2024 and was the Senior Statutory
Audit Partner for the year under review.
Ethical Standards and ISA (UK) 260 require the external auditor
to report to the Committee, on a timely basis, all significant facts
and matters that may bear upon their integrity, objectivity and
independence. During the year, the external auditor drew a
number of matters to the attention of the Committee in relation
to independence and were able to confirm that sufficient
safeguards were in place and that there were no significant
facts or matters that impacted their independence as external
auditor.
Furthermore, Grant Thornton confirmed that it had complied with
the Financial Reporting Council’s Ethical Standard and that as a
firm, and each covered person, that it was independent and able
to express an objective opinion on the financial statements of the
Group and Company.
Non-Audit Services
A key issue for the Committee that may impair auditor
independence, and the auditor’s objective opinion on the
financial statements, is the engagement of the external auditor
for the provision of non-audit services. In response to the
Financial Reporting Council’s Revised Ethical Standard 2019 (the
2019 Ethical Standard’), non-audit services should be provided
by a professional services firm other than the Company’s
appointed external auditor. The 2019 Ethical Standard provides
that fees payable to the external auditor in respect of non-audit
related services should be no more than 70% of the average audit
fees over the previous three years. The 2019 Ethical Standard
includes a ‘whitelist’ of permitted non-audit related services.
Fees Payable to the Auditor
Fees payable (including expenses) to Grant Thornton in 2025 in
respect of audit related services amounted to £590,000 (2024:
£590,000).
Fees payable (including expenses) to Grant Thornton in 2025 in
respect of non-audit related services amounted to £15,000 (2024:
£15,000). The non-audit related procedures were in relation to the
performance of agreed upon procedures in respect of informally
reviewing, but not auditing, the Group’s Consolidated Interim
Financial Statements. In addition, during 2025, Grant Thornton UK
Advisory & Tax LLP were engaged to provide certain non-audit
services to the Company as permitted under the 2019 Ethical
Standard. These services were provided in Grant Thornton UK
Advisory & Tax LLP’s capacity as Reporting Accountant to the
Company in connection with the Company’s transition from AIM
to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies) category of the
Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on
London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market for listed securities.
Fees payable (including expenses) to Grant Thornton UK Advisory
& Tax LLP in respect of such non-audited related services
amounted to £310,000 (2024: £nil).
Independence Assessment by the Committee
In assessing and concluding upon the independence and
objectivity of the external auditor, the Committee takes into
account the assurances and information provided by the
external auditor at the planning stage of the audit, including a
written disclosure of the relationships that could have an impact
on the external auditor’s independence and objectivity and the
safeguards put in place to address such threats. As part of this
process, the Committee receives a statement from the external
auditor advising that all covered partners and staff annually
confirm their compliance with Grant Thornton’s ethics and
independence policies and procedures including, in particular,
that they have no prohibited shareholdings and their ethics and
independence policies are fully consistent with the requirements
of the 2019 Ethical Standard.
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
88 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
In addition, the Committee meets with the external auditor
during the year without the presence of management and I,
as Audit Committee Chair, have had regular contact with the
audit engagement partner. The Committee also has authority
to take independent advice, as it determines necessary, in order
to resolve issues on auditor independence. No such advice was
required during the year.
Accordingly, the Committee has concluded that Grant Thornton
was independent of the Group.
Statutory Audit Tender Process
In accordance with its terms of reference and regulatory
requirements, the Audit Committee is required to ensure that
the external audit services contract is put out to tender at least
once every ten years. The Committee is responsible for the
selection and appointment of the external auditor. It initiates
and conducts any competitive tender process undertaken
by the Company for the provision of external audit services
and considers and makes recommendations to the Board, to
be put to shareholders for approval at the Company’s AGM.
The Committee confirms that for the year under review, the
Company complied with the provisions of the Statutory Audit
Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory
Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee
Responsibilities) Order 2014 (the ‘CMA Order 2014’).
The last competitive tender process for the Company’s statutory
audit was completed in 2020, following which Grant Thornton
UK LLP was appointed as external auditor with effect from and
including the financial year ended 31 December 2021.
The Audit Committee keeps under review the timing of the next
tender process in line with the CMA Order 2014, the 2019 Ethical
Standard, and the UK Corporate Governance Code. Each year
the Audit Committee assesses the effectiveness of the external
auditor and, as at the date of this report, subject to the Audit
Committee continuing to believe that the audit is effective, the
Audit Committee’s present intention would be to continue with
Grant Thornton UK LLP as external auditor up to and including
the audit for the year ending 31 December 2030.
Assuming this is the case then our current expectation would
be to run a tender process during the calendar year ended
31December 2030 in order to select a new auditor for the year
ending 31 December 2031. When considering the appropriate
time to conduct the audit tender, the Audit Committee takes into
account the benefit of an incumbent firm with deep knowledge
of the Group’s operations, the independence and objectivity
of the appointed auditor and audit partner and the results
of the audit effectiveness assessment. The Audit Committee
currently believes that this approach is in the best interests of the
shareholders of Johnson Service Group PLC.
Reappointment of the External Auditor
The Committee has recommended to the Board to propose to
Shareholders the reappointment of Grant Thornton as auditor
until the conclusion of the AGM in 2027. Full details are set out in
the Notice of Annual General Meeting on pages 192 to 202. There
are no contractual restrictions over choice of auditor.
Internal Assurance
The Group does not currently have a standalone, independent,
internal audit function. Instead, internal assurance activities
are undertaken, in the main, by a nominated resource within the
Group Finance function. Other members of the Group Finance
function and other functions (e.g. Health & Safety, IT Security)
may, on occasion, also perform internal assurance activities.
Internal assurance activities are overseen by the Director of
Group Finance, who reports functionally to the Audit Committee
and operationally to the Chief Financial Officer. The Director of
Group Finance, and the Group Finance function, are independent
of the business operations.
At its meeting in February, the Audit Committee will consider, and
approve, the annual internal assurance plan for the coming year.
Thereafter, the Audit Committee will receive regular updates at
each of its meetings on progress against the plan and details of
findings, together with management actions taken to address
recommendations, from the Director of Group Finance.
Whilst the Group does not have a standalone, independent,
internal audit function, both the Board and the Audit
Committee are satisfied that the current arrangements in
place are appropriate to monitor, and provide assurance
over, the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control and
risk management processes across the Group’s operations.
Furthermore, they are satisfied that internal assurance activities
are undertaken with the necessary objectivity and competency
and that those individuals performing the internal assurance
activities are free from management influence or other
restrictions.
Internal Control and Risk Management
Whilst day to day responsibility has been delegated to the
Committee, the Board is ultimately responsible for the overall
risk management and internal control system and framework
for the Group and for reviewing its effectiveness. The Board’s
agenda includes a bi-annual consideration, or more frequently
if appropriate, of risk and control and it receives reports thereon
from the Audit Committee.
The Committee carries out a review, at least annually, covering
all material controls, including financial, operational and
compliance controls, and the risk management systems and
framework. The Committee also receives regular reports from
the Director of Group Finance in respect of progress against
the annual internal assurance plan and, where necessary,
recommendations for improvement are considered and agreed.
This process has been regularly reviewed by the Board.
The main features of the internal control framework are detailed
below.
1. Financial Reporting
There is a detailed budgeting and forecasting process with
the annual budget and forecast both challenged, stress tested
and, ultimately, approved by the Board. Monthly financial
results, together with updated forecasts as appropriate, are
reported against the corresponding figures for the budget and
the previous year with corrective and/or investigative action
initiated by the Board as appropriate.
2. Treasury Management
The Group’s treasury activities are operated within Board
approved guidelines. Facilities are approved by the Board
and all transactions are controlled and monitored. Monthly
summaries of treasury management activities are prepared for
the Board. Speculative transactions are not undertaken.
3. Risk Management
There is an on-going process for identifying, evaluating and
managing the Group’s Principal Risks and Uncertainties that
has been in place throughout the financial year and up to the
date of approval of the financial statements. The identification
of business risks is carried out in conjunction with operating
management and reviewed by the Committee and the Board.
The Board regularly assesses the financial implications and
effectiveness of the control process in place to mitigate or
eliminate these risks. The Group has insurance cover where it is
considered appropriate and cost effective.
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
89
4. Financial Control
Each business maintains financial controls and procedures
appropriate to its own operating environment. The Group has
a centralised finance function, independent to the operating
businesses and which can second additional resources from
around the Group, which reviews the systems and procedures
within each business and reports regularly to the Committee.
A review of control procedures is undertaken in respect of all
new acquisitions and action taken where necessary to bring
the controls up to the level required by the Group. The Group
has clearly defined guidelines for the review and approval of
capital expenditure projects. These include annual budgets and
designated levels of authority.
The system of internal control is designed to mitigate, rather than
eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and
can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against
material misstatement or loss.
The key elements of the Group’s on-going processes for the
provision of an effective internal control and risk management
framework, in place throughout the year and at the date of this
Report, include:
regular Board meetings to consider matters reserved for
Directors’ consideration;
regular management reporting, providing a balanced
assessment of key risks and controls;
an annual Board review of corporate strategy, including a
review of material business risks and uncertainties;
established organisational structure with clearly defined
lines of responsibility and levels of authority;
a centralised Group finance function which is independent to
the operating businesses and which implements, overseen by
the Director of Group Finance, the annual internal assurance
plan and provides independent assurance to management,
the Committee and the Board on the effectiveness of the
Company’s risk management and internal control framework
and material controls;
documented policies and procedures;
regular review by the Board of financial budgets, forecasts
and covenants with performance reported to the Board
monthly; and
a detailed investment process for major projects, including
capital investment coupled with a post investment appraisal
analysis.
In reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal control
the Committee has:
received six-monthly reports, compiled by the Director
of Group Finance following discussion with key senior
managers, that set out the key risks facing the Group and
indicate whether controls and risk management processes
in each business unit have operated satisfactorily. These
reports are reviewed in detail, challenged where appropriate
and approved by the Committee for use in the Annual Report;
regularly reviewed the financial and accounting controls;
reviewed the internal assurance reports; and
monitored management’s responsiveness to the findings and
recommendations arising from the above.
No significant failings or weaknesses were identified.
In respect of Group financial reporting, the finance department
is responsible for preparing the Group financial statements
using a well-established consolidation process and ensuring
that accounting policies are in accordance with International
Financial Reporting Standards. There is a detailed budgeting
process with an annual budget both challenged, stress-tested
and approved by the Board. Monthly results are reported against
the corresponding figures for the budget and the previous year
with corrective action initiated by the Board as appropriate.
All financial information published by the Group is subject to
approval by the Committee.
The Group’s treasury activities are operated within Board
approved guidelines. Facilities are approved by the Board
and all transactions are controlled and monitored. Monthly
summaries of treasury management activities are prepared for
the Board. Speculative transactions are not undertaken.
There have been no changes in the Company’s internal control
over financial reporting during the year under review that have
materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect,
the Company’s control over financial reporting.
The Audit Committee and Board is cognisant of the coming
into force, with effect from 1 January 2026, of Provision 29 of the
Financial Reporting Council’s 2024 UK Corporate Governance
Code and looks forward to reporting against the relevant
requirements, regarding, inter alia, the monitoring and review of
the Company’s risk management and internal control framework
and the effectiveness of material controls, in the Company’s
annual report and accounts for the financial year ending
31 December 2026. Significant preparatory work has already
been undertaken in this regard.
Bribery Act 2010 (the ‘Act’)
The Group is committed to conducting its business with the
highest degree of integrity. This commitment includes a zero-
tolerance approach towards all forms of bribery, corruption,
fraud and theft. The Group has in place an appropriate policy,
which sets out how employees must act to ensure that our
zero-tolerance approach to bribery and corruption is upheld,
and regularly re-enforces its Code of Ethics. In addition, our
employee Code of Conduct (the ‘Code of Conduct’) sets out the
requirements and guidelines on expected behaviours for all
employees to act with honesty, integrity and fairness to others
to ensure the Group meets the highest standards of conduct in
business dealings. The Code of Conduct, which encompasses a
high-level overview of each of the Group’s more detailed policies,
including the Code of Ethics, is available on our internal intranet
system and hard copies can be obtained from our Human
Resources teams.
On joining the Group, whether by way of acquisition or otherwise,
all employees will be made aware of these standards and
procedures. Senior employees are also required to sign an
annual statement of compliance with the Code of Ethics.
Appropriate Board approved procedures are in place to
prevent employees and other associated persons committing
offences under the Act. Engaging in fraud, bribery or corruption
is unlawful and any employee, director or officer found to have
breached the Code of Conduct will be liable to disciplinary
action which may result in dismissal or other serious sanctions.
Breaches of the Code of Conduct by third parties may result in
immediate termination for breach of all contracts with the Group.
These procedures are subject to regular monitoring and review.
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
90 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Modern Slavery Act
We are committed to implementing and enforcing effective
systems and controls to ensure slavery and human trafficking is
not taking place anywhere in our supply chains or in any part of
our business. To ensure a high level of understanding of the risks
of modern slavery and human trafficking in our supply chains and
our business, all Directors have been briefed on the subject and
we have provided training to relevant employees. The Company’s
modern slavery compliance statement, pursuant to section 54(1)
of the Modern Slavery Act 2015, for the financial year ended
31December 2025 was approved by the Board in January 2026.
Further details can be found on page 41.
Whistleblowing
The Group is committed to a culture of openness, honesty and
accountability and believes that it is fundamental that any
concerns our employees have can be raised in confidence and
without fear of victimisation. To this end, the Group has in place a
whistleblowing policy which encourages employees to report any
malpractice, illegalities, wrongdoing or matters of similar concern
(together ‘ethical wrongdoing’) by other employees, former
employees, contractors, suppliers or advisors. Examples of ethical
wrongdoing include bribery, corruption, fraud, dishonesty and
illegal practices which may endanger employees or other parties.
Any matters raised through the whistleblowing process are
reported to the Committee. Where such matters are raised a
proportionate investigation is undertaken either by independent
management or an appropriate external party under the
direction and guidance of the Committee.
During the current and preceding financial years, a number
of matters were raised via the whistleblowing process. These
mostly related to employee related grievances and were
escalated to the relevant manager or other investigating officer
for investigation. One matter reported last year has been
successfully closed during the year under review which, following
internal investigation, resulted in an employee being dismissed
for gross misconduct due to a violation of Group IT policy. In the
year under review a total of three matters were raised via the
Group’s whistleblowing process. One of these matters, concerning
various alleged grievances, was investigated by HR and resulted
in no action being taken. The two other matters reported during
the year under review (one relating to alleged theft of waste
material from one of the Group’s processing facilities and the
other relating to alleged misuse of a Company vehicle) were
investigated, with both investigations concluding in January
2026. The first investigation found no evidence of impropriety,
confirming that the waste material had been collected by a
registered waste carrier. In the second matter, while a vehicle was
used otherwise than in accordance with Group policy, no further
action was considered necessary in light of the circumstances.
Chris Girling
Chair, Audit Committee
2 March 2026
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
91
Audit Committee Report
Continued >
Nomination Committee Report
Dear Shareholder.
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the Nomination Committee’s Report for the financial year ended 31 December 2025.
Objectives
The key objective of the Nomination Committee (the ‘Committee’) is to monitor the performance, appropriateness and future
succession of the Company’s executive and Board talent in order to ensure that the Board comprises individuals with the right blend of
skills, knowledge, experience and diversity to maintain a high degree of effectiveness in discharging its responsibilities. Appointments
to the Board are recommended, as appropriate, by the Committee. Board appointments are subject to approval by the Board as a
whole.
Composition
The Committee has been chaired by myself with remaining membership, for the financial year ended 31 December 2025, comprised of
the Company’s three other Independent Non-Executive Directors. As at the date on which this Report was approved by the Directors of
the Company, the Committee membership is comprised of myself, as chair, and the three other Independent Non-Executive Directors
of the Company. Membership of the Committee is therefore in compliance with Provision 17 of the Financial Reporting Council’s UK
Corporate Governance Code 2024 (the ‘Code’). Further details relating to the membership and composition of the Committee can be
found in the Corporate Governance Report on pages 70 to 83.
Roles and Responsibilities
The principal responsibilities of the Committee are:
reviewing the structure, size and composition of the Board and its committees;
identifying and nominating candidates to fill Board vacancies;
keeping up to date and fully aware of the strategic and commercial changes affecting the Group and the markets in which it
operates;
keeping under review the leadership needs of the business with a view to ensuring the continued ability to compete effectively in
the marketplace;
assessing the roles of the existing Directors in office to ensure that there continues to be a balanced board in terms of skills,
knowledge, experience and diversity;
considering the continuing service of a Director; and
providing recommendations for reappointment of Directors retiring by rotation.
The Committee reports to the Board on how it has discharged its responsibilities. The full terms of reference of the Committee are
available on the Company’s website, or on request to the Company Secretary.
The Committee undertakes its responsibilities proactively, recognising it is important to plan Board succession well in advance, and to
ensure that the Company’s Board and executive leadership skills are fully aligned to the Company’s long-term strategy. The Committee
therefore takes care to ensure that there is a continuous pipeline of high-performing and executive talent beneath Board level.
Further information relating to Board composition, succession and evaluation can be found in the Corporate Governance Report on
pages 77 to 81.
What the Committee did
The main focus of the Committee’s work during 2025 and up to the date of this report included:
following initiation of a review process in October 2025, reviewing the performance of the Executive Directors and concluding that
their performance continues to be effective and that each demonstrates sufficient commitment to their role (further details of the
Board Performance Review can be found in the Corporate Governance Report on page 81);
recommending to the Board the appointment, with effect from 1 October 2025, of Ryan Govender as Chief Financial Officer and
Board member, in succession to Yvonne Monaghan;
launching a recruitment process to facilitate the appointment of an additional Independent Non-Executive Director to succeed
Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair;
recommending to the Board the appointment, with effect from 1 June 2026, of Lysanne Gray as an Independent Non-Executive
Director and as successor to Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair;
recommending to the Board the appointment, with effect from 1 June 2026, of Nicola Keach as Senior Independent Director in
succession to Chris Girling;
reviewing the independence of each Non-Executive Director, including each Non-Executive Director’s actual, potential or perceived
conflicts of interest and concluding that each Non-Executive Director was independent in character and judgment and that there
were no circumstances that were likely to affect their judgment;
considering the structure and composition of the Board and, in particular, succession planning for both Executive and
Non-Executive roles as well as key management roles within the Group;
reviewing the Committee’s terms of reference and conducting the annual review of the Committee’s performance;
recommending each Director for re-election (or, for Ryan Govender, election) at the Annual General Meeting; and
reviewing, approving and recommending that the Board adopt a documented Board diversity policy.
92 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Nomination Committee Report
Continued >
Appointment of New Directors
During the year, the Committee undertook recruitment processes to facilitate the appointment of both an Executive Director, to
succeed Yvonne Monaghan as Chief Financial Officer (the ‘CFO Search’), and an additional Independent Non-Executive Director to
succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair (the ‘NED Search’).
The selection process was led by me and assisted by the Group Chief Executive Officer and the Independent Non-Executive Directors.
The Committee used the services of two executive search firms to identify suitable candidates: MWM Consulting (MWM), for the
CFO Search and Russell Reynolds (RR), for the NED Search. MWM were previously used by the Company for the recruitment of an
Independent Non-Executive Director. Both MWM and RR were considered to be independent of, and to have no other links with, the
Company or its Directors in connection with their respective search assignments.
Position specifications were prepared, discussed and agreed for both appointments in conjunction with input from the Executive
Directors and the Committee, setting out the desired attributes, experience and personal style for the successful candidates. Potential
candidates were also required to demonstrate that they had sufficient time available to devote to the role.
In executing the search strategy for the CFO Search and the NED Search, and to ensure a diverse range of candidates, wide pools
of potential candidates were identified. From this, long-lists were compiled and, following further review, a number of individuals
were profiled and considered by the Company. Short-lists were then drawn up and candidates were interviewed by me and another
Committee member before progressing to the second stage of interviews with the Chief Executive Officer. Candidates who were
considered to best match the role requirements were then put forward to meet with the Senior Independent Director and other
members of the Board.
After detailed discussions and careful consideration, the Nomination Committee concluded and recommended to the Board that:
Ryan Govender be appointed to the Board and as Chief Financial Officer of the Company with effect from 1 October 2025 in
succession to Yvonne Monaghan; and
Lysanne Gray be appointed to the Board of the Company as an Independent Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June 2026
and succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair following the announcement of the Company’s interim results for the 6 months
ending 30 June 2026.
Diversity Policy
Our policy remains to make appointments based on merit and to identify the most suitable candidate to join the Board having regard
to the individual’s skills, experience and knowledge. When considering succession plans the Board remains cognisant of the need to
ensure that there is a diverse range of individuals who are included in the plan. The business as a whole continues to promote diversity
and inclusion from within, particularly in respect of supporting female employees to progress up the career ladder. In furtherance of
the Group’s sustainability agenda, in November 2022, the Board approved for adoption a new Group wide Equality, Diversity & Inclusion
(ED&I) policy for publication internally and externally. This policy is intended as the overarching statement for the whole Group across
this topic and will apply to all employees, contractors and agency staff across the Group. Further details can be found on pages 36 and
37. In addition, in November 2025, following the Company’s admission, in August 2025, to the Equity Shares (Commercial Companies)
Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on London Stock Exchange plc’s Main Market for listed
securities, and upon the Nomination Committee’s recommendation, the Board adopted a Board diversity policy.
We are proud to have a diverse workforce and, as explained further on pages 36 to 37, we are committed to promoting Equity, Diversity
& Inclusion throughout the business to build a culture that is inclusive to all, actively values difference, ensures everyone is treated fairly
and is free from unlawful discrimination. Accordingly, the aim of our policy is to ensure that diversity in its broadest sense, including
gender, ethnicity, age, sexuality, social class, education, experience, ways of thinking and more, is reflected throughout the business
including within the composition of the Board, to provide the range of perspectives, insights and challenge needed to support good
decision making.
The Board notes that from 1 January 2025 until the retirement of Yvonne Monaghan as Chief Financial Officer on 1 October 2025, the
Company met the gender diversity targets under the UK Listing Rules and the FTSE Women Leaders Review, and had maintained
female representation in a senior Board position since 2007. As at 31 December 2025, the Board comprised 33% women and 67%
men, with 17% of the Board identifying as being from a minority ethnic background. Accordingly, at that date, the Company met the
UK Listing Rules and Parker Review target relating to ethnic diversity but did not meet the 40% gender representation target or the
requirement for a woman to hold one of the specified senior Board positions.
As previously disclosed, and in line with the Board’s diversity policy adopted in November 2025, the Board remains fully supportive of
the diversity targets set out in the UK Listing Rules, the FTSE Women Leaders Review and the Parker Review. The Board will continue
to promote diversity of gender, ethnicity, background and experience through its succession planning, taking account of the relevant
targets as vacancies arise and making appointments on merit against objective criteria. The Board recognises the competitive market
for diverse talent but remains committed to achieving alignment with the applicable targets over time.
In this regard, the Board is pleased to announce that, as part of its succession planning, Lysanne Gray will join the Board as an
Independent Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June 2026 and will succeed Chris Girling as Audit Committee Chair following the
announcement of the Group’s interim results for the six month period ended 30 June 2026. In addition, Nicola Keach, who has served as
an Independent Non-Executive Director of the Company since June 2022, will succeed Chris Girling as Senior Independent Director with
effect from 1 June 2026. As a result of these appointments, and assuming no further changes to Board composition, the Company will,
in addition to its current alignment with the UK Listing Rules and Parker Review target relating to minority ethnic representation, also
achieve alignment with the gender diversity targets set out in the UK Listing Rules and the FTSE Women Leaders Review — namely that
at least 40% of the Board will be women and that at least one of the specified senior Board positions will be held by a woman.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
93
The Board, together with the Nomination Committee, will:
continue to aim to ensure appropriate balance in all aspects of diversity in its broadest sense, including gender, ethnicity, age,
sexuality, social class, education, experience, ways of thinking and more, at Board and Senior Management level, without the need
for quotas;
seek to ensure that Board candidates bring the right skills, knowledge and experience to complement the existing balance of the
Board, taking into account the diversity benefits the candidate can bring to the Board’s composition;
only work with executive search consultants that have adopted a voluntary code of conduct addressing diversity;
take into account any regulatory requirements and best practice guidance when reviewing the balance and composition of, and
succession plans for, the Board and Senior Management, whilst having regard to the individual skill sets and the general and
sector-specific knowledge needed to drive corporate performance; and
remain fully aware of the need to ensure that the business recruits and maintains a diverse workforce.
Jock Lennox
Chair, Nomination Committee
2 March 2026
94 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Letter from Kirsty Homer, Chair of the Remuneration Committee
Dear Shareholder.
On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present our 2025 Directors’ Remuneration Report. This is our first Directors’ Remuneration
Report since the Company’s transition from AIM to the Main Market of the London Stock Exchange in August 2025. The report includes
our new Directors’ Remuneration Policy (“Policy), which will be put forward for binding shareholder approval at the 2026 AGM. It
also includes the Annual Report on Remuneration, describing how the current Policy was put into practice during 2025 and how the
proposed new Policy will be implemented in 2026.
Performance for 2025
The Group has delivered a strong performance for the financial year ended 31 December 2025. Total revenue for the year to
31December 2025 increased by 4.3% to £535.4 million (2024: £513.4 million). This increase delivered an adjusted profit before taxation of
£64.5 million (2024: £54.8 million). Further details on our performance in 2025 can be found in the Strategic Report on pages6 to 56.
Board Changes During the Year
Further to the announcements made on 24 March 2025 and 1 October 2025, after over 40 years with the Company including 17 years
as CFO, Yvonne Monaghan retired and stepped down as a Director of the Company on 1 October 2025. Yvonne completed a handover
to the new CFO, Ryan Govender, and continued to provide services to the Company and remained employed until 28 February 2026. In
accordance with our current Policy and relevant incentive plan rules, Yvonne was treated as a good leaver. Further details are set out
on page109.
Ryan Govender joined the Board as CFO on 1 October 2025. His base salary on appointment was £350,000 (slightly lower than his
predecessor). In accordance with the current Policy, Ryan receives pension contributions (or cash in lieu) in line with the rate available
to the majority of the wider UK workforce (6% of salary) and is eligible for a pro-rata bonus in respect of the period from 1 October
2025. Following his appointment to the Board, Ryan was granted an LTIP award of 150% of salary (noting that Ryan did not receive a
buyout award in respect of the 2025 award at his previous employer) which vests after 3 years (followed by a two year post-vesting
holding period) and is subject to the same performance conditions as other 2025 LTIP participants. Ryan also received buyout awards
to compensate for certain awards forfeited from his previous employer in connection with his appointment at the Company. Further
details are set out on page 109.
Annual Bonus Outcome for 2025
The 2025 maximum bonus opportunities for the CEO and CFO were 150% and 125% of salary respectively. For Ryan Govender, the bonus
opportunity was pro-rated based on his services as a Director for the period from joining the Board (1 October 2025) to 31 December
2025.
The performance targets for the 2025 bonus were based on Adjusted PBT excluding notional interest (76.5%), margin (8.5%) and
sustainability (15%). The Group’s performance for the financial year ended 31 December 2025 resulted in an overall bonus outcome for
2025 of 39.3% of maximum. Further details regarding 2025 bonus performance targets and performance against them are set out on
page107. The Committee is confident that this outcome appropriately reflects the performance delivered in 2025 and therefore did not
exercise any discretion.
2023 LTIP Outcome
Peter Egan and Yvonne Monaghan were granted awards under the LTIP on 8 March 2023. The awards were subject to performance
conditions over the three-year period to 31 December 2025, with 50% of the award based on Relative TSR performance compared to
the FTSE AIM All-Share Industrial Goods and Services Index and the remaining 50% based on Adjusted PBT per share. Both our TSR and
Adjusted PBT per share performance have been very strong over the period, significantly exceeding the maximum performance levels
set by the Committee. The overall vesting outcome was therefore 100% of maximum.
The Committee is confident that this outcome appropriately reflects the performance delivered over the three-year period and
therefore did not exercise any discretion. Further details are set out on page 108.
Advisers to the Remuneration Committee
During the year, we conducted a re-tender for the adviser to the Committee. The Committee was keen to ensure that we considered
fresh perspectives in anticipation of the Company’s transition to the Main Market and shareholder approval of a new Policy at the
2026 AGM. Several firms, including the incumbent adviser, were invited to participate in the process, which included the submission of a
formal response to our request for proposal and a face-to-face interview with shortlisted firms. The Committee unanimously decided
to appoint PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC), noting their significant experience advising on executive remuneration matters and
strength of the proposed team members. The Committee then worked closely with PwC in setting the Policy and its implementation for
2026.
Directors’ Remuneration Policy
As noted above, following the Company’s transition to the Main Market in August 2025, we are required to submit a Directors’
Remuneration Policy for binding shareholder approval at the 2026 AGM. The Committee took the opportunity to review the current
Policy to ensure it remains aligned to the business strategy, delivers a market competitive remuneration package and adheres to the
stronger corporate governance expectations as a Main Market business.
The Company’s existing approach to executive remuneration includes a base salary, benefits and pension, annual bonus and
performance based long-term incentive plan and has been strongly supported by shareholders. At this time, the Committee’s review
concluded that the existing remuneration structure remains broadly appropriate at the current time and therefore no changes to the
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
95
overall incentive structures are proposed, subject to the changes outlined below, many of which have been made to ensure the policy
remains fit for purpose as a Main Market listed company. However, the Committee intends to keep this under review as the business
strategy continues to evolve and may re-review the Policy before the normal triennial renewal in 2029.
The key changes under the new Policy are as follows:
Pension
As outlined in previous annual reports, Peter Egan’s pension contributions were previously frozen at the 2019 level (£41,613,
equivalent to c.8.6% of salary in 2025). In accordance with Provision 39 of the UK Corporate Governance Code, from 1 January 2026,
Peter’s pension contributions will reduce to 6% of salary, in line with the rate available to the majority of the wider UK workforce. The
contribution rate for Ryan Govender was set in line with this level on appointment.
Annual Bonus
The maximum bonus opportunity for Executive Directors under the Policy will be 150% of salary. The 2026 opportunity for the CEO
and CFO will be 150% and 125% of salary respectively (in line with previous years). Further details on the performance measures and
weightings for 2026 are set out below.
Bonuses for Executive Directors have historically been paid in cash. However, in order to align with Main Market best practice
and shareholder expectations, the Committee is introducing an element of bonus deferral under the new Policy for 2026. Where
an Executive Director has not met their shareholding requirement at the end of the financial year, at least one-third of any bonus
(after tax) must be invested in the Company’s shares to be held for a minimum of two years. Where the shareholding requirement
has been met, the bonus may be delivered in cash with no further deferral requirements, provided the Committee is satisfied that
sufficient measures are in place to apply malus / clawback provisions if required.
Long Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”)
The maximum LTIP opportunity for Executive Directors under the Policy will be 200% of salary. The 2026 LTIP opportunity for the CEO
and CFO will be 175% and 150% of salary respectively. Awards will vest after three years, based on performance measured over a
three-year period, and be subject to a two-year post-vesting holding period.
For reference, the 2025 LTIP opportunities were 150% and 125% of salary for the CEO and former CFO respectively. The increase
for 2026 brings the Executive Directors closer into line with typical market practice for a Main Market business of our size and
emphasises the importance of long term performance. Furthermore, the Committee is of the view that the additional headroom
under the Policy (up to 200% of salary) provides additional flexibility over the lifespan of the Policy.
Shareholding Requirement
The CEO and CFO will be subject to a shareholding requirement of 200% and 150% of salary respectively.
In order to ensure that the Policy is aligned with the expectations set out under Provision 36 of the UK Corporate Governance Code,
the Committee is introducing a post-employment shareholding requirement. After 1 January 2026, upon stepping down from the
Board, Executive Directors will be required to maintain a shareholding equivalent to:
100% of their in-employment requirement for the first year (or the shareholding upon stepping down if lower); and
50% of their in-employment requirement for the second year (or 50% of the shareholding upon stepping down if lower).
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Letter from Kirsty Homer, Chair of the Remuneration Committee
96 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Letter from Kirsty Homer, Chair of the Remuneration Committee Continued >
As part of the review, the Committee considered market benchmarking data compared to Main Market companies of a similar size
to the Company across a broad range of sectors (excluding financial services companies). The Company was included in the FTSE
250 index from September 2025 (the first index review following the Company’s transition to the Main Market in August 2025). The
Company’s market capitalisation positioned it towards the lower end of the constituents of the FTSE 250 index, and therefore the
Committee considered a comparator group based on +/- 20 companies either side of the Company’s market cap (i.e. including FTSE 250
and Small Cap businesses of similar size to the Company). The charts below illustrate the market data, together with the 2025 and 2026
remuneration positioning (including salary changes for 2026 as outlined below).
Notes:
Total target remuneration: Defined as the sum of salary, the value of employer pension contributions (or cash in lieu), the value of any on-target bonus and the on-target expected
value of the annual long-term incentive award.
Total maximum remuneration: Defined as the sum of salary, the value of employer pension contributions (or cash in lieu), the maximum value of any bonus and the maximum value
of an annual long-term incentive award.
Peer Group: The benchmarking peer group consisted of the +/- 20 companies either side of the Company’s market cap as follows: A.G. Barr, Alfa Financial Software Holdings, AO
World, ASOS, Aston Martin Lagonda Global Holdings, Atalaya Mining Copper, Auction Technology Group, Avon Technologies, Bloomsbury Publishing, C&C Group, Crest Nicholson
Holdings, DFS Furniture, DiscoverIE Group, Dr. Martens, Forterra, Future, Galliford Try, Goodwin, Harworth Group, Hilton Food Group, Hollywood Bowl Group, Hunting, Ibstock, Kier
Group, Marshalls, ME Group International, Moonpig Group, Morgan Advanced Materials, NCC Group, On The Beach Group, Paypoint, Pinewood Technologies Group, PPHE Hotel
Group, Rank Group, Senior, THG, Victrex, W A G Payment Solutions, Wickes Group, ZIGUP
This illustrates that the CEO is positioned below the median level and the CFO is positioned around the lower quartile (recognising that
he is new in role).
The Committee engaged extensively with the Company’s largest shareholders in relation to the proposed Policy and its
implementation for 2026. Further details are set out below.
The full Directors’ Remuneration Policy to be put forward for shareholder approval at the 2026 AGM is set out on pages 98 to 105.
Implementation of the New Policy for 2026
Base Salary
The market benchmarking review highlighted that the base salary for our CEO, Peter Egan, is significantly below the market lower
quartile and that this, together with a slightly lower long term incentive opportunity, delivers a total remuneration package which is
below the market level for a company of our size and does not reflect Peter’s experience and performance track record.
The Company’s resilience during the pandemic and its performance in recent years has been spearheaded by Peter, who has proved
himself to be an exceptionally capable leader since his appointment to the role in January 2019. Under his stewardship, the Company
has established itself as a profitable and cash-generative business with a strong balance sheet and a long-standing record of
increasing dividends, demonstrating both financial resilience and a clear commitment to shareholder returns. In addition, Peter has
overseen the successful execution and integration of multiple M&A transactions, further strengthening the Company’s strategic
position and long-term growth prospects. Given the performance of the business under this leadership, our expectations of future
growth and the additional complexity associated therewith, we believe that it is the right time to address the below market level
positioning of Peter’s reward package.
The Committee noted that this low market positioning was not simply a feature of using a Main Market comparator group - compared
to AIM-listed companies, Peter’s base salary is also relatively low for a business of our size and his experience and performance. The
Committee therefore determined that appropriate steps should be taken to address this issue.
In determining the appropriate approach, the Committee and the CEO were cognisant of the wider workforce increase level and
shareholder views regarding above workforce increases. The Committee therefore concluded that it would be appropriate to phase
the salary increases over multiple years to achieve a market positioning around the median level over time. In this context, the
Committee decided that Peter’s salary would increase from £484,509 to £510,000 (an increase of around 5%) with effect from 1 January
2026. The Committee will review the approach to further increases in subsequent years, but we note that increases over the next few
years may be above the wider workforce level in this context.
Total target Total maximum
(£’000) Salary
remuneration remuneration
Upper quartile 651 2,005 3,165
Median 589 1,628 2,393
Lower quartile 532 1,379 1,961
JSG 2025 485 1,326 1,980
JSG 2026 510 1,459 2,198
£4,000k
£3,000k
£2,000k
£1,000k
£0k
Remuneration
Total target Total maximum
(£’000) Salary
remuneration remuneration
Upper quartile 452 1,275 1,888
Median 412 1,110 1,620
Lower quartile 358 942 1,290
JSG 2025 350 905 1,334
JSG 2026 359 927 1,367
£2,000k
£1,500k
£1,000k
£500k
£0k
Remuneration
CEO
LQ-M
CFO
M-UQ Current Proposed
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
97
Although the market benchmarking review also highlighted similar findings for the base salary of our CFO, Ryan Govender (£350,000,
which was set slightly below his predecessor), the Committee concluded that this positioning reflects that he is new in role but will
keep this under review in subsequent years as he develops in role. Ryan received a salary increase of 2.5% to £358,750 with effect from
1January 2026, such increase being in line with, and in some cases lower than, that for the Group’s wider employee population.
Pension
As noted above, the CEO’s pension contribution will reduce from the current level (£41,613, equivalent to c.8.6% of 2025 salary) to 6% of
salary in line with the rate availability to the majority of the wider UK workforce. The CFO’s pension contribution was set at 6% of salary
on appointment and will remain unchanged for 2026.
Annual Bonus
The maximum bonus opportunity for the CEO and CFO will be 150% and 125% of salary respectively, unchanged from 2025. The bonus
will be subject to adjusted PBT (75%), adjusted operating margin (15%) and sustainability measures (10%).
In accordance with the new Policy, where an Executive Director has not met their shareholding requirement at the end of the financial
year, at least one-third of any bonus (after tax) must be invested in Company shares to be held for a minimum of two years.
LTIP
Subject to approval of the new Policy at the 2026 AGM, the CEO and CFO will be granted LTIP awards of 175% and 150% of salary,
respectively. The awards will be subject to performance conditions over the three-year period to 31 December 2028 based on Relative
TSR (50%) and cumulative adjusted fully diluted EPS growth (50%). The awards will vest after three years and be subject to a two-year
post-vesting holding period. Further details are set out on page 112.
Non-Executive Director Fees
The Committee reviewed the fee for the Chair of the Board in the context of the Company’s transition from AIM to the Main Market,
and was particularly cognisant of the expanded responsibilities and time commitments of the role in this context. Market data, based
on the same comparator group as the CEO, also highlighted that the current fee level for the Chair of the Board is significantly below
the lower quartile. In line with the approach taken for the CEO, the Committee resolved to seek to more closely align the fee to typical
market levels on a phased basis over time. The Committee determined that the same proportionate increase as the CEO (around 5%)
would apply to the fee for the Chair of the Board with effect from 1 January 2026 (increasing the Chair’s fee from £159,628 to £168,088)
and would be kept under review in future years.
The Chair and Executive Directors similarly reviewed the base fee for the Non-Executive Directors in the context of the additional
responsibilities as a Main Market role and a below lower quartile positioning of the current fee. They concluded that an increase in line
with the CEO and Chair (around 5%) would be appropriate with effect from 1 January 2026, with increases in future years to be kept
under review.
Shareholder Engagement
In November 2025, I wrote to the Company’s largest shareholders covering approximately 68% of the Company’s issued share capital, as
well as the main UK proxy agencies, to outline the Committee’s proposed Policy and its implementation for 2026, including the phased
approach to salary and fee increases. We received responses covering approximately 55% of our register and were delighted with the
positive feedback received. Further details on the feedback received is set out on page 105. On behalf of the Committee, I would like to
thank shareholders for their input and engagement during this consultation, and throughout the year.
Conclusion
As ever, I am very grateful for the support and guidance given to me throughout the year by my fellow members of the Remuneration
Committee.
Shareholders’ views on executive remuneration are very important to the Board. Should you have any questions, comments or
feedback on remuneration matters at the Company, please contact me via the Company Secretary.
I hope that you will support the Company’s resolutions to approve both the Directors’ Remuneration Report and the Directors’
Remuneration Policy at the 2026 AGM.
Kirsty Homer
Chair, Remuneration Committee
2 March 2026
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Letter from Kirsty Homer, Chair of the Remuneration Committee Continued >
98 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ Remuneration Policy
Overview
The Committee reviews the Company’s remuneration philosophy and structure each year to ensure that the remuneration framework
remains effective in supporting the Company’s business objectives, in line with best practice, and fairly rewards individuals for the
contribution that they make to the business, having regard to the size and complexity of the Group’s operations and the need to retain,
motivate and attract employees of the highest calibre.
The Committee intends that base salary and total remuneration of Executive Directors should be market competitive. Remuneration
is periodically benchmarked against equivalent roles in a suitable comparator group with the aim of paying neither significantly
above nor below the market level. The Committee also considers general pay and employment conditions of all employees within the
Group and is sensitive to these, to prevailing market conditions, and to governance trends when assessing the level of salaries and
remuneration packages of Executive Directors.
The total remuneration package links corporate and individual performance with an appropriate balance between short and
long term elements, and fixed and variable components. The remuneration policy is designed to incentivise executives to meet the
Company’s strategic objectives, such that a significant portion of total remuneration is performance related, based on a mixture of
internal targets linked to the Company’s strategic business drivers (which can be easily measured, understood and accepted by both
executives and shareholders) and appropriate external comparator groups.
The Committee considers that the targets set for the different elements of performance related remuneration are both appropriate
and demanding in the context of the business environment and the challenges with which the Group is faced.
Prior to proposing the adoption of new or amended employee share schemes, the Company will consult in advance with, and seek
feedback from, major shareholders. New schemes may need to be proposed in order for the Company to be able to continue to operate
its executive and all employee share schemes, for example, due to the incumbent scheme nearing the end of its lifetime. Existing
schemes may need to be amended to reflect current or emerging best practice. Following any consultation process, the adoption of
new or amended employee share schemes will then be proposed at the next relevant AGM.
Full details of all current schemes are included within this Report.
Remuneration Policy Table (Executive Directors)
The current remuneration of Executive Directors comprises base salary, taxable benefits, pension, annual bonus and a Long-Term
Incentive Plan (“LTIP). Details of how the various components of remuneration are delivered are set out below.
Component and Link to
Strategy Operation Maximum Opportunity
Performance
Measures
Base Salary
Reflects the individual’s role,
experience and contribution.
Set at levels to attract and
retain individuals of the
calibre required to lead the
business and to ensure no
over reliance on variable pay.
Salaries are appropriately benchmarked and
reflect the role, job size and responsibility as
well as the performance and effectiveness of
the individual.
Base salaries are reviewed annually with any
increases normally taking effect on 1 January
of each year.
Whilst there is no prescribed
formulaic maximum, any
increases will take into
account prevailing market
and economic conditions
as well as increases for the
wider workforce.
Higher increases may be
applied to reflect significant
progression or development
in role, experience, a
significant increase in the
scope and complexity
of the role, growth in the
business, or any other
such circumstances as the
Remuneration Committee
considers appropriate.
Any increase will be
appropriately explained in
the relevant year’s annual
report.
None.
Benefits
To provide a competitive level
of benefits in order to attract
and retain individuals of the
calibre required to lead the
business.
Benefits typically include, but are not limited
to, the provision of a car or car allowance
and private medical insurance for Executive
Directors and their dependents.
Executive Directors may also participate in
any all-employee share schemes on the same
basis as other employees.
The cost of providing
these benefits can vary in
accordance with market
conditions, which will,
therefore, determine the
maximum value.
None.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
99
Component and Link to
Strategy Operation Maximum Opportunity
Performance
Measures
Pension
To ensure the Company can
provide a fully competitive
level of benefits in order to
attract and retain individuals
of the calibre required to lead
the business.
Executive Directors are invited to participate
in the Company’s defined contribution
pension scheme or to take a cash alternative
allowance in lieu of pension entitlement.
In addition, the CEO is a deferred member
of the Company’s defined benefit pension
scheme. The CEO left active pensionable
service on 31 December 2014, and has
a deferred entitlement to a pension at
retirement under this scheme in accordance
with the scheme rules.
The contribution level will be
aligned with that available
to the majority of the wider
UK workforce (currently
approximately 6% of salary).
None.
Annual Bonus
To incentivise and reward the
achievement of stretching
one-year key performance
targets set by the Committee
at the start of each financial
year.
The annual bonus is normally earned by
the achievement of one-year appropriately
stretching performance targets set by the
Committee at the start of each financial year.
Where an Executive Director has not met
their shareholding requirement at the end
of the financial year, Executive Directors will
be required to invest at least one-third of
any bonus (after tax) in Company shares to
be held for two years. If the shareholding
requirement has been met, the bonus may
be delivered in cash with no further deferral
requirement, provided the Committee is
satisfied that sufficient measures are in
place to apply malus/clawback provisions if
required.
The Committee retains the discretion to
adjust the targets to take account of events
which were not foreseen or allowed for at
the start of the year when targets were set,
for example, acquisitions in the year. The
Committee also retains the discretion to
adjust the bonus outcomes and/or targets
to ensure that they reflect the underlying
business performance or any other factors
that the Committee deems appropriate.
The annual bonus is subject to malus and
clawback provisions, as set out further below.
The maximum bonus
opportunity for Executive
Directors is 150% of salary.
At least 50% of
the bonus will be
based on financial
measures. The
remainder may
be based on non-
financial, strategic,
ESG or individual
performance
measures.
Up to 20% of
the bonus will
be payable
for threshold
performance,
increasing to 50% for
target performance
and 100% payable
for achievement
of maximum
performance. A
straight-line basis
will apply from
threshold to target
and target to
maximum.
100 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ Remuneration Policy Continued >
Component and Link to
Strategy Operation Maximum Opportunity
Performance
Measures
LTIP
To incentivise and reward
Executive Directors for the
delivery of longer-term
financial performance and
shareholder value.
Share-based to provide
alignment with shareholder
interests.
An annual grant of conditional shares or nil/
nominal cost options over ordinary shares.
Awards may be granted in conjunction with a
linked HMRC tax advantaged Company Share
Option Plan (“CSOP) option. No additional
gross value can be delivered from the exercise
of any CSOP option.
Awards will normally be subject to a three-
year performance period. Participants are
required to hold vested LTIP shares (net of any
shares sold to meet tax and social security
liabilities) for a period of two years post
vesting.
LTIP awards may be granted with an
entitlement to dividend equivalents on any
shares which vest.
The Committee retains the discretion to
adjust the targets to take account of events
which were not foreseen or allowed for at
the start of the year when targets were set.
The Committee also retains the discretion to
adjust the outcomes and/or targets to ensure
that they reflect the underlying business
performance or any other factors that the
Committee deems appropriate.
The LTIP is subject to malus and clawback
provisions, as set out further below.
The maximum LTIP
opportunity for Executive
Directors is 200% of salary.
At least 50%
of any award
granted will be
based on financial
performance
measures. The
remainder of the
award may be
based on non-
financial, strategic
or ESG measures.
Up to 25% of any
award is payable
for the achievement
of threshold
performance,
with 100% of any
award payable for
the achievement
of maximum
performance.
Vesting between
threshold and
maximum will be
determined on a
straight-line basis.
Differences Between Executive Directors’ and Employees’ Remuneration
The remuneration of Executive Directors is structurally similar to that of those members of the wider workforce who are not paid on
an hourly basis. In contrast, hourly paid employees are remunerated primarily through fixed pay, with limited participation in variable
incentive arrangements. A higher proportion of total remuneration for Executive Directors is linked to variable pay given the nature of
their role, consistent with the responsibilities and strategic impact of their positions.
Employee remuneration includes base pay (salary or hourly wages, as applicable), pension contributions and benefits (which vary
based on role, seniority, location and legacy business in light of various M&A activity). Pension arrangements vary across the Group,
primarily due to legacy reasons where the Group has acquired a business, but the rate available to the majority of the UK workforce is
around 6% of salary or earnings as appropriate.
The Group Management Board and other senior employees participate in an annual bonus similar to that for the Executive Directors
(except that divisional roles have an element of their bonus linked to the performance of their division, and there is no deferral of
bonus awards below Board level). In addition, the Group operates annual performance-related bonus schemes for certain eligible
employees across the wider workforce. These schemes are designed to incentivise eligible employees’ delivery of key Group and / or
divisional operational, financial, and strategic objectives. Bonus opportunities for the wider workforce are determined by role, seniority,
and market benchmarks, and are subject to performance measures relevant to each function. Performance metrics typically include
financial performance, operational efficiency, customer satisfaction, and individual objectives.
The Group Management Board and certain other senior employees may also participate in the LTIP based on the same performance
conditions as the Executive Directors (although no post-vesting holding period will apply below Board level).
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
101
Illustrations of the Application of the Remuneration Policy
The Company’s policy is to provide a total remuneration package that links corporate and individual performance with an appropriate
balance between short and long term elements, and fixed and variable components. The charts below show an example of the
remuneration that could be receivable by the current Executive Directors under the Policy in respect of the 2026 financial year.
Each bar gives an indication of the minimum amount of remuneration payable, remuneration payable at target and at maximum
performance to each Executive Director under the Policy. Each of the bars is broken down to show how the total under each scenario is
made up of fixed elements of remuneration, the annual bonus and the LTIP.
Peter Egan (Chief Executive Officer)
Fixed
£0.0m£0.5m £1.0m£1.5m £2.0m£2.5m
Maximum
Target
Minimum
100%
Maximum +50%
Share Price
Appreciation
34% 17%
29%
35%
28% 32%
40%
40%
25%
21%
£558,000
£1,387,000
£2,216,000
£2,662,000
Bonus
LTIP
50% Share Price Appreciation
Ryan Govender (Chief Financial Officer)
Maximum +50%
Share Price
Appreciation
Maximum
Target
Minimum
100%
24%
27%
29% 32%
44% 25%
£0.0m £0.5m £1.0m £1.5m £2.0m £2.5m
30%
39%
33% 16%
£395,000
£888,000
£1,381,000
£1,650,000
Fixed
Bonus
LTIP
50% Share Price Appreciation
The above illustration is based on a number of assumptions:
Fixed remuneration includes:
Base salary as at 1 January 2026;
Value of taxable benefits received in 2025 (annualised for Ryan Govender) as shown in the single figure table on page 106; and
Pension contribution (or cash in lieu) of 6% of salary.
A maximum bonus opportunity equal to 150% and 125% of salary for the CEO and CFO respectively - minimum, target and maximum
payout has been assumed at 0%, 50% and 100% of the maximum opportunity respectively.
An LTIP award equal to 175% and 150% of salary for the CEO and CFO respectively - minimum, target and maximum payout has been
assumed at 0%, 50% and 100% of the maximum opportunity respectively.
Share price appreciation has been calculated as a 50% increase in the value of the LTIP between the date of grant and vesting.
No dividend accrual has been incorporated in the values relating to the LTIP.
Note that percentages may not add to 100 due to rounding.
Malus and Clawback
To reflect best practice, and to align with shareholder interests, malus and clawback provisions apply to awards under the annual
bonus and LTIP schemes (together ‘Awards’).
Those provisions enable the Committee to decide, up until the third anniversary of an Award becoming payable, in circumstances in
which the Committee considers it appropriate, to reduce the quantum of an Award, cancel an Award or impose further conditions on
an Award. The provisions also enable the Committee to decide, up until the third anniversary of an Award becoming payable that, in
the relevant circumstances, the participant must repay to the Company (or any person nominated by the Company) some or all of the
cash or shares received under an Award.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ Remuneration Policy Continued >
102 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ Remuneration Policy Continued >
The circumstances in which the Committee may apply the malus and clawback provisions include, but are not limited to:
a material misstatement of the Company’s audited financial results;
a miscalculation of the extent to which a performance target has been met;
a material failure of risk management by the Company;
serious reputational damage to the Company;
misconduct by a participant; and
a material downturn in the financial position of the Company.
Shareholding Requirements
In order that their interests are linked with those of shareholders, Executive Directors are expected to build and maintain a personal
shareholding in the Company. The requirement for the CEO and CFO is 200% and 150% of salary, respectively, to be achieved over a
period of five years from the date of their appointment. For the purpose of this requirement, the shareholding will include beneficially
owned shares and (on a net of tax basis) any vested but unexercised awards (including any awards subject to a holding period) and
any unvested awards which are not subject to performance conditions.
Upon stepping down from the Board, Executive Directors will be required to maintain a shareholding equivalent to:
100% of their in-employment requirement for the first year (or the shareholding upon stepping down if lower); and
50% of their in-employment requirement for the second year (or 50% of the shareholding upon stepping down if lower).
For the purposes of the post-employment shareholding requirement, only shares acquired from share awards granted after the 2026
AGM will be included. The Committee has the discretion to disapply the post-employment shareholding requirement in exceptional
circumstances.
Performance Measures and Targets
Annual bonus
The Committee selects annual bonus performance measures each year to incentivise Executive Directors to achieve financial targets
and specific strategic objectives for the year. These measures are aligned with the Key Performance Indicators we use as a business
to monitor performance against our strategic priorities, as shown on pages 19 and 27. The relevant performance targets are set at or
following the start of each year with reference to internal and external forecasts and the Group’s strategic targets.
Long-Term Incentive Plan
The long-term performance metrics are in line with the long-term strategic focus of the Company and will be reviewed as required in
line with any changes in strategic direction. Targets will be set by reference to internal budgets and strategic plans, industry backdrop
and external expectations to ensure they represent appropriately stretching levels of performance.
Approach to Recruitment Remuneration
In determining the appropriate remuneration for a new Executive Director, the Committee will take into consideration all relevant
factors (including quantum, nature of remuneration and the jurisdiction from which the candidate was recruited) to ensure that
arrangements are in the best interests of both the Company and its shareholders. Any package offered will be structured so as to
be sufficiently competitive (but not excessively so) so that senior, high calibre candidates can be appointed, to promote the long-
term success of the Company. Consideration will be given to the candidate’s skills, knowledge and experience in determining the
appropriate remuneration.
Remuneration will generally be in accordance with the same Remuneration Policy as that which applies to existing Executive Directors.
The maximum variable remuneration opportunity (excluding any buyout awards) would be 350% of salary, in line with the Policy.
Nevertheless, other arrangements may be established specifically to facilitate recruitment of a particular individual, albeit that any
such arrangement would be made within the context of minimising the cost to the Company. An example might be the need to provide
a level of compensation for forfeiture of bonus entitlements and/or unvested incentive awards from an existing employer, if any, or the
additional provision of benefits in kind and other allowances, such as relocation, education and tax equalisation, as may be required
in order to achieve a successful recruitment. Any arrangement established specifically to facilitate the recruitment of a particular
individual would be intended to be of comparable form, timing, commercial value and capped as appropriate. The quantum, form and
structure of any buyout arrangement will be determined by the Committee taking into account the terms of the previous arrangement
being forfeited. The buyout may be structured as an award of cash or shares, however, the Committee will normally have a preference
for replacement awards to be made in the form of shares, deliverable no earlier than the previous awards.
Where an Executive Director is appointed from either within the Company or following corporate activity/reorganisation, the normal
policy would be to honour any legacy incentive arrangements to run off in line with the original terms and conditions.
The policy on the recruitment of new Non-Executive Directors would be to apply the same remuneration elements as for the existing
Non-Executive Directors.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
103
Executive Directors’ Service Agreements
It is the Company’s policy that Executive Directors have rolling service agreements. Peter Egan is employed under a service agreement
dated 30 March 2018, as amended by a Variation Letter dated 21 December 2018 relating to his appointment to Chief Executive Officer
from 1 January 2019. Ryan Govender is employed under a service agreement dated 23 March 2025.
The current Executive Directors’ service agreements contain the key terms shown in the table below. Copies of the service agreements
are available for inspection at the company’s registered office.
Provision Detailed Terms
Remuneration
1
Base salary, pension and benefits
Car benefit
Family private health insurance
Life assurance
30 days’ paid annual leave
Participation in the annual bonus plan, subject to plan rules
Participation in the LTIP, subject to plan rules
Change of Control No special contractual provisions apply in the event of a change of control
Notice Period Up to 12 months’ notice from the Company and up to 12 months’ notice from the Director
In respect of the CEO’s service contract:
12 months’ notice from the Company
6 months’ notice from the Director
In respect of the CFO’s service contract:
12 months’ notice from the Company
12 months’ notice from the Director
Termination
2
Payment in lieu of notice for a period of up to 12 months
Restrictive Covenants During employment and for a period of up to 12 months after leaving
Note 1: Whilst service agreements outline the components of remuneration payable, they do not prescribe how remuneration levels may be adjusted from year to year.
Note 2: In the event of termination without cause, the Company has a contractual obligation to compensate the Executive Director for the unexpired period of his or her
notice. The Company will seek to reduce this payment by means of the Executive Director’s duty to mitigate this payment wherever possible.
Policy on Payment for Loss of Office
The Remuneration Committee will consider the treatment on termination having regard to all of the relevant facts and circumstances
available at that time. This policy applies both to any negotiations linked to notice periods on a termination and any treatments that
the Committee may choose to apply under the discretions available to it under the terms of the Company’s incentive plans (including
any legacy plans). The potential treatments on termination under these plans are set out below, and any retained awards remain
subject to the relevant malus and clawback provisions. The termination treatment under any HMRC-approved all-employee share
plans will be in line with HMRC rules for such plans.
Under all service contracts, the Company can opt to terminate immediately by making a payment in lieu of the notice period or part
of it. Payments in lieu of notice are normally to be made in monthly instalments. Unless the Company decides otherwise, the Executive
Directors have a duty to mitigate their losses arising from termination of their employment where payment in lieu of notice is offered in
which case any replacement earnings earned in what would otherwise have been the notice period would reduce the obligation on the
Company to make payments in lieu.
Under the annual bonus, if, during the performance period or at any time prior to payment of a bonus, a participant:
ceases to be employed due to ill-health, injury or disability, redundancy, retirement from their employment with the Group, the
company by which the participant is employed ceasing to be a member of the Group, the transfer of the undertaking or part-
undertaking in which the participant is employed to a person or body corporate outside the Group or for any other reason at
the discretion of the Remuneration Committee, they will remain eligible for a bonus in respect of the relevant financial year. Any
bonus will normally be paid at the normal time, or if the Committee so decides, immediately on the participant ceasing to be
in employment (acceleration will be automatic in cases of death). The bonus will remain subject to the relevant performance
conditions and will normally be pro-rated by reference to the proportion of the performance period for which the participant
remained employed, unless the Committee determines otherwise; or
ceases to be employed for any other reason, they will not be entitled to receive a bonus in respect of the relevant financial year.
Under the LTIP, if, during the performance or vesting period, a participant:
ceases to be employed due to ill-health, injury or disability, redundancy, retirement from their employment with the Group, the
company by which the participant is employed ceasing to be a member of the Group, the transfer of the undertaking or part-
104 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Directors’ Remuneration Policy Continued >
undertaking in which the participant is employed to a person or body corporate outside the Group or for any other reason at the
discretion of the Remuneration Committee, awards will be retained and vest in the normal course, or if the Committee so decides,
immediately on the participant ceasing to be in employment (acceleration will be automatic in cases of death). Awards will remain
subject to the relevant performance conditions and will normally be pro-rated by reference to the proportion of the vesting or
performance period for which the participant remained employed, unless the Committee determines otherwise; or
ceases to be employed for any other reason, their awards will lapse in full.
If a participant ceases employment during the holding period, vested awards will normally be retained and be released as normal at
the end of the holding period (except in the case of death, in which case the award will be released immediately).
The Company has the power to enter into settlement agreements with Directors and to pay compensation to settle potential legal
claims. In addition, and consistent with market practice, in the event of the termination of an Executive Director, the Company may
make a contribution towards that individual’s legal fees and fees for outplacement services as part of a negotiated settlement. Any
such fees will be disclosed as part of the detail of termination arrangements.
For the avoidance of doubt, the Policy does not include an explicit cap on the cost of termination payments.
Exercise of Discretion
In line with market practice, the Committee retains discretion relating to operating and administering the incentive schemes. This
discretion includes, but is not limited to:
timing of awards and payments;
size of awards, within the overall limits disclosed in the policy table;
determination of vesting;
ability to override formulaic outcomes;
treatment of awards in the case of change of control or restructuring;
treatment of leavers within the rules of the plan and the policy on payments for loss of office shown on page 103; and
adjustments needed in certain circumstances, for example, a rights issue, corporate restructuring or special interim dividend.
While performance conditions will generally remain unchanged once set, the Committee has the usual discretions to amend the
measures, weightings and targets where the original conditions would cease to operate as intended. Any such changes would be
explained in the subsequent annual remuneration report and, if appropriate, be the subject of consultation with the Company’s major
shareholders.
Remuneration Policy Table (Chair and Non-Executive Directors)
Details of the policy on fees paid to our non-executive directors are set out in the table below.
Component and
Link to Strategy Operation Maximum Opportunity Performance Measures
Fees
To attract and
retain Non-
Executive
directors of the
highest calibre
and experience
relevant to the
Company.
Fees are normally reviewed
annually, taking into account market
benchmarks for non-executives
of companies of similar size and
complexity to the Company.
The Chair’s remuneration is
recommended by the Committee
and approved by the Board.
Neither the Chair nor the Non-
Executive Directors take part in
discussions or vote on their own
remuneration.
The Chair and Non-Executive
Directors are reimbursed for
expenses, such as travel and
subsistence costs, incurred in
connection with the carrying out of
their duties. Any tax costs associated
with these benefits are paid by the
Company.
Fee levels will take account of any
significant change in the scope of the
role or time commitment required and
are set by reference to an appropriate
comparator group.
The Chair receives a single base
fee, with no additional fees paid for
additional Board responsibilities.
Non-Executive Directors receive
a base fee for their Board service.
Additional fees may be payable for
additional responsibilities, including
(but not limited to) acting as Senior
Independent Director, being a member
or Chair of a Board Committee or for
other responsibilities, such as those
relating to workforce engagement.
They do not participate in any share
option or share incentive plans. The
Company retains the discretion to
pay additional fees to the Chair and/
or Non-Executive Directors should
the Company require a significant
additional time commitment
in exceptional or unforeseen
circumstances.
None.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
105
Non-Executive Directors’ Service Agreements
The Chair and Non-Executive Directors each have fixed term appointments. Fees payable to the Chair and Non-Executive Directors,
which are commensurate with their experience and contribution to the Group, are reviewed annually by the Board with any increase
ordinarily taking effect on 1 January. They do not participate in decisions regarding their own remuneration and are not eligible for
pension scheme membership, bonus or incentive arrangements. Costs in relation to business expenses and travel will be reimbursed.
The Chair’s appointment is terminable without compensation on three months’ notice from either side. A Non-Executive Director’s
appointment is terminable without compensation on three months’ notice from the Company and one month’s notice from the
individual. Copies of the letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.
The Chair and Non-Executive Directors are expected to devote such time as is necessary for the proper fulfilment of the role. Whilst
this is not, ordinarily, expected to exceed 40 days per annum for the Chair and 20 days per annum for the Non-Executive Directors, the
nature of the role makes it impossible to be specific about the maximum time commitment.
The Chair and Non-Executive Directors are encouraged, but are not required, to hold a personal shareholding in the Company.
At 31 December 2025, the unexpired terms of their letters of appointment were:
Date of Latest Letter of
Appointment
1
Term Start Date Term End Date
Unexpired Term at
31 December 2025
Jock Lennox 23 November 2023 5 January 2024 4 January 2027 1 year
Chris Girling 22 August 2024 29 August 2024 28 August 2027 1 years 8 months
Nicola Keach 26 February 2025 1 June 2025 31 May 2028 2 years 5 months
Kirsty Homer 13 July 2023 1 August 2023 31 July 2026 7 months
Note 1: Jock Lennox was first appointed to the Board on 5 January 2021 pursuant to a letter of appointment dated 4 January 2021. Chris Girling was first appointed to the Board
on 29 August 2018; Nicola Keach was first appointed to the Board on 1 June 2022; and Kirsty Homer was first appointed to the Board on 1 August 2023.
Consideration of Employment Conditions Elsewhere in The Company
In assessing Executive Director remuneration, internal relativities within the Company are reviewed by the Committee. For example, the
Committee periodically receives information regarding the salaries and total remuneration packages of the wider workforce (including
the Group Management Board) and the Committee reviews the CEO pay ratio on an annual basis. The Committee also considers
salary increases for the wider workforce when reviewing salaries for the Executive Directors. However, the Committee has not formally
consulted with employees during its review of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy.
Shareholder Engagement
In November 2025, the Committee Chair wrote to the Company’s largest shareholders covering approximately 68% of the Company’s
issued share capital, as well as the main UK proxy agencies, to outline the Committee’s proposed Policy and its implementation for
2026, including the phased approach to salary and fee increases. We received responses covering approximately 55% of our register
and were delighted with the positive feedback received and the support for the proposals. A minority of shareholders raised concern
regarding an overlap between performance financial metrics in the bonus and LTIP. The Committee considered this feedback, but is
confident that there is sufficient distinction between the two schemes, noting that the LTIP is based on growth in EPS over a three year
period and measured on a per share basis (compared to the use of in-year total Adjusted PBT in the annual bonus), as well as being in
line with typical market practice.
106 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual Report on Remuneration
Single Total Figure of Remuneration (Audited)
The remuneration for Executive Directors of the Company who performed qualifying services during 2025 is detailed below, with prior
year information provided for comparison purposes.
Peter Egan Ryan Govender
1
Yvonne Monaghan
2
2025
£000
2024
£000
2025
£000
2024
£000
2025
£000
2024
£000
Base Salary 485 473 88 273 355
Benefits
3
17 18 3 14 20
Pension 42 42 5 25 43
Total Fixed Remuneration 544 533 96 312 418
Bonus 286 495 43 134 309
LTIP
4,5
675 531 334 350
Buyout awards
6
68
Total Variable Remuneration 961 1,026 111 468 659
Total Remuneration 1,505 1,559 207 780 1,077
Note 1: Ryan Govender was appointed as the Chief Financial Officer with effect from 1 October 2025. All figures reflect the period from his appointment to the end of the
financial year.
Note 2: Yvonne Monaghan stepped down from the Board on 1 October 2025, but remained in employment with Johnson Service Group PLC until 28 February 2026. The figures in
the single total figure table have been pro-rated to reflect the remuneration received for services as an Executive Director during the year.
Note 3: Benefits includes the provision of a car allowance (£14,500 pa for the CEO, £14,500 pa for the CFO and £17,500 pa for the former CFO), private medical insurance and (in
respect of 2024 only) participation in the SAYE (based on the value at maturity of the award being the difference between the exercise price and the market price on
the date of maturity).
Note 4: The LTIP numbers in the table for 2025 reflect the indicative value of the shares which are due to vest in March 2026 in respect of the 2023 LTIP, based on performance
measured up to 31 December 2025 and a share price of 138.40 pence, being the average price over the last three months of 2025. In respect of Peter Egan, £103,000
of the gain is attributable to share price appreciation over the performance period. In respect of Yvonne Monaghan, £51,000 of the gain is attributable to share price
appreciation over the performance period.
Note 5: The 2024 comparative has been updated to reflect the share price on the last trading day prior to the vesting date (16 March 2025: 136.40 pence).
Note 6: Ryan Govender was granted awards on 2 October 2025 to compensate him for certain awards forfeited from his previous employer on joining the Company. The awards
vest subject only to Ryan’s continued employment (and not being under notice) as at the date on which the relevant award vests. The value included here is based on
the total number of shares granted to Ryan (excluding those which were subsequently surrendered following confirmation from his previous employer that one of
the awards would vest) and the average mid-market closing price over the 10 trading days preceding the date of grant (145.9p).
Pensions (Audited)
Executive Directors are contractually entitled to receive retirement benefits, which are calculated on base salary, under one or
more of the Group’s contributory defined benefit or defined contribution schemes. Details of the schemes are given in note 26 of the
Consolidated Financial Statements.
Defined Benefit Entitlement
Peter Egan is a deferred member in the Johnson Group Defined Benefit Scheme (the ‘JGDBS’). The accrued pension entitlement, which
is the amount that would be paid annually on retirement (at normal retirement age at 65), for Peter Egan at 31 December 2025 was
£15,600 (2024: £15,300) and allows for revaluation in deferment from the date of leaving to the date of calculation.
Yvonne Monaghan took a partial transfer of benefits from the JGDBS on 31 March 2012 and her date of retirement from the JGDBS was
16 September 2021 and began receiving remaining benefits from this date.
Pension entitlement is calculated based on the total period of pensionable service to the Company, both before and after becoming a
Director.
Defined Contribution Entitlement
During the 2025 financial year, the Executive Directors received the following pension contributions (or cash in lieu):
Peter Egan: £41,613 (frozen at the 2019 level), equivalent to c.8.6% of salary
Yvonne Monaghan: £24,543, equivalent to 9% of salary (for the period as a Director)
Ryan Govender: £5,250, equivalent to 6% of salary (for the period as a Director) which is approximately in line with the rate available
to the majority of the UK workforce.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
107
2025 Bonus Achievement (Audited)
The annual bonus is normally earned by the achievement of one-year performance targets set by the Committee, ordinarily at the start
of each financial year, adjusted accordingly to take account of events which were not foreseen or allowed for at the start of the year
when targets were set, for example, acquisitions or changes in accounting policy.
The performance targets and performance against them for 2025 are set out below:
Weighting
Threshold
(0% of max)
Target
(50% of max)
Maximum
(100% of max)
Actual
performance
Bonus
Achieved
(% of max)
Financial measures
Adjusted PBT (excluding
notional interest)
1
76.5% £61.5m £66.5m £76.5m £64.2m 27.2%
Margin 8.5% 12.8% 13.1% 13.4% 13.5% 100.0%
Sustainability
Carbon emissions
(% reduction in 2024 final
intensity rate, CO
2
e / Tonne
processed)
5% Reduction of
less than 3%
Reduction of 3%
or more
Reduction of
3.15%
100.0%
Water consumption
(% reduction in 2024 final
intensity rate, m3 / Tonne
processed)
5% Reduction of
less than 5%
Reduction of
5% or more
Reduction of
2.01%
0.0%
Plastic consumption
(% reduction versus 2024
volume of plastic purchased,
Tonnes)
5% Reduction of
less than 10%
Reduction of
10% or more
Reduction of
19. 27%
100.0%
Total 100% 39.3%
Note 1: The Adjusted PBT (excluding notional interest) targets have been adjusted to reflect the impact of customer contracts acquired during the year and the share buyback
(which were not included in the targets set at the start of the year). The original threshold, target and maximum levels were £61.65m, £66.65m and £76.65m respectively.
The Committee believes that these targets were appropriately stretching in the context of expected levels of performance for the
business over 2025. Performance against the targets was assessed after the end of the financial year and this resulted in a bonus
outcome of 39.3% of maximum, as set out in the table above. The Committee felt that this represented a strong result in the wider
market context and was a fair reflection of the Company’s overall performance over the period both in terms of financial performance
and against the set of sustainability measures used for incentive purposes, and therefore did not exercise any discretion to adjust the
outcome.
The table below sets out the bonus awards payable to the Executive Directors:
2025 base salary
(per annum)
2025 opportunity
(% of salary)
2025 bonus outcome
(% of max)
2025 bonus
Peter Egan £484,509 150% 39. 3% £285,577
Ryan Govender
1
£350,000 125%
(pro-rata: 31.5%)
39.3% £43,331
Yvonne Monaghan
2
£363,598 125% 39.3% £178,592
Note 1: 2025 opportunity for Ryan Govender was pro-rated to reflect the proportion of the year as a Director.
Note 2: Yvonne Monaghan was eligible for a full year bonus based on her services as a Director up to 1 October 2025 and her continued services to the Group after that date up
to 31 December 2025. Her bonus in relation to services as a Director (and therefore included in the single total figure of remuneration table) was £133,577.
Bonuses will be paid in cash and are subject to malus and clawback provisions.
108 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual Report on Remuneration Continued >
2023 LTIP Achievement (Audited)
On 8 March 2023, Peter Egan and Yvonne Monaghan were granted awards under the 2018 LTIP Scheme (nil cost options) and 2018
Approved LTIP Scheme (market value options, with an exercise price of 117.0 pence). The awards were subject to performance
conditions assessed over the period of three financial years from 1 January 2023 to 31 December 2025. The extent to which the
performance conditions were met is set out below:
Weighting
Threshold
(25% of max)
Maximum
(100% of max)
Actual
performance
Vesting
(% of max)
Growth in adjusted PBT per
share 50% 5% pa 10% pa 23.0% pa 100%
Relative TSR vs Index
1
50%
In line with the
Index Index + 7.0% pa Index + 16.1% pa 100%
Total 100% 100%
Note 1: The TSR performance condition was based on the annualised growth in the Company’s TSR over the performance period relative to the annualised growth in the FTSE
AlM All-Share Industrial Goods and Services net return index (the ‘Index’).
Based on the performance achieved as set out above, the Remuneration Committee determined that there would be full vesting of the
2023 LTIP Award. The Committee was satisfied that the TSR and EPS achieved were aligned with the underlying financial performance
of the Company over the performance period and therefore no discretion was applied to this outcome.
The table below sets out the number of shares due to vest under the 2018 LTIP Scheme in respect of the 2023 LTIP Award and the
estimated value included in the single total figure of remuneration table on page 106:
Director
Number of shares
granted Vesting outcome
Number of shares
vesting
Estimated vesting
value of award
2
Peter Egan 487,934 100% 487,934 £675,301
Yvonne Monaghan 322,228 100% 322,228
1
£445,964
Note 1: The number of shares due to vest for Yvonne Monaghan includes the impact of time pro-rating in accordance with her leaving arrangements based upon the extent
that the relevant performance period has elapsed at 28 February 2026. Further details are set out on page 109.
Note 2: Based on a share price of 138.4 pence, being the average price over the last three months of 2025.
As noted above, the 2023 LTIP awards were granted in the form of a nil-cost option and a linked market value option (over 25,641 shares,
based on the HMRC-approved Company Share Option Plan scheme). Under this approach, on exercise of the options, the number of
shares exercisable under the nil-cost option is reduced from that outlined above by such number of shares as equates to the gain on
exercise of the market value option.
LTIP Awards Granted During 2025 (Audited)
During the year, Peter Egan, Yvonne Monaghan and (following his appointment to the Board) Ryan Govender were granted awards
under the 2018 LTIP Scheme in the form of a nil-cost option. The proportion of Yvonne Monaghan’s award which shall vest will be
determined after the end of the performance period and after taking into account the extent to which the performance conditions to
which it is subject have been met and will then be pro-rated based upon the extent that the relevant award performance period has
elapsed at 28 February 2026 in accordance with her leaving arrangements – further details are set out below. The awards vest after
three years from the date of grant and are subject to a two-year post-vesting holding period.
Director Date of grant Share price
1
Basis of award
Face value of
award
Number of
shares
Peter Egan 5 March 2025 142.4p 150% of salary £726,761 510,366
Yvonne Monaghan 5 March 2025 142.4p 125% of salary £454,495 319,168
Ryan Govender 2 October 2025 149.8p 150% of salary £525,000 350,467
Note 1: The share price was based on the closing mid-market share price of the Company on the trading day immediately preceding the date of grant.
The performance period is the three financial years starting 1 January 2025 and ending 31 December 2027 and details of the
performance targets are set out below. Vesting is determined on a straight-line basis for performance between the threshold and
maximum levels.
Weighting
Threshold
(25% of max)
Maximum
(100% of max)
Growth in adjusted fully diluted EPS 50% 9% pa 16% pa
Relative TSR vs FTSE 250 (excluding
investment trusts) 50% Median Upper Quartile
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
109
Leaving Arrangements for Yvonne Monaghan (Audited)
Further to the announcements made on 24 March 2025 and 1 October 2025, after over 40 years with the Company including 17 years as
CFO, Yvonne Monaghan retired and stepped down as a Director of the Company on 1 October 2025. She completed a handover to the
new CFO and continued to provide services to the Company, remaining in active employment until 28 February 2026.
Yvonne’s fixed remuneration (salary, benefits and pension) continued to be paid in the normal way up to the end of her employment,
except that her pension contribution level reduced from 9% to 6% of salary with effect from 1 January 2026. Yvonne received £90,899
in salary, £4,988 in benefits and £8,181 in respect of cash in lieu of pension between 1 October 2025 and 31 December 2025. Amounts
payable in respect of 2026 will be disclosed in next year’s report.
As Yvonne’s departure relates to her retirement from the Company, she was treated as a “good leaver” under the Company’s incentive
plans. This means that:
she remained eligible for a bonus in respect of the 2025 financial year to be paid in March 2026 (totalling £178,592 as outlined earlier
in this report, of which £45,015 was related to her services after stepping down from the Board); and
she retains unvested LTIP awards granted in 2023, 2024 and 2025. The awards will vest at the normal time, subject to the
achievement of the relevant performance conditions and be subject to a two-year post-vesting holding period. The number of
shares subject to each award will be pro-rated based on the proportion of the performance period she has been employed up to
28 February 2026.
Yvonne will be paid in lieu for any untaken annual leave entitlement remaining as at 28 February 2026, including holidays that have
been carried over, calculated as Yvonne’s annual salary, divided by 260 days, multiplied by the number of days’ entitlement remaining.
Any such payment will be made in or around March 2026 and will be disclosed in next year’s report. No other payments will be made.
Buyout Awards for Ryan Govender (Audited)
Ryan Govender was appointed to the Board as CFO on 1 October 2025. As outlined in the Remuneration Committee Chair’s Statement,
Ryan was granted buyout awards to partially compensate him for certain awards which he forfeited on resignation from his previous
employer. This included two deferred bonus awards granted in respect of his previous employer’s 2023 and 2024 financial years (which
were not subject to performance conditions) and one long term incentive award granted in the company’s 2023 financial year (for
which the Committee estimated a 50% of maximum performance outcome).
All buyout awards vest on the original vesting date and will also be subject to a two-year post-vesting holding period.
Director Date of grant Vesting date Share price
1
Basis of award
Face value of
award
Number of
shares
Ryan Govender 2 October 2025 13 December 2025 149.5p 2023 Deferred Bonus £16,592 11,076
2 October 2025 13 December 2026 149.5p 2024 Deferred Bonus £7,891 5,268
2 October 2025 14 December 2025 149.5p 2023 LTIP £61,652 41,156
Note 1: The share price was based on the average closing mid-market share price of the Company over the 10 trading days immediately preceding the date of grant.
As announced on 11 December 2025, Ryan’s former employer subsequently confirmed that his 2023 Deferred Bonus award would
continue to vest. The buyout award granted by the Company in respect of this award was therefore surrendered and has lapsed.
No buyout awards were granted by the Company in respect of Ryan’s 2025 bonus entitlement or 2024 or 2025 long term incentive
awards with his previous employer.
110 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual Report on Remuneration Continued >
Statement of Directors’ Shareholding and Share Interests (Audited)
The table below details, for each Director who served during the year, the total number of Directors’ interests in shares at
31 December 2025 or the date the departing Director left the Board:
Director
Ordinary
shares
2
Unvested
awards
subject to
performance
conditions
Unvested
awards
subject to
continued
employment
only
Vested but
unexercised
options
Total
shareholding
and share
interests
Shareholding
requirement
met?
3
Executive Directors:
Peter Egan 725,162 979,179 513,575 2, 217,916 Yes
Ryan Govender 350,467 5,268 41,156 396,891 No
Yvonne Monaghan 886,309
4
680,473 347,869 1,914,651 Yes
Chair and Non-Executive Directors:
Jock Lennox 72,000 72,000 n/a
Chris Girling 17,333 17,333 n/a
Nicola Keach n/a
Kirsty Homer n/a
Note 1: Unvested awards subject to performance conditions” and “Unvested awards subject to continued employment only” in the table above all relate to awards granted in
the form of an option.
Note 2: Includes shares held by connected persons.
Note 3: Executive Directors are expected to build up and maintain a personal shareholding in the Company. For the purpose of this requirement, the shareholding will include
beneficially owned shares and (on a net of tax basis) any vested but unexercised awards (including any awards subject to a holding period) and any unvested awards
which are not subject to any, or any further, performance conditions. The required shareholding level is 200% of salary for Peter Egan and Yvonne Monaghan and 150%
of salary for Ryan Govender. Non-Executive Directors are encouraged, but are not required, to hold a personal shareholding in the Company.
Note 4: In addition to the beneficial and conditional interests shown above, Yvonne Monaghan was a Trustee of the Johnson Charitable Trust (the ‘Trust’) at the date she
stepped down from the Board. The Trust, having originally been founded in 1927, is intended for the benefit of employees or former employees of the Company,
its associated companies or a company that was historically a subsidiary of the Company or the respective spouses, widowed spouses, children or other dependants
of such employees or former employees. The Trust owned 588,452 Ordinary shares of 10 pence each in the Company as at the date Yvonne stepped down from the
Board. The Company considers this to be a Non-Beneficial interest.
Note 5: There have been no changes in the Directors’ interests in the shares of the Company during the period 31 December 2025 up until the date of signing this report.
Details of share options exercised by Executive Directors during the year are set out below:
Director Award
Number of
shares
Date of
exercise Exercise price Share price
1
Gain on
exercise
2
Peter Egan 2021 LTIP 117,723 2 April 2025 Nil 132.8472p £156,392
2022 LTIP 389,080 2 April 2025 Nil 132.8472p £516,882
SAYE 6,936 2 April 2025 129.75p 132.8472p £215
Yvonne Monaghan 2021 LTIP 77,743 2 April 2025 Nil 132.8472p £103,279
2022 LTIP 256,945 2 April 2025 Nil 132.8472p £341,344
SAYE 6,936 2 April 2025 129.75p 132.8472p £215
Note 1: Peter Egan and Yvonne Monaghan exercised options in relation to their 2021 and 2022 LTIP awards and sold sufficient shares to cover taxes with the respective
associated dealing costs covered by Peter and Yvonne personally. In relation to the 2021 and 2022 LTIP awards, the share price used to determine the gain on exercise
represents the average sale price for this purpose. No shares were sold in relation to the exercise of SAYE options, however, for consistency the same share price as the
2021 and 2022 LTIP awards has been used to determine the gain on exercise.
Note 2: The gain on exercise represents the value of the gain before deduction for any taxes and dealing costs.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
111
Performance Graph and CEO Remuneration Table
The chart below shows the Company’s TSR performance against the performance of the FTSE 250 Index (excluding Investment Trusts)
over the ten-year period to 31 December 2025. The index has been selected for this comparison as the Company is a constituent of this
index following the transition from AIM to the Main Market in August 2025.
Since 2020, when an AIM-listed company, the Company had voluntarily prepared a Remuneration Report broadly in accordance with
the requirements for Main Market companies. Prior to this, the Remuneration Report was prepared on a different basis (and did not
include a comparable “single figure of remuneration”). The table below therefore details certain elements of the CEO’s remuneration
since 2020.
Year CEO
Single figure of
remuneration (£000)
Annual bonus outcome
(% of max)
LTIP outcome
(% of max)
2020 Peter Egan 427 0.00% 0.00%
2021 Peter Egan 683 36.35% 0.00%
2022 Peter Egan 624 22.50% 0.00%
2023 Peter Egan 1,211 95.00% 34.35%
2024 Peter Egan 1,559 69.75% 83.00%
2025 Peter Egan 1,505 39.29% 100.00%
Non-Executive Directors’ Remuneration (Audited)
Details of the amounts received by the Chair and the Non-Executive Directors during the year ended 31 December 2025 are as follows:
2025
£000
2024
£000
Jock Lennox 160 156
Chris Girling 72 71
Kirsty Homer
1
62 52
Nicola Keach 52 51
346 330
Note 1: The 2024 figure in the above table for Kirsty Homer includes her pro-rated receipt of the £10,000 per annum supplementary fee for the Chair of the Remuneration
Committee following her appointment as Remuneration Committee Chair with effect from 1 November 2024.
300
250
200
150
100
Dec-15
Total Return Index (re-based to 100 at 31 Dec 2015)
Dec-16 Dec-17
JSG
FTSE 250 ex. Investment Trusts Index
Dec-18 Dec-19 Dec-20 Dec-21 Dec-22 Dec-23 Dec-24 Dec-25
50
0
112 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual Report on Remuneration Continued >
Implementation of Remuneration Policy in 2026
The table below sets out the anticipated implemented of the new Policy for the financial year ending 31 December 2026:
Executive Directors:
Base Salary
1
CEO: £510,000 (+5.3%)
CFO: £358,750 (+2.5%, in line with (and in some cases lower than) that for the Group’s wider employee population).
Benefits No change
Pension 6% of salary (in line with the rate available to the majority of the UK workforce)
Bonus
2
The maximum opportunity for the 2026 bonus will be as follows:
CEO: Up to 150% of salary
CFO: Up to 125% of salary
The performance measures for the 2026 bonus are set out below. The Committee considers that the performance
targets for the 2026 bonus are commercially sensitive at this time. The targets will be disclosed, together with
actual performance outcomes, in next year’s report.
Performance measure Weighting
Adjusted PBT (excluding notional interest) 75%
Adjusted Operating Profit Margin 15%
Sustainability 10%
Where an Executive Director has not met their shareholding requirement at the end of the financial year, at least
one-third of any bonus will be deferred such that Executive Directors will be required to invest at least one-third
of any bonus (after tax) in the Company’s shares to be held for two years.
LTIP LTIP awards will be granted to Executive Directors in 2026 as follows:
CEO: 175% of salary
CFO: 150% of salary
The performance measures for the 2026 LTIP awards are set out below.
Performance measure Weighting
Threshold
(25% of max)
Maximum
(100% of max)
Cumulative Adjusted Fully Diluted EPS 50% 42p 48p
Relative TSR vs FTSE 250 (excluding
investment trusts)
50% Median Upper Quartile
Chair and Non-Executive Directors:
Fees Chair: £168,088 (+5.3%)
Non-Executive Director base fee: £54,784 (+5.3%)
Additional fee for:
Senior Independent Director: £10,000 (no change)
Chair of the Audit Committee: £10,000 (no change)
Chair of the Remuneration Committee: £10,000 (no change)
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
113
CEO Pay Ratio
The total pay and benefits of our UK employees at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile and the ratios between the CEO and these
employees, using the CEO’s single total remuneration figure are as follows:
25th
percentile
pay ratio
50th
percentile
pay ratio
75th
percentile
pay ratio
2025 60:1 56:1 40:1
2024 65:1 63:1 43:1
2023 49:1 45:1 32:1
2022 32:1 25:1 19:1
2021 33:1 31:1 28:1
2020 23:1 19:1 16:1
2019 46:1 31:1 26:1
The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018 provide companies with a number of options for gathering the data
required to calculate the ratio. We have chosen to use “Option B” to calculate the CEO pay ratio which involves the use of data
previously gathered for UK gender pay gap reporting purposes. This option was chosen given the size and complexity of the exercise
required to produce these ratios using other means and on the basis that the Company has already completed comprehensive data
collation and analysis for the purposes of its UK gender pay gap reporting.
The table below sets out the salary and total pay and benefits for the three identified quartile point employees:
25th
percentile
pay ratio
50th
percentile
pay ratio
75th
percentile
pay ratio
2025 Salary £23,557 £25,605 £35,193
2025 Total Pay and Benefits £24,901 £26,856 £37,296
As explained in previous reports, our pay ratios have fluctuated between each reported year to date (not least due to the impact of the
Covid pandemic on employee remuneration) and no overall trend in the median pay ratio is observed at this time.
The majority of our employees work either within one of our processing facilities or in distribution. Irrespective of the specific role,
we aim to apply the same reward principles for all employees, in particular, that overall remuneration should be competitive when
compared to similar roles in other organisations from which we draw our talent. We are aware that year-to-year movements in the pay
ratio will be driven largely by our CEO’s variable pay outcomes. These movements will significantly outweigh any other changes in pay
within the organisation. Whatever the CEO pay ratio, the Company will continue to invest in competitive pay for all employees.
The Committee also recognises that, due to the specific nature of the Company’s business and the flexibility permitted within the
regulations for identifying and calculating the total pay and benefits for employees, as well as differences in employment and
remuneration models between companies, the ratios reported above may not be comparable to those reported by other companies.
Annual Percentage Change in Remuneration of Directors and Employees
The percentage change in remuneration of the Directors and employees of Johnson Service Group PLC over the last financial year was
follows:
% change from 2024 to 2025
Director Salary/Base Fee Benefits Bonus
Executive Directors:
Peter Egan 2.5% (3.1%) (42.3%)
Ryan Govender n/a n/a n/a
Yvonne Monaghan 2.5% (3.4%) (42.3%)
Chair and Non-Executive Directors:
Jock Lennox 2.5% n/a n/a
Chris Girling 2.5% n/a n/a
Kirsty Homer 2.5% n/a n/a
Nicola Keach 2.5% n/a n/a
Wider workforce:
Employees 4.8% 0.7% (38.0%)
114 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors’ Remuneration Report
Annual Report on Remuneration Continued >
Relative Importance of Spend on Pay
The following table sets out the amounts payable in dividends; amounts paid in connection with the Company’s share buyback
programmes; and total employee costs in respect of the years ended 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024. The Committee does
not consider that there are any other significant distributions or payments outside the ordinary course of business that warrant
disclosure.
2025
£m
2024
£m
%
change
Dividends payable
1
18.4 16.5 11.5%
Share buyback programme
2
54.3 n/a
Total employee costs 248.9 229.0 8.7%
Note 1: The 2025 dividend comprises an interim dividend of 1.6 pence (2024: 1.3 pence) per Ordinary share and a proposed final dividend of 3.2 pence (2024: 2.7 pence) per
Ordinary share. This total dividend of 4.8 pence (2024: 4.0 pence) per Ordinary share, subject to the approval of Shareholders and based upon the number of shares in
issue as at the date of this report, will amount to a dividend distribution for the year of £18.4 million (2024: £16.5 million).
Note 2: The Company completed a share buyback programme totalling £30.0 million, originally announced in March 2025 and extended in June 2025. The Company also
announced a further share buyback programme of up to £25.0 million in September 2025 – as at 31 December 2025, £24.3 million had been completed. The total share
buyback programme value during the year, excluding expenses, was therefore £54.3 million.
Remuneration Committee
Membership and Attendance
Throughout 2025, membership of the Committee comprised of the Independent Non-Executive Directors (including the Non-Executive
Chair of the Board) and the Committee was chaired by Kirsty Homer. None of the members of the Committee have, or had, any personal
financial interests in the Company (other than as shareholders), conflicts of interests arising from cross-directorships or day to day
involvement in running the business.
Member
Since
Eligible
to Attend
1
Meetings
Attended
1
Kirsty Homer (Committee Chair) Aug 2023 8 8
Chris Girling Aug 2018 8 8
Jock Lennox Jan 2021 8 8
Nicola Keach Jun 2022 8 8
Note 1: Includes scheduled and unscheduled meetings.
The CEO, CFO, Company Secretary and employees may be invited to attend meetings by the Chair of the Committee. No attendee plays
any part in determining their own remuneration.
Main Responsibilities
In line with the authority delegated by the Board, the Committee sets the Company’s Remuneration Policy and is responsible for
determining remuneration terms and conditions of employment for the Chair of the Board, Executive Directors and other members of
the Group Management Board (including the Company Secretary).
The Committee:
ensures that the Executive Directors are appropriately incentivised to enhance the Group’s performance and rewarded for their
contribution to the success of the business by designing, monitoring and assessing incentive arrangements, including setting
stretching targets and assessing performance and outcomes against them;
reviews the remuneration arrangements for other senior executives within the Group, namely the members of the Group
Management Board (including the Company Secretary);
in undertaking its responsibilities above, reviews and monitors the remuneration and related policies and culture applying to the
wider workforce, taking these into account when considering, developing and setting remuneration policies and packages for
Executive Directors and the Group Management Board; and
maintains an active dialogue with shareholders, ensuring their views and those of their advisers are sought and considered when
setting executive remuneration.
The Committee regularly reports to the Board on how it has discharged its responsibilities. The full terms of reference of the Committee
are available on the Company’s website, or on request to the Company Secretary.
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
115
External Advisers
The Committee seeks and considers advice from independent remuneration advisers where appropriate. Korn Ferry provided
advice to the Committee during 2025, having been selected through a thorough process led by the previous Chair of the Committee,
Nick Gregg, in 2019. Following a competitive tender process in 2025 led by the current Chair of the Committee, Kirsty Homer,
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) were appointed in August 2025 as the Committee’s new external adviser.
The Chair of the Committee has direct access to the advisers as and when required, and the Committee determines the protocols
by which the advisers interact with management, in particular the Company Secretary, in support of the Committee. The advice and
recommendations of the external advisers are used as a guide, but do not serve as a substitute for thorough consideration of the issues
by each Committee member. Advisers attend Committee meetings as and when required by the Committee.
Both PwC and Korn Ferry are members of the Remuneration Consultants’ Group and, as such, voluntarily operate under the
Remuneration Consultants’ Group Code of Conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. This is based upon
principles of transparency, integrity, objectivity, competence, due care and confidentiality by executive remuneration consultants. The
Remuneration Consultants’ Group Code of Conduct is available at remunerationconsultantsgroup.com.
During the year, PwC also provided taxation advice services to the Group. There are processes in place to ensure the advice received
by the Committee is independent of any support provided to management. The Committee is satisfied on this basis that PwC (and
previously Korn Ferry) are able to serve as an objective and independent remuneration adviser.
The total fees paid to Korn Ferry for the financial year ending 31 December 2025 were £16,240 excluding VAT, and were calculated on a
time spent basis. The total fees paid to PwC for the financial year ending 31 December 2025 were £52,500 excluding VAT, comprising a
fixed fee element and in addition, out of scope work which is charged on a time spent basis.
Annual General Meeting
Prior to the Company’s transition to the Main Market, the Company has voluntarily put forward the Directors’ Remuneration Report
for advisory shareholder approval. The table below shows the voting outcome at the 2025 AGM for the 2024 Directors’ Remuneration
Report.
No. of
Votes ‘For
1
% of
Votes Cast
No. of
Votes ‘Against’
% of
Votes Cast
Total No.
of Votes Cast
No. of
Votes ‘Withheld’
2
316,501,473 98.44% 5,029,945 1.56% 321,531,418 8,398
Note 1: Includes ‘Discretionary’ votes.
Note 2: A vote ‘Withheld’ is not a vote under English law and is not counted in the calculation of votes ‘For’ or ‘Against’ a resolution.
Kirsty Homer
Chair, Remuneration Committee
2 March 2026
118 Independent Auditor’s
Report
130 Consolidated Balance
Sheet
127 Consolidated Income
Statement
131 Consolidated Statement
of Cash Flows
128 Consolidated Statement
of Comprehensive Income
132 Statement of Significant
Accounting Policies
129 Consolidated Statement
of Changes in Shareholders’
Equity
144 Notes to the Consolidated
Financial Statements
116 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
117
Independent Auditors Report to the members of
JohnsonService Group PLC
Opinion
Our opinion on the financial statements is unmodified
We have audited the financial statements of Johnson Service Group PLC (the ‘Parent Company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) for the year ended
31December 2025, which comprise:
The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and UK-adopted
international accounting standards. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Parent Company financial
statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure
Framework’ (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).
In our opinion:
the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the Parent Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2025 and
of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;
the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards;
the Parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting
Practice; and
the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.
Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under those
standards are further described in the ‘Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements’ section of our report. We are independent of
the Group and the Parent Company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK,
including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance
with these requirements. We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.
Conclusions relating to going concern
We are responsible for concluding on the appropriateness of the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting and, based on the audit
evidence obtained, whether a material uncertainty exists related to events or conditions that may cast significant doubt on the Group’s and the Parent
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern. If we conclude that a material uncertainty exists, we are required to draw attention in our report to
the related disclosures in the financial statements or, if such disclosures are inadequate, to modify the auditor’s opinion. Our conclusions are based on
the audit evidence obtained up to the date of our report. However, future events or conditions may cause the Group or the Parent Company to cease
to continue as a going concern.
Our evaluation of the directors’ assessment of the Group’s and the Parent company’s ability to continue to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting included:
Obtaining and assessing management’s paper containing their assessment of going concern, including Board approved forecasts covering the
period to 30 June 2027;
Testing the mathematical accuracy of those forecasts;
Testing the accuracy of management’s forecasting ability by a comparison of prior period forecasts to actual data;
Assessing the forecasts prepared for consistency with other areas of the audit;
Utilising industry data and other external information to challenge the reasonableness of management’s assumptions;
Assessing compliance with financial covenants within the Group’s facilities for the period to 30 June 2027 and the available headroom to the
Group;
Group Parent Company
Consolidated Income Statement Company Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income Company Balance Sheet
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
Notes to the Company Financial Statements, including material
accounting policy information
Consolidated Balance Sheet
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements, including material
accounting policy information
118 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
119
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Assessing the reverse stress test performed by management, determining if the scenario is plausible, and assessing the adequacy of the related
disclosures within the Annual Report and Accounts; and
Obtaining correspondence between management and their lenders, as well as discussing with our internal debt advisory teams to conclude on the
likelihood of the refinance of the facility expiring in August 2027, and assessing the disclosures thereupon within the viability statement.
In our evaluation of the Directors’ conclusions, we considered the inherent risks associated with the Group’s and the Parent Company’s business model
including effects arising from macro-economic uncertainties such as rising national insurance and living wages. We assessed and challenged the
reasonableness of estimates made by the directors and the related disclosures and analysed how those risks might affect the Group’s and the Parent
Company’s financial resources or ability to continue operations over the going concern period.
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting in the preparation of the
financial statements is appropriate.
Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or conditions that, individually or collectively,
may cast significant doubt on the Group’s and the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from
when the financial statements are authorised for issue.
In relation to the Group’s reporting on how it has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing material to add or draw attention to in
relation to the Directors’ statement in the financial statements about whether the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of
accounting.
Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the directors with respect to going concern are described in the relevant sections of this report.
Our approach to the audit
Key audit matters
Key audit
matters
Scoping
Materiality
Overview of our audit approach
Overall materiality:
Group: £2.58m, which represents approximately 5% of the Group’s profit before tax (PBT).
Parent Company: £1.61m, which represents approximately 0.25% of the Parent Company’s total
assets.
Key audit matters were identified as:
The revenue cycle includes fraudulent transactions (new in current year)
Customer (rebate) arrangements (same as previous year)
Our auditor’s report for the year ended 31 December 2024 included one key audit matter that
has not been reported as a key audit matter in our current year’s report. This previous key audit
matter related to acquisition accounting, however in the year ended 31 December 2025, there
have been no business combinations and hence this is not applicable.
We performed audits of the financial statements of the Parent Company, and of the financial
information of three other components using component performance materiality (full scope
audit). We performed specific audit procedures relating to one further component. We
performed analytical procedures at Group level for the remaining eight components in the
Group during the year.
In total, our procedures covered 87% of the Group’s revenue, 92% of the Group’s total assets and
95% of the Group’s profit before tax.
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement,
were of most significance in our audit of the financial statements of the
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters
included those that had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the
allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the
engagement team. These matters were addressed in the context of our
audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion
thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.
Audit
reponse
Description
KAM
Disclosures
Our results
KAM
120 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Independent Auditors Report to the members of
JohnsonService Group PLC Continued >
In the graph below, we have presented the key audit matters and significant risks relevant to the audit. This is not a complete list of all risks identified
by our audit.
High
Low
Potential
financial
statement
impact
High
Low Extent of management judgement
Significant risk
Revenue cycle includes
fraudulent transactions
Parent company
investments
DB Pension scheme
Customer
(rebate)
agreements
Management override of controls
Key Audit Matter – Group How our scope addressed the matter – Group
The revenue cycle includes fraudulent transactions
We identified the risk that the revenue cycle includes fraudulent
transactions as one of the most significant assessed risks of material
misstatement due to fraud.
Under ISA (UK) 240, there is a presumption that revenue may be misstated
due to improper recognition of revenue. This is also considered to be a key
audit matter given the importance of reported revenue to key
stakeholders. The revenue recorded is one of the key factors that impacts
Key Performance Indicators for the Group.
The majority of revenue within the Group is considered non-complex. We
therefore pinpointed a significant risk to transactions outside of the
normal accounting posting pattern as identified through audit data
analytics techniques, as these pose a risk of fraud due to their unusual
nature.
Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report and Accounts
Financial statements: Statement of Significant Accounting Policies,
Revenue Recognition
Financial statements: Note 1, Segment Analysis
In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit
procedures:
Assessed whether accounting policies adopted by the Directors are in
accordance with the requirements of International Financial Reporting
Standard (‘IFRS’) 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’, and
whether the accounting for revenue is in accordance with the
accounting policies;
Utilised audit data analytics techniques to identify transactions outside
of the normal accounting posting pattern; and obtained supporting
evidence to corroborate management explanations of these postings;
Selected a sample of revenue transactions and agreed these to
supporting evidence such as customer contract, sales invoices and
proof of cash receipt; and
Tested the operating effectiveness of bank reconciliations of those
accounts used in the revenue cycle to support our audit data analytics.
Our results
Based on our audit work, we did not identify material misstatements in
relation to revenue recognition.
121
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Key Audit Matter – Group How our scope addressed the matter – Group
Customer (rebate) arrangements
We identified the completeness and accuracy of customer (rebate)
arrangements, pinpointed to those rebate arrangements which contain
management estimation, as one of the most significant assessed risks of
material misstatement due to fraud and error.
Through its divisional trading activities, the Group has rebate
arrangements in place across certain key customers. These vary on a
customer-by-customer basis but largely relate to volume of sales made
throughout the year.
The complexity of such arrangements also vary, with some based on
retrospective information and others requiring estimation by
management. We have pinpointed the significant risk to the accuracy and
completeness of rebate arrangements which feature management
estimation.
The level of rebate granted is based on contractual terms which are
specific to each customer. These are not uniform, which means that there is
inherently an element of complexity which gives rise to an increased risk of
error or fraud occurring in respect of these balances. This includes both the
amounts recognised within the income statement and within the balance
sheet at the year end.
In responding to the key audit matter, we performed the following audit
procedures:
For a sample of customers, recalculated the rebate recognised within
both the income statement and the balance sheet based on
contractual terms by reviewing customer contracts for rebate terms;
Performed a year-on-year analysis of the accrual balance per customer
to consider the reasonableness of the year-end balance recognised.
We tested the completeness of the rebate recognised by assessing
contractual arrangements within the Group’s key customers to
corroborate that these were not indicative of unrecorded (rebate)
arrangements;
Held discussions with employees outside of the finance function to
understand new rebate arrangements entered into during the year;
Obtained an understanding of significant revenue deductions or
credits issued to customers in the year to determine if these related to
rebate agreements;
Tested transactions post year end by agreeing to source
documentation such as customer sales agreements and invoices, to
determine whether they were accounted for in the correct period and
whether post year-end activity was indicative of unrecorded customer
arrangements; and
Assessed the ageing of the accruals at year end and performed
specific procedures to gain comfort over the aged amounts which were
released in the year.
Relevant disclosures in the Annual Report and Accounts
Financial statements: Statement of Significant Accounting Policies,
Rebates
Audit committee report: Accounting for Complex Customer
Arrangements.
Our results
Based on our audit work, we did not identify material misstatements in
relation to customer (rebate) arrangements.
We did not identify any key audit matters relating to the audit of the financial statements of the Parent Company.
Our application of materiality
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing the audit, and in evaluating the effect of identified misstatements on the audit
and of uncorrected misstatements, if any, on the financial statements and in forming the opinion in the auditor’s report.
122 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Materiality was determined as follows:
Materiality measure Group Parent company
Materiality for financial
statements as a whole
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that, individually or in the
aggregate, could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of the users of these financial
statements. We use materiality in determining the nature, timing and extent of our audit work.
Materiality threshold
Significant judgements made by
auditor in determining materiality
£2.58m (2024: £2.42m), which represents approximately
5% of PBT (2024: approximately 0.5% of Group’s
revenue)
In determining materiality, we made the following
significant judgements:
We determined PBT to be the most appropriate
benchmark for the Group due to this having
importance in both external financial reporting and
internal management reporting. This is a metric on
which growth is monitored.
A market-based measurement percentage was
chosen which reflected our knowledge of the
business from the prior year audit, as well as our risk
assessment of the business.
The benchmark used has changed from revenue in
the previous period to PBT, given the stabilisation of
the business in the recovery post Covid-19 where the
underlying PBT was volatile.
Materiality for the current year is higher than the level
that we determined for the year ended 31 December
2024 to reflect the general growth in the Group.
£1.61m (2024: £1.55m), which represents 0.25% of the
Parent Company’s total assets.
In determining materiality, we made the following
significant judgements:
We determined total assets to be the most
appropriate benchmark because the parent
company does not trade and largely holds
investments in subsidiary undertakings.
A market-based measurement percentage was
chosen which reflected our knowledge of the
business from the prior year audit, as well as our risk
assessment of the business.
Materiality for the current year is higher than the level
that we determined for the year ended 31 December
2024 to reflect the growth in Parent Company total
assets.
Performance materiality used to
drive the extent of our testing
We set performance materiality at an amount less than materiality for the financial statements as a whole to
reduce to an appropriately low level the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected
misstatements exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a whole.
Performance materiality threshold
Significant judgements made by
auditor in determining
performance materiality
£1.8m (2024: £1.69m), which is 70% (2024: 70%) of
financial statement materiality.
The range of component performance materialities
used across the Group was £1.26m to £1.71m.
In determining performance materiality, we made the
following significant judgements:
Our risk assessment procedures did not identify any
significant changes in business objectives and
strategy of the Group;
We considered qualitative and quantitative factors
when evaluating the impact of prior period
adjusted and unadjusted misstatements; and
We considered whether there were any significant
control deficiencies identified in the prior year.
£1.13m (2024: £1.08m), which is 70% (2024: 70%) of
financial statement materiality.
In determining performance materiality, we made the
following significant judgements:
Our risk assessment procedures did not identify any
significant changes in business objectives and
strategy of the Parent Company;
We considered qualitative and quantitative factors
when evaluating the impact of prior period
adjusted and unadjusted misstatements; and
We considered whether there were any significant
control deficiencies identified in the prior year.
Specific materiality We determine specific materiality for one or more particular classes of transactions, account balances or
disclosures for which misstatements of lesser amounts than materiality for the financial statements as a whole
could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of the financial
statements.
Independent Auditors Report to the members of
JohnsonService Group PLC Continued >
123
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
The graph below illustrates how performance materiality and the range of component materiality interacts with our overall materiality and the
threshold for communication to the audit committee.
FSM: Financial statement materiality, PM: Performance materiality, RoPM: Range of performance materiality at 4 components, TfC: Threshold for
communication to the audit committee.
An overview of the scope of our audit
We performed a risk-based audit that requires an understanding of the Group’s and the Parent Company’s business and in particular matters
relatedto:
Understanding the Group, its components, their environments, and its system of internal control including common controls
The engagement team obtained an understanding of the Group and its environment, including common controls, and assessed the risks of
material misstatement at the group level; and
The engagement team further considered the effect of the Group’s organisational structure on the scope of the audit, and used this to inform our
assessment of risk.
Identifying components at which to perform audit procedures
The engagement team performed an evaluation of identified components to assess the components which would be in scope and to determine
the planned audit response based on whether we determined there to be a risk of material misstatement in the component, or was considered
to be financially significant to the Group.
Type of work to be performed on financial information of parent and other components (including how it addressed the key audit matters)
We have assessed the Group to have a total of 13 components. The Group’s main trading activity takes place through the subsidiary entity,
Johnsons Textile Services Limited (JTSL). JTSL is considered to be made up of separate components in line with the activities of the divisions within
this entity, being Workwear, Restaurant and Catering, and Hotel Linen. Other components of the Group relate to other trading subsidiaries,
including ‘Ireland’ which includes the Belfast division of JTSL, and other holding companies. Of the Group’s 13 components, we identified four which,
Materiality measure Group Parent company
Specific materiality We determined a lower level of specific materiality for
the following areas:
Related party transactions; and
Directors’ remuneration
We determined a lower level of specific materiality for
the following areas:
Related party transactions; and
Directors’ remuneration
Communication of misstatements
to the audit committee
We determine a threshold for reporting unadjusted differences to the audit committee.
Threshold for communication £0.13m (2024: £0.12m), which represents 5% of Group
materiality, and misstatements below that threshold
that, in our view, warrant reporting on qualitative
grounds.
£0.08m (2024: £0.08m), which represents 5% of Parent
Company materiality and misstatements below that
threshold that, in our view, warrant reporting on
qualitative grounds.
Total PBT,
£50.8m
FSM £2.58m
Overall materiality – Parent
Total Assets,
£644.7m
FSM £1.61m
FSM
£2.58m,
5%
PM £1.8m
70%
RoPM
£1.26m to
£1.71m
TfC
£0.13m, 5%
FSM £1.61m,
0.25%
PM £1.13m,
70%
TfC £0.08m,
5%
Overall materiality – Group
124 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
in our view, required an audit of their financial information using component materiality (full scope audit), due to being assessed as having a risk
of material misstatement or financially significant to the Group. As a result of this, we performed an audit of the financial statements of the Parent
Company and of the financial information of three components, JTSL (Workwear Division), JTSL (Restaurant and Catering Division), JTSL (Hotel
Linen Division).
We identified the key audit matters of the Group as the revenue cycle includes fraudulent transactions and customer (rebate) arrangements. The
audit procedures performed in respect of this has been included within the key audit matters section of our report.
We performed specific audit procedures in respect of the year end cash balance held within the Ireland component. The Ireland component
includes Harkglade Limited, Celtic Linen Limited, Milbrook Linen Limited and Johnsons Belfast.
We performed analytical procedures at group level over the remaining eight components. These procedures, together with the additional
procedures outlined above, were designed to give us the audit evidence needed for our opinion on the Group financial statements as a whole.
Performance of our audit
Together, the components subject to full-scope audits covered 87% of the Group’s revenue, 92% of the Group’s total assets and 95% of the Group’s
profit before tax.
All procedures on component financial information were performed by the group audit team.
Audit work was performed primarily on site at the company head office, with some remote working throughout the audit. Planning and interim
testing was also performed during various site visits throughout the period.
Further audit procedures performed on components subject to specific scope and specified procedures may not have included testing of all significant
account balances of such components, but further audit procedures were performed on specific accounts within that component that we, the group
auditor, considered had the potential for the greatest impact on the group financial statements either due to risk, size or coverage.
The components within the scope of further audit procedures accounted for the following percentages of the group’s results, including the key audit
matters identified:
Full-scope audit 4 (2024: 4) 92 (2024: 86) 87 (2024: 89) 95 (2024: 94)
Specific scope procedures 1 (2024: 2) <1 (2024: <1) 0 (2024: 0) 0 (2024: 0)
Full-scope and specific scope
procedures coverage 5 (2024: 6) 92 (2024: 86) 87 (2024: 89) 95 (2024: 94)
Analytical procedures 8 (2024: 9) 8 (2024: 14) 13 (2024: 11) 5 (2024: 6)
To ta l 13(2024: 15) 100 100 100
Changes in approach from previous period
One of the components in the prior period on which specific scope audit procedures were performed has been removed from scope in the
current period due to no longer being of a specific nature or size in the context of the group as a whole
One further entity, Johnsons Belfast, has been incorporated within the Ireland component in the current year to reflect the structure of the group.
Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the Annual Report and Accounts, other than the financial statements and our auditors
report thereon. The directors are responsible for the other information contained within the Annual Report and Accounts. Our opinion on the financial
statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of
assurance conclusion thereon.
Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is materially inconsistent with the financial
statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. If we identify such material inconsistencies or
apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine whether there is a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If,
based on the work we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.
We have nothing to report in this regard.
Our opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 is unmodified
In our opinion, the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act
2006.
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:
the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is
consistent with the financial statements; and
the strategic report and the directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements.
Matter on which we are required to report under the Companies Act 2006
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the Parent Company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we
have not identified material misstatements in the strategic report or the directors’ report.
No. of % coverage % coverage % coverage
Audit approach components total assets revenue PBT
Independent Auditors Report to the members of
JohnsonService Group PLC Continued >
125
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters in relation to which the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:
adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from
branches not visited by us; or
the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or
certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.
Corporate governance statement
We have reviewed the directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement
relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code subject to our voluntary review.
Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of the Corporate Governance Statement is
materially consistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained during the audit:
the directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of accounting and any material uncertainties
identified as set out on page 68;
the directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment covers and why the period is appropriate as
set out on page 68;
the directors statement on whether they have a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to continue in operation and meet its
liabilities as set out on page 68;
the directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable as set out on page 69;
the board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks as set out on page 82;
the section of the annual report that describes the review of the effectiveness of risk management and internal control systems as set out on
page 82; and
the section describing the work of the Audit Committee as set out on page 81.
Responsibilities of directors
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 69, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such internal control as the directors determine is necessary to enable
the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going
concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend
to liquidate the Group or the Parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether
due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a
guarantee that an audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists.
Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to
influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting
irregularities, including fraud, is detailed below:
We obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory frameworks applicable to the Parent Company and the Group and the industry in
which they operate. We determined that the most significant laws and regulations are: the Companies Act 2006, UK-adopted international
accounting standards, Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’, the UK Corporate Governance Code and taxation laws;
We obtained an understanding of how the Parent Company and the Group are complying with those legal and regulatory frameworks by
making enquiries of management, those responsible for legal and compliance procedures and the company secretary. We corroborated our
enquiries through our review of board minutes and papers provided to the Audit Committee;
We assessed the susceptibility of the Group and Parent Company’s financial statements to material misstatement, including how fraud might
occur. Audit procedures performed by the group engagement team included:
Assessing the design and implementation of controls management has in place to prevent and detect fraud;
Obtaining an understanding of how those charged with governance considered and addressed the potential for override of controls or
other inappropriate influence over the financial reporting process;
Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in significant accounting estimates;
Obtaining an understanding around rebate agreements and releases of aged accrual balances including obtaining an understanding of
the legal requirements of such agreements;
126 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Identifying and testing journal entries, in particular any journal with unusual characteristics;
Engaging with our internal tax specialist to address the risk of non-compliance with taxation legislation; and
Designing audit procedures to incorporate unpredictability around the nature, timing or extent of our testing.
These audit procedures were designed to provide reasonable assurance that the financial statements were free from fraud or error. The risk of not
detecting a material misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, and detecting irregularities that
result from fraud is inherently more difficult than detecting those that result from error, as fraud may involve collusion, deliberate concealment,
forgery or intentional misrepresentations. Also, the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from events and transactions
reflected in the financial statements, the less likely we would become aware of it;
The engagement partners assessment of the appropriateness of the collective competence and capabilities of the group audit team included
consideration of the group audit team’s knowledge of the industry in which the group operates, and the understanding of, and practical
experience with, audit engagements of a similar nature and complexity through appropriate training and participation; and
We communicated relevant laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team members and remained alert to any
indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations throughout the audit.
A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial Reporting Council’s website at:
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors report.
Other matters which we are required to address
We were appointed by the Audit Committee on 1 May 2025 to audit the financial statements for the year ending 31 December 2025. Our total
uninterrupted period of engagement is 5 years, covering the years ended 31 December 2021 to 31 December 2025.
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the group or the parent company and we remain independent of
the group and the parent company in conducting our audit.
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the audit committee.
Use of our report
This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work
has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for
no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the company and the
company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.
Jonathan Maile FCA BSc (Hons)
Senior Statutory Auditor
for and on behalf of Grant Thornton UK LLP
Statutory Auditor, Chartered Accountants
Manchester
2 March 2026
Independent Auditors Report to the members of
JohnsonService Group PLC Continued >
Year ended
Statements
Year ended
Shareholder
Information
31 December 2025
Group Financial
31 December 2024
Company Financial
Note
Statements
Consolidated Income Statement
£m
£m
Revenue
Strategic
Report
1,2
535.4
513.4
Impairment loss on trade receivables
Corporate
Governance
18
(1.2)
(1.2)
All other costs
(475.4)
(457 .5)
Operating profit
1,2
58.8
54.7
Operating profit before amortisation of intangible assets
(excluding software amortisation) and exceptional items
1,2
72.5
62.3
Amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation) 13
(7.7)
(7 .2)
Exceptional items
6
(6.0)
(0.4)
Operating profit
1,2
58.8
54.7
Finance cost
7
(8.0)
(7 .5)
Profit before taxation
50.8
47 .2
Taxation charge
9
(13.8)
(11.7)
Profit for the year from continuing operations
37 .0
35.5
Profit for the year from discontinued operations
35
0. 1
0. 1
Profit for the year attributable to equity holders
37 . 1
35.6
Earnings per share
11
Basic earnings per share
From continuing operations
9 .3p
8.5p
From discontinued operations
From total operations
9 .3p
8.5p
Diluted earnings per share
From continuing operations
9 .2p
8.4p
From discontinued operations
From total operations
9 .2p
See note 11 for adjusted basic earnings per share and adjusted diluted earnings per share.
8.4p
127
Year ended
Year ended
31 December 2025
31 December 2024
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
Note
£m
£m
Profit for the year
37 . 1
35.6
Items that will not be subsequently reclassified
to profit or loss
Re-measurement and experience gains on
post-employment benefits
26
0. 9
3.8
Taxation in respect of re-measurement and
experience gains
(0.2)
(0. 9)
Items that may be subsequently reclassified to profit or loss
Cash flow hedges (net of taxation) fair value losses
27
(0.3)
(0. 1)
transfers to administrative
expenses
27
0.3
0.5
Net (loss)/gain on hedge of a net investment
27
128 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
(1. 4)
1. 1
Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations
1.7
(1.2)
Total other comprehensive income for the year
1.0
3.2
Total comprehensive income for the year
38. 1
The notes on pages 144 to 175 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
38.8
Capital
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Share
Strategic
Report
Share
Corporate
Governance
Merger
Redemption
Hedge
Retained
Statements
To t a l
Shareholder
Information
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
Capital
Premium
Reserve
Reserve
Reserve
Earnings
Equity
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Balance at 31 December 2023
41 .4
16.8
1.6
3. 7
(0.6)
216.2
279 . 1
Profit for the year
35.6
35.6
Other comprehensive income
0.4
2.8
3.2
Total comprehensive income
for the year
0.4
38. 4
38.8
Share options (value of employee
services)
1.5
1.5
Deferred tax on share options
0.2
0.2
Issue of share capital
0. 1
0.5
0.6
Dividend paid
(13.3)
(13.3)
Transactions with Shareholders
recognised directly in
Shareholders’ equity
0. 1
0.5
(11.6)
(11.0)
Balance at 31 December 2024
41.5
17 .3
1.6
3. 7
(0.2)
243.0
306. 9
Profit for the year
3 7.1
3 7.1
Other comprehensive income
1.0
1.0
Total comprehensive income
for the year
38. 1
38. 1
Share options (value of employee
services)
2.4
2.4
Purchase of own shares by EST
(0. 1)
(0. 1)
Share buybacks
(3.8)
3.8
(54.7)
(54. 7)
Deferred tax on share options
(0.5)
(0.5)
Current tax on share options
0. 1
0. 1
Issue of share capital
0. 1
0.2
0.3
Dividend paid
(17 .4)
(17 .4)
Transactions with Shareholders
recognised directly in
Shareholders’ equity
(3.7)
0.2
3.8
(70.2)
(6 9.9)
Balance at 31 December 2025
37 .8
17 .5
1.6
7. 5
(0.2)
commitments to employee share schemes. At 31 December 2025 the EST held 2,947 shares (2024: 9,024).
210. 9
275. 1
The Group has an Employee Share Trust (EST) to administer share plans and to acquire shares, using funds contributed by the Group, to meet
129
As at
As at
31 December 2025
31 December 2024
Note
Consolidated Balance Sheet
£m
£m
Assets
Non-current assets
Goodwill
12
154.0
153.6
Intangible assets
13
24.9
29.0
Property, plant and equipment
14
168. 9
160.0
Right of use assets
15
42.3
43.0
Textile rental items
16
80.0
73.4
Trade and other receivables
18
0.8
0.5
Post-employment benefit assets
26
4. 9
3.8
475.8
463.3
Current assets
Inventories
17
2. 9
2.3
Trade and other receivables
18
87.1
82.4
Current income tax assets
0.4
Reimbursement assets
19
2. 1
2.6
Cash and cash equivalents
11.0
11.5
Assets classified as held for sale
0.2
0.2
103.7
99.0
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
20
93. 1
94.3
Borrowings
22
9. 0
8. 9
Current income tax liabilities
0.7
Lease liabilities
23
7. 4
6.2
Derivative financial liabilities
27
0.3
0.3
Provisions
25
2.2
3.2
112.0
113.6
Non-current liabilities
Post-employment benefit obligations
26
0.3
0.3
Deferred income tax liabilities
24
37 .8
28. 9
Trade and other payables
21
0. 1
0.2
Borrowings
22
114.4
71.2
Lease liabilities
23
39 .4
40.8
Provisions
25
0.4
0.4
192.4
141.8
Net assets
275. 1
306. 9
Equity
Capital and reserves attributable to the
company’s shareholders
Share capital
29
37 .8
41.5
Share premium
31
130 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
17 .5
17 .3
Merger reserve
1.6
1.6
Capital redemption reserve
7. 5
3.7
Hedge reserve
(0.2)
(0.2)
Retained earnings
210. 9
2 43.0
Total equity
approved by the Board of Directors on 2 March 2026 and signed on its behalf by:
Ryan Govender
Chief Financial Officer
275. 1
306. 9
The notes on pages 144 to 175 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements. The financial statements on pages 127 to 175 were
Year ended
Statements
Year ended
Shareholder
Information
31 December 2025
Group Financial
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
31 December 2024
Company Financial
Note
Statements
£m
£m
Cash flows from operating activities
Corporate
Governance
Profit for the year
Strategic
Report
3 7.1
35.6
Adjustments for:
Taxation charge
9
13.8
11.7
Total finance cost
7
8.0
7. 5
Depreciation
94.0
89.6
Amortisation
13
8.0
7.9
Increase in inventories
(0.6)
(0.4)
Increase in trade and other receivables
(1.4)
(2.5)
(Decrease)/increase in trade and other payables
(6.4)
2.0
Share-based payments
30
2.4
1.5
Decrease in provisions
(0. 5)
(0. 9)
Cash generated from operations
154.4
152.0
Interest paid
(7.9)
(7 .5)
Taxation paid
(6.6)
(2. 7)
Net cash generated from operating activities
1 3 9.9
141.8
Cash flows from investing activities
Acquisition of businesses (net of cash acquired)
34
(0.2)
(19 .6)
Purchase of other intangible assets
(3.4)
(6.0)
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
(35.8)
(44.5)
Purchase of software
(0. 1)
(0. 1)
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment
0.2
0.3
Purchase of textile rental items
(65.8)
(63.2)
Proceeds received in respect of special charges
16
2. 1
2.3
Interest received
0. 1
Net cash used in investing activities
(103.0)
(130. 7)
Cash flows from financing activities
Proceeds from borrowings
96.8
56. 7
Repayment of borrowings
(55.3)
(47 .2)
Capital element of leases
(7.1)
(6.3)
Share buybacks
29
(54.7)
Proceeds from issue of share capital
0.3
0.6
Purchase of own shares by EST
(0. 1)
Dividends paid to company shareholders
(17 .4)
(13.3)
Net cash used in financing activities
(37 .5)
(9 .5)
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents
(0.6)
1.6
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year
2.2
0. 9
Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held
0.3
(0.3)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year
36
1.9
2.2
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:
Cash
11.0
11.5
Overdraft
(9.1)
(9 .3)
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year
1. 9
The notes on pages 144 to 175 are an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
2.2
131
Johnson Service Group PLC (the ‘Company’) and its subsidiaries (together ‘the Group’) provide textile rental and related services across the United
Kingdom (‘UK’) and the Republic of Ireland (‘ROI’).
The Company is incorporated and domiciled in the UK, its registered number is 523335 and the address of its registered office is Johnson House, Abbots
Park, Monks Way, Preston Brook, Cheshire, WA7 3GH. The Company is a public limited company and is listed on the London Stock Exchange.
The Group and Company financial statements were authorised for issue by the Board on 2 March 2026.
Basis of preparation
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these financial statements are set out below. These policies have been consistently
applied to the information presented, unless otherwise stated. These financial statements and notes have been rounded to the nearest £0.1 million,
unless otherwise stated. Accounting policies have been applied consistently throughout all periods.
The Consolidated Financial Statements of the Group have been prepared on a going concern basis in accordance with UK-adopted international
accounting standards. The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention, as modified by the
revaluation of financial assets and financial liabilities (including derivative instruments) at fair value through profit or loss and defined benefit pension
plans where plan assets are measured at fair value.
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with UK adopted international standards requires the use of certain critical accounting
estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgment in the process of applying the Group’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher
degree of judgment or complexity, or areas where assumptions and estimates are significant to the Consolidated Financial Statements, are disclosed
below in the section entitled ‘Judgments made in accounting policies’ and ‘Sources of estimation and uncertainty’.
Going concern
After considering the monthly cash flow projections, the stress tests and the facilities available to the Group and Company, the Directors have a
reasonable expectation that the Group and Company have adequate resources for their operational needs, will remain in compliance with the
financial covenants set out in the bank facility agreement and will continue in operation for at least the period to 30 June 2027. Accordingly, and having
reassessed the principal risks and uncertainties, the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the Group and
Company financial statements. See the Directors’ Report for the full going concern assessment.
Changes in accounting policy and disclosures
(a) Standards and amendments that are effective for the first time in 2025 and could be applicable to the Group:
Lack of Exchangeability Amendments to IAS 21
(b) Standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards that are not yet effective (have been endorsed
by the UKEB) and have not been early adopted by the Group:
Amendments to the Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 (effective for annual
periods beginning on or after 1 January 2026)
Contracts Referencing Nature-dependent Electricity Amendments to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7
Annual Improvements to IFRS Accounting Standards Volume 11
IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements (effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2027)
(c) Standards, amendments and interpretations to existing standards that are not yet effective (have not been
endorsed by the UKEB) and have not been early adopted by the Group:
IFRS 19 ‘Subsidiaries without Public Accountability: Disclosures’ Amendments to IFRS 19
None of above accounting standard changes are expected to have a material impact on the Group.
Judgments made in applying accounting policies
In the course of preparing these financial statements, certain judgments are made by the Group in the process of applying the Group’s accounting
policies. Those that have the most significant effect on either the amounts recognised in the financial statements or the presentation thereof are
discussed below.
Going concern
The Consolidated Financial Statements are prepared on a going concern basis. Additional information on the judgments management has applied in
adopting the going concern assumption is set out on pages 67 to 68.
Sources of estimation and uncertainty
The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. Whilst such estimates and assumptions are believed to be reasonable under the
circumstances, the resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal the related actual results. The estimates and assumptions that are
considered to have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year
are discussed below:
(a) Post-employment benefits
The Group operates two post retirement defined benefit arrangements (note 26). Asset valuations are based on the fair value of scheme assets.
The valuations of the liabilities of the schemes are based on statistical and actuarial calculations, using various assumptions including discount
132 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
rates, future inflation rates and pension increases, life expectancy of scheme members, flexible retirement options and cash commutations. The
actuarial assumptions may differ materially from actual experience due to changes in economic and market conditions, variations in actual
mortality, higher or lower cash withdrawal rates and other changes. Any of these differences could impact the assets or liabilities recognised in
the Balance Sheet in future years.
Forward looking statements
The terms ‘expect’, ‘should be, ‘will be’, ‘is likely to’ and similar expressions identify forward looking statements.
Although the Board believes that the expectations reflected in these forward looking statements are reasonable, such statements are subject to a
number of risks and uncertainties and actual results and events could differ materially from those currently expressed or implied in such forward
looking statements.
Factors which may cause future outcomes to differ from those foreseen in forward looking statements include, but are not limited to: general economic
conditions and business conditions in the Group’s markets; exchange and interest rate fluctuations; customers’ acceptance of its products and services;
the actions of competitors; and legislative, fiscal and regulatory developments.
Consolidation
The Group controls an entity when the Group has power over an entity, is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the
entity and has the ability to affect these returns through its power over the entity. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which control is
transferred to the Group. They are deconsolidated from the date that control ceases.
The accounting periods of subsidiary undertakings are co-terminus with those of the Company. Inter-company transactions, balances and unrealised
gains and losses on transactions between Group companies are eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides
evidence of an impairment of the asset transferred. Subsidiaries’ accounting policies have been changed at acquisition, where necessary, to ensure
consistency with the policies adopted by the Group.
Inter-company transactions include those relating to internal property leases between either Johnson Group Properties PLC or Harkglade Limited (the
property holding companies of the Group) and each of our other businesses. Under IFRS 16, each of the lessees are required to recognise an asset (the
right to use the leased item) and a financial liability to pay rentals. On consolidation, each of the right of use asset, lease liability, depreciation and
interest recognised by the lessee, relating to internal property leases, is therefore eliminated.
The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the
fair value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the date of exchange. Where consideration due to
vendors is deferred, but is not contingent on future events, it is included in consideration when assessing the total acquisition cost and is accrued within
trade and other payables until such a time that the amounts are settled. Where consideration due to vendors is contingent on future events,
management’s assessment of the fair value of the amounts payable are included in consideration when assessing the total acquisition cost and is
accrued within trade and other payables until such a time that the amounts are settled. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent
liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair value at the acquisition date, irrespective of the extent of any non-
controlling interest. The excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable net assets acquired is recorded as
goodwill. If the cost of acquisition is less than the fair value of the Group’s share of the net assets of the subsidiary acquired, the difference is recognised
immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement. As per IFRS 3, where new information is obtained within the measurement period about facts and
circumstances that existed as at the acquisition date and, if known, would have affected the amounts recognised as at that date, the fair value of
assets and liabilities acquired should be adjusted accordingly. The measurement period does not exceed one year from the acquisition date. Costs
directly attributable to acquisitions are expensed to the Consolidated Income Statement as an exceptional item.
The results from overseas operations have been translated into sterling at the weighted average euro rate of exchange for the period of £1 = €1.167
(2024: £1 = €1.181) where this is a reasonable approximation to the rate at the dates of the transactions. Euro denominated assets and liabilities have
been translated at the relevant rate of exchange at the balance sheet date of £1 = €1.145 (2024: £1 = €1.210).
Segment reporting
Operating segments are identified in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision maker. The chief
operating decision maker, who is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, has been identified as
the Executive Directors. For reporting purposes, operating segments are aggregated into reporting segments where operating segments are
considered to have similar economic conditions and characteristics and where the aggregation of operating segments provides information that
enables users to evaluate the nature and financial effects of the business activities in which the Group engages and the economic environments in
which it operates.
Alternative Performance Measures (APMs)
Throughout this Annual Report, and consistent with prior years, we refer to a number of APMs. APMs are used by the Group to provide further clarity
and transparency of the Group’s financial performance. The APMs are used internally by management to monitor business performance, budgeting
and forecasting, and for determining Directors’ remuneration and that of other management throughout the business. The APMs, which are not
recognised under UK-adopted international accounting standards, are:
adjusted operating profit’, which refers to continuing operating profit/(loss) before amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software
amortisation), and exceptional items;
adjusted profit before and after taxation’, which refers to adjusted operating profit less total finance cost;
adjusted EBITDA, which refers to adjusted operating profit plus the depreciation charge for property, plant and equipment, textile rental items
and right of use assets, plus software amortisation;
adjusted earnings per share’ and ‘adjusted diluted earnings per share’, which refer to earnings per share calculated based on adjusted profit
after taxation; and
‘net debt excluding IFRS 16 lease liabilities’.
133
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
The Board considers that the above APMs, all of which exclude the effects of non-recurring items or non-operating events, provide useful information
for stakeholders on the underlying trends and performance of the Group and facilitate meaningful year on year comparisons.
Limitations of APMs
The Board is cognisant that APMs do have limitations and should not be regarded as a complete picture of the Group’s financial performance.
Limitations of APMs may include, inter alia:
similarly named measures may not be comparable across companies;
profit-related APMs may exclude significant, sometimes recurring, business transactions (e.g. restructuring charges and acquisition-related costs)
that impact financial performance and cash flows; and
adjusted operating profit, adjusted profit before and after taxation, adjusted EBITDA and adjusted earnings per share and adjusted diluted
earnings per share all exclude the amortisation of intangibles acquired in business combinations, but do not similarly exclude the related
revenue and costs.
Reconciliation of APMs to Statutory Performance Measures
Reconciliations between the above APMs and statutory performance measures are reconciled within this Annual Report as follows:
Adjusted operating profit – note 1
Adjusted profit before and after taxation – note 8
Adjusted EBITDA – note 8
Adjusted earnings per share and adjusted diluted earnings per share – note 11
Net debt excluding IFRS 16 lease liabilities – note 36
Revenue recognition
Rendering of services
Revenue recognition is based on the principle that revenue is recognised when the performance obligation is satisfied i.e. control of a service transfers
to a customer and is measured based on the consideration specified in a contract with a customer. The Group’s contracts are repeat service-based
contracts where value is transferred to the customer over time as the services are delivered. The provision of clean items of workwear/linen is a
repetitive service of the same nature even though the number of items delivered may vary based on customer needs. As such, the Group’s contracts
have a single performance obligation as this is a series of distinct goods or services that are substantially the same and that have the same pattern of
transfer to the customer. The Group applies the practical expedient under IFRS 15 B16 and recognises the revenue in the amount to which the Group
has a right to invoice.
Revenue recognised is the amount of consideration to which the Group expects to be entitled to, in accordance with the existing contract, in exchange
for transferring promised services to a customer, excluding amounts collected on behalf of third parties, such as VAT.
Customers are generally invoiced weekly or monthly for service contracts with the vast majority of customers on 30 60 day credit terms.
Revenue from services provided to customers not invoiced as at the balance sheet date is recognised as unbilled receivables as where the service has
already been performed, the Group has an unconditional right to consideration before it invoices where only the passage of time is required before
payment of that consideration is due. This typically arises where the timing of the related billing cycle occurs in a period after the performance
obligation is satisfied.
Contract modifications occur on a regular basis to record change in stock requirements for customers or price changes. The Group accounts for a
contract modification when it is approved by the parties to the contract. Following a contract modification, the customer is billed in line with the
delivery of the remaining performance obligations. Changes in stock requirements do not result in additional separate services being provided as the
service provided is of the same nature with the amount of garments/linen varying. Given the provision of clean items of garments/linen is a repetitive
service of the same nature, any remaining services following a modification are distinct from those previously provided. The remaining consideration in
the original contract not yet recognised as revenue is combined with the additional consideration promised in the modification to create a new
transaction price that is then allocated to all remaining performance obligations. This effectively accounts for the modification as a termination of the
original contract and the inception of a new contract for all performance obligations that remain unperformed. This approach would also apply to
any mid-contract price increases.
The Group applies the practical expedient included in paragraph 121 of IFRS 15 and does not disclose information about its remaining performance
obligation for contracts as the Group recognises revenue in line with the value of the services received by the customer to date.
Supply of goods
Where sale of goods occur, revenue is recognised at a point in time when goods are delivered to customers. Revenue recognised is the amount of
consideration to which the Group expects to be entitled to, in accordance with the existing contract, in exchange for transferring promised goods to a
customer, excluding amounts collected on behalf of third parties, such as VAT.
Invoices are raised to customers for the sale of goods following delivery.
The breakdown of revenue within the Group is presented, by operating segment, in the Segment Analysis (note 1).
134 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Continued >
Rebates
Rebates payable to customers are recognised in line with relevant contractual terms. Rebates payable to customers are contingent on the occurrence
or non-occurrence of a future event e.g. the customer meeting certain agreed criteria. Rebates are recorded using the most likely method (the single
most likely amount in a range of possible consideration amounts). Accruals are made for each individual rebate based on the specific terms and
conditions of the customer agreement, including where they are subject to a demand from the customer. Management makes estimates on an
ongoing basis, primarily based on current customer spending, historic data and its accumulated experience, in order to assess customer revenues and
to calculate total rebates earned to be recorded as deductions from revenue. Rebates are charged directly to the Consolidated Income Statement over
the period to which they relate.
Costs incurred to obtain a contract
The incremental costs incurred to directly obtain a contract with a customer are capitalised and recognised as an asset within Trade and other
receivables (note 18) where management expects to recover those costs. Such costs are subsequently amortised over the period consistent with the
Group’s transfer of the related goods or services to the customer. Costs to obtain a contract that would have been incurred regardless of whether the
contract was obtained are recognised as an expense in the period where incurred.
The costs capitalised include sales commission paid to employees where payment is identified as relating directly to the signing of a customer
contract. Where consideration is paid to customers relating to a contract for a period over which services will be provided, the Group also capitalises
these costs. The costs are amortised over the average contract life.
Management is required to determine the recoverability of contract related assets at each reporting date. An impairment exists if the carrying amount
of any asset exceeds the amount of consideration the Group expects to receive in exchange for providing the associated goods and services, less the
remaining costs that relate directly to providing those goods and services under the relevant contract. An impairment is recognised immediately where
such losses are forecast.
The movement in the asset balance in the period therefore represents additional payments made, subsequent amortisation and any required
impairment.
Exceptional items
Items that are material in size, non-operating or non-recurring in nature are presented as exceptional items in the Consolidated Income Statement,
within the relevant account heading. The Directors are of the opinion that the separate recording of exceptional items provides helpful information
about the Group’s underlying business performance. Events which may give rise to the classification of items as exceptional include, but are not
restricted to, restructuring of businesses, gains or losses on the disposal of certain properties, one off gains or losses relating to pension liabilities, one off
income relating to non-trading activities, gains and losses related to capital insurance claims and expenses incurred and costs relating to business
acquisitions and any subsequent reorganisation cost.
Employee benefits
Post-employment benefits
The Group operates various pension schemes. The schemes are funded through payments to insurance companies or trustee-administered funds,
determined by periodic actuarial calculations. The Group has both defined benefit and defined contribution plans.
A defined contribution plan is a pension plan under which the Group pays contributions to publicly or privately administered pension insurance plans
on a mandatory, contractual or voluntary basis. The Group has no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions if the fund does not
hold sufficient assets to pay all employees the benefits relating to employee service in the current and prior periods. A defined benefit plan is a
pension plan that is not a defined contribution plan. Typically defined benefit plans define an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive
on retirement, usually dependent on one or more factors such as age, years of service and compensation.
The asset/liability recognised in the Balance Sheet in respect of the defined benefit pension plan is the present value of the defined benefit
surplus/obligation at the balance sheet date, less the fair value of plan assets. The defined benefit surplus/obligation is calculated periodically by an
independent actuary using the projected unit credit method. The present value of the defined benefit surplus/obligation is determined by discounting
the estimated future cash outflows using interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds that are denominated in the currency in which benefits will be
paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating to the terms of the related pension liability.
Past service costs are recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement. Interest cost on plan liabilities and interest income on plan
assets are recognised in finance costs. Curtailment gains arising from amendments to the terms of a defined benefit plan such that a significant
element of future service by current employees will no longer qualify for benefits, or will only qualify for reduced benefits, are recognised in the
Consolidated Income Statement. Re-measurement gains and losses arising from experience adjustments and changes in actuarial and demographic
assumptions are charged or credited to the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income in the period in which they arise.
For defined contribution plans, contributions are recognised as an employee benefit expense when they are due. Prepaid contributions are recognised
as an asset to the extent that a cash refund or a reduction in the future payments is available.
Other post-employment benefit obligations
The Group provides unfunded post-retirement healthcare benefits to a limited number of current retirees. The entitlement to these benefits is usually
conditional on the employee remaining in service up to retirement age and the completion of a minimum service period. The expected costs of these
benefits are accrued over the period of employment using the same accounting methodology as used for defined benefit pension plans. The liability is
recognised on the Balance Sheet within ‘Post-employment benefit obligations’. Re-measurement gains and losses arising from experience adjustments
and changes in actuarial assumptions are charged or credited to equity in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income in the year in which
they arise.
135
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Share-based compensation
The Group operates a number of equity-settled, share-based compensation plans. The economic cost of awarding shares and share options to
employees is recognised as an expense in the Consolidated Income Statement equivalent to the fair value of the benefit awarded. The fair value is
determined by reference to option pricing models, principally Binomial and Monte Carlo models. The fair value at the grant date of the award is
recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement over the vesting period of the award. At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimate of
the number of options that are expected to become exercisable. Any revision to the original estimate is reflected in the Consolidated Income
Statement with a corresponding adjustment to equity to the extent it relates to past service and the remainder over the rest of the vesting period. All
options cancelled are fully expensed to the Consolidated Income Statement upon cancellation. The proceeds received net of any directly attributable
transaction costs are credited to share capital (nominal value) and share premium when the options are exercised. Any amount charged or credited to
the Consolidated Income Statement by any of the Group’s subsidiaries is reflected in the books of the Company via an increase or decrease in
investments, with a corresponding increase or decrease to equity. These entries are eliminated within the Consolidated Financial Statements.
Bonus plans
The Group recognises an expense and a liability for bonuses based on the profit attributable to the Group or business, as appropriate, and other pre-
determined performance criteria. The Group recognises an accrual where it is contractually obliged or where there is a past practice that has created
a constructive obligation.
Termination benefits
The Group recognises termination benefits when it is demonstrably committed to the termination of the employment of current employees according
to a detailed formal plan without possibility of withdrawal.
Discontinued operations and assets held for sale
Business components that represent separate major lines of business or geographical areas of operations are recognised as discontinued if the
operations have been disposed of, or meet the criteria of as held for sale under IFRS 5. Assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying value will be
principally recovered through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. This condition is regarded as met only when the sale is highly probable,
expected to be completed within one year and the asset is available for immediate sale in its present condition. Assets held for sale are held at the
lower of their carrying value amount on the date they are classified as held for sale and fair value less costs to dispose.
Impairment of non-financial assets
Assets that have an indefinite useful life, for example goodwill, are not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment, or more
frequently if there are indicators that an impairment may have arisen. Assets that are subject to amortisation are reviewed for impairment whenever
events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by
which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to dispose
and value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are separately identifiable cash
flows (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets, other than goodwill, that suffer an impairment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment
at each reporting date. Value in use calculations are considered first followed by fair value less costs to dispose if it is deemed necessary. See note 12 for
further information.
Intangible assets
Goodwill
For acquisitions since 28 December 2003, goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the
identifiable net assets of the acquired business at the date of acquisition. For acquisitions prior to this date, goodwill is included at the amount
recorded previously under UK GAAP. For acquisitions prior to 1 January 2010, the cost of an acquisition includes related expenses but such costs are
excluded for acquisitions after this date.
Goodwill on business acquisitions is included in non-current assets. Negative goodwill arising on acquisition is recognised directly in the Consolidated
Income Statement.
Gains and losses on the disposal of a business include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the business sold. Goodwill is tested at least
annually for impairment and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Where an impairment is identified, it is charged to the Consolidated
Income Statement within amortisation and impairment of intangible assets (excluding software). Impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed.
Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating units for the purpose of impairment testing. The allocation is made to those cash-generating units or groups
of cash-generating units that are expected to benefit from the business combination in which the goodwill arose.
Capitalised software
Computer software licences are capitalised on the basis of the costs incurred to acquire and bring to use the specific software, and are included on the
Balance Sheet within intangible assets. Costs are amortised, once commissioned, over their estimated useful lives (not exceeding ten years).
Costs associated with the general development and maintenance of computer software programs are recognised as an expense as incurred. Costs
that are directly associated with the production of identifiable and unique software products controlled by the Group, and that are expected to
generate economic benefits exceeding costs beyond one year, are recognised as intangible assets. Direct costs include the costs of employees involved
in software development and an appropriate portion of relevant overheads.
Computer software development costs recognised as assets are amortised over their estimated useful lives (not exceeding ten years).
Costs incurred in respect of the configuration and customisation of cloud-based software arrangements are expensed as and when the services are
received. Configuration and customisation costs which include the development of software code that enhances or modifies, or creates additional
136 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Continued >
capability to the existing on-premise software to enable it to connect with the cloud-based software applications, are recognised as intangible assets
and amortised over their estimated useful lives (not exceeding ten years).
Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets comprise customer contracts and relationships and brands, recognised at cost. They have a finite useful life and are carried at
cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the cost of the intangible assets over their
estimated useful lives (currently three to thirteen years).
For assets resulting from a business combination, fair value is calculated based upon historical and prospective information and financial data specific
to each business combination, with an appropriate discount factor applied.
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, less depreciation, which is calculated to write off these assets, by equal annual instalments, over their
estimated useful lives. Cost includes expenditure which is directly attributable to the acquisition of the asset. The estimated life of plant, vehicles and
fixtures is two to fifteen years. Improvements to short leasehold properties are amortised over the shorter of the terms of the leases and their useful life.
The residual values and useful lives of assets are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each balance sheet date.
Properties are depreciated over their estimated remaining useful life not exceeding 50 years commencing on 26 December 1999 or, if later, date of
purchase. Land is not depreciated. The Group has not adopted a policy of revaluation but the carrying amounts of properties reflect previous
valuations. In the event of an impairment in property value the deficit below cost is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement.
The fit-out costs of new freehold or long leasehold industrial buildings are depreciated, in equal annual instalments, over their expected useful lives
which range from 10 to 25 years from the date on which the assets are fully commissioned.
Subsequent costs are included in the asset’s carrying amount, or recognised as a separate asset, as appropriate, only when it is probable that future
economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the
replaced part is derecognised. All other repairs and maintenance costs are charged to the Consolidated Income Statement during the financial year in
which they are incurred.
No depreciation is provided for assets in the course of construction until they are completed and ready in use as management intended.
The cost of property, plant and equipment acquired through business combinations is accounted for as the fair value of assets acquired.
Gains and losses on disposals are determined by comparing the net proceeds with the carrying amount and are recognised within the Consolidated
Income Statement.
Right of use assets and lease liabilities
Under IFRS 16, an asset (the right to use the leased item) and a financial liability to pay rentals are recognised. The only exceptions are short-term and
low-value leases where costs are charged to the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
At the date of lease inception, the Group determines whether the arrangement is a lease or contains a lease, while examining if it conveys the right to
control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration. In its assessment of whether an arrangement conveys the right
to control the use of an identified asset, the Group assesses whether it has the following two rights throughout the lease term:
(a) The right to obtain substantially all the economic benefits from use of the identified asset; and
(b) The right to direct the identified asset’s use.
Where a contract is deemed to contain a lease, the lease liability is initially recognised at the commencement date and measured at an amount
equal to the present value of the lease payments during the lease term (the non-cancellable period) that are not yet paid.
Lease payments, excluding non-lease components (which are charged to the Consolidated Income Statement on a straight-line basis over the lease
term) such as service costs, are discounted using the incremental borrowing rate of the lessee, since the interest rate implicit in the Group’s leases is not
readily determinable. The incremental borrowing rate is the rate that the Group would have to pay for a loan of a similar term, and with similar security,
to obtain an asset of similar value. The Group consults with its main bankers to determine what interest rate they would expect to charge the Group to
borrow money to purchase a similar asset to that which is being leased.
In determining the lease term, management considers all facts and circumstances that create an economic incentive to exercise an extension option
or not exercise a break clause. Periods after extension options/break clauses are only included in the lease term if the lease is reasonably certain to be
extended or not be terminated.
Break clause options are included in a number of property leases across the Group. These are used to maximise operational flexibility in terms of being
able to make decisions regarding the Group’s processing facilities in order to manage the needs of the Group. The majority of break clauses held are
exercisable by either the Group or the lessor.
At the commencement date, it is unlikely that management would consider a break clause to be reasonably certain of being exercised given
management would be unlikely to enter into a new lease agreement for a term which it was not their current intention to utilise in full. The lease term is
reassessed if a break clause is exercised or the likelihood of exercise becomes reasonably certain. The assessment of reasonable certainty is only
revised if a significant event or a significant change in circumstances occurs, which affects this assessment, and that is within the control of the Group.
An example of a significant change for the Group may include changing economic conditions and customer requirements impacting the Group’s
activities or long-term strategy.
All property break clause options held by the Group have not been included in the lease liability unless otherwise stated i.e. the periods after the break
clauses have been included in the lease term. This is due to the fact the Group could not move the plants to other locations without significant cost and
137
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
disruption, for reasons such as the Group will have made significant leasehold improvements to the property to meet the requirements of a laundry
processing facility, the costs involved in moving plant and machinery, the availability of a workforce and the lack of suitable alternative premises.
Variable lease payments that depend on an index or a rate, are initially measured using the index or rate existing at the commencement of the lease
and are included in the measurement of the lease liability. The Group is exposed to potential future increases in variable lease payments based on an
index or rate, which are not included in the lease liability until they take effect. When adjustments to lease payments based on an index or rate take
effect, the lease liability is reassessed and adjusted against the right-of-use asset.
Each subsequent lease payment is allocated between the liability and finance cost. The finance cost is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement
over the lease period using the effective interest method.
The right of use asset is initially recognised at the commencement day and measured at cost, consisting of the amount of the initial measurement of
the lease liability, plus any lease payments made to the lessor at or before the commencement date, plus any initial direct costs incurred by the Group,
less any lease incentives received.
The right of use asset is subsequently depreciated in accordance with the requirements in IAS 16 ‘Property, Plant and Equipment’ which results in
depreciation on a straight-line basis over the shorter of the asset’s useful life and the lease term on a straight-line basis. IAS 36 ‘Impairment of Assets’ is
also applied to determine whether the right of use asset is impaired and to account for any impairment loss identified. An impairment can be
recognised where onerous property leases are identified which can occur where a particular property becomes non-trading but for which the Group
still has a remaining lease obligation, the net book value of the right of use asset is written down to £nil.
Reassessment of a lease occurs where there is a change in cash flows based on contractual clauses that have been part of the contract since
inception. Any remeasurement of the lease liability results in a corresponding adjustment of the right of use asset. If the carrying amount of the right of
use asset has already been reduced to zero, the remaining remeasurement is recognised in profit or loss. The Group remeasures the lease liability to
reflect those revised lease payments only when there is a change in the cash flows, using an unchanged discount rate. Reassessment of leases in the
Group occurs where lease consideration changes due to a market rent review clause or changes to variable lease payments dependent on an index
or rate.
A modification to a lease occurs where there is a change in scope of the lease, or the consideration for a lease, that was not part of the original terms
and conditions. Where the modification increases the scope of the lease by adding the right to use one or more underlying assets, and the
consideration increases by an amount commensurate with the stand-alone price for the increase in scope and any appropriate adjustments to that
stand-alone price to reflect the contract’s circumstances, the Group accounts for the modification as a separate lease.
In all other cases, on the initial date of the lease modification, the Group allocates the consideration in the modified contract to the contract
components, determines the revised lease term and measures the lease liability by discounting the revised lease payments using a revised discount
rate. This occurs in the case where the Group agrees property lease term extensions that were not contractual as part of the original lease.
Rentals payable in respect of operating leases (net of any incentives received from the lessor) for short term and low value leases are charged to the
Consolidated Income Statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
Lease payments are presented in the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows as follows:
short term lease payments relating to low value assets are presented within cash flows from operating activities
payments for the interest element of recognised lease liabilities are included within Interest paid within cash flows from operating activities
payments for the capital element of recognised lease liabilities are presented within cash flows from financing activities
For lessor accounting, leases in which a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the lessor are classified as operating
leases. Sublet income is therefore recognised on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
Assets financed by leasing or hire purchase arrangements, which give rights approximating to ownership, and which had an outstanding liability on
transition to IFRS 16 were transferred from property, plant and equipment to be disclosed within right of use assets. Where such agreements expire
and ownership is transferred, the cost and accumulated depreciation of the relevant assets are transferred back to Property, plant and equipment.
Textile rental items
Textile rental items which principally comprise workwear garments, cabinet towels, linen and dust mats are initially treated as inventories. On issue to
customers or into pool stock, rental items are transferred to non-current assets and are stated at invoiced cost. Depreciation is calculated on a straight-
line basis over the estimated lives of the items in circulation, which range from two to five years with the majority being between two and three years.
Issued textile rental items bought through acquisition of other businesses are accounted for as the fair value of issued textile rental items acquired. This
will be the deemed cost of these items.
Charges are levied in respect of lost or damaged items or where a customer terminates the service before the end of the contracted period. Such
charges are referred to as ‘special charges’. Where proceeds are received in respect of these special charges the amounts received are deducted from
the carrying value of those items to the extent possible. Any amounts received in excess of the carrying value are taken to the Consolidated Income
Statement.
Where textile rental items are damaged and no charges are levied, an impairment loss is charged to the Consolidated Income Statement.
Where proceeds are received in respect of textile rental items withdrawn from circulation these are deducted from the carrying value of those
amounts.
Inventories
Stocks of materials, stores, goods for resale and new rental items are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is stated on either a first
in, first out basis or average cost basis and comprises invoiced cost in respect of the purchase of finished goods and materials, direct labour and direct
transportation costs in respect of garments for sale. It excludes borrowing costs.
138 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Continued >
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less applicable variable selling expenses. Costs of inventories
include the transfer from equity of any gains/losses on qualifying cash flow hedges of purchases of goods. Provision is made for obsolete, defective and
slow moving stock.
Trade receivables
Trade receivables are recognised initially at transaction value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less
provision for impairment.
Under IFRS 9, the Group applies the simplified approach to measure the loss allowance at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses for trade
receivables.
The Group continues to establish a provision for impairment of trade receivables when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to
collect all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. In addition, IFRS 9 requires the Group to consider forward looking
information and the probability of default when calculating expected credit losses. The measurement of expected credit losses reflects an unbiased
and probability-weighted amount that is determined by evaluating the range of possible outcomes as well as incorporating the time value of money.
The expected loss rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over the year and the corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this
period. The historical loss rates are adjusted to reflect current and forward looking information on factors affecting the ability of the customers to settle
the receivables. Trade receivables have been grouped for this analysis based on shared credit risk characteristics, including operating segment and
region in which the customer operates. The model considers indicators such as actual or expected significant adverse changes in business, financial or
economic conditions that are expected to cause a significant change to the customers ability to meet its obligations. The forward looking loss rate is
applied to the trade receivables excluding those specifically provided as per details below.
Further to the above model, trade receivables are specifically impaired where there are indicators of significant financial difficulties of the counterparty,
probability that the counterparty will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, or there is default or delinquency in payments.
The amount of the provision is the difference between the carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows of the asset,
discounted, where material, at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account,
and the amount of the loss is recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement within ‘impairment loss on trade receivables’. When a Trade receivable
is uncollectable, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are
credited against ‘impairment loss on trade receivables’ in the Consolidated Income Statement. Only when amounts are confirmed irrecoverable, are
they written off to the Consolidated Income Statement.
Reimbursement assets
The Group recognise a reimbursement asset in respect of third-party claims made against the Group but which are indemnified under the terms of its
insurance policies. A corresponding provision for such claims is also recognised. All of the expenditure required to settle such claims will be reimbursed
by the insurer under the terms of the policies, therefore it is virtually certain that reimbursement will be received. See note 19 for further details.
Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents in the Balance Sheet comprise cash at bank and in hand.
In accordance with IAS 32: ‘Financial instruments: Presentation, even where banking arrangements have a right of set off, bank overdrafts are not
netted against cash and cash equivalents as the Group does not intend to offset the balances with the resulting position shown as either a bank
overdraft or a cash balance as appropriate, but are instead shown within borrowings in current liabilities on the Balance Sheet.
For the purpose of the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows, cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined above, net
of outstanding bank overdrafts on the basis that the overdraft is repayable on demand and form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.
Trade payables
Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Trade payables
are non-interest bearing.
Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of unamortised transaction costs. Transaction costs are amortised, as a finance cost, over the
expected term of the facility, using the effective interest method. Borrowings are classified on the Balance Sheet as either current or non-current
liabilities, dependent upon the maturity date of the loan. Where no borrowings exist to offset transaction costs, these costs are presented in current or
non-current assets.
Bank overdrafts are shown within borrowings in current liabilities on the Balance Sheet.
Net debt
Net debt is defined as borrowings and lease liabilities, less cash and cash equivalents.
Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation (legal or constructive) as a result of a past event, it is probable that an outflow of
resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.
Provision is not made for future operating losses. Provisions are discounted where the impact is deemed to be material.
139
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Insurance claims
The Group recognise a provision for third-party claims made against the Group which are indemnified under the terms of its insurance policies. A
corresponding reimbursement asset in respect of third party claims is also recognised. See note 25 for further details.
Property
Provision is made for dilapidations and environmental remediation costs. Liabilities for environmental remediation costs are recognised as a property
provision when environmental assessments or remediation are probable and the associated costs can be reliably estimated. Generally, the timing of
these provisions coincides with the commitment to a formal plan of action or, if earlier, on divestment or closure of inactive sites. The provision will be
utilised by the payment of annual costs, shortfalls on sub-tenanted property, expenses of early termination, environmental remediation operations and
dilapidations.
Self insurance
Provision is made for the expected costs of uninsured incidents arising prior to the balance sheet date and for the anticipated cost of benefits due to
existing claimants under the, now discontinued, self-insured incapacity payroll scheme.
Taxation
Current tax
Current tax assets and liabilities for the current and prior years are measured at the amount expected to be recovered from or paid to the tax
authorities. The tax rates and tax laws used to compute the amount are those that are enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.
Deferred tax
Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their
carrying amounts in the financial statements. Deferred tax is not accounted for if it arises from initial recognition of an asset or liability in a transaction,
other than a business combination, that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is determined
using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and that are expected to apply when the
related deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.
Deferred income tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary
differences can be utilised.
Government grants
Government grants are recognised at fair value when there is reasonable assurance that the conditions associated with the grants have been
complied with and the grants will be received. Grants compensating for expenses incurred are recognised as a deduction of the related expenses in
the Consolidated Income Statement on a systematic basis in the same periods in which the expenses are incurred.
Foreign currency translation
The Consolidated Financial Statements are presented in Sterling, which is the functional and presentational currency of the Group and Company.
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into functional currency at the rates of exchange quoted at the
balance sheet date. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the exchange rates as
at the dates of the initial transactions.
Day-to-day transactions in a foreign currency are recorded in the functional currency at an average rate for the month in which those transactions take
place, which is used as a reasonable approximation to the actual transaction rate.
Translation differences on monetary items are taken to the Consolidated Income Statement.
A number of subsidiaries within the Group have a non-sterling functional currency. The financial performance and end position of these entities are
translated into Sterling in the Consolidated Financial Statements. Balance sheet items are translated at the rate applicable at the balance sheet date.
Transactions reported in the Consolidated Income Statement are translated using an average rate for the month in which they occur.
The differences that arise from translating the results of foreign entities at average rates of exchange, and their assets and liabilities at closing rates,
are dealt with in a separate component of equity.
On disposal of a foreign entity, the deferred cumulative amount recognised in equity relating to that particular foreign operation is recognised in the
Consolidated Income Statement.
Derivative financial instruments and hedging activities
The Group enters into commodity swaps to hedge against the Group’s exposure to price changes in respect of diesel. Derivatives are initially
recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently remeasured at their fair value. The method of
recognising the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as a hedging instrument, and if so, the nature of the item being
hedged. The Group designates certain derivatives as hedges of the variability of cash flows (cash flow hedge).
The Group documents at the inception of the transaction the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items, as well as its risk
management objective and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The Group also documents its assessment, both at hedge inception
and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are effective in offsetting changes in the cash flows of
hedged items.
140 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Continued >
Cash flow hedges
The effective portion of changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised within
Comprehensive income and accumulated in a separate component of equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised
immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement.
Amounts accumulated in equity are recycled in the Consolidated Income Statement in the years when the hedged item will affect profit or loss (for
example, when the forecast transaction that is hedged takes place). However, when the forecast transaction that is hedged results in the recognition of
a non-financial asset (for example, inventory) or a liability, the gains and losses previously deferred in equity are transferred from equity and included in
the initial measurement of the cost of the asset or liability.
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing
in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the Consolidated Income
Statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately
transferred to the Consolidated Income Statement.
Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting
Certain derivative instruments do not qualify for hedge accounting. Such derivatives are classified as at fair value through profit or loss, and changes in
their fair value are recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement.
Net investment hedging
Financial instruments are classified as net investment hedges when they hedge the Group’s net investment in an overseas operation. The effective
element of any foreign exchange gain or loss from remeasuring the instrument is recognised directly in other comprehensive income and accumulated
in the translation reserve in equity. Any ineffective element is recognised immediately in the Consolidated Income Statement. Gains and losses
accumulated in the translation reserve are reclassified to the Consolidated Income Statement when the foreign operation is disposed of.
Investment in own shares
Ordinary shares in the Company held by the Trustee of the Employee Share Trust (EST), are recorded in the Balance Sheet as a reduction in
Shareholders’ equity.
Own shares are treated as a deduction to equity until the shares are cancelled, at which point they are transferred to retained earnings. The nominal
value of shares in the Company purchased and subsequently cancelled is shown as a reduction in share capital and an equal and opposite transfer to
the capital redemption reserve.
Dividend distribution
Dividends to holders of equity instruments declared after the balance sheet date are not recognised as a liability as at the balance sheet date. Final
dividend distributions to the Company’s Shareholders are recognised in the Group’s financial statements in the year in which the dividends are
approved by the Company’s Shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when paid.
Shareholders’ equity
Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares or options are shown in equity as a
deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.
Share premium
Amounts in excess of the nominal value of Ordinary shares issued are recognised in share premium except where the Company was able to take relief
under section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 from crediting share premium and instead transfer the net proceeds in excess of the nominal value to
retained earnings.
Capital redemption reserve
Amounts in respect of the redemption of certain of the Company’s Ordinary shares are recognised in the Capital redemption reserve once shares have
been cancelled. Repurchase of the Company’s own equity instruments is recognised and deducted directly in equity. No gain or loss is recognised in
profit or loss on the purchase, sale, issue or cancellation of the Company’s own equity instruments.
Merger reserve
The merger reserve represents the difference arising on completion of the relevant mergers in accordance with applicable accounting standards.
Translation reserve
The foreign currency translation reserve is used to record exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign
subsidiaries and exchange differences on financial instruments that provide a hedge against net investments in foreign operations.
Hedging reserve
The hedging reserve represents the accumulated movements in the Group’s derivative financial instruments that have been designated as hedging
instruments. Amounts are transferred in and out of the reserve on the revaluation, or realisation, of identified hedging instruments.
141
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT
1 Financial risk factors
The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including currency risk, cash flow interest rate risk and fair value interest
rate risk), price risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. The Group’s overall risk management programme focuses on the unpredictability of financial
markets and seeks to minimise potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance. The Group uses derivative financial instruments
to hedge certain risk exposures.
Risk management is carried out by a central treasury department (Group Treasury) under policies approved by the Board. Group Treasury
identifies, evaluates and hedges financial risks in close co-operation with the Group’s operating companies. The Board provides written
principles for overall risk management, as well as written policies covering specific areas, such as foreign exchange risk, interest rate risk, credit
risk, use of derivative financial instruments and non-derivative financial instruments and investment of excess liquidity.
(a) Market risk
Currency risk
The Group monitors the growth and risks associated with its overseas operations. In August 2023, the Group entered into a net
investment hedge to manage the impact of movements in the GBP:EUR exchange rate on the value of the Group’s investment in its
business in the Republic of Ireland.
Further details are provided in note 27 of these Consolidated Financial Statements.
Cash flow and fair value interest rate risk
As the Group has no significant interest-bearing assets, the Group’s income and operating cash flows are substantially independent of
changes in market interest rates.
The Group’s interest rate risk arises from its borrowings and lease liabilities. Borrowings issued at variable rates expose the Group to cash
flow interest rate risk. Borrowings issued at fixed rates expose the Group to fair value interest rate risk. Lease liabilities are calculated on
commencement of a lease as the remaining lease payments discounted using the incremental borrowing rate of the Group, thus
exposing the Group to fair value interest rate risk.
Note 27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements provides additional disclosures regarding cash flow and fair value interest rate risk.
Price risk – Utilities and fuel
Key costs incurred by the Group in its operations include utility costs for gas and electricity. The Group also incurs significant costs in
respect of diesel given the size of the fleet of vehicles operated across the Group. Changes in utilities or fuel costs could have a material
impact on the Group’s financial performance.
The Group takes steps to mitigate the risk of price changes across both utilities and fuel as appropriate. In respect of gas and electricity,
the Group enters into contracts with suppliers to forward fix prices for determined periods, ensuring the Group has appropriate visibility
of future costs and to protect the Group, in the short term, over price volatility.
To try and mitigate the price risk associated with diesel costs the Group has entered into certain forward contracts with financial
institutions to fix an element of the diesel cost being incurred by the Group. Contracts are in place to cover a portion of the Group’s
forecast diesel usage and allow for actual costs to be swapped for a fixed rate on a monthly basis. Additional details of the contracts
entered into by the Group are included in note 27.
(b) Credit risk
Credit risk is managed on a Group basis. Credit risk arises from cash and cash equivalents, derivative financial instruments and deposits
with banks and financial institutions, as well as credit exposures to customers, including outstanding receivables and committed
transactions.
The Group’s credit risk is relatively low as, for banks and financial institutions, only independently rated parties with a minimum rating of
A-2’ are accepted. If wholesale customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. If there is no independent rating,
Management assesses the credit quality of the customer, taking into account its financial position, past experience and other factors.
Individual risk limits are set based on internal or external ratings in accordance with limits set by the Board. The utilisation of credit limits
is regularly monitored.
With regards to credit exposures to customers, the Group applies the simplified approach to measure the loss allowance at an amount
equal to lifetime expected credit losses for trade receivables. The Group continues to establish a provision for impairment of trade
receivables when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original terms of
the receivables. In addition, IFRS 9 requires the Group to consider forward looking information and the probability of default when
calculating expected credit losses. The measurement of expected credit losses reflects an unbiased and probability-weighted amount
that is determined by evaluating the range of possible outcomes as well as incorporating the time value of money. The expected loss
rates are based on the payment profiles of sales over the year and the corresponding historical credit losses experienced within this
period. The historical loss rates are adjusted to reflect current and forward looking information on factors affecting the ability of the
customers to settle the receivables. Trade receivables have been grouped for this analysis based on shared credit risk characteristics,
including segment and region in which the customer operates. The model considers indicators such as actual or expected significant
adverse changes in business, financial or economic conditions that are expected to cause a significant change to the customers’ ability
to meet its obligations. This would include the impact of possible customer closures, unemployment increases etc which are factors
impacting the ability of customers to settle outstanding debts.
142 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Continued >
Further to the above model, trade receivables are specifically impaired where there are indicators of significant financial difficulties of
the counterparty, probability that the counterparty will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, or there is default or delinquency in
payments.
Note 18 and Note 27 provide both numerical and narrative disclosures regarding credit risk.
(c) Liquidity risk
Prudent liquidity risk management involves maintaining sufficient cash reserves and maintaining the availability of funding through an
adequate amount of committed credit facilities. Due to the dynamic nature of the underlying businesses Group Treasury maintains
flexibility in funding by maintaining availability under committed credit lines.
Management monitors rolling forecasts of the Group’s liquidity reserve (comprising an undrawn borrowing facility (note 22) and cash
and cash equivalents (note 27) on the basis of expected cash flow.
2 Capital risk management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern in order to provide returns
for Shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders and to maintain an optimal capital structure to reduce the cost of capital.
Further details are provided in the Financial Review and in note 27.
143
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
1 SEGMENT ANALYSIS
The chief operating decision-maker (CODM) has been identified as the Executive Directors. The CODM reviews the Group’s internal reporting in
order to assess performance and allocate resources. The CODM determines the operating segments based on those reports and on the
internal reporting structure.
For reporting purposes, the CODM considered the aggregation criteria set out within IFRS 8, ‘Operating Segments’, which allows for two or more
operating segments to be combined as a single reporting segment if:
1) aggregation provides financial statement users with information that allows them to evaluate the business and the environment in
which it operates; and
2) they have similar economic characteristics (for example, where similar long-term average gross margins would be expected) and are
similar in each of the following respects:
the nature of the products and services;
the nature of the production processes;
the type or class of customer for their products and services;
the methods used to distribute their products or provide their services; and
the nature of the regulatory environment (i.e. banking, insurance or public utilities), if applicable.
The CODM deems it appropriate to present two reporting segments (in addition to ‘Discontinued Operations’ and ‘All Other Segments’), being:
1) Hotel, Restaurant and Catering (‘HORECA’): comprising of our Johnsons Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen, Johnsons Hotel Linen,
Johnsons Luxury Linen and Johnsons Ireland businesses each of which are a separate operating segment; and
2) Workwear: comprising of our Johnsons Workwear business only
The CODM’s rationale for aggregating the Johnsons Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen, Johnsons Hotel Linen, Johnsons Luxury Linen
and Johnsons Ireland, operating segments into a single reporting segment is set out below:
the gross margins of each operating segment are within a similar range, with long-term average margin expected to further
align;
the nature of the customers, products and production processes of each operating segment are very similar;
the nature of the regulatory environment is the same due to the similar nature of products, processes and customers involved;
and
distribution is via exactly the same method across each operating segment.
The CODM assesses the performance of the reporting segments based on a measure of operating profit, both including and excluding the
effects of non-recurring items from the reporting segments, such as restructuring costs and impairments when the impairment is the result of an
isolated, non-recurring or non-operating event. Interest income and expenditure are not included in the result for each reporting segment that is
reviewed by the CODM. Segment results include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a
reasonable basis, for example rental income received by Johnson Group Properties PLC (the main property holding company of the Group) is
credited back, where appropriate, to the paying company for the purpose of segmental reporting. There have been no changes in
measurement methods used compared to the prior year.
Other information provided to the CODM is measured in a manner consistent with that in the financial statements. Segment assets exclude
deferred income tax assets, post-employment benefit surplus, derivative financial assets, current income tax assets and cash and cash
equivalents, all of which are managed on a central basis. Segment liabilities include lease liabilities but exclude current income tax liabilities,
bank borrowings, derivative financial liabilities, post-employment benefit obligations and deferred income tax liabilities, all of which are
managed on a central basis. These balances are part of the reconciliation to total assets and liabilities.
Exceptional items have been included within the appropriate reporting segment as shown on pages 145 to 146.
144 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
All Other
HORECA
Workwear
Segments
To ta l
£m
£m
£m
£m
Balance sheet information
Segment assets
397.2
164.2
1.8
563.2
Unallocated assets:
Post-employment benefit assets
4.9
Current income tax assets
0.4
Cash and cash equivalents
11.0
Total assets
579.5
Segment liabilities
(99.4)
(39.8)
(3.4)
(142.6)
Unallocated liabilities:
Bank borrowings
(123.4)
Derivative financial liabilities
(0.3)
Post-employment benefit obligations
(0.3)
Deferred income tax liabilities
(37.8)
Total liabilities
(304.4)
Other information
Non-current asset additions
Property, plant and equipment
28.3
5.3
33.6
Right of use assets (including reassessment/modifications)
3.7
2.9
0.4
7.0
Textile rental items
42.6
27.2
69.8
Customer contracts
3.4
3.4
Depreciation and amortisation expense
Property, plant and equipment
19.3
5.8
25.1
Right of use assets
4.8
2.8
0.1
7. 7
Textile rental items
38.9
22.3
61.2
Capitalised software
0.1
0.2
0.3
Customer contracts
in the Group’s country of domicile, the United Kingdom.
7. 7
7.7
With the exception of non-current assets of £18.0 million which were located in the Republic of Ireland, all non-current assets of the Group reside
145
All Other
Statements
HORECA
Workwear
Segments
To ta l
Shareholder
Information
Year ended 31 December 2025
Corporate
Governance
£m
Group Financial
Statements
£m
£m
Company Financial
£m
Revenue
1 SEGMENT ANALYSIS (Continued)
Strategic
Rendering of services
Report
389.5
141.9
531.4
Sale of goods
0.3
3.7
4.0
Total revenue
389.8
145.6
535.4
Cost of Sales
(227.9)
(87.9)
(315.8)
Distribution costs
(64.3)
(20.9)
(85.2)
Administrative costs
(37.8)
(15.8)
(8.3)
(61.9)
Operating profit/(loss) before amortisation of intangible
assets (excluding software amortisation) and exceptional items
59.8
21.0
(8.3)
72.5
Amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation)
(7.7)
(7.7)
Exceptional items
(2.1)
(1.8)
(2.1)
(6.0)
Operating profit/(loss)
50.0
19.2
(10.4)
58.8
Total finance cost
(8.0)
Profit before taxation
50.8
Taxation charge
(13.8)
Profit for the year from continuing operations
37.0
Profit for the year from discontinued operations
0.1
Profit for the year attributable to equity holders
37.1
All of the above revenues are generated in the United Kingdom, with the exception of £37.5 million generated within the Republic of Ireland.
All Other
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
HORECA
Workwear
Segments
To ta l
Year ended 31 December 2024
Continued >
£m
£m
£m
£m
Revenue
1 SEGMENT ANALYSIS (Continued)
Rendering of services
371.0
139.0
510.0
Sale of goods
0.2
3.2
3.4
Total revenue
371.2
142.2
513.4
Cost of Sales
(222.6)
(85.2)
(307.8)
Distribution costs
(61.5)
(20.2)
(81.7)
Administrative costs
(37.7)
(16.5)
(7.4)
(61.6)
Operating profit/(loss) before amortisation of intangible
assets (excluding software amortisation) and exceptional items
49.4
20.3
(7.4)
62.3
Amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation)
(6.8)
(0.4)
(7.2)
Exceptional items
(0.4)
(0.4)
Operating profit/(loss)
42.2
1 9.9
(7.4)
54.7
Total finance cost
(7.5)
Profit before taxation
47.2
Taxation charge
(11.7)
Profit for the year from continuing operations
35.5
Profit for the year from discontinued operations
0.1
Profit for the year attributable to equity holders
35.6
All of the above revenues are generated in the United Kingdom, with the exception of £34.1 million generated within the Republic of Ireland.
All Other
HORECA
Workwear
Segments
To ta l
£m
£m
£m
£m
Balance sheet information
Segment assets
390.7
154.4
1.9
547.0
Unallocated assets:
Post-employment benefit assets
3.8
Cash and cash equivalents
11.5
Total assets
562.3
Segment liabilities
(102.2)
(39.2)
(3.7)
(145.1)
Unallocated liabilities:
Bank borrowings
(80.1)
Derivative financial liabilities
(0.3)
Post-employment benefit obligations
(0.3)
Current income tax liabilities
(0.7)
Deferred income tax liabilities
(28.9)
Total liabilities
(255.4)
Other information
Non-current asset additions
Property, plant and equipment
37.9
10.1
48.0
Right of use assets (including reassessment/modifications)
4.7
2.5
0.1
7.3
Textile rental items
38.9
24.0
62.9
Capitalised software
0.1
0.1
Customer contracts
6.0
6.0
Depreciation and amortisation expense
Property, plant and equipment
16.8
5.7
22.5
Right of use assets
4.5
2.4
0.1
7.0
Textile rental items
39.5
20.6
60.1
Capitalised software
0.3
0.4
0.7
Customer contracts
in the Group’s country of domicile, the United Kingdom.
6.8
146 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
0.4
7.2
With the exception of non-current assets of £11.6 million which were located in the Republic of Ireland, all non-current assets of the Group reside
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Revenue
2 EXPENSES BY FUNCTION
Strategic
Rendering of services
Report
Corporate
Governance
531.4
510.0
Sale of goods
4.0
3.4
Total revenue
535.4
513.4
Cost of sales
(315.8)
(307.8)
Distribution costs
(85.2)
(81.7)
Administrative expenses
(61.9)
(61.6)
Operating profit before amortisation of intangible assets (excluding
software amortisation) and exceptional items
72.5
62.3
Amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation)
(7.7)
(7.2)
Exceptional items
(6.0)
(0.4)
Operating profit
58.8
54.7
2025
2024
The items outlined below have been charged/(credited) to the Consolidated Income Statement in deriving operating profit:
£m
£m
Employee benefit expense (note 4)
248.9
229.0
Auditor’s remuneration (note 3)
0.9
0.6
Exceptional items (note 6)
3.0
0.4
Trade receivables impairment (note 18)
1.2
1.2
Energy costs*
39.5
45.2
Water and effluent costs
8.5
7. 7
All other operating costs**
71.6
75.4
Amortisation of intangible assets: (note 13)
Capitalised software
0.3
0.7
Customer contracts
7.7
7.2
Depreciation and impairment of:
Property, plant and equipment (note 14)
25.1
22.5
Right of use assets (note 15)
7.7
7.0
Textile rental items (note 16)
61.2
60.1
Short term/low value leases:
Land and buildings
0.2
0.6
Sublet rental income
(0.4)
(0.5)
Plant and equipment
* Energy costs comprise of electricity, gas and fuel costs.
3 AUDITOR’S REMUNERATION
1.2
1.6
** All other operating costs includes other distribution costs, other production costs, costs of inventory and other administrative costs.
2025
2024
£m
£m
Fees payable for the audit of the Company
0.1
0.1
Fees payable for the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries
0.5
0.5
Fees payable in relation to non-audit services
0.3
Auditor’s remuneration
£310,000 has been charged to exceptional costs.
0.9
0.6
Included in the above for the year to 31 December 2025 is £325,480 for non-audit services (2024: £15,461) in respect of the Auditor of which
147
2025
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
2024
£m
£m
Wages and salaries
4 EMPLOYEE BENEFIT EXPENSE
Continued >
205.9
192.6
Social security costs
24.6
18.3
Redundancy costs
1.0
0.1
Pension costs defined contribution plans (Note 26)
6.0
5.5
Total costs
237.5
216.5
Agency costs
8.7
10.8
Cost of employee share schemes (Note 30)
2.7
1.7
Total employee benefit expense
248.9
229.0
Within the above employee benefit expense note costs of £2.7 million (2024: £nil) have been included within exceptional items.
2025
The monthly average number of persons employed by the Group during the year was:
2024
HORECA
4,810
4,687
Workwear
1,864
1,894
All other segments
22
20
To ta l
management personnel is defined as the Board.
6,696
6,601
5 DIRECTORS’ EMOLUMENTS AND REMUNERATION OF THE KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL
2025
2024
Detailed disclosures that form part of these financial statements are given in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 94 to 115. Key
£m
£m
Short-term employee benefits
1.9
2.4
Share based payments
1.2
0.7
Post-employment benefits
0.1
0.1
To ta l
Short-term employee benefits shown in the table above include social security costs, bonuses and other benefits. Post-employment benefits
above include cash in lieu of pension contributions.
6 EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS
3.2
3.2
2025
2024
£m
£m
Costs in relation to business acquisition activity
(0.5)
(1.4)
Reorganisation costs
(3.4)
Costs in relation to the Main Market listing
(1.7)
Insurance claims
(0.4)
Property related credits
1.0
Total exceptional items
expenses.
CURRENT YEAR EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS
Costs in relation to business acquisition activity
was incurred in respect of other business acquisition related activities.
Reorganisation costs
recognition of £1.4 million of reorganisation costs during the year.
148 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
(6.0)
(0.4)
Of the £6.0 million of exceptional items £2.7 million would be included in cost of sales and £3.3 million would be included within administrative
The cost increases being experienced across UK businesses are encouraging some of our smaller, independent competitors to review their
business strategy which, as a result, allowed us to add contracts with an annualised revenue of some £4.9 million to our HORECA division during
the year. Professional and transitional services fees of £0.3 million were incurred in relation to those contract acquisitions. A further £0.2 million
The project to relocate our Workwear operations from Lancaster to Manchester, and the subsequent closure of the Lancaster site, resulted in the
2025
A further £1.1 million of reorganisation costs have also been incurred across the Group during the year.
related insurance proceeds will be recognised when it is deemed virtually certain that they will be received..
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Reorganisation costs of £0.9 million were also incurred during the period in relation to the contract acquisitions mentioned above.
Costs of £1.7 million were incurred during the year in relation to the Company’s ordinary shares being admitted to the Equity Shares
(Commercial Companies) Category of the Official List of the Financial Conduct Authority and to trading on the Main Market of the London
At the end of June 2025, our small industrial workwear processing unit in Bristol suffered a fire which rendered that part of the site inoperable. To
date, costs of £0.4 million have been recognised within exceptional items. In accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards,
Professional fees of £0.4 million were incurred relating to the acquisition of Empire Linen Services Limited. A further £1.0 million was incurred in
Income of £0.6 million was recognised in respect of a non-returnable deposit received relating to the potential sale of a freehold site in Exeter,
which was destroyed by a fire in 2020. In addition, a £0.4 million provision relating to the same site was released as it was no longer required.
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Interest payable on bank loans and overdrafts
Insurance claims
Property related credits
7 FINANCE COST
Corporate
Governance
5.2
4.8
Amortisation of bank facility fees
0.4
0.4
Finance costs on lease liabilities relating to IFRS 16 (note 23)
2.6
2.3
Notional interest on post-employment benefits (note 26)
(0.2)
Total finance cost
6 EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS (Continued)
Costs in relation to the main market listing
Stock Exchange, which occurred on 1 August 2025.
PRIOR YEAR EXCEPTIONAL ITEMS
Costs in relation to business acquisition activity
respect of other business acquisition related activities.
8 ALTERNATIVE PERFORMANCE MEASURES (APMS)
continuing operations used are shown below:
Strategic
Report
8.0
7.5
2025
2024
As discussed on pages 133 to 134 of these Consolidated Financial Statements, we refer to a number of APMs. A reconciliation of the APMs for
£m
£m
Adjusted profit before and after taxation
Profit before taxation
50.8
47.2
Amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation)
7.7
7.2
Exceptional items
6.0
0.4
Adjusted profit before taxation
64.5
54.8
Taxation thereon
(15.6)
(12.7)
Adjusted profit after taxation
48.9
42.1
Adjusted EBITDA
Operating profit before amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software
amortisation) and exceptional items
72.5
62.3
Software amortisation
0.3
0.7
Property, plant and equipment depreciation
25.1
22.5
Right of use asset depreciation
7.7
7.0
Textile rental items depreciation
61.2
60.1
Adjusted EBITDA
166.8
152.6
149
2025
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
2024
£m
£m
Current tax
9 TAXATION
Continued >
UK corporation tax charge for the year
5.9
2.5
Adjustment in relation to previous years
(0.3)
(0.3)
Current tax charge for the year
5.6
2.2
Deferred tax
Origination and reversal of temporary differences
7.9
10.1
Adjustment in relation to previous years
0.3
(0.6)
Deferred tax charge for the year
8.2
9. 5
Total charge for taxation included in the Consolidated Income Statement
provided below:
13.8
11.7
The tax charge for the year is higher (2024: lower) than the effective rate of Corporation Tax in the UK of 25.0% (2024: 25.0%). A reconciliation is
2025
2024
£m
£m
Profit before taxation
50.8
47.2
Profit before taxation multiplied by the effective rate of Corporation Tax in the UK
12.7
11.8
Factors affecting taxation charge for the year:
Non-taxable income
continuing operations by £0.9 million (2024: £0.1 million increase).
(0.3)
Tax effect of expenses not deductible for tax purposes
1.4
1.2
Difference in current and deferred taxation rates
0.1
Tax rate differential on non-UK profits
(0.3)
(0.2)
Adjustments in relation to previous years
(0.9)
Total charge for taxation included in the Consolidated Income Statement
(2024: 12.5%).
13.8
11.7
Taxation in relation to the amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation) has decreased the charge for taxation on
continuing operations by £0.9 million (2024: £1.1 million). Taxation in relation to exceptional items has decreased the charge for taxation on
Deferred income tax balances at the balance sheet date in the UK have been measured at a tax rate of 25.0% (2024: 25.0%). Deferred tax
balances in relation to balances held in the Republic of Ireland have been recognised at 12.5%, in line with the prevailing rate of tax in 2025
2025
2024
During the year, a deferred taxation charge of £0.2 million (2024: £1.0 million) has been recognised in Other Comprehensive Income in relation to
Dividend per share
post-employment benefits.
10 DIVIDENDS
Final dividend proposed
3.20p
2.70p
Interim dividend proposed and paid
1.60p
1.30p
2025
2024
£m
£m
Shareholders’ funds committed
Final dividend proposed
150 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
12.1
11.1
Interim dividend proposed and paid
6.3
has waived the entitlement to receive dividends on the Ordinary shares held by the trust.
5.4
The Directors propose the payment of a final dividend in respect of the year ended 31 December 2025 of 3.2 pence per share. Based upon the
number of shares in issue as at the latest practicable date prior to the publication of this document, this is expected to, utilise Shareholders’
funds of £12.1 million and will be paid, subject to Shareholder approval, on 15 May 2026 to Shareholders on the register of members on 17 April
2026. In accordance with IAS 10 there is no payable recognised at 31 December 2025 in respect of this proposed dividend. The trustee of the EST
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Profit for the financial year from continuing operations attributable to Shareholders
11 EARNINGS PER SHARE
Strategic
Report
37.0
35.5
Amortisation of intangible assets from continuing operations (net of taxation)
6.8
6.1
Exceptional costs from continuing operations (net of taxation)
Corporate
Governance
5.1
0.5
Adjusted profit from continuing operations attributable to Shareholders
48.9
42.1
Profit from discontinued operations attributable to Shareholders
0.1
0.1
Total adjusted profit from all operations attributable to Shareholders
49.0
42.2
No. of
No. of
shares
shares
Weighted average number of Ordinary shares
401,128,215
414,500,856
Potentially dilutive Ordinary shares
1,747,031
3,656,131
Diluted number of Ordinary shares
402,875,246
418,156,987
Pence
Pence
per share (p)
per share (p)
Basic earnings per share
From continuing operations
9.3p
8.5p
From discontinued operations
From total operations
9.3p
8.5p
Adjustments for amortisation of intangible assets (continuing)
1.7p
1.5p
Adjustment for exceptional items (continuing)
1.2p
0.2p
Adjusted basic earnings per share (continuing)
12.2p
10.2p
Adjusted basic earnings per share (discontinued)
Adjusted basic earnings per share from total operations
12.2p
10.2p
Diluted earnings per share
From continuing operations
9.2p
8.4p
From discontinued operations
From total operations
9.2p
8.4p
Adjustments for amortisation of intangible assets (continuing)
1.7p
1.5p
Adjustment for exceptional items (continuing)
1.2p
0.2p
Adjusted diluted earnings per share (continuing)
12.1p
10.1p
Adjusted diluted earnings per share (discontinued)
Adjusted diluted earnings per share from total operations
before the end of the reporting period.
12.1p
considered to show the underlying performance of the Group.
10.1p
Basic earnings per share is calculated using the weighted average number of Ordinary shares in issue during the year, excluding those held by
the Employee Share Trust, based on the profit for the year attributable to Shareholders. Adjusted earnings per share figures are given to
exclude the effects of amortisation of intangible assets (excluding software amortisation) and exceptional items, all net of taxation, and are
For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of Ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume conversion of all potentially
dilutive Ordinary shares. The Company has potentially dilutive Ordinary shares arising from share options granted to employees. Options are
dilutive under the SAYE scheme, where the exercise price together with the future IFRS 2 charge of the option is less than the average market
price of the Company’s Ordinary shares during the year. Options under the LTIP schemes, as defined by IFRS 2, are contingently issuable shares
and are therefore only included within the calculation of diluted EPS if the performance conditions, as set out in the Directors’ Remuneration
Report, are satisfied at the end of the reporting period, irrespective of whether this is the end of the vesting period or not.
Potentially dilutive Ordinary shares are dilutive at the point, from a continuing operations level, when their conversion to Ordinary shares would
decrease earnings per share or increase loss per share. Potentially dilutive Ordinary shares have been treated as dilutive in both years, as their
inclusion in the diluted earnings per share calculation decreases the earnings per share from continuing operations.
There were no events occurring after the balance sheet date, and up until the date of this report, that would have changed significantly the
number of Ordinary shares or potentially dilutive Ordinary shares outstanding at the balance sheet date if those transactions had occurred
151
2025
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
2024
£m
£m
Cost
12 GOODWILL
Continued >
Brought forward
155.0
145.8
Impact of foreign exchange translation
0.4
(0.3)
Business combinations (see note 34)
9.5
Carried forward
155.4
155.0
Accumulated impairment losses
Brought forward
1.4
1.4
Losses in the year
Carried forward
1.4
1.4
Carrying amount
Opening
153.6
144.4
Closing
In accordance with UK adopted international accounting standards, goodwill is not amortised but instead is tested annually for impairment, or
Impairment tests for goodwill
154.0
153.6
more frequently if there are indicators that an impairment has arisen, and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses.
2025
2024
£m
£m
Workwear
The allocation of goodwill to Cash Generating Units (CGUs) is as follows:
41.7
41.7
Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen
48.3
48.3
Hotel Linen
40.9
40.9
Luxury Linen
12.7
12.7
Ireland
10.4
10.0
HORECA
112.3
111.9
To ta l
Goodwill is tested for impairment by comparing the carrying value of each CGU against its recoverable amount. The carrying value for each
CGU includes the net book value of goodwill, intangible assets and certain related deferred tax balances, property, plant and equipment, right
of use assets, textile rental items and lease liabilities. Where lease liabilities have been included within the carrying value, the same adjustment
combination in accordance with IAS 12 and performing the VIU assessment on a pre-tax basis in accordance with IAS 36. They are included to
avoid any potential ‘artificial’ impairment of the CGU.
The recoverable amount of a CGU is primarily determined based on value-in-use calculations. These calculations use cash flow projections
based on financial budgets and forecasts, covering three years, which are approved by the Board. In arriving at the values assigned to each key
assumption management make reference to past experience and external sources of information regarding the future. Key assumptions
around income and costs within the budget are derived on a detailed, ‘bottom up’ basis. All income streams and cost lines are considered and
appropriate growth, or decline, rates are assumed for each, all of which are then reviewed, challenged and stress tested, firstly by senior
management and ultimately by the Board. Income and cost growth forecasts are risk adjusted to reflect specific risks facing each CGU and take
into account the markets in which they operate. Cash flows beyond the above period are, ordinarily, extrapolated using the estimated growth
rate stated below, which does not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the markets in which the CGU’s operate, into perpetuity.
152 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
154.0
153.6
has been made to the recoverable amount. Deferred tax balances included are only those which have arisen as a result of a business
2025
Group Financial
Company Financial
2024
Shareholder
Information
Sterling
changes in legislation that would affect the forecast cash flows.
The assumptions used for value-in-use calculations are as follows:
Statements
Euro
Statements
Sterling
would consider alternative use values prior to realising any impairment, being the fair value less costs to dispose.
was identified that the Ireland CGU is the most sensitive to any changes beyond the assumptions considered.
Euro
When assessing the recoverable amount for CGUs as at 30 November 2025, the forecasts covered the period to the end of 2028. Cash flows
beyond that period were then extrapolated using the estimated growth rate stated below. It is assumed that there are no material adverse
The pre-tax discount rate used within the recoverable amount calculations was 14.1% (2024: 14.3%) for all Sterling denominated cashflows and
10.8% (2024: 10.7%) for Euro denominated cashflows and is based upon the weighted average cost of capital reflecting specific principal risks
and uncertainties. The discount rate takes into account, amongst other things, the risk free rate of return, the market risk premium, size premium
and beta factor reflecting the average Beta for the Group and comparator companies which are used in deriving the cost of equity.
The same discount rate has been used for each CGU (with the exception of Euro denominated cashflows within the Ireland CGU) as the
principal risks and uncertainties associated with the Group, as highlighted on pages 50 to 56, are expected to impact each CGU in a similar
manner. Although Ireland is also impacted by the same principal risks and uncertainties associated with the Group as a whole, it is also subject
to a different economic and regulatory environment and, therefore, where relevant, a different WACC has been calculated to take these
The Board acknowledge that there are additional factors that could impact the risk profile of each CGU. These additional factors were
considered by way of sensitivity analysis performed as part of the annual impairment tests. The level of headroom is predominantly dependent
upon judgments used in arriving at future growth rates and the discount rate applied to cash flow projections. Within the cash flow projections,
key drivers to future growth rates are dependent on the Group’s ability to maintain and grow income streams including price increases and
volume growth, whilst effectively managing operating costs in light of the current inflationary pressures in the wider macroeconomic
environment. The level of headroom may change if different growth rate assumptions, a different pre-tax discount rate were used or cash flow
projections were not met in the calculation of value-in-use for each CGU. Where the value-in-use calculations suggest an impairment, the Board
Sensitivity analysis has been performed in assessing the recoverable amounts of goodwill such that (i) the long-term growth rate for the
forecast period was reduced to nil and (ii) the pre-tax discount rate was increased by 4.55%. Such changes did not result in any impairment of
goodwill. Significant headroom exists in each of the CGUs and, based on the stress testing performed, reasonable possible changes in the
assumptions would not cause the carrying amount of the CGUs to equal or to exceed their recoverable amount. From this sensitivity analysis, it
Annual growth rate (after forecast period)
Corporate
Governance
2.00%
2.00%
2.00%
2.00%
Risk free rate of return
Strategic
Report
5.07%
3.30%
4.55%
2.32%
Market risk premium
5.26%
5.26%
4.90%
5.21%
Beta Factor
12 GOODWILL (Continued)
differences into account.
0.93
0.93
1.16
1.16
Size Premium
3.00%
3.00%
3.00%
3.00%
Cost of debt
7.54%
7.24%
7.37%
Having completed the 2025 impairment review, no impairment has been recognised in relation to the CGUs.
6.64%
153
Capitalised
Other
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Software
Intangible Assets
To ta l
£m
£m
£m
Cost
13 INTANGIBLE ASSETS
Continued >
At 31 December 2023
2.6
99.5
102.1
Additions
0.1
6.0
6.1
Business combination (note 34)
12.2
12.2
Foreign exchange differences
(0.6)
(0.6)
At 31 December 2024
2.7
117.1
119.8
Additions
3.4
3.4
Foreign exchange differences
0.6
0.6
At 31 December 2025
2.7
121.1
123.8
Accumulated amortisation
At 31 December 2023
1.4
81.6
83.0
Charged during the year
0.7
7.2
7.9
Foreign exchange differences
(0.1)
(0.1)
At 31 December 2024
2.1
88.7
90.8
Charged during the year
0.3
7.7
8.0
Foreign exchange differences
0.1
0.1
At 31 December 2025
2.4
96.5
98.9
Carrying amount
At 31 December 2023
1.2
17.9
19.1
At 31 December 2024
0.6
28.4
29.0
At 31 December 2025
0.3
24.6
24.9
Amortisation of capitalised software is included within administrative expenses in the Consolidated Income Statement in determining adjusted
operating profit. Amortisation of other intangible assets is shown separately on the face of the Consolidated Income Statement.
Other intangible assets comprise of customer contracts and relationships and brands arising from business combinations together with the
customer contracts acquired not as part of a business combination. For assets resulting from a business combination, fair value is calculated
based upon historical and prospective information and financial data specific to each business combination, with an appropriate discount
factor applied. For assets not acquired as part of a business combination, fair value is deemed to be the amounts to purchase the contracts
Remaining
The longest estimated useful life remaining at 31 December 2025 is 12 years.
Acquisition
estimated
2025
2024
Other intangible assets have a finite useful life and are carried at cost less accumulated amortisation. Amortisation of other intangible assets is
calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the cost of the assets over their estimated useful lives (usually three to thirteen years).
Acquisition
less value of stock acquired.
Year
intangible
154 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
useful life
£m
£m
Empire
2024
Customer Contracts
Significant acquisition intangibles (net book value)
12 years
9.1
9.9
Celtic Linen
2023
Customer Contracts
11 years
7.2
7.8
Plant and
Company Financial
Statements
Properties
14 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Equipment
To t a l
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
£m
Cost
At 31 December 2023
Strategic
Report
45.0
240.4
285.4
Foreign exchange differences
(0.1)
(0.4)
(0.5)
Additions
1.8
46.2
48.0
Disposals
(0.1)
(5.3)
(5.4)
Business combinations (note 34)
0.9
0.9
Transfers from right of use assets
0.1
0.1
Transfers to assets classified as held for sale
(0.3)
(0.3)
At 31 December 2024
46.3
281.9
328.2
Foreign exchange differences
0.2
0.4
0.6
Additions
2.9
30.7
33.6
Disposals
(4.9)
(4.9)
At 31 December 2025
49.4
308.1
357.5
Accumulated depreciation
At 31 December 2023
17.3
133.6
150.9
Charged during the year
1.1
21.4
22.5
Eliminated on disposals
(5.1)
(5.1)
Transfers to assets classified as held for sale
(0.1)
(0.1)
At 31 December 2024
18.3
1 49.9
168.2
Charged during the year
1.1
24.0
25.1
Eliminated on disposals
(4.7)
(4.7)
At 31 December 2025
19.4
169.2
188.6
Carrying amount
At 31 December 2023
27.7
106.8
134.5
At 31 December 2024
28.0
132.0
160.0
At 31 December 2025
which the depreciation relates.
30.0
repaid in the year and the asset is now owned.
138.9
168.9
The value of assets under construction at 31 December 2025 was £2.8 million (2024: £5.3 million) and are included above within plant and
equipment. Depreciation charges are recognised in cost of sales, administrative expenses and distribution costs depending on the assets to
The transfer of assets from right of use assets represents the reclassification of the cost of assets from right of use assets where the lease was
155
Plant and
Properties
Equipment
To t a l
£m
£m
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
£m
Cost
15 RIGHT OF USE ASSETS
Continued >
At 31 December 2023
54.6
8.3
62.9
Additions
0.9
0.7
1.6
Business combinations (note 34)
1.9
0.9
2.8
Reassessment/modification of assets previously recognised
5.7
5.7
Disposals
(2.3)
(2.3)
Transfers to property, plant and equipment
(0.1)
(0.1)
At 31 December 2024
63.1
7.5
70.6
Additions
5.9
0.3
6.2
Reassessment/modification of assets previously recognised
0.8
0.8
Disposals
(0.9)
(1.1)
(2.0)
At 31 December 2025
68.9
6.7
75.6
Accumulated depreciation
At 31 December 2023
18.9
4.0
22.9
Charged during the year
5.1
1.9
7.0
Disposals
(2.3)
(2.3)
At 31 December 2024
24.0
3.6
27.6
Charged during the year
6.0
1.7
7. 7
Disposals
(0.9)
(1.1)
(2.0)
At 31 December 2025
29.1
4.2
33.3
Carrying amount
At 31 December 2023
35.7
4.3
40.0
At 31 December 2024
39.1
3.9
43.0
At 31 December 2025
39.8
on the assets to which the depreciation relates.
156 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
2.5
property, plant and equipment where the lease was repaid in the year and the asset is now owned.
December 2025 and 31 December 2024 that were in place at the start of the relevant year.
42.3
Depreciation charges are recognised in distribution costs and administrative expenses within the Consolidated Income Statement depending
The transfer of assets to property, plant and equipment represents the reclassification of the cost and associated depreciation of assets to
The reassessment/modification of leases relates to rental increases and extensions to lease terms that have been agreed during the year to 31
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Cost
16 TEXTILE RENTAL ITEMS
Brought forward
Strategic
Report
130.4
129.7
Foreign exchange differences
Corporate
Governance
0.4
(0.3)
Additions
69.8
62.9
Business combinations (note 34)
1.1
Disposals
(54.6)
(58.4)
Special charges
(4.2)
(4.6)
Carried forward
141.8
130.4
Accumulated depreciation
Brought forward
57.0
57.8
Foreign exchange differences
0.3
(0.2)
Charged during the year
61.2
60.1
Disposals
(54.6)
(58.4)
Special charges
(2.1)
(2.3)
Carried forward
61.8
57.0
Carrying amount
Opening
73.4
71.9
Closing
17 INVENTORIES
80.0
Depreciation charges are recognised in cost of sales within the Consolidated Income Statement.
73.4
2025
2024
£m
£m
New textile rental items
2.1
1.8
Raw materials and stores
£8.4 million).
0.8
0.5
2.9
2.3
The amounts above are net of an inventory provision of £0.1 million (2024: £0.1 million). There has been £nil (2024: £nil) stock provision recognised
during the year within cost of sales in the Consolidated Income Statement. Amounts transferred to cost of sales in the year are £6.6 million (2024:
2025
2024
£m
£m
Amounts falling due within one year:
Trade receivables
18 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
72.3
68.8
Less: provision for impairment of trade receivables
(4.2)
(4.5)
Trade receivables – net
68.1
64.3
Unbilled receivables
6.2
5.8
Other receivables
2.5
2.9
Trade receivables, unbilled receivables and other receivables
76.8
73.0
Prepayments
been received as at 31 December 2025.
9.3
8.6
Costs incurred to obtain a contract
1.0
0.8
87.1
82.4
Amounts falling due after more than one year:
Costs incurred to obtain a contract
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
87.9
82.9
Prepayments include £3.6 million (2024: £4.3 million) of deposits relating to items of property, plant and equipment where no asset has physically
157
2025
2024
Costs capitalised as costs incurred to obtain a contract during the year total £1.6 million (2024: £1.1 million). The charge recognised during the
year relating to costs incurred to obtain a contract is £1.1 million (2024: £0.9 million). Costs capitalised in relation to costs incurred to obtain a
The maturity of financial assets (which comprise of current and non-current trade receivables, unbilled receivables and other receivables) is
Gross
contract are expected to be recoverable.
Provision
Net
Gross
Provision
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Net
£m
£m
18 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES (Continued)
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trade receivables, unbilled receivables
analysed below:
Continued >
and other receivables
Not yet due and up to 3 months overdue
78.7
(2.8)
75.9
75.3
(3.1)
72.2
3 to 6 months past due
1.9
(1.0)
0.9
1.4
(0.6)
0.8
6 to 12 months past due
0.4
(0.4)
0.8
(0.8)
81.0
provision for impairment.
(4.2)
76.8
77.5
(4.5)
73.0
Under IFRS 9, the Group is required to utilise objective evidence as well as consider forward looking information and the probability of default
when calculating expected credit losses. The maturity of financial assets is therefore used as an indicator as to the probability of default.
Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less
Under IFRS 9, the Group applies the simplified approach to measure the loss allowance at an amount equal to lifetime expected credit losses
for trade receivables. Forward looking loss rates for each debt aging category takes into account how overdue the debt is, the type of
2025
The movement in the provision for trade and other receivables is analysed below:
2024
receivable, operating segment and region in which the customer operates, as well as other current market and trading conditions. Further to
the expected credit loss model, trade receivables are specifically impaired where there are indicators of significant financial difficulties of the
counterparty, probability that the counterparty will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganisation, or there is default or delinquency in payments.
There is limited concentration of credit risk with respect to trade receivables due to the diverse and unrelated nature of the Group’s customers.
Accordingly, the Directors believe that no further credit provision is required in excess of the provision for impairment of receivables.
£m
£m
At 1 January
(4.5)
(4.1)
Business acquisitions
(0.2)
Provisions for receivables impairment
(1.2)
(1.2)
Receivables written off during the year as uncollectable
1.5
1.0
At 31 December
recovering additional cash.
deemed to be not material.
(4.2)
(4.5)
The creation and release of the provision for impaired receivables has been included in impairment loss on trade receivables in the
Consolidated Income Statement. Amounts charged to the allowance account are generally written off when there is no expectation of
All trade and other receivable balances at the balance sheet date are denominated in Sterling, with the exception of £6.1 million (2024: £4.3
million) which are denominated in Euros, and are held at amortised cost. Given the short-term nature of current receivables there is deemed to
be no difference between this and fair value. The difference between the book value and fair value of non-current trade and other receivables is
2025
2024
The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date is the fair value of each class of receivable detailed within this note. The Group does
£m
£m
Reimbursement assets
not hold any collateral as security.
19 REIMBURSEMENT ASSETS
158 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
2.1
2.6
2.1
terms of the policies, and therefore it is virtually certain that reimbursement will be received.
recognition of these balances is made within current assets and current liabilities.
2.6
The Group recognises a reimbursement asset in respect of third-party claims made against the Group, but which under the terms of its
insurance policies, the Group is indemnified. All of the expenditure required to settle such claims will be reimbursed by the insurer under the
As the Group expects, on average, insurance claims to be settled within one year which is driven by a review of the historic claims data,
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Trade payables
20 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (CURRENT)
Strategic
Report
39.9
41.1
Other payables
0.9
2.0
Other taxation and social security liabilities
Corporate
Governance
16.8
13.4
Deferred income
0.5
0.5
Accruals
fair value.
Trade payables are unsecured and are usually paid within 60 days of recognition.
35.0
37.3
93.1
94.3
All trade and other payables at the balance sheet date are denominated in Sterling, with the exception of £4.8 million (2024: £3.3 million) which
are denominated in Euros and are held at amortised cost. Given the short term nature there is deemed to be no difference between this and
2025
Accruals includes balances in relation to, inter alia, energy costs, rebates and wages and salaries.
21 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES (NON-CURRENT)
2024
Other taxation and social security liabilities includes amounts owing in relation to Value Added Tax, Pay As You Earn and Pay Related Social
£m
£m
Deferred income
Insurance.
0.1
0.2
0.1
The difference between the book value and fair value of non-current trade and other payables is not material.
0.2
2025
2024
£m
£m
Current
22 BORROWINGS
Overdraft
9.1
9.3
Bank loans
(0.1)
(0.4)
9.0
8.9
Non-current
Bank loans
114.4
71.2
114.4
71.2
123.4
80.1
The maturity of non-current bank loans is as follows:
Between one and two years
114.4
Between two and five years
71.3
Unamortised issue costs of bank loans
(0.1)
114.4
71.2
The currency of the outstanding bank loans is as follows:
Sterling
83.0
44.0
Euros
Consolidated Financial Statements.
31.4
27.3
114.4
2.45% and was 1.45% at 31 December 2025. Margin is determined on the achievement of leverage ratios.
71.3
At 31 December 2025, borrowings were secured and drawn down under a committed facility dated 8 August 2022. The facility comprises a
£135.0 million revolving credit facility (including overdrafts) which runs to August 2027. Details of the security are provided in note 28 to the
Individual tranches are drawn down, in Sterling or Euros, for periods of up to six months and at SONIA or Euribor rates of interest respectively,
prevailing at the time of drawdown, plus the credit adjustment spread and the applicable margin. Maturity of the bank loans is shown as non-
current to reflect the term of the facility. Although the tranches are drawn down for periods of up to six months, in reality the tranches are not
repaid in full and therefore it would be misleading to present the bank loans as current. The margin on the facility ranges between 1.45% and
159
Plant and
borrowings (2024: £0.4 million) and £nil is included within non-current borrowings (2024: £0.1 million).
Properties
22 BORROWINGS (Continued)
and £3.0 million) with two of its principal bankers.
Equipment
To t a l
The secured bank loans are stated net of unamortised issue costs of £0.1 million (2024: £0.5 million) of which £0.1 million is included within current
The Group has two net overdraft facilities, included as part of the overall £135.0 million facility, for £5.0 million and £3.0 million (2024: £5.0 million
£m
£m
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
£m
At 31 December 2023
Continued >
38.8
4.4
43.2
Additions
23 LEASE LIABILITIES
0.9
0.7
1.6
Business combinations (note 34)
1.9
0.9
2.8
Reassessment/modification of liabilities previously recognised
5.7
5.7
Lease liability payments (including finance costs)
(6.5)
(2.1)
(8.6)
Finance costs
2.1
0.2
2.3
At 31 December 2024
42.9
4.1
47.0
Additions
5.9
0.2
6.1
Reassessment/modification of liabilities previously recognised
0.8
0.8
Lease liability payments (including finance costs)
(7.8)
(1.9)
(9.7)
Finance costs
2.5
0.1
2.6
At 31 December 2025
44.3
Lease liabilities are comprised of the following balance sheet amounts:
2.5
46.8
2025
2024
£m
£m
Amounts due within one year (Lease liabilities, Current liabilities)
7.4
6.2
Amounts due after more than one year (Lease liabilities, Non-Current liabilities)
39.4
40.8
46.8
47.0
2025
2024
£m
£m
Not more than one year
Minimum lease payments
9.3
8.5
Interest element
Lease liabilities are as follows:
(1.9)
(2.3)
Present value of minimum lease payments
7.4
6.2
Between one and five years
Minimum lease payments
26.4
26.1
Interest element
(6.7)
(6.6)
Present value of minimum lease payments
19.7
19.5
More than five years
Minimum lease payments
28.5
30.9
Interest element
£0.4 million (2024: £0.5 million).
160 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
(8.8)
(9.6)
Present value of minimum lease payments
property portfolio.
£1.6 million).
£8.6 million).
19.7
21.3
Future increases or decreases in rentals linked to an index or rate are not included in the lease liability until the change in cash flows takes
effect. Of the remaining lease liability at 31 December 2025 £nil (2024: £0.1 million) is subject to inflation-linked rentals, relating to the certain
commercial vehicles within the HORECA division. A further £42.5 million (2024: £38.2 million) is subject to rent reviews relating to the Group’s
Following the adoption of IFRS 16, short term leases (those with an expected term of 12 months or less) and leases for low value assets, continue
to be expensed on a straight line basis over the lease term, as under IAS 17. The expense relating to these payments was £1.4 million (2024:
Total cash outflow for leases, comprising capital and interest payments, for the year ended 31 December 2025 was £9.7 million (2024:
Furthermore, the Group sublets certain of its properties. Income recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement during the year amounts to
Deferred
Group Financial
Company Financial
Deferred
Shareholder
Information
Income Tax Assets
Statements
Statements
Income Tax Liabilities
liabilities and when the deferred income taxes relate to the same fiscal authority. The offset amounts are as follows:
2025
2024
2025
2024
Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax
£m
£m
£m
£m
Recognised deferred income tax assets and liabilities
24 DEFERRED TAXATION
Depreciation less than capital allowances
Corporate
Governance
(47.3)
(43.4)
Employee share schemes
Report
0.8
1.0
Post-employment benefit surplus/obligations
(1.2)
(0.9)
Derivative financial liabilities
0.1
0.1
Trading losses
Strategic
13.7
19.7
Other short term timing differences
(0.5)
Separately identifiable intangible assets
(3.9)
(4.9)
14.6
The deferred income tax assets disclosed above are deemed to be recoverable.
20.8
(52.4)
(49.7)
Depreciation
Other
less than
Employee
Post-
Derivative
Short Term
Capital
Share
employment
Financial
Trading
Timing
Intangible
The following provides a reconciliation of the movement in each of the deferred income tax assets and liabilities:
Allowances
Schemes
Benefits
Instruments
Losses
Differences
Assets
To t a l
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2023
(35.0)
0.3
0.1
0.2
22.4
(0.1)
(2.9)
(15.0)
Deferred income tax liabilities
acquired
(0.5)
(3.1)
(3.6)
(Charge)/credit to income
(7.9)
0.5
(0.1)
(2.7)
(0.4)
1.1
(9.5)
Credit to Shareholders’ equity
0.2
0.2
Charge to other
comprehensive income
(0.9)
(0.1)
(1.0)
At 31 December 2024
(43.4)
1.0
(0.9)
0.1
19.7
(0.5)
(4.9)
(28.9)
(Charge)/credit to income
(3.9)
0.3
(0.1)
(6.0)
0.5
1.0
(8.2)
Charge to Shareholders’ equity
(0.5)
(0.5)
Charge to other
comprehensive income
(0.2)
(0.2)
At 31 December 2025
(47.3)
(2024: 25.0% and 12.5% respectively).
0.8
(1.2)
estimate and may not reflect the actual outcome in the next 12 months.
0.1
13.7
The charge to income above of £8.2 million (2024: £9.5 million charge) is all in relation to continuing operations.
(3.9)
(37.8)
Deferred income taxes at the balance sheet date have been measured at a tax rate of 25.0% in the UK and 12.5% in ROI as at 31 December 2025
The Group does not expect to utilise any of the Group’s net deferred income tax liability in the next 12 months. This is management’s current best
161
Insurance
Self
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Claims
Property
Insurance
To t a l
£m
£m
£m
£m
At 31 December 2023
25 PROVISIONS
Continued >
3.9
0.9
0.9
5.7
Additions
0.7
0.7
Utilised during the year
(2.0)
(0.1)
(2.1)
Credit to Income Statement
(0.4)
(0.3)
(0.7)
At 31 December 2024
2.6
0.5
0.5
3.6
Additions
1.8
1.8
Utilised during the year
(2.3)
(0.1)
(2.4)
Credit to Income Statement
(0.1)
(0.3)
(0.4)
At 31 December 2025
2.1
0.4
0.1
2.6
2025
2024
£m
£m
Analysis of total provisions
Current
Insurance claims
be utilised over a period of up to four years.
Self insurance
scheme over an estimated period of 10 years. This scheme is now closed to new entrants.
26 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS
below are in respect of all of the Group schemes.
Pensions – defined contribution
(2024: £5.5 million).
Pensions – defined benefit
accrual on 31 December 2014.
(2024: £3.8 million). During the year, no employer or employee contributions were made (2024: £nil).
benefits by way of a future refund of a surplus on wind-up of the scheme.
162 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
2.2
3.2
Non-current
Property
0.4
0.4
2.6
payments. Accordingly, deficit recovery payments of £nil (2024: £nil) were made to the Scheme during the year.
3.6
The Group recognises a provision for liabilities in respect of third party claims made against it. A corresponding reimbursement asset of
£2.1 million (2024: £2.6 million) has been recognised as all of the expenditure required to settle such claims will be reimbursed by the insurer
under the terms of the policy. As the Group expects insurance claims to be settled within one year, recognition of these balances is made within
current assets and current liabilities. All movement shown above in respect of Insurance claims is non-cash movement as the amounts are
settled by the third party insurance provider and therefore there will be no amounts shown within the Consolidated Cashflow Statement.
The property provision includes onerous property costs, expected lease dilapidation costs and the estimated remediation costs of property
where an environmental problem has been identified and the costs to rectify can be reliably measured. The estimates and judgments used in
determining the value of provisioning are continually evaluated and are based on historical experience and other factors, including
expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. The majority of the property provision is expected to
£0.1 million of the self insurance provision is in respect of the estimated payments due to existing claimants under the self funded incapacity
The Group operates pension schemes of both the funded defined benefit and the defined contribution type for a substantial number of
employees. In addition, the Group also operates an unfunded defined benefit private healthcare scheme for eligible retirees. The disclosures
Several defined contribution pension schemes are used within the Group. The total cost of employer contributions for the year was £6.0 million
The Group operates a defined benefit pension scheme, the Johnson Group Defined Benefit Scheme (‘JGDBS’). The JGDBS was closed to future
A full actuarial valuation of the JGDBS was carried out as at 30 September 2022 and has been updated to 31 December 2025 by an
independent qualified actuary. The updated actuarial valuation at 31 December 2025 showed that the scheme had a surplus of £4.9 million
The schedule of contributions put in place on 31 October 2023, which superseded all earlier versions, required no further deficit recovery
The surplus is recognised on the balance sheet in line with IFRIC 14, as the Group has an unconditional legal right to any future economic
2025
Assumption for valuing pension liabilities Comments on prescribed conditions
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
IAS19 sets out prescribed (qualitative) conditions for selecting the actuarial assumptions used to calculate the pension liabilities and pension
costs. A key assumption is the discount rate which is used to determine the value of pension liabilities at the balance sheet date. The selection of
the price inflation assumptions (both RPI and CPI) is also critical as these are relevant for the pre-retirement revaluation and pension increases
These assumptions are based on market yields at the balance sheet date and may not be borne out in practice due to the long-term expected
duration of the Scheme. The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation is approximately 9 years (2024: 9 years). The duration
is calculated based on the membership data and results of the 2022 triennial valuation but updated to reflect market conditions as at
31 December 2025. Within the prescribed conditions however, assumptions must be mutually compatible and lead to the best estimate of the
Discount rate (pre and post retirement) Based on yields on “high quality” corporate bonds of appropriate duration and
currency, or a suitable proxy. Our approach is to value sample pensioner and non-
pensioner cash flows with different durations using a yield curve approach and to
calculate the single equivalent discount rate for each set of cash flows
Retail Price inflation (RPI) Based on the yield differential between index-linked bonds and fixed-interest
bonds of appropriate duration and of a similar credit standing (for example, using
spot yields derived from the inflation yield curve published by the Bank of England)
with the allowance for an inflation premium to reflect market conditions
Consumer Price Inflation (CPI) Based on the RPI assumption with an adjustment to reflect the historic and future
expected long term differences between the RPI and CPI indices
Pension increases Compatible with the rate of price inflation above taking into account the effects of
scheme rules and valid expectations of discretionary increases based on best past
Demographic assumptions Compatible assumptions that lead to a best estimate of future cash flows
Shareholder
Information
Rate used to discount scheme liabilities
Actuarial assumptions
in payment assumptions.
Assumptions used
Corporate
Governance
5.35%
5.35%
Retail price inflation (RPI)
26 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS (Continued)
Considerations when calculating the IAS 19 liability
future cash flows in respect of pension liabilities.
A summary of relevant considerations is set out below:
(e.g. rates of mortality and early retirement)
trend rate with core parameters” used).
for a higher, but non-increasing pension.
Strategic
Report
2.85%
3.30%
Consumer price inflation (CPI)
2.25%
2.60%
Rate of increase of pensions in payment (5.0% RPI linked)
practice
2.74%
3.05%
Rate of increase of pensions in payment (2.5% RPI linked)
1.86%
1.99%
Rate of increase of pensions in payment (2.5% CPI linked)
commute 25% of pension).
1.70%
females. The Company has historically included a reserve in its IAS19 valuation for GMP equalisation.
1.83%
Life expectancy at age 60 for current male pensioners is assumed to be 25.8 years (2024: 25.5 years) and 28.2 years for current female pensioners
(2024: 28.1 years). Life expectancy at age 60 for future male pensioners is assumed to be 26.0 years (2024: 25.6 years) and 28.0 years for future
female pensioners (2024: 27.9 years). “S3PXA 112%/113% males/females (YoB) CMI 2023 with a 1.25% long term trend rate with core parameters” has
been used to derive these mortality rates for future pensioners (2024: “S3PXA 112%/113% males/females (YoB) CMI 2023 with a 1.25% long term
It is assumed that 100% of non-retired members of the JGDBS will commute 25% of their pension at retirement (2024: 100% of members will
It has been assumed that 50% (2024: 50%) of future pensioners at retirement will exchange their non-statutory pension increases at retirement
Following the High Court ruling on 26 October 2018 regarding the equalisation of Guaranteed Minimum Pension (‘GMP’) benefit within the
Lloyds pension scheme, the Scheme is required to adjust benefits to remove the inequalities between the GMP benefits awarded to males and
On 20 November 2020 the High Court issued a supplementary ruling in the Lloyds bank GMP equalisation case with respect to members that
have transferred out of their scheme prior to the ruling. The ruling obliged Trustees to make top-up payments in respect of historic transfers that
were not paid on an equalised basis. The additional cost is required to be recognised through the income statement as a past service cost.
The full effect of the ruling can only be known following a detailed review of the history of Scheme membership movements, dating back as far
as the early 1990s. This will take some time to complete. No allowance has been included in the IAS19 valuation in respect of the supplementary
ruling on the grounds of immateriality. This is consistent with the approach taken as part of the 31 December 2024 disclosures.
163
Approximate increase/(decrease)
to the amount or timing of any outflow of resources, or the possibility of reimbursement of resources.
Item
26 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS (Continued)
In June 2023, the High Court judged that amendments made to the Virgin Media scheme were invalid because necessary S37 certification
associated to these historic amendments was not prepared. The case was subsequently reviewed by the Court of Appeal in July 2024 which
upheld the High Court’s decision. In June 2025, the Department of Work and Pensions (DWP) confirmed that the Government will introduce
legislation to give affected pension schemes the ability to retrospectively obtain written actuarial confirmation that historic benefit changes
met the necessary standards. On 1 September 2025 the government published a series of draft amendments to the Pension Schemes Bill 2025
including new provisions which will enable trustees to obtain retrospective validation of previous amendments where certain conditions are
met.
The Trustee is monitoring the position and will consider the possible implications, if any, for the Scheme of the above with its advisers and what
steps, if any, it wishes to take. It is not practicable, at present, to estimate the financial effect on the Scheme, if any, of the uncertainties in relation
Sensitivity of key assumptions
The table below gives an approximation of the impact on the IAS19 pension scheme liabilities to changes in assumptions and experience. Note
that all figures are before allowing for deferred tax.
The above sensitivities are applied to adjust the defined benefit obligations at the end of the reporting year. Whilst the analysis does not take
account of the full distribution of cash flows expected under the Scheme, it does provide an approximation of the sensitivity of the assumptions
shown. No changes have been made to the method and assumptions used in this analysis from those used in the previous year.
Private healthcare
The Group operates an unfunded defined benefit private healthcare scheme for eligible retirees. At 31 December 2025, the deficit of the scheme
was £0.3 million (2024: £0.3 million). During the year, the Group accounted for a current service cost of £nil and a notional interest cost of £15,000
in the Consolidated Income Statement (2024: £nil and £15,000 respectively). The current service cost in 2026 is expected to be £nil with a notional
interest cost of £15,000.
The scheme is subject to a periodic independent actuarial review which assesses the cost of providing benefits for current retirees. There are no
more future eligible retirees. The latest formal review was undertaken as at 31 December 2023 and this was updated to 31 December 2024 by an
independent qualified actuary.
circumstances since the last formal review.
Continued >
on Post-employment benefit obligation
Increase/decrease discount rate by 0.5%
(£5.7 million)/£5.7 million
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Increase/decrease RPI inflation assumption by 0.50%
£1.7 million/(£1.7 million)
1 year increase/decrease in life expectancy at age 60
£4.1 million/(£4.1 million)
2025
the interest cost by an estimated £1,000 per annum.
The amounts credited to the Consolidated Income Statement are set out below:
2024
The latest review was performed using the projected unit credit method, and a discount rate of 5.35%. The main long-term actuarial assumption
used in the review was that the rate of increase in medical costs is to be 6.50% throughout. There have been no material changes in
An increase of 1.00% in the medical cost trend would increase the scheme liabilities by an estimated £21,000 and the interest cost by an
estimated £2,000 per annum. A decrease of 1.00% in the medical cost trend would reduce the scheme liabilities by an estimated £19,000 and
£m
£m
Notional interest on post-employment benefits
Post-employment benefits disclosures
0.2
Total amounts credited to the Consolidated Income Statement
0.2
2025
2024
The interest income on scheme assets and the interest cost on scheme liabilities are included within total finance costs.
In addition, the following amounts have been recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income:
£m
£m
Return on scheme assets excluding interest income
0.8
(9.3)
Re-measurement (losses)/gains arising from changes in demographic assumptions
(0.6)
3.1
Re-measurement gains arising from changes in financial assumptions
1.3
9.6
Experience (losses)/gains on liabilities
(0.6)
0.4
Total amounts recognised in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
0.9
164 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
3.8
2025
26 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS (Continued)
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Present value of funded obligations
Corporate
Governance
(125.4)
(128.9)
Fair value of scheme assets
Amounts recognised in the Balance Sheet are as follows:
Strategic
Report
130.3
132.7
Net defined benefit pensions
4.9
3.8
Post-retirement healthcare obligations
(0.3)
(0.3)
Net post-employment benefits
4.6
3.5
2025
2024
£m
£m
Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year
132.7
145.4
Interest income
Movements in the fair value of scheme assets were as follows:
6.8
6.4
Return on scheme assets (excluding interest income)
0.8
(9.3)
Benefits paid – defined benefit pension obligations
(10.0)
(9.8)
Fair value of scheme assets at end of the year
130.3
132.7
2025
2024
£m
£m
Fair value of scheme liabilities at beginning of the year
(129.2)
(145.7)
Interest expense
Movements in the fair value of scheme liabilities were as follows:
(6.6)
(6.4)
Re-measurement (losses)/gains from changes in demographic assumptions
(0.6)
3.1
Re-measurement gains from changes in financial assumptions
1.3
9.6
Experience (losses)/gains on liabilities
(0.6)
0.4
Benefits paid defined benefit pension obligations
10.0
9.8
Fair value of scheme liabilities at the end of the year
(125.7)
(129.2)
2025
2024
£m
£m
Opening post-employment benefits
3.5
(0.3)
Notional interest
Movements in post-employment benefits were as follows:
0.2
Re-measurement and experience gains
0.9
3.8
Closing post-employment benefits
4.6
3.5
Quoted
No Quoted
The major categories of scheme assets were as follows:
Quoted
No Quoted
Market Price
Market Price
2025
Market Price
Market Price
2024
Active
Active
To ta l
Active
Active
To t a l
Market
Market
Scheme
Market
Market
Scheme
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Bonds
asset value valuations.
13.1
13.1
12.8
12.8
Liability driven investments
32.9
32.9
23.7
23.7
Alternative return seeking assets
68.9
68.9
71.6
71.6
Cash and cash equivalents
15.4
15.4
24.6
24.6
Total market value of assets
61.4
arising from a fall in the discount rate (and vice versa).
68.9
130.3
61.1
The assets of the pension scheme do not include shares in the Group in either 2025 or 2024.
71.6
132.7
Scheme assets held with no quoted market price on active market are valued by the fund managers. The managers determine fair value of
their holdings based on several factors. They may use secondary market prices, internal valuation models or independent valuations. The
process adopted will vary by manager and asset class, although independent third parties are typically used to verify and support the net
The Liability driven investments (LDI) shown above comprise of nominal and real LDI funds, investing in partly funded leveraged gilts and funds
for liability matching and liquidity funds investing in pooled cash funds. Under these arrangements, if interest rates fall, the value of the LDI
would be expected to rise, all else being equal, to help offset the expected increase in the present value placed on the scheme’s liabilities
165
2025
scheme assets could result in future increases in the deficit recognised on the JGDBS.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
2024
The funding position in respect of the JGDBS is influenced by both the measurement of plan liabilities and the valuation of plan assets. The
Trustee, in conjunction with the Group, has tried to ensure an appropriate balance of investments has been made by the scheme to mitigate
potential price volatility in individual asset categories. The Group and Trustee regularly monitor the composition of plan assets and amend the
composition accordingly to try and match scheme assets with the liabilities they are intended to fund. However, any underperformance of
Details of the Group’s policies and strategies in relation to financial instruments are given within the Statement of Significant Accounting
IAS 32, Financial Instruments: Presentation, IFRS 9, Financial Instruments and IFRS 7, Financial Instruments: Disclosures, also require numerical
disclosures in respect of financial assets and liabilities and these are set out below and in note 18. Financial assets and liabilities are stated at
either amortised cost or fair value. Where stated at amortised cost, this is not materially different to the fair value unless otherwise stated due to
The Group has recognised current and non-current gross trade receivables, unbilled receivables and other receivables of £81.0 million (2024:
£77.5 million) in the year. See note 18 for further details. In addition, reimbursement assets of £2.1 million in the year to 31 December 2025 (2024:
£m
£m
Cash at bank and in hand
Policies.
Continued >
Sterling
9.7
9.6
Euro
26 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFITS (Continued)
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS
Policies and strategies
their short term nature.
Financial assets
£2.6 million) have also been recognised. See note 19 for further details.
1.3
1.9
At 31 December
11.0
11.5
For interest purposes only, cash is offset against overdrafts through a pooling arrangement with each of the Group’s principal bankers.
Rating
At the balance sheet date, cash was held with the following institutions:
2025
2024
£m
£m
Cash at bank and in hand
National Westminster Bank
A-1
4.8
4.6
Lloyds Bank
A-1
4.9
4.8
Allied Irish Bank
A-1
1.3
Bank of Ireland
A-2
2.1
Total cash and cash equivalents
11.0
11.5
The Group refers to Standard and Poors short-term issue credit ratings when determining with which financial institutions to deposit its surplus
cash balances. A short-term obligation rated ‘A-1’ is rated in the highest category by Standard & Poor’s. The obligors capacity to meet its
2025
2024
Cash balances are used for working capital purposes. The Directors do not consider deposits at these institutions to be at risk.
As per
financial commitment on the obligation is strong.
Future
To t a l
As per
Future
To t a l
Balance
Interest
Cash
Balance
Interest
Cash
Sheet
Cost
Flows
Sheet
Cost
Flows
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Trade and other payables (note 1)
75.8
75.8
79.9
79.9
Overdraft
Financial liabilities
9.1
9.1
9.3
9.3
Bank loans (note 2, 3)
114.4
114.4
71.3
71.3
Lease liabilities
46.8
17.4
64.2
47.0
18.5
65.5
Derivative financial instruments
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
246.4
17.4
taxation and social security liabilities and deferred income.
166 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
263.8
207.8
Note 2. Bank loans and overdraft in the table above do not include unamortised bank fees.
18.5
226.3
Note 1. Trade and other payables comprise both current and non-current payables as disclosed within notes 20 and 21, excluding other
2025
Statements
2024
Note 3. IFRS 7 requires the contractual future interest cost of a financial liability to be included within the above table. As disclosed in note 22
of these financial statements, all bank loans are currently drawn under an RCF arrangement and as such there is no contractual
future interest cost. Interest charged in the year in relation to bank loans drawn down amounted to £5.2 million (2024: £4.8 million).
Interest is payable at a rate of SONIA or EURIBOR prevailing at the time of drawdown plus the credit adjustment spread and the
applicable margin, which ranges from 1.45% and 2.45% and is settled monthly. Bank loans drawn as at 31 December 2025 were
£114.4 million (2024: £71.3 million). Should these bank loans remain drawn until the expiry of the bank facility in August 2027, at the
prevailing rates of interest and current margin at the balance sheet date, the future interest cost would be £10.4 million
Shareholder
Information
Current
(2024: £10.0 million).
Strategic
Non-Current
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (Continued)
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
To ta l
Current
Statements
Non-Current
To t a l
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Company Financial
£m
Trade and other payables
Report
93.1
0.1
93.2
94.3
0.2
94.5
Less: Other taxation and social security
liabilities
(16.8)
(16.8)
(13.4)
(13.4)
Less: Deferred income
(0.5)
(0.1)
(0.6)
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)
75.8
75.8
80.4
80.4
2025
2024
Current
Non-Current
To ta l
Current
Non-Current
To t a l
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Bank loans
114.4
114.4
71.3
71.3
Overdraft
Liquidity risk
9.1
9.1
9.3
9.3
Less: Unamortised bank fees
(0.1)
(0.1)
(0.4)
(0.1)
(0.5)
9.0
114.4
123.4
8.9
The maturity of financial liabilities based on contracted cash flows is shown in the table below.
71.2
80.1
This table has been drawn up using the undiscounted cash flows of financial liabilities based on the earliest date on which the Group is obliged
Trade and
Derivative
Other
Bank
calculated using the relevant interest rates prevailing at the year end, where applicable.
Leases
Financial
Payables
1
Overdrafts
Loans
2
Liabilities
Instruments
To t a l
to pay. The table includes both interest and principal cash flows in respect of lease liabilities. Floating rate interest payments have been
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
As at 31 December 2025
Due within one year
75.8
9.1
9.3
0.3
94.5
Due within one to two years
114.4
8.2
122.6
Due within two to five years
18.1
18.1
Due after more than five years
28.6
28.6
75.8
9.1
114.4
64.2
0.3
263.8
As at 31 December 2024
Due within one year
80.4
9.3
8.5
0.3
98.5
Due within one to two years
8.0
8.0
Due within two to five years
71.3
18.1
89.4
Due after more than five years
amortised cost.
30.9
30.9
80.4
2 Bank loans excludes unamortised bank fees.
9. 3
71.3
65.5
1 Trade and other payables excludes ‘Other taxation and social security liabilities’ and ‘accruals’.
0.3
226.8
With the exception of derivative financial instruments which are held at fair value, all financial liabilities shown above are held at
167
Floating
Financial
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Fixed Rate
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (Continued)
Rate
Liabilities
Financial
Financial
on which no
Liabilities
Liabilities
Interest is paid
To t a l
£m
£m
£m
£m
As at 31 December 2025
Continued >
Sterling
64.2
92.1
71.3
227.6
Euro
Interest rate risk profile
31.4
4.8
36.2
As at 31 December 2024
Sterling
65.5
53.3
77.5
196.3
Euro
Fixed rate financial liabilities
For lease liabilities, the weighted average interest rate incurred is 5.2% (2024: 5.1%) and the weighted average period remaining is 115 months
(2024: 135 months).
Floating rate financial liabilities
Floating rate financial liabilities bear interest at rates based on relevant SONIA or EURIBOR equivalents. Loans are drawn and interest rates
fixed for periods of between one and six months. The weighted average period remaining for floating rate financial liabilities is 1 month (2024:
1 month).
The variation in the interest rate of floating rate financial liabilities (with all other variables held constant) required to increase or decrease post-
tax profit for the year by £0.1 million is 11 basis points (2024: 17 basis points).
Fair values of financial liabilities
Bank loans are drawn down and interest set for no more than a six month period (2024: six month period). In view of this the fair value of bank
loans is not materially different from the book value. The fair value of other financial liabilities was not materially different from the book value.
The Group recognises financial instruments that are held at fair value. Financial instruments have been classified as Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3
dependent on the valuation method applied in determining their fair value.
The different levels have been defined as follows:
Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities (Level 1).
Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (that is, as prices) or
indirectly (that is, derived from prices) (Level 2).
Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (that is, unobservable inputs) (Level 3).
The only financial instruments held at fair value by the Group relate to commodity swaps.
Commodity swaps
The Group enters into commodity swaps (hedging instrument) to economically hedge the Group’s exposure to changes in diesel prices (hedged
item). The fair values of the hedging instrument and the hedged item move in the opposite direction because of the price risk. Therefore, there is
The Group hedges a portion of its annual diesel usage using commodity swaps. The diesel hedged for future periods is based on management
Hedge ineffectiveness for price risk may occur due to differences in critical terms between the commodity swaps and diesel purchases such as
payment date or due to changes in fair value affecting the hedging instrument, such as credit risk, which is not replicated on the hedged item.
Ineffectiveness may also occur where diesel purchases were forecast but do not occur. There was no ineffectiveness recognised within the
Consolidated Income Statement during 2025 or 2024 in relation to the commodity swaps. The quantity of the hedging instrument and the
hedged item are the same when applying hedge accounting and are the same as that used for risk management purposes at a ratio of 1:1.
168 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
27.3
an economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument.
3.2
At 31 December 2025 the Group’s fixed rate financial liabilities related to lease liabilities (2024: lease liabilities).
forecasts of future diesel purchases and would meet the ‘highly probable’ assessment for hedge accounting.
30.5
Commodity
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Swaps
£m
5.7 million litres of diesel at a weighted average price of 44.54 pence per litre for the period 1 January 2026 to 31 December 2026.
For the proportion of our commodity swaps where hedge accounting is applicable and thus any gains and losses on these swap contracts
continue to be recognised in the hedging reserve as of 31 December 2025, these gains and losses will be continuously released to the
The movement in the Group’s hedging reserve as disclosed in the Consolidated Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity relate to the
At 31 December 2023
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (Continued)
As at the balance sheet date, the Group has the following commodity swaps in place:
Consolidated Income Statement within distribution costs until the end of the hedged period.
commodity swaps above:
Strategic
Report
0.6
Loss in fair value of swaps recognised in OCI
Corporate
Governance
0.1
Reclassified from OCI to Consolidated Income Statement
Group Financial
Statements
(0.5)
At 31 December 2024
0.2
Loss in fair value of swaps recognised in OCI
0.3
Reclassified from OCI to Consolidated Income Statement
(0.3)
At 31 December 2025
The fair value of these instruments at each of the year ends was:
0.2
For both the years ended 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 liabilities arising from these instruments have been classified as Level 2.
Fair Value
Fair Value
2025
2024
£m
£m
Derivative financial instruments held:
Current Liabilities
Where available, market rates have been used to determine fair value.
Commodity products – cash flow hedges
(0.3)
The movement in the Group’s derivative financial liabilities during the year is as follows:
(0.3)
Derivatives are only used for economic hedging purposes and not as speculative investments. However, where derivatives do not meet the
hedge accounting criteria, they are classed as ‘held for trading’ for accounting purposes and are accounted for at fair value through profit or
loss. They are presented as current liabilities to the extent they are expected to be settled within 12 months after the end of the reporting period.
To ta l
£m
At 31 December 2023
(0.8)
Loss in fair value of swaps recognised in OCI
(0.1)
Cash payments
0.6
At 31 December 2024
(0.3)
Loss in fair value of swaps recognised in OCI
(0.3)
Cash payments
costs respectively within the Consolidated Income Statement.
The fair value of the following financial assets and liabilities approximate their carrying amount:
Trade receivables and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents
Trade and other payables
0.3
At 31 December 2025
and 3 in any period.
(0.3)
Fair value losses on commodity swaps not qualifying as hedges are recognised directly in profit or loss and are included within distribution
All financial instruments are Level 2 financial instruments for all periods and there have been no transfers between either Level 1 and 2 or Level 2
169
27 FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (Continued)
Valuation techniques used to derive Level 2 fair values
Level 2 trading and hedging derivatives comprise commodity swaps. Commodity swaps are using a mark to market valuation at the balance
sheet date. The effects of discounting are generally insignificant for Level 2 derivatives.
Foreign currency risk
Hedge of net investment in foreign operations
In August 2023, the Group acquired Harkglade Limited and its subsidiaries Celtic Linen Limited and Millbrook Linen Limited (together ‘Celtic’), a
business located in the Republic of Ireland. The Group utilised its multicurrency facility to fund the acquisition. €29.4 million of the bank loan was
designated as a net investment hedge to manage the impact of movements in the GBP:EUR exchange rate on the value of the Group’s
investment in the Republic of Ireland.
There is an economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument as the net investment creates a translation risk that
will match the foreign exchange risk on the bank loan. The Group has established a hedge ratio of 1:1 as the underlying risk of the hedging
instrument is identical to the hedged risk component. The hedge ineffectiveness will arise when the amount of the investment in the foreign
subsidiary becomes lower than the nominal amount of the loans.
The net investment hedges were assessed to be highly effective at 31 December 2025 and a net unrealised loss of £1.4 million (2024: £1.1 million
gain) has been recorded in the other comprehensive income.
Capital risk management
The Group’s objective is to employ a disciplined approach to investment, returns and capital efficiency to deliver sustainable compounding
growth whilst also maintaining a strong balance sheet.
In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of dividends paid to Shareholders, return capital to
Shareholders, issue new shares or take other steps to increase or reduce share capital and reduce or increase debt facilities.
The Group manages its capital structure using a number of measures and taking into account future strategic plans. Such measures include
interest cover and gearing ratios. The Group therefore manages capital which includes cash and cash equivalents, bank borrowings and lease
liabilities.
Gearing, for bank purposes, is calculated as Adjusted EBITDA compared to total debt, including IFRS 16 liabilities, and the agreed covenant is for
the ratio to be not more than 3 times. The Group’s medium- to long-term intention is to maintain the capital structure such that we operate at
no more than 1 – 1.5 times on this basis, other than for short term specific exceptions. Under this framework, our capital allocation policy remains
unchanged and will take into account the following criteria as part of a periodic review of capital structure:
maintaining a strong balance sheet;
continuing capital investment to increase processing capacity and efficiency;
appropriate accretive acquisitions;
operating a progressive dividend policy; and
distributing any surplus cash to Shareholders.
28 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
The Group operates from a number of sites across the UK and the Republic of Ireland. Some of the sites have operated as laundry sites for many
years and historic environmental liabilities may exist. Such liabilities are not expected to give rise to any significant loss.
The Group has granted its Bankers and Trustee of the Pension Scheme (the ‘Trustee’) security over the assets of the Group. The priority of security
is as follows:
first ranking security for up to £28.0 million to the Trustee ranking pari passu with up to £155.0 million of bank liabilities; and
second ranking security for the balance of any remaining liabilities to the Trustee ranking pari passu with any remaining bank liabilities.
During the period of ownership of the Facilities Management division the Company had given guarantees over the performance of contracts
entered into by the division. As part of the disposal of the division the purchaser agreed to pursue the release or transfer of obligations under
the Parent Company guarantees and this remains in process. The Sale and Purchase Agreement contains an indemnity from the purchaser to
cover any loss in the event a claim is made prior to release. In the period until release the purchaser is to make a payment to the Company of
£0.2 million per annum, reduced pro rata as guarantees are released. Such contingent liabilities are not expected to give rise to any significant
loss.
170 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Continued >
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
2024
Shareholder
Information
Issued and Fully Paid
29 SHARE CAPITAL
Strategic
Report
Shares
Corporate
Governance
£m
Shares
Statements
£m
Ordinary shares of 10p each:
At start of year
414,954,767
41.5
414,415,123
41.4
New shares issued
1,636,260
0.1
539,644
0.1
Share buybacks
(38,293,361)
(3.8)
At end of the year
378,297,666
37.8
414,954,767
41.5
In respect of the two share buyback programmes which were running during the prior year, 38,293,361 Ordinary shares with a total nominal
value of £3,829,336 were bought back by the Company and subsequently cancelled for a total consideration including transaction costs of £54.7
million which represented an average price of 142.0p per share. The total shares repurchased across the two share buyback programmes to
2025
buyback programmes. There were no share buyback programmes running during the prior year.
Payments made in respect of the above transactions were (debited)/credited as follows:
2024
31 December 2025 represented 9.2% of the Company’s issued share capital outstanding immediately prior to the commencement of the share
£m
£m
Share capital
(3.7)
0.1
Capital redemption reserve
3.8
Retained earnings
Potential issues of Ordinary shares of 10p each
Approved LTIP’) (together referred to as ‘Executive Schemes’).
(54.7)
(54.6)
0.1
As at the balance sheet date, certain senior executives hold options in respect of the potential issue of Ordinary shares of 10 pence each
granted pursuant to the 2018 Long-Term Incentive Plan (the ‘2018 LTIP’) and the 2018 Long-Term Incentive Plan Approved Section (‘2018
Certain Group employees also hold options in respect of the potential issues of Ordinary shares of 10p each granted pursuant to the Johnson
Date Options
Number
Service Group Sharesave Plan (hereinafter referred to as the ‘SAYE Scheme’).
granted and the date from which they may be exercised are given below:
Date
Exercise Price
Scheme
Options granted under the SAYE Scheme are normally exercisable within six months from the date exercisable as shown below. Options under
the Executive Schemes are normally exercisable, subject to the achievement of performance conditions, three years after the date of grant and
lapse ten years from the date of grant in the UK and seven years from the date of grant in ROI. Upon exercise, all options are settled in equity.
Granted
of Shares
Exercisable
per Share
2018
LTIP
8 March 2023
1,696,349
8 March 2026
Nil
The number of shares subject to option under each scheme which were outstanding at 31 December 2025, the date on which they were
2018
Approved LTIP
8 March 2023
589,743
8 March 2026
117.0
2018
LTIP
3 May 2024
1,647,523
3 May 2027
Nil
2018
Approved LTIP
3 May 2024
595,707
3 May 2027
149.4
2018
LTIP
5 March 2025
1,742,618
5 March 2028
Nil
2018
LTIP
2 October 2025
350,467
2 October 2028
Nil
2018
LTIP
2 October 2025
41,156
14 December 2025
Nil
2018
LTIP
2 October 2025
5,268
13 December 2026
Nil
6,668,831
SAYE Scheme
1 October 2021
1,109
1 December 2024
129.75p
SAYE Scheme
1 October 2021
226,156
1 December 2026
129.75p
SAYE Scheme
4 April 2024
1,034,076
1 June 2027
128.25p
SAYE Scheme
4 April 2024
448,333
1 June 2029
128.25p
The weighted average remaining contractual life of options outstanding at the end of the year is 1.31 years (2024: 1.59 years).
171
1,709,674
8,378,505
2025
(2024: £0.2 million) in relation to equity-settled share-based payment transactions.
2024
The 2018 LTIP provides for an exercise price of £nil in respect of unapproved schemes. The 2018 LTIP also contains a sub-plan (the 2018 Approved
LTIP) which permits the grant of options for an exercise price equal to the quoted closing mid-market price of the Company shares on the
business day immediately preceding the date of grant. The vesting period is generally three years and may be subject to a further holding
period at the discretion of the Remuneration Committee for specified individuals. Both market based and non-market based performance
conditions are generally attached to the options, for which an appropriate adjustment is made when calculating the fair value of an option. If
vesting periods or non-market vesting conditions apply, the expense is allocated over the vesting period based on the best available estimate
of the number of share options expected to vest. Estimates are subsequently revised if there is any indication that the number of share options
expected to vest differs from previous estimates. If the options remain outstanding at the balance sheet date are unexercised after a period of
up to 10 years from the date of grant, the options expire. Furthermore, options are forfeited if the employee leaves the Group before the options
The SAYE Scheme provides for an exercise price equal to the average of the quoted mid-market price of the Company shares on the business
days immediately preceding the date of grant, less a discount of up to ten per cent. The vesting period under the scheme is either three or five
During the year the Group recognised total expenses of £2.7 million (2024: £1.7 million) including associated social security costs of £0.3 million
The aggregate gain made by Directors, who served during the year, on the exercise of share options during the year was £1.1 million (2024: £nil).
Number of
30 SHARE BASED PAYMENTS
vest, unless under exceptional circumstances.
Weighted Average
Number of
Further details are disclosed within the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 94 to 115.
Movements in the current and prior year in respect of all share schemes are summarised below:
Weighted Average
years and no performance conditions, other than remaining a Group employee, are attached to the options.
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
Options
Exercise Price (p)
Options
The average share price of Johnson Service Group PLC during the year was 139.7 pence (2024: 148.2 pence).
Exercise Price (p)
Executive schemes
Executive Schemes
SAYE Scheme
Disclosures
Continued >
Outstanding at beginning of the year
6,155,256
27p
4,172,497
19p
Granted during the year
2,392,299
2,387,446
39p
Exercised during the period
(1,456,077)
(95,000)
Lapsed during the year
(422,647)
17p
(309,687)
19p
Outstanding at the end of the year
6,668,831
24p
6,155,256
27p
Exercisable at the end of the year
41,156
311,220
SAYE schemes
Outstanding at beginning of the year
2,303,010
130p
1,241,361
133p
Granted during the year
1,713,662
128p
Exercised during the year
(186,260)
130p
(444,644)
130p
Lapsed during the year
(407,076)
136p
(207,369)
131p
Outstanding at the end of the year
1,709,674
128p
2,303,010
130p
Exercisable at the end of the year
1,109
130p
418,591
137p
The fair value of options awarded to employees is determined by reference to option pricing models, principally Binomial models for SAYE
Options Granted
Options Granted
For options outstanding at 31 December 2025, the exercise date and the exercise price are disclosed within note 29.
During 2025
During 2024
schemes and Monte Carlo models for all other schemes. The inputs into the Binomial and Monte Carlo models are as follows:
Weighted average share price at date of grant (pence)
142
141
Weighted average exercise price (pence)
76
Weighted average fair value (pence)
104
104
Expected volatility (%)
32.6
35.9
Expected life (years)
172 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
3.0
3.3
Risk free interest rate (%)
4.0
4.2
Expected dividend yield (%)
2.5
government gilts on the date of grant, for a period akin to the expected life of the option.
0.7
Expected volatility and expected dividend yield were determined by calculating the historical volatility of the Company’s share price and the
historical dividend yield for a period akin to the expected life of each option scheme. The risk free rate of return is based on the rate for UK
2025
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
Balance brought forward
31 SHARE PREMIUM
Strategic
Report
17.3
16.8
Received on allotment of shares
Corporate
Governance
0.2
0.5
Balance carried forward
32 OWN SHARES
17.5
17.3
Own shares represent the cost of shares in Johnson Service Group PLC purchased in the market and held by the Trustee of the EST, to satisfy
options under the Group’s share option schemes. During the year, the EST acquired 1,450,000 shares at nominal value, using funds gifted by the
2025
year. In satisfying such awards, the EST transferred 1,456,077 of shares to award holders.
The number of shares and the market value at the balance sheet date are as follows:
2024
Company, which were used, together with those shares already held by the EST, to satisfy the vesting of employee share awards during the
Number of shares held in EST
2,947
9,024
Market value £m
2025
33 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
2024
£m
£m
Profit for the year
37.1
35.6
Other recognised gains and losses relating to the year:
37.1
35.6
Share options (value of employee services)
2.4
1.5
Issue of share capital
0.3
0.6
Deferred tax on share options
(0.5)
0.2
Current tax on share options
0.1
Purchase of own shares by EST
(0.1)
Share buyback
(54.7)
Dividends paid to Shareholders
(17.4)
(13.3)
Re-measurement and experience gains (net of taxation)
0.7
2.9
Movement of translation reserve
0.3
(0.1)
Cash flow hedges movement
0.4
Net addition to Shareholders’ equity
(31.8)
27.8
Opening Shareholders’ equity
306.9
279.1
Closing Shareholders’ equity
34 BUSINESS COMBINATIONS
There were no business combinations during the year.
275.1
306.9
2025
The cash flows in relation to business combinations are summarised below:
2024
In the prior year, the Group acquired 100% of the share capital of Empire Linen Services Limited (‘Empire’). Full details are provided in the 2024
Annual Report and Accounts. There have been no subsequent adjustments made to the fair values for any of the prior year acquisitions.
£m
£m
Net consideration payable
(21.2)
Deferred consideration
(0.2)
0.2
Cash acquired
Cash flows from business combinations
1.4
Net cash used in investing activities
(0.2)
(19.6)
173
2025
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements
2024
During the year, a provision against deferred consideration of £0.1 million (2024: £0.1 million) was released relating to the sale of the Facilities
The Income Statement from discontinued operations included within the Consolidated Income Statement is as follows:
£m
£m
Operating profit
Continued >
0.1
0.1
Taxation
35 DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS
Management division in August 2013.
Income Statement
Profit for the year from discontinued operations
Cash Flows
0.1
0.1
2025
2024
The cash flows from discontinued operations included within the Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows are as follows:
£m
£m
Net cash generated from operating activities
0.1
0.1
Net debt is calculated as total borrowings net of unamortised bank facility fees, less cash and cash equivalents. Non-cash changes represent
the effects of the recognition and subsequent amortisation of fees relating to the bank facility, changing maturity profiles, debt acquired as
Foreign
At 31 December
36 ANALYSIS OF NET DEBT
Non-cash
part of an acquisition and the recognition of lease liabilities entered into during the year.
Exchange
At 31 December
2024
Cash Flow
Changes
adjustments
2025
December 2025
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Debt due within one year (See note 22)
0.4
(0.3)
0.1
Debt due after more than one year (See note 22)
(71.2)
(41.5)
(0.1)
(1.6)
(114.4)
Lease liabilities (See note 23)
(47.0)
7.1
(6.9)
(46.8)
Total debt and lease financing
(117.8)
(34.4)
(7.3)
(1.6)
(161.1)
Cash and cash equivalents
2.2
(0.6)
0.3
1.9
Net debt
(115.6)
(35.0)
(7.3)
(1.3)
(159.2)
Foreign
At 31 December
Non-cash
Exchange
At 31 December
2023
Cash Flow
Changes
adjustments
2024
December 2024
£m
£m
£m
£m
£m
Debt due within one year (See note 22)
0.4
0.3
(0.3)
0.4
Debt due after more than one year (See note 22)
(63.0)
(9.5)
(0.1)
1.4
(71.2)
Lease liabilities (See note 23)
(43.2)
6.3
(10.1)
(47.0)
Total debt and lease financing
(105.8)
(2.9)
(10.5)
1.4
(117.8)
Cash and cash equivalents
0.9
1.6
(0.3)
2.2
Net debt
(104.9)
(1.3)
(10.5)
The cash and cash equivalents figures are comprised of the following balance sheet amounts:
1.1
(115.6)
2025
2024
£m
£m
Cash (Current assets)
:
11.0
11.5
Overdraft (Borrowings, Current liabilities)
(9.1)
(9.3)
1.9
2.2
2025
Lease liabilities are comprised of the following balance sheet amounts:
2024
£m
£m
Amounts due within one year (Lease liabilities, Current liabilities)
:
(7.4)
(6.2)
Amounts due after more than one year (Lease liabilities, Non-current liabilities)
(39.4)
(40.8)
(46.8)
174 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
(47.0)
2025
37 RECONCILIATION OF NET CASH FLOW TO MOVEMENT IN NET DEBT
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
2024
Shareholder
Information
£m
£m
(Decrease)/increase in cash in the year
:
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
(0.6)
1.6
Increase in debt and lease financing
(34.4)
(2.9)
Change in net debt resulting from cash flows
(35.0)
(1.3)
Debt acquired through business acquisitions
(2.8)
Lease liabilities recognised during the year
(6.9)
(7.3)
Non-cash movement in unamortised bank facility fees
(0.4)
(0.4)
Foreign exchange adjustments
(1.3)
1.1
Movement in net debt
(43.6)
(10.7)
Opening net debt
(115.6)
(104.9)
Closing net debt
38 FINANCIAL COMMITMENTS
Capital expenditure
(159.2)
(115.6)
2025
2024
Contracts placed for future capital expenditure contracted but not provided for in the consolidated financial statements are shown below:
£m
£m
Property, plant and equipment
:
39 EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
period’.
10.3
15.2
There were no events occurring after the balance sheet date which should be disclosed in accordance with IAS 10, ‘Events after the reporting
175
1178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2 009/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:08
176 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
178 Company Statement
of Changes in
Shareholders’ Equity
182 Notes to the Company
Financial Statements
179 Company Balance
Sheet
180 Statement of Significant
Accounting Policies
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
1178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 1-2 009/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:0809/03/2026 20:08
177
178 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Balance at 31 December 2023 41.4 16.8 3.5 3.7 (0.6) 98.2 163.0
Profit for the year 14.2 14.2
Other comprehensive profit 0.4 2.9 3.3
Total comprehensive profit
for the year 0.4 17.1 17.5
Share options (value of employee
services) 1.5 1.5
Deferred tax on share options 0.2 0.2
Issue of share capital 0.1 0.5 0.6
Dividends paid (13.3) (13.3)
Transactions with Shareholders
recognised directly in Shareholders’
Equity 0.1 0.5 (11.6) (11.0)
Balance at 31 December 2024 41.5 17.3 3.5 3.7 (0.2) 103.7 169.5
Profit for the year 67.3 67.3
Other comprehensive profit 0.7 0.7
Total comprehensive profit
for the year 68.0 68.0
Share options (value of employee
services) 2.4 2.4
Purchase of own shares by EST (0.1) (0.1)
Share buybacks (3.8) 3.8 (54.7) (54.7)
Deferred tax on share options (0.6) (0.6)
Current tax on share options 0.1 0.1
Issue of share capital 0.1 0.2 0.3
Dividends paid (17.4) (17.4)
Transactions with Shareholders
recognised directly in Shareholders’
Equity (3.7) 0.2 3.8 (70.3) (70.0)
Balance at 31 December 2025 37.8 17.5 3.5 7. 5 (0.2) 101.4 167.5
Capital
Share Share Merger Redemption Hedge Retained To t a l
Capital Premium Reserve Reserve Reserve Earnings Equity
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m
Company Statement of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity
Assets
Non-current assets
Right of use assets 5 0.5 0.2
Trade and other receivables 8 9.6 6.8
Deferred income tax assets 6 1.2 1.4
Post-employment benefits 4.9 3.8
Investments 7 622.3 621.4
638.5 633.6
Current assets
Trade and other receivables 8 0.4 0.8
Current income tax assets 5.8 2.6
6.2 3.4
Liabilities
Current liabilities
Trade and other payables 9 352.7 386.6
Borrowings 10 9.0 8.9
Lease liabilities 11 0.1 0.1
Derivative financial liabilities 13 0.3 0.3
362.1 395.9
Non-current liabilities
Post-employment benefits 12 0.3 0.3
Borrowings 10 114.4 71.2
Lease liabilities 11 0.4 0.1
Derivative financial liabilities 13
115.1 71.6
Net assets 167.5 169.5
Equity
Capital and reserves attributable to the company’s shareholders
Share capital 15 37.8 41.5
Share premium 16 17.5 17.3
Merger reserve 3.5 3.5
Capital redemption reserve 7.5 3.7
Hedge reserve (0.2) (0.2)
Retained earnings 101.4 103.7
Total Shareholders’ equity 167.5 169.5
The Company recognised a profit during the year of £67.3 million (2024: £14.2 million).
The financial statements on pages 178 to 189 were approved by the Board of Directors on 2 March 2026 and signed on its behalf by:
Ryan Govender
Chief Financial Officer
As at As at
31 December 2025 31 December 2024
Note £m £m
179
Company Balance Sheet
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
The Company is incorporated and domiciled in the UK. The Company’s registered number is 523335. The address of its registered office is Johnson
House, Abbots Park, Monks Way, Preston Brook, Cheshire, WA7 3GH.
The Company is a public limited company and has its primary listing on the London Stock Exchange.
The Company Financial Statements were authorised for issue by the Board on 2 March 2026.
Basis of preparation
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the Company Financial Statements are the same as those used in the Consolidated
Financial Statements as set out on pages 132 to 143 with the addition of the policies set out below. These policies have been consistently applied to the
information presented, unless otherwise stated.
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101). In
preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements of International Financial
Reporting Standards as adopted by the UK (UK-adopted international accounting standards) but makes amendments where necessary in order to
comply with the Companies Act 2006 and to take advantage of FRS 101 disclosure exemptions. In preparing these financial statements in accordance
with FRS 101, the Company Financial Statements transitioned to FRS 101 (as described above) on 1 January 2023. There were no amendments which
had a material effect on the first financial statements presented upon transition to FRS 101, in respect of recognition, measurement or disclosure.
FRS 101 sets out amendments to IFRS that are necessary to achieve compliance with the Act and related Regulations. The preparation of financial
statements in conformity with FRS 101 requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management to exercise its judgement
in the process of applying the company’s accounting policies. The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where
assumptions and estimates are significant to the financial statements, are disclosed on page 181.
The following exemptions from the requirements of IFRS have been applied in the preparation of these financial statements, in accordance with
FRS101:
The following paragraphs of IAS 1, ‘Presentation of financial statements’:
10(d) (Statement of cash flows)
16 (statement of compliance with all IFRS), and
111 (cash flow information)
IAS 7, ‘Statement of cash flows’
As the Consolidated Financial Statements include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also taken the exemptions available under FRS 101 in
respect of the following disclosures:
IFRS 2 – Share-based Payment in respect of Group settled share-based payments; and
Certain disclosures required by IFRS 13 – Fair Value Measurement and the disclosures required by IFRS 7 – Financial Instruments: Disclosures.
Investments
Investments in Group Undertakings are recorded at cost, which is the fair value of the consideration paid. Investments are tested for impairment and
carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. The Company considers impairment of its investment in subsidiaries by estimating the
recoverable amounts of the investments, which are based on the value-in-use calculations adjusted where necessary for intercompany balances. For
further details of value-in-use calculations, see note 12 of the Consolidated Financial Statements as the CGU’s are able to be attributable to the
subsidiaries that the investment represents. Where an impairment is identified, it is charged to the Income Statement within intangibles amortisation
and impairment (excluding software). Investments that suffered an impairment are reviewed for possible reversal of the impairment at each reporting
date.
Share based compensation
The Company operates a number of equity-settled, share based compensation plans. The economic cost of awarding shares and share options to
employees is recognised as an expense in the employing company’s Income Statement equivalent to the fair value of the benefit awarded. The fair
value is determined by reference to option pricing models, principally Binomial and Monte Carlo models. The fair value of the award is recognised in
the employing company’s Income Statement over the period of the award. The grant by the Company of options over its equity instruments to the
employees of the subsidiary undertakings is treated as a capital contribution. The fair value of employee services received, measured by reference to
the grant date fair value, is recognised over the vesting period as an increase to the investment in that subsidiary undertaking, with a corresponding
credit to equity in the Company’s accounts.
180 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Statement of Significant Accounting Policies
Judgments made in applying accounting policies
In the course of preparing these financial statements, certain judgments are made by the Company in the process of applying the Company’s
accounting policies. Those that have the most significant effect on either the amounts recognised in the financial statements or the presentation
thereof are discussed below.
Going Concern
After considering the monthly cash flow projections, the stress tests and the facilities available to the Group and Company, the Directors have a
reasonable expectation that the Group and Company have adequate resources for their operational needs, will remain in compliance with the
financial covenants set out in the bank facility agreement and will continue in operation for at least the period to 30 June 2027. Accordingly, and having
reassessed the principal risks and uncertainties, the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the Group and
Company financial statements. Additional information on the judgment management has applied in adopting the going concern assumption is
included in the basis of preparation of these accounts on pages 67 to 68.
Sources of estimation and uncertainty
The Company makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. Whilst such estimates and assumptions are believed to be reasonable under
the circumstances, the resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, seldom equal the related actual results. The estimates and assumptions that
are considered to have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial
year are discussed below:
(a) Post-employment benefits
The Company operates a post retirement defined benefit arrangement (see note 26 of the Consolidated Financial Statements). Asset
valuations are based on the fair value of scheme assets. The valuations of the liabilities of the schemes are based on statistical and actuarial
calculations, using various assumptions including discount rates, future inflation rates and pension increases, life expectancy of scheme
members, flexible retirement options and cash commutations. The actuarial assumptions may differ materially from actual experience due to
changes in economic and market conditions, variations in actual mortality, higher or lower cash withdrawal rates and other changes. Any of
these differences could impact the assets or liabilities recognised in the Balance Sheet in future periods. Sensitivities are shown in note 26 of the
Consolidated Financial Statements.
181
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
1 COMPANY INCOME STATEMENT AND COMPANY STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
As permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, the Company Income Statement and Company Statement of Comprehensive
Income are not presented with these financial statements. Details of Auditor’s remuneration are shown in note 3 of the Consolidated Financial
Statements.
2 DIRECTORS’ EMOLUMENTS
Detailed disclosures that form part of these financial statements are given in note 4 of the Consolidated Financial Statements and the Directors’
Remuneration Report on pages 94 to 115.
3 EMPLOYEE BENEFIT EXPENSE
Wages and salaries 4.1 4.2
Social security costs 0.6 0.6
Pension costs defined contribution plans 0.2 0.2
To ta l 4.9 5.0
Cost of employee share schemes 1.8 1.5
Total employee benefit expense 6.7 6.5
The monthly average number of persons employed by the Company during the year was 21 (2024: 20).
4 PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
Cost
At 31 December 2023 0.3
Disposals (0.1)
At 31 December 2024 0.2
At 31 December 2025 0.2
Accumulated depreciation
At 31 December 2023 0.3
Disposals (0.1)
At 31 December 2024 0.2
At 31 December 2025 0.2
Carrying amount
At 31 December 2023, 2024 & 2025
There were £nil assets under construction at 31 December 2025 (2024: £nil).
2025 2024
£m £m
Plant and
Equipment
£m
182 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
5 RIGHT OF USE ASSETS
Cost
At 31 December 2023 0.6
Additions 0.1
At 31 December 2024 0.7
Reassessment/modification 0.4
At 31 December 2025 1.1
Accumulated depreciation
At 31 December 2023 0.4
Charged during the year 0.1
At 31 December 2024 0.5
Charged during the year 0.1
At 31 December 2025 0.6
Carrying amount
At 31 December 2023 and 2024 0.2
At 31 December 2025 0.5
6 DEFERRED INCOME TAX
Deferred income tax attributable to the Company are as follows:
Deferred income tax balances in respect of:
Depreciation in excess of capital allowances 0.1 0.1
Short-term timing differences 0.2 (0.2)
Post-employment benefits (1.2) (0.9)
Derivative financial instruments 0.1 0.1
Employee share schemes 0.6 0.9
Trading losses 1.4 1.4
2.4 2.5 (1.2) (1.1)
The following provides a reconciliation of the movement in each of the deferred income tax assets and liabilities:
At 31 December 2023 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.3 1.4 2.1
(Charge)/credit to income (0.1) 0.4 (0.2) 0.1
Credit to shareholders equity 0.2 0.2
Charge to other comprehensive income (0.9) (0.1) (1.0)
At 31 December 2024 0.1 (0.9) 0.1 0.9 (0.2) 1.4 1.4
(Charge)/credit to income (0.1) 0.3 0.4 0.6
Charge to shareholders equity (0.6) (0.6)
Charge to other comprehensive income (0.2) (0.2)
At 31 December 2025 0.1 (1.2) 0.1 0.6 0.2 1.4 1.2
Deferred income taxes have been measured at an effective deferred tax rate of 25.0% as at 31 December 2025 (2024: 25.0%).
The Company has estimated that £nil of the Company’s deferred income tax asset will be realised in the next 12 months. This is management’s
current best estimate and may not reflect the actual outcome in the next 12 months.
Properties
£m
Deferred tax assets Deferred tax liabilities
2025 2024 2025 2024
£m £m £m £m
Depreciation
in Excess of Post- Derivative Employee Short-term
Capital employment Financial Share timing Trading
Allowances Benefits Instruments Schemes differences Losses To t al
£m £m £m £m £m £m £m
183
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
7 INVESTMENTS
Investment in subsidiary undertakings
Cost
Brought forward 632.0 610.6
Additions 21.2
Movement relating to share options 0.9 0.2
Carried forward 632.9 632.0
Accumulated impairment
Brought forward 10.6 10.6
Impairment
Carried forward 10.6 10.6
Carrying amount
Opening 621.4 600.0
Closing 622.3 621.4
Particulars of subsidiary undertakings are shown in note 20 of the Company Financial Statements.
During 2024, the Company acquired Empire Linen Services Limited. Details of this acquisition are shown in note 34 of the 2024 Annual report
and accounts. The Directors deem the investments to be recoverable due to the future forecasts of the Group.
8 TRADE AND OTHER RECEIVABLES
Amounts falling due within one year:
Prepayments and other receivables 0.4 0.8
0.4 0.8
Amounts falling due after more than one year:
Receivables from subsidiaries 9.6 6.8
9.6 6.8
Amounts owed by subsidiaries due within one year relate to invoiced services and are due according to the invoice terms.
Amounts owed by subsidiaries due after more than one year are unsecured and have no fixed date of repayment and the Company has no
present intention of demanding repayment in less than 12 months and therefore the amounts have been presented as non-current assets.
Balances are interest bearing with interest charged based on one month GBP SONIA or EURIBOR plus a 1.45% margin. The fair value of these
amounts is considered to be the same as their carrying value as they bear interest at a rate considered by Directors to be a market rate.
All Company receivables (including those from related parties) are not yet due. Management have considered whether any provision is
required in relation to these balances and determined it is immaterial.
All receivable balances at the balance sheet date are denominated in Sterling (2024: Sterling) and are held at amortised cost.
9 TRADE AND OTHER PAYABLES
Trade payables 0.2 0.3
Other payables 0.1 0.4
Other taxation and social security liabilities 0.9 0.6
Accruals 1.9 2.5
Deferred consideration 0.2
Payables to subsidiaries 349.6 382.6
352.7 386.6
All trade and other payable balances at the balance sheet date are denominated in Sterling (2024: Sterling) and are held at amortised cost.
Given their short term nature there is to be no difference between this and their fair value.
Amounts payable to subsidiaries are unsecured, have no fixed date of repayment and the Company has no unconditional right to defer
settlement of the liability for at least twelve months after the reporting date, therefore the amounts are shown as current. Of the balance
outstanding, £35.3 million is interest bearing with interest charged on one month GBP SONIA or EURIBOR plus a 1.45% margin.
2025 2024
£m £m
2025 2024
£m £m
2025 2024
£m £m
184 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
Continued >
10 BORROWINGS
Current
Overdraft 9.1 9.3
Bank loans (0.1) (0.4)
9.0 8.9
Non-current
Bank loans 114.4 71.2
Total Borrowings 123.4 80.1
The maturity of non-current bank loans is as follows:
Between one and two years 114.4
Between two and five years 71.3
Unamortised issue costs of bank loans (0.1)
114.4 71.2
The currency of the outstanding bank loans is as follows:
Sterling 83.0 44.0
Euros 31.4 27.3
114.4 71.3
All Group bank loans are held by the Company. Full details of Group facilities are provided in note 22 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
The overdraft and secured bank loans are stated net of unamortised issue costs of £0.1 million (2024: £0.5 million) of which £0.1 million is included
within current borrowings (2024: £0.4 million) and £nil is included within non-current borrowings (2024: £0.1 million within non-current borrowings).
The Group has two overdraft facilities for £5.0 million and £3.0 million with two of its principal bankers (2024: £5.0 million and £3.0 million). Certain
cash balances in certain Group bank accounts can be offset with overdrawn balances in those bank accounts. The maximum amount any
individual Company may be overdrawn, with each bank, is £10.0 million and £5.0 million respectively (2024: £10.0 million and £5.0 million).
11 LEASE LIABILITIES
At 31 December 2023 0.2
Reassessment and modifications 0.1
Lease liability payments (including finance costs) (0.1)
At 31 December 2024 0.2
Reassessments and modifications 0.4
Lease liability payments (including finance costs) (0.1)
At 31 December 2025 0.5
Lease liabilities are comprised of the following balance sheet amounts:
Amounts due within one year (Lease liabilities, Current Liabilities) 0.1 0.1
Amounts due more than one year (Lease liabilities, Non-current Liabilities) 0.4 0.1
0.5 0.2
2025 2024
£m £m
Properties
£m
2025 2024
£m £m
185
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
11 LEASE LIABILITIES (Continued)
Lease liabilities are as follows:
Not more than one year
Minimum lease payments 0.1 0.1
Interest element
Present value of minimum lease payments 0.1 0.1
More than one year
Minimum lease payments 0.4 0.1
Interest element
Present value of minimum lease payments 0.4 0.1
12 POST-EMPLOYMENT BENEFIT OBLIGATIONS
Details of the Group’s pension and healthcare schemes are provided in note 26 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
As at 31 December 2025 and 31 December 2024 the entire Group liabilities under defined benefit schemes are held on the Company Balance
Sheet.
During the year the Company’s cost of defined contribution pension schemes was £0.2 million (2024: £0.2 million).
13 DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES
Details of derivative financial liabilities are shown in note 27 of the Consolidated Financial Statements. All of the Group’s derivative financial
liabilities are held by the Company.
14 CONTINGENT LIABILITIES
The Company has guaranteed the banking facilities of certain UK and the Republic of Ireland subsidiary undertakings under a cross guarantee
arrangement. No losses are expected to result from this arrangement. Note 28 of the Consolidated Financial Statements provides full details of
the guarantee arrangement in place.
15 SHARE CAPITAL
Ordinary shares of 10p each:
At start of year 414,954,767 41.5 414,415,123 41.4
Issue of share capital 1,636,260 0.1 539,644 0.1
Share buyback (38,293,361) (3.8)
At end of the year 378,297,666 37.8 414,954,767 41.5
Full details relating to movements of Ordinary shares in the prior year are shown in note 29 of the Consolidated Financial Statements.
16 SHARE PREMIUM
Balance brought forward 17.3 16.8
Received on allotment of shares 0.2 0.5
Balance carried forward 17.5 17.3
2025 2024
£m £m
2025 2024
Issued and Fully Paid Shares £m Shares £m
2025 2024
£m £m
186 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
Continued >
17 RECONCILIATION OF MOVEMENTS IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY
Profit for the year 67.3 14.2
67.3 14.2
Other recognised gains and losses relating to the year:
Share option (value of employee services) 2.4 1.5
Purchase of own shares by EST (0.1)
Deferred tax on share options (0.6) 0.2
Current tax on share options 0.1
Share buybacks (54.7)
Issue of share capital 0.3 0.6
Dividends paid (17.4) (13.3)
Re-measurement and experience gains (net of taxation) 0.7 2.9
Cash flow hedges movement (net of taxation) 0.4
Net movement in Shareholders’ equity (2.0) 6.5
Opening Shareholders’ equity 169.5 163.0
Closing Shareholders’ equity 167.5 169.5
18 RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
Transactions during the year between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, are eliminated on consolidation. These
transactions are carried out on an arms-length basis.
The following significant transactions with subsidiary undertakings occurred in the year:
Interest paid (3.4) (3.7)
Interest received 0.4 0.4
Dividend received 82.6 26.3
79.6 23.0
19 EVENTS AFTER THE REPORTING PERIOD
There were no events occurring after the balance sheet date which should be disclosed in accordance with IAS 10, ‘Events after the reporting
period’.
2025 2024
£m £m
2025 2024
£m £m
187
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
20 RELATED UNDERTAKINGS
As at 31 December 2025 the company had a number of wholly owned subsidiary companies, a list of which is shown below.
Johnsons Textile Services Limited* Textile and linen rental
Regency Laundry Limited Textile and linen rental
Celtic Linen Limited* Textile and linen rental
Millbrook Linen Limited* Textile and linen rental
Empire Linen Services Limited Textile and linen rental
Johnson Group Properties PLC Property holding
Semara Estates Limited* Property holding
Fresh Linen Holdings Limited Holding company
Harkglade Limited Holding company
Johnson Investment Limited Holding company
Semara Group Limited* Holding company
Semara Investments Limited* Holding company
Semara Contract Services Limited* Holding company
South West Laundry Holdings Limited Holding company
Afonwen Laundry Limited* Non-trading company
Ashbon Services Limited Non-trading company
Bentley Textile Services Limited* Non-trading company
Bourne Services Group Limited Non-trading company
Bourne Textile Services Limited* Non-trading company
Caterers Linen Supply Limited* Non-trading company
Catering Linen Supply Limited* Non-trading company
Chester Laundry Limited Non-trading company
Clayfull Limited Non-trading company
Clifton Cleaning Limited Non-trading company
Fresh Linen Limited* Non-trading company
Greenearth Cleaning Europe Limited Non-trading company
Greenearth Cleaning Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Group Cleaners Trustee Company (no 1) Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Group Cleaners Trustee Company (no 2) Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Group Inc (UK) Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Group Management Services Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Group Pension Nominees Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Hospitality Services Limited Non-trading company
Johnsons Hotel Linen Limited Non-trading company
Johnsons Hotel, Restaurant and Catering Linen Limited Non-trading company
Johnsons Restaurant and Catering Limited Non-trading company
Johnsons Apparelmaster Limited Non-trading company
Johnsons Workwear Limited Non-trading company
JSG PLC* Non-trading company
London Linen Management Limited* Non-trading company
London Linen Supply Limited Non-trading company
London Workwear Rental Limited* Non-trading company
Lilliput (Dunmurry) Limited Non-trading company
Pure Laundry Limited* Non-trading company
Portgrade Limited Non-trading company
Quality Textile Services Limited Non-trading company
Roboserve Limited Non-trading company
Semara Nominees Limited* Non-trading company
Semara Trustees Limited* Non-trading company
South West Laundry Limited* Non-trading company
Stalbridge Linen Services Limited* Non-trading company
StarCounty Textile Services Limited Non-trading company
Whiteriver Laundry Limited* Non-trading company
Wintex UK Limited Non-trading company
Zip Textiles (Services) Limited Non-trading company
Johnson Service Group PLC owns directly or indirectly the entire share capital of each of these companies. The share capital of the companies
annotated * are held through intermediate holding companies. All companies above are incorporated in Great Britain and registered in
England and Wales, apart from Clayfull Limited which is registered in Scotland, Lilliput (Dunmurry) Limited which is registered in Northern
Ireland and Harkglade Limited, Celtic Linen Limited and Millbrook Linen Limited which are registered in the Republic of Ireland. The registered
office for all the companies listed above is Johnson House, Abbots Park, Monks Way Preston Brook, Runcorn, Cheshire, WA7 3GH apart from
Clayfull Limited whose registered office is Unit 1, Sherwood Industrial Estate, Bonnyrigg, EH19 3LW, Lilliput (Dunmurry) Limited whose registered
office is 9 City Business Park, Dunmurry, Belfast, BT17 9GX, Regency Laundry Limited whose registered office is Unit 10b, Leafield Industrial Estate,
Leafield Way, Corsham, Wiltshire, SN13 9SW and Harkglade Limited, Celtic Linen Limited and Millbrook Linen Limited whose registered office is
Rosslare Road Drinagh, Wexford, Republic of Ireland.
Subsidiary companies at the balance sheet date Principal Activity
188 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notes to the Company Financial Statements
Continued >
20 RELATED UNDERTAKINGS (Continued)
In addition, the Group has one other significant holding in Moore Bros 1815 LLP. The registered office is Middlebrough House, 16 Middleborough,
Colchester, Essex, CO1 1QT.
Under Section 479A of the Companies Act 2006, exemption from an audit of the financial statements for the financial period ended
31 December 2025 has been taken by Empire Linen Services Limited (12722778). As required, the Company guarantees all outstanding liabilities
to which the subsidiary company is subject to at the end of the financial year until they are satisfied in full, and the guarantee is enforceable
against the Company by any person to whom the subsidiary company is liable in respect of those liabilities.
Under Section 479A of the Companies Act 2006, exemption from an audit of the financial statements for the financial period ended 31
December 2025 has been taken by Regency Laundry Limited (10879379). As required, the Company guarantees all outstanding liabilities to
which the subsidiary company is subject to at the end of the financial year until they are satisfied in full, and the guarantee is enforceable
against the Company by any person to whom the subsidiary company is liable in respect of those liabilities.
189
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
1178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4 009/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:09
190 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
191 Financial
Calendar
192 Notice of Annual
General Meeting
204 Directors and
Advisors
Shareholder
Information
Company Financial
Statements
Group Financial
Statements
Corporate
Governance
Strategic
Report
1178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4178012 JSG Divider Pages Back end.indd 3-4 009/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:0909/03/2026 20:09
191
FINANCIAL CALENDAR
Results announcement for the year to
31December 2025
3 March 2026
Annual General Meeting
7 May 2026
Results announcement for the half year to
30 June 2026
September 2026
This Document is important and requires your immediate attention. If you are in any doubt as to any aspect of the contents of this Document or the
action you should take, you are recommended to consult immediately your stockbroker, solicitor, accountant or other independent adviser authorised
under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 if you are resident in the United Kingdom or, if you reside elsewhere, another appropriately
authorised financial adviser.
If you have sold or otherwise transferred all of your shares in Johnson Service Group PLC, please pass this document as soon as possible to the
purchaser or transferee, or to the person who arranged the sale or transfer so they can pass these documents to the person who now holds the shares.
Dear Shareholder.
I am pleased to be writing to you with details of the 2026 Annual General Meeting (the ‘Meeting’ or the ‘AGM’) of Johnson Service Group PLC (‘JSG’ or the
Company’) which will be held at the DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel & Spa Chester, Warrington Road, Hoole, Chester, CH2 3PD on Thursday 7 May 2026 at
11:00am.
BUSINESS OF THE MEETING
The formal notice of the AGM is set out on pages 194 to 202 and full details of the Resolutions to be proposed at the AGM are contained in the
Explanatory Notes on pages 200 to 202.
FORM OF PROXY
As we did last year, and in order to reduce the Company’s environmental impact, our intention is to once again remove paper from the voting process
as far as possible. As a result, you will not receive a hard copy Form of Proxy for the AGM but instead you will be able to register your vote electronically.
You are, therefore, asked to vote in one of the following ways:
Register your vote online through our Investor Centre app or via the website at https://uk.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com/. You will need to log into
your Investor Centre account or register if you have not previously done so.
CREST members may utilise the CREST electronic proxy appointment service in accordance with the instructions provided in Accompanying
Note6 below.
If you are an institutional investor you may also be able to appoint a proxy electronically via the Proxymity platform, a process which has been
agreed by the Company and approved by the Registrar. For further information regarding Proxymity, please go to www.proxymity.io and refer to
Note 7 below.
If you prefer, you may request a hard copy Form of Proxy from our Registrar, MUFG Corporate Markets, using the contact details shown within
Accompanying Note 3 below and return it to MUFG Corporate Markets at the address shown on the Form of Proxy.
All Forms of Proxy, whether registered online, electronic or hard copy, must be received by the Company’s Registrar no later than 11:00am on Tuesday
5May 2026 or, if the Meeting is adjourned, by the time which is 48 hours before the start time of the adjourned Meeting.
Further details are provided in Accompanying Note 4 below. If you need help with completing the Form of Proxy online, please contact the Company’s
Registrar.
HOW TO VOTE
Your vote is important to us. We strongly encourage you to vote in advance of the Meeting by appointing the Chair of the Meeting as your proxy,
regardless of whether you attend the Meeting in person. Our Registrar, MUFG Corporate Markets, must receive your Form of Proxy containing your
voting instructions by 11:00am on Tuesday 5 May 2026 at the latest to ensure that your vote is counted. Details of how to submit a Form of Proxy are set
out in Accompanying Note 5 below.
192 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Company Number: 00523335
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
BOARD RECOMMENDATIONS
The Directors believe that each of the proposed Resolutions to be considered at the AGM is in the best interests of the Company and its Shareholders
as a whole and recommend that all Shareholders vote in favour of all Resolutions, as the Directors intend to do in respect of their own shareholdings.
The results of the voting on all Resolutions will be announced via the Regulatory News Service and published on our website as soon as practicable
following the conclusion of the AGM.
Jock Lennox
Non-Executive Chair
2 March 2026
193
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
NOTICE is hereby given that the Annual General Meeting of Johnson Service Group PLC will be held at the DoubleTree by Hilton Hotel & Spa Chester,
Warrington Road, Hoole, Chester, CH2 3PD on Thursday 7 May 2026 at 11:00am to transact the business set out in the Resolutions below.
Resolutions 1 to 13 (inclusive) will be proposed as Ordinary Resolutions and Resolutions 14 to 16 (inclusive) will be proposed as Special Resolutions.
The business of the Meeting will be to consider and, if thought fit, to pass the following Resolutions:
ORDINARY RESOLUTIONS
Annual Report and Accounts
1. To receive and adopt the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2025 together with the strategic report and the reports of the
Directors and the auditor on those financial statements.
Directors’ Remuneration Policy
2. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Policy as set out on pages 98 to 105 of the 2025 Annual Report.
Directors’ Remuneration Report
3. To approve the Directors’ Remuneration Report (excluding the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, set out on pages 98 to 105 of the 2025 Annual
Report) as set out on pages 94 to 115 of the 2025 Annual Report.
Final Dividend
4. To confirm the payment of the interim dividend of 1.6 pence per Ordinary Share and to declare a final dividend of 3.2 pence per Ordinary Share for
the year ended 31 December 2025.
Election and Re-election of Directors
5. To re-elect Jock Lennox as a Director.
6. To re-elect Peter Egan as a Director.
7. To elect Ryan Govender as a Director.
8. To re-elect Chris Girling as a Director.
9. To re-elect Nicola Keach as a Director.
10. To re-elect Kirsty Homer as a Director.
External Auditors Appointment and Remuneration
11. To reappoint Grant Thornton UK LLP as auditor to the Company until the conclusion of the next general meeting at which accounts are laid
before the Company.
12. To authorise the Audit Committee to determine the remuneration of the auditor.
Directors’ Authority to Allot Shares
13. In substitution for all existing and unexercised authorities and powers, the Directors of the Company be and they are hereby generally and
unconditionally authorised for the purposes of section 551 of the Companies Act 2006 to exercise all powers of the Company to allot equity
securities (as defined in section 560 of the Companies Act 2006) (“Equity Securities”) to such persons at such times and on such terms and
conditions as the Directors may determine and subject always to the Articles of Association, provided that the aggregate of the nominal amount
of such Equity Securities that may be allotted under this authority shall not exceed £12,593,074.
This authority shall, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the conclusion of the next Annual
General Meeting of the Company to be held after the passing of this Resolution or, if earlier, on 1 July 2027, save that the Directors of the Company
may, before such expiry make an offer or agreement which would or might require Equity Securities to be allotted after such expiry and the
Directors of the Company may allot Equity Securities in pursuance of any such offer or agreement as if the authority conferred hereby had not
expired.
All unutilised authorities previously granted to the Directors of the Company under section 551 of the Companies Act 2006 shall cease to have
effect at the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting (save to the extent that the same are exercisable pursuant to section 551(7) of the
Companies Act 2006 by reason of any offer or agreement made prior to the date of this Resolution which would or might require equity securities
to be allotted on or after that date).
SPECIAL RESOLUTIONS
Disapplication of Pre-emption Rights
14. Subject to and conditional upon the passing of the Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual General Meeting of the Company
and in substitution for all existing and unexercised authorities and powers, the Directors of the Company be and are hereby generally and
unconditionally empowered pursuant to section 570 of the Companies Act 2006 to allot Equity Securities for cash pursuant to the authority
conferred upon them by the Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual General Meeting of the Company and/or sell ordinary
shares held by the Company as treasury shares for cash as if section 561 of the Companies Act 2006 did not apply to any such allotment of Equity
Securities or sale of ordinary shares held by the Company as treasury shares, provided that this power shall be limited to:
(i) the allotment of Equity Securities in connection with a rights issue or similar offer to or in favour of ordinary Shareholders where the Equity
Securities respectively attributable to the interests of all ordinary Shareholders are proportionate (as nearly as may be) to the respective
194 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
Continued >
numbers of shares held by them on that date provided that the Directors of the Company may make such exclusions or other arrangements
to deal with any legal or practical problems under the laws of any territory or the requirement of any regulatory body or any stock exchange
or with fractional entitlements as they consider necessary or expedient;
(ii) the allotment (otherwise than pursuant to sub paragraph (i) above) of Equity Securities pursuant to the authority granted under the
Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual General Meeting or sale of treasury shares up to an aggregate nominal amount of
£3,777,922 (representing approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026); and
(iii) the allotment of Equity Securities or sale of treasury shares (otherwise than under sub-paragraphs (i) or (ii) above) up to an aggregate
nominal amount equal to 20 per cent of any allotment of Equity Securities or sale of treasury shares from time to time under sub-paragraph
(ii) above, such authority to be used only for the purposes of making a follow-on offer which the Directors of the Company determine to be of
a kind contemplated by paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the Statement of Principles on Disapplying Pre-Emption Rights most recently
published by the Pre-Emption Group prior to the date of this notice.
This power shall, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the conclusion of the next Annual
General Meeting of the Company to be held after the passing of this Resolution or, if earlier, on 1 July 2027, save that the Company may before
such expiry make any offer or enter into any agreement which would or might require Equity Securities to be allotted (and treasury shares to be
sold) after such expiry and the Directors of the Company may allot Equity Securities (and sell treasury shares) in pursuance of any such offer or
agreement as if the power conferred hereby had not expired. All previous authorities under Section 571 of the Companies Act 2006 shall cease to
have effect at the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting.
15. Subject to and conditional upon the passing of the Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual General Meeting of the Company
and in addition to any authority granted under the Special Resolution numbered 14 in this notice of Annual General Meeting of the Company, the
Directors of the Company be and are hereby generally and unconditionally empowered pursuant to section 570 of the Companies Act 2006 to
allot Equity Securities for cash pursuant to the authority conferred upon them by the Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual
General Meeting of the Company and / or sell ordinary shares held by the Company as treasury shares for cash as if section 561 of the Companies
Act 2006 did not apply to any such allotment of Equity Securities or sale of treasury shares, provided that this power shall be limited to the
allotment of Equity Securities pursuant to the authority granted under the Ordinary Resolution numbered 13 in this notice of Annual General
Meeting of the Company or the sale of treasury shares:
(i) up to an aggregate nominal amount of £3,777,922 (representing approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued share capital (excluding
treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026) such authority to be used only for the purposes of financing (or refinancing, if the authority is to be used
within twelve months after the original transaction) a transaction which the Directors of the Company determine to be an acquisition or
other specified capital investment of a kind contemplated by the Statement of Principles on Disapplying Pre-Emption Rights most recently
published by the Pre-Emption Group prior to the date of this notice of Annual General Meeting of the Company; and
(ii) (otherwise than under sub-paragraph (i) above) up to an aggregate nominal amount equal to 20 per cent of any allotment of Equity
Securities or sale of treasury shares from time to time under sub-paragraph (i) above, such authority to be used for the purposes of making a
follow-on offer which the Directors of the Company determine to be of a kind contemplated by sub-paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the
Statement of Principles on Disapplying Pre-Emption Rights most recently published by the Pre-Emption Group prior to the date of this notice
of Annual General Meeting of the Company.
This power shall, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the conclusion of the next Annual
General Meeting of the Company to be held after the passing of this Resolution or, if earlier, on 1 July 2027, save that the Company may before
such expiry make any offer or enter into any agreement which would or might require Equity Securities to be allotted (and treasury shares to be
sold) after such expiry and the Directors of the Company may allot Equity Securities (and sell treasury shares) in pursuance of any such offer or
agreement as if the power conferred hereby had not expired. All previous authorities under Section 571 of the Companies Act 2006 shall cease to
have effect at the conclusion of the Annual General Meeting.
Purchase of Own Shares
16. In accordance with article 11 of the Articles of Association, the Directors of the Company be and are hereby generally and unconditionally
authorised for the purposes of section 701 of the Companies Act 2006 to make market purchases (within the meaning of section 693(4) of the
Companies Act 2006) of ordinary shares of 10 pence each in the capital of the Company (“Ordinary Shares”) on such terms and in such manner as
the Directors of the Company may from time to time determine, provided that:
(i) the maximum aggregate number of Ordinary Shares that may be purchased under this authority is 37,779,223 (representing approximately
10per cent of the Company’s issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026);
(ii) the minimum price which may be paid for each Ordinary Share is 10 pence, exclusive of attributable expenses payable by the Company (if
any); and
(iii) the maximum price which may be paid for each Ordinary Share is the higher of:
a) an amount equal to not more than 105 per cent of the average of the middle market quotations for the Ordinary Shares as derived
from the London Stock Exchange Daily Official List for the five business days immediately preceding the day on which the purchase is
made; and
b) the higher of the price of the last independent trade of Ordinary Shares and the highest current independent bid for Ordinary Shares
on the trading venue where the purchase is carried out,
in each case, exclusive of attributable expenses payable by the Company (if any).
The authority hereby conferred shall, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the
conclusion of the next Annual General Meeting of the Company held after the passing of this Resolution or, if earlier, on 1 July 2027 save in
relation to purchases of Ordinary Shares the contract for which was concluded before the expiry of this authority and which will or may be
executed wholly or partly after such expiry, where the Company may make a purchase of Ordinary Shares in pursuance of any such contract.
195
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
All previous unutilised authorities for the Company to make market purchases of Ordinary Shares are revoked, except in relation to the purchase
of shares under a contract or contracts concluded before the date of this Resolution and where such purchase has not yet been executed.
All Shareholders are strongly encouraged to vote by appointing the Chair of the Meeting as their proxy in advance of the AGM.
By Order of the Board
Christopher Clarkson
Company Secretary
2 March 2026
Johnson Service Group PLC
Abbots Park, Monks Way, Preston Brook, Cheshire, WA7 3GH
196 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
Continued >
Accompanying Notes
1. AGM Arrangements
If you wish to attend the AGM in person, please be prepared to provide evidence of your shareholding and/or identity, to authenticate your right
to attend, ask questions and vote at the AGM. If you are attending on behalf of a shareholder, you must bring photographic proof of your identity
and evidence of your appointment to represent that shareholder. Shareholders planning to attend the AGM in person are requested to notify the
Company in advance by email to the Company Secretary at enquiries@jsg.com by 5 May 2026. This will enable the Company to make the
necessary arrangements at the AGM venue.
2. Entitlement to Attend or Vote at the AGM
Pursuant to Regulation 41 of the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001, the Company specifies that only those Shareholders registered in the
Register of Members of the Company at close of business on 5 May 2026 or, in the event that the Meeting is adjourned, in the Register of Members
at close of business on the date which is two days prior to the date fixed for holding any adjourned Meeting, shall be entitled to attend or vote at
the Meeting in respect of the number of shares registered in their name at the relevant time. Changes to entries on the Register of Members after
that time shall be disregarded in determining the rights of any person to attend or vote at the Meeting.
3. Contacting the Company’s Registrar
You can write to the Company’s Registrar at the address below:
MUFG Corporate Markets
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Alternatively, you can email at shareholderenquiries@cm.mpms.mufg.com or call MUFG Corporate Markets on 0371 664 0300. Calls are charged at
the standard geographic rate and will vary by provider. Calls outside the United Kingdom will be charged at the applicable international rate.
Lines are open between 09:00 - 17:30 (GMT), Monday to Friday excluding public holidays in England and Wales.
When contacting the Registrar please ensure you provide your unique Investor Code (IVC), which can be found on a share certificate or dividend
confirmation. Alternatively, you can contact the Company’s Registrar to obtain your IVC.
4. Voting
In order to reduce the Company’s environmental impact, our intention is to remove paper from the voting process as far as possible. As a result,
you will not receive a Form of Proxy for the AGM in the post.
Whether or not you intend to attend the Meeting in person, you are asked to register your vote online through our Investor Centre app or via the
website at https://uk.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com. You will need to log into your Investor Centre account or register if you have not previously
done so. Once you have setup your account you will need to add your shareholding by clicking ‘Add Holding’ in the ‘Portfolio’ section and following
the on-screen instructions. You will require your Investor Code (IVC) to add your shareholding. You can find your IVC on your share certificate or by
contacting our Registrar, MUFG Corporate Markets at shareholderenquiries@cm.mpms.mufg.com or by calling on 0371 664 0300.
Shareholders can vote electronically via the Investor Centre, a free app for smartphone and tablet provided by MUFG Corporate Markets (the
company's registrar). It allows you to securely manage and monitor your shareholdings in real time, take part in online voting, keep your details up
to date, access a range of information including payment history and much more. The app is available to download on both the Apple App Store
and Google Play, or by scanning the relevant QR code below. Alternatively, you may access the Investor Centre via a web browser at:
https://uk.investorcentre.mpms.mufg.com/.
CREST members may utilise the CREST electronic proxy appointment service in accordance with the instructions provided in Accompanying
Note6 below.
If you are an institutional investor you may also be able to appoint a proxy electronically via the Proxymity platform in accordance with
Accompanying Note7 below.
If you prefer, you may request a hard copy Form of Proxy from MUFG Corporate Markets, using the contact details set out in Accompanying Note3
above, and return it to MUFG Corporate Markets at the address shown on the form.
All Forms of Proxy, whether online, electronic or hard copy, must be received by the Company’s Registrar no later than 11:00am on 5 May 2026 or, if
the Meeting is adjourned, by the time which is 48 hours before the start time of the adjourned Meeting.
If you need help with completing the Form of Proxy online, please contact the Company’s Registrar.
197
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
5. Proxies
Shareholders are entitled to appoint a proxy to exercise all or any of their rights to attend, speak and vote on their behalf at the Meeting. A
Shareholder may appoint more than one proxy in relation to the AGM provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights attached to a
different share or shares held by that Shareholder. A proxy need not be a Shareholder of the Company. You can only appoint a proxy by using the
procedures set out in these notes.
Shareholders can complete the Form of Proxy online as further detailed in Accompanying Note 4 above. As an alternative, you may request a
hard copy Form of Proxy by emailing, calling, or writing to, MUFG Corporate Markets using the contact details provided in Accompanying Note3
above. To appoint more than one proxy you may photocopy the Form of Proxy. Please indicate the proxy holder’s and the number of shares in
relation to which they are authorised to act as your proxy (which, in aggregate, should not exceed the number of shares held by you). Please also
indicate if the proxy instruction is one of multiple instructions being given. All Forms of Proxy must be signed and returned to MUFG Corporate
Markets at the above address together in the same envelope.
Shareholders who are CREST members may use the electronic proxy voting service as described below.
If you are an institutional investor you may also be able to appoint a proxy electronically via the Proxymity platform as described below.
To be valid, any Form of Proxy or other instrument appointing a proxy, together with any power of attorney or other authority under which it is
signed (or a duly certified copy), must be received by post or (during normal business hours only) by hand at the Company’s Registrar no later
than 11:00am on Tuesday 5 May 2026.
Shareholders are encouraged to ensure that they contact MUFG Corporate Markets in sufficient time ahead of the AGM to allow any request for a
paper Form of Proxy to be processed, dispatched and (following completion) subsequently returned to the Registrar.
The return of a completed Form of Proxy or other such instrument or any CREST Proxy Instruction or appointing a proxy via Proxymity (as
described below) will not prevent a Shareholder attending the AGM and voting in person. Unless otherwise indicated on the Form of Proxy, CREST,
Proxymity or any other electronic voting instruction, the proxy will vote as they think fit or, at their discretion, withhold from voting.
6. CREST
CREST members who wish to appoint a proxy or proxies by utilising the proxy voting service may do so for the Meeting (and any adjournment
thereof) by following the procedures described in the CREST Manual. CREST Personal Members or other CREST sponsored members (and those
CREST members who have appointed a voting service provider) should refer to their CREST sponsor or voting service provider, who will be able to
take the appropriate action on their behalf.
In order for a proxy appointment made by means of CREST to be valid, the appropriate CREST message (a “CREST Proxy Instruction”) must be
properly authenticated in accordance with CREST’s specifications and must contain the information required for such instructions, as described in
the CREST Manual. The message (regardless of whether it relates to the appointment of a proxy or to an amendment to the instruction given to a
previously appointed proxy) must, in order to be valid, be transmitted so as to be received by the issuers agent (ID “RA10”) by the latest time(s) for
receipt of proxy appointments specified in, or in a note to, the Notice of Meeting. For this purpose, the time of receipt will be taken to be the time
(as determined by the timestamp applied to the message by the CREST Applications Host) from which the issuers agent is able to retrieve the
message by enquiry to CREST in the manner prescribed by CREST. After this time, any change of instructions to proxies appointed through CREST
should be communicated to the appointee through other means.
CREST members (and, where applicable, their CREST sponsors or voting service providers) should note that CREST does not make available
special procedures in CREST for any particular messages. Normal system timings and limitations will therefore apply in relation to the input of
CREST Proxy Instructions. It is the responsibility of the CREST member concerned to take (or, if the CREST member is a CREST personal member or
sponsored member or has appointed a voting service provider, to procure that his CREST sponsor or voting service provider takes) such action as
shall be necessary to ensure that a message is transmitted by means of the CREST system by any particular time. In this connection, CREST
members (and, where applicable, their CREST sponsors or voting service providers) are referred, in particular, to those sections of the CREST
Manual concerning practical limitations of the CREST system and timings (www.euroclear.com).
The Company may treat as invalid a CREST Proxy Instruction in the circumstances set out in Regulation 35(5)(a) of the Uncertificated Securities
Regulations 2001.
7. Proxymity Voting
If you are an institutional investor you may also be able to appoint a proxy electronically via the Proxymity platform, a process which has been
agreed by the Company and approved by the Registrar. For further information regarding Proxymity, please go to www.proxymity.io. Your proxy
must be lodged by 11:00am on Tuesday 5 May 2026 in order to be considered valid or, if the Meeting is adjourned, by the time which is 48 hours
before the time of the adjourned Meeting. Before you can appoint a proxy via this process you will need to have agreed to Proxymity’s associated
terms and conditions. It is important that you read these carefully as you will be bound by them and they will govern the electronic appointment
of your proxy. An electronic proxy appointment via the Proxymity platform may be revoked completely by sending an authenticated message via
the platform instructing the removal of your proxy vote.
8. Availability of this Notice
A copy of this notice, and other information required by section 311A of the Companies Act 2006, can be found at www.jsg.com/investor-relations/
9. Documents Available for Inspection
The following documents will be available for inspection at the Registered Office of the Company during normal business hours on any business
day (Saturdays, Sundays and public holidays excluded) from the date of this notice until the close of the Meeting and at the place of the Meeting
for 15 minutes prior to and during the Meeting:
(i) the Register of Directors’ interests kept by the Company under Section 809 of the Companies Act 2006;
198 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
Continued >
(ii) copies of all service agreements between the Executive Directors and the Company together with other appropriate documentation; and
(iii) copies of the terms and conditions of appointment of the Non-Executive Directors.
So that appropriate arrangements can be made for Shareholders wishing to inspect documents, we request that Shareholders contact the
Company Secretary by email at enquiries@jsg.com in advance of any visit to ensure that access can be arranged.
10. Audit Statement
Shareholders meeting the threshold requirements set out in section 527 of the Companies Act 2006 have the right to require the Company to
publish a statement on its website in relation to the audit of the Company’s accounts that are to be laid before the Meeting, or any circumstances
connected with an auditor of the Company ceasing to hold office since the previous AGM. The Company may not charge the requesting
shareholders for website publication of such a statement. The Company must also forward the statement to the auditor not later than the time
when it publishes the statement on the website. The business that may be dealt with at the Meeting includes any statement that the Company
has been required to publish on a website under section 527 of the Companies Act 2006.
11. Corporate Representatives
Any corporation which is a member can appoint one or more corporate representatives who may exercise on its behalf all of its powers as a
member provided that they do not do so in relation to the same shares.
12. Nominated Persons
Any person to whom this notice is sent who has been nominated by a shareholder of the Company to enjoy information rights under section146
of the Companies Act 2006 (“a Nominated Person”) may have the right, under an agreement with the shareholder by whom they were
nominated, to be appointed (or to have someone else appointed) as a proxy to exercise the shareholder’s rights at the Meeting. If a Nominated
Person does not have such a right, or does not wish to exercise it, they may, under any such agreement, have a right to give instructions to the
shareholder as to how the shareholder exercises the voting rights attached to the shares in respect of which they have been nominated.
The statement of the rights of shareholders in relation to the appointment of proxies in this notice does not apply to Nominated Persons. The
rights described can only be exercised by the shareholder who is entered on the Company’s Register of Members. Nominated Persons are
therefore advised to contact the shareholder by whom they were nominated for further information on their rights.
13. Shareholder Rights and AGM Business
Subject to the provisions of section 338 of the Companies Act 2006, members representing at least 5 per cent of the total voting rights of all
members (or at least 100 members who would have the right to vote at the Meeting and who hold shares on which there has been paid an
average sum per member of at least £100) may have the right to require the Company:
(i) to give, to members of the Company entitled to receive notice of the Meeting, notice of a Resolution which may properly be moved and is
intended to be moved at the Meeting; and/or
(ii) to include in the business to be dealt with at the Meeting any matter (other than a proposed Resolution) which may be properly included in
the business.
A Resolution may properly be moved or a matter may properly be included in the business unless:
(i) (in the case of a Resolution only) it would, if passed, be ineffective (whether by reason of inconsistency with any enactment or the Company’s
constitution or otherwise);
(ii) it is defamatory of any person; or
(iii) it is frivolous or vexatious.
Such a request may be in hard copy form or in electronic form, must identify the Resolution of which notice is to be given or the matter to be
included in the business, must be authenticated by the person or persons making it, must be received by the Company not later than six weeks
before the Meeting, and (in the case of a matter to be included in the business only) must be accompanied by a statement setting out the
grounds for the request.
14. Shareholders’ Right to Ask Questions at the AGM
Any member attending the Meeting would have the right to ask questions relating to the business of the AGM in accordance with section 319A of
the Companies Act 2006. The Company must cause to be answered any such question relating to the business being dealt with at the Meeting
but no such answer need be given if:
(i) to do so would interfere unduly with the business of the Meeting or involve the disclosure of confidential information;
(ii) the answer has already been given on a website in the form of an answer to a question; or
(iii) it is undesirable in the interests of the Company or the good order of the Meeting that the question be answered.
Please note that only shareholders, proxies and corporate representatives attending the Meeting in person will be eligible to ask questions and
vote during the Meeting.
15. Total Voting Rights
As at 2 March 2026 (being the last business day prior to publication of this notice) the Company’s issued share capital consists of 377,792,229
Ordinary Shares carrying one vote each. The total voting rights in the Company as at 2 March 2026 are, therefore, 377,792,229 (excluding treasury
shares). As at the date of this notice, no shares are held by the Company in treasury.
199
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Explanatory Notes
The following notes give an explanation of the proposed Resolutions.
Resolutions 1 to 13 (inclusive) are proposed as Ordinary Resolutions. This means that for each of those Resolutions to be passed, more than half of the
votes cast must be in favour of the Resolution. Resolutions 14 to 16 (inclusive) are proposed as Special Resolutions. This means that for each of those
Resolutions to be passed, at least three-quarters of the votes cast must be in favour of the Resolution.
The Directors consider the passing of all of the Resolutions to be in the best interests of the Company and its Shareholders and accordingly
recommend that you vote in favour of these Resolutions as they intend to do so in respect of their own shareholdings.
Annual Report and Accounts (Resolution 1)
The Directors of the Company must present the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2025 to the AGM.
Directors’ Remuneration Policy (Resolution 2)
This resolution seeks shareholder approval of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, which is set out in full in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on
pages98 to 105 of the Annual Report. The Remuneration Policy is binding in nature, which means that once the Remuneration Policy commences, all
payments by the Company to current, former or future Directors (including termination payments) must be made in accordance with the
Remuneration Policy unless separately approved by a shareholder resolution. If Resolution 2 is passed, the Directors’ Remuneration Policy will take
effect from the date of its adoption. A new remuneration policy will be put to the shareholders again no later than the AGM in 2029.
Directors’ Remuneration Report (Resolution 3)
This resolution seeks shareholder approval of the Directors’ Remuneration Report, excluding the Directors’ Remuneration Policy, for the year ended
31December 2025 as set out on pages 94 to 115 of the Annual Report. This resolution is subject to an ‘advisory vote’ by shareholders and the Directors’
entitlement to remuneration is not conditional on it.
Declaration of a Dividend (Resolution 4)
A final dividend can only be paid after the Shareholders at a general meeting have approved it. A final dividend of 3.2 pence per Ordinary Share is
recommended by the Directors for payment to Shareholders who are on the Register at the close of business on 17 April 2026. If approved, the date of
payment of the final dividend will be 15 May 2026. The ex-dividend date is 16 April 2026. An interim dividend of 1.6 pence per Ordinary Share was paid
on 4 November 2025.
Election and Re-election of Directors (Resolutions 5 to 10 inclusive)
Provision 18 of the Financial Reporting Council’s UK Corporate Governance Code (the ‘Code’) requires all Directors to be subject to annual re-election.
Biographical details of all the Directors offering themselves for re-election or election, as applicable, are set out on pages 60 to 61 of the 2025 Annual
Report and are also available for viewing on the Company’s website (www.jsg.com).
For 2025, an evaluation of the Board was conducted within the Company by way of questionnaire for completion by each Board member. The
questionnaire was designed to encourage thought provoking and candid responses in relation to several aspects of Board performance during the
year and views on future focus topics for the Board. The Chair then arranged individual, one-to-one, meetings with each Board member to discuss the
aggregated and anonymised questionnaire responses. Overall conclusions were then presented and discussed at the meeting of the Board in January
2026. Further details are provided on page 81 of the 2025 Annual Report. Additionally, the Independent Non-Executive Directors conducted a
performance evaluation of the Chair, after taking into account the views of the Executive Directors. Furthermore, the Remuneration Committee
regularly reviewed the performance of each Executive Director.
As a result of these reviews and evaluations, it is considered that the performance of each Director continues to be effective, that each Director
demonstrates sufficient commitment to their role and that the contribution of each Director continues to be important to the Company’s long-term
sustainable success.
Appointment of the Auditor (Resolution 11)
The Company is required to appoint the auditor at each general meeting at which accounts are presented, to hold office until the end of the next such
meeting. Resolution 11, which is recommended by the Audit Committee, proposes the reappointment of the Company’s existing auditor, Grant Thornton
UK LLP.
Remuneration of the Auditor (Resolution 12)
This Resolution follows best practice in corporate governance by separately seeking authority for the Audit Committee to determine the auditor’s
remuneration.
Renewal of Directors’ Authority to Allot Securities (Resolution 13)
The Company’s Directors may only allot Ordinary Shares or grant rights over Ordinary Shares if authorised to do so by Shareholders. The authority
granted at the 2025 AGM under section 551 of the Companies Act 2006 to allot relevant securities is due to expire at the conclusion of this year’s AGM.
Accordingly, this Resolution seeks to grant a new authority to authorise the Directors to allot shares in the Company or grant rights to subscribe for, or
convert any security into, shares in the Company and will expire at the conclusion of the next AGM of the Company in 2027 or, if earlier, the close of
business on 1 July 2027.
If passed, the authority granted by the passing of this Resolution will be limited to an aggregate nominal value of £12,593,074 of Ordinary Shares which
represents approximately one third of the Ordinary share capital in issue (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026 (being the latest practicable
date prior to publication of this notice). If renewed, the authority will, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting,
200 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
Continued >
expire at the conclusion of the next Annual General Meeting of the Company to be held after the passing of this Resolution or, if earlier, on 1 July 2027.
Asat the date of this notice, no shares are held by the Company in treasury.
Other than in respect of allotting Ordinary Shares in order to satisfy employee share schemes, the Directors have no present intention of exercising this
authority. However, it is considered prudent to maintain the flexibility that this authority provides. The Company’s Directors intend to renew this
authority annually.
Renewal of General Disapplication of Pre-emption Rights (Resolution 14)
Under section 561(1) of the Companies Act 2006, if the Directors wish to allot any of the unissued shares or grant rights over shares or sell treasury
shares for cash (other than pursuant to an employee share scheme) they must in the first instance offer them to existing Shareholders in proportion to
their holdings. There may be occasions, however, when the Directors will need the flexibility to finance business opportunities by the issue of shares
without a pre-emptive offer to existing Shareholders. This cannot be done under the Companies Act 2006 unless the Shareholders have first waived
their pre-emption rights.
In 2022, the Pre-Emption Group (which represents the Investment Association and the Pension and Lifetime Savings Association) published a revised
statement of principles for the disapplication of pre-emption rights (the “Principles”). The Principles relate to issues of equity securities for cash other
than on a pre-emptive basis (i.e. other than pro rata to existing Shareholders) by all companies (wherever incorporated) with shares admitted to the
Premium Listing segment of the Official List of the UK Listing Authority and to trading on the Main Market for listed securities of the London Stock
Exchange (noting that, since the publication of the Principles, the Premium and Standard listing segments have subsequently been replaced by a
single listing category for equity shares in commercial companies). At the Company’s AGM in 2025, the Company sought and obtained Shareholder
approval for a general authority for the disapplication of pre-emption rights in accordance with the applicable authority limits set out in the Principles.
The Principles provide that a general authority for the disapplication of pre-emption rights over approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued
ordinary share capital, together with a further disapplication for up to 2 per cent to be used only for the purposes of a follow-on offer which the
Directors of the Company determine to be of a kind contemplated by paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the Principles, should be treated as routine.
Whilst the Directors do not have any present intention to exercise the disapplication authority sought in Resolution 14, the Directors consider that it is
appropriate for them to seek the flexibility that this authority provides, and that the authority sought in Resolution 14 is in the best interests of the
Company.
Accordingly, other than in connection with a rights issue or any other pre-emptive offer concerning Equity Securities, and subject to the passing of
Resolution 13, this Resolution seeks to replace the authority conferred on the Directors at the 2025 AGM to allot ordinary shares, or grant rights to
subscribe for, or convert securities into, ordinary shares or sell treasury shares for cash (other than pursuant to an employee equity incentive share
scheme) without application of pre-emption rights. The authority will be limited to the issue of shares for cash up to a maximum aggregate nominal
value of (i) £3,777,922, which is equivalent to approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at
2March 2026 (being the latest practicable date prior to publication of this notice); and (ii) up to an additional £755,584, which is equivalent to
approximately 2 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026 (being the latest practicable
date prior to publication of this notice), solely for the purposes of making a follow-on offer which the Directors of the Company determine to be of a
kind contemplated by paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the Principles.
This Resolution also seeks a disapplication of the pre-emption rights on a rights issue so as to allow the Directors to make exclusions or such other
arrangements as may be appropriate to resolve legal or practical problems which, for example, might arise with overseas Shareholders.
Shareholders will note that this Resolution also relates to treasury shares and will be proposed as a Special Resolution. If renewed, the authority will,
unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the conclusion of the next AGM of the Company in 2027 or, if
earlier, the close of business on 1 July 2027. The Directors intend to renew this authority annually and confirm their intention to follow best practice, as set
out in the Principles.
General Disapplication of Pre-emption Rights in Connection with an Acquisition or Specified Capital Investment (Resolution 15)
The Principles further provide that the Company may, as a routine, seek to disapply pre-emption rights over the equivalent of approximately an
additional 10 per cent of the issued ordinary share capital of the Company, so long as certain criteria are met. Subject to the passing of Resolution13,
Resolution15 seeks to replace the authority conferred on the Directors at the 2025 AGM (in addition to the authority referred to above in relation to
Resolution14) to allot ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for, or convert securities into, ordinary shares or sell treasury shares for cash (other
than pursuant to an employee equity incentive share scheme) up to an aggregate nominal value of approximately:
(i) 10 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) without application of pre-emption rights pursuant to
section 561 of the Companies Act 2006, provided that this authority will only be used for the purpose of:
a. an acquisition; or
b. a specified capital investment in respect of which sufficient information regarding the effect of the investment on the Company, the
assets that are the subject of the investment and (where appropriate) the profits attributable to those assets is made available to
Shareholders to enable them to reach an assessment of the potential return on the investment which is announced
contemporaneously with the issue or which has taken place in the preceding twelve month period and is disclosed in the
announcement of the issue; and up to an additional
(ii) 2 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) without application of pre-emption rights pursuant to
section561 of the Companies Act 2006, provided that this authority will only be used for the purpose of making a follow-on offer which the
Directors of the Company determine to be of a kind contemplated by paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the Principles.
At the Company’s 2025 AGM, in addition to a general authority for the disapplication of pre-emption rights in accordance with the authority limits set
out in the Principles, the Company sought and obtained Shareholder approval for an additional general authority for the disapplication of
pre-emption rights in connection with an acquisition or specified capital investment, in accordance with the applicable authority limits set out in the
Principles.
201
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
Whilst the Directors do not have any present intention to exercise the disapplication authority sought in Resolution 15, the Directors consider that it is
appropriate for them to seek the additional flexibility that this authority provides, and that the authority sought in Resolution 15 is in the best interests
of the Company.
Accordingly, other than in connection with a rights, scrip dividend, or other similar issue, the authority contained in Resolution 15 would be limited to (i)
the issue of shares for cash up to a maximum aggregate nominal value of £3,777,922 (which includes the sale on a non-pre-emptive basis of any shares
held in treasury), which is equivalent to approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at
2March 2026 (being the latest practicable date prior to the publication of this notice); and (ii) up to an additional £755,584, which is equivalent to
approximately 2 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026 (being the latest practicable
date prior to publication of this notice), solely for the purposes of making a follow-on offer which the Directors of the Company determine to be of a
kind contemplated by paragraph 3 of Section 2B of the Principles.
If approved, the authority will, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the conclusion of the next
AGM of the Company in 2027 or, if earlier, the close of business on 1 July 2027. The Directors intend to renew this authority annually.
Renewal of Company’s authority to purchase Ordinary Shares (Resolution 16)
In certain circumstances it may be advantageous for the Company to purchase its own shares and this Resolution seeks the authority from
Shareholders to continue to do so. Authority was given to the Company to make market purchases up to an aggregate of 41,498,320 of its Ordinary
Shares at the 2025 AGM (being equal to approximately 10 per cent of the Company’s issued ordinary share capital as at 3 March 2025, the latest
practicable date prior to the publication of the notice for the 2024 AGM). This authority is due to expire at the end of the AGM and it is proposed that
the Company be authorised to make market purchases up to an aggregate of 37,779,223 Ordinary Shares, representing approximately 10 per cent of
the Company’s issued ordinary share capital (excluding treasury shares) as at 2 March 2026, being the latest practicable date prior to the publication
of this notice. The authority specifies the minimum and maximum prices that may be paid for any Ordinary Shares.
Details of share buyback programmes undertaken by the Company during the financial year ended 31 December 2025 are set out on page 63 of the
2025 Annual Report.
Renewing the authority for the Company to purchase Ordinary Shares in the market, pursuant to Resolution 16, is intended to allow your Board the
flexibility to take advantage of opportunities that may arise to increase Shareholder value. The Directors intend that this authority will only be
exercised when, in the light of market conditions prevailing at the time and having carefully considered any priority capital allocation activities,
financial gearing levels and the overall position of the Company, they believe that the effect of such purchases will be to increase earnings per share
and will be likely to promote the success of the Company for the benefit of its members as a whole. The purchase price would be paid out of
distributable profits.
Whilst it is the Directors’ present intention to cancel any shares purchased pursuant to this authority, any shares purchased in the market under this
authority may be either cancelled or, pursuant to the Companies Act 2006 and the authority conferred by this Resolution, held as treasury shares. Once
held in treasury, the Company is not entitled to exercise any rights, including the right to attend and vote at meetings in respect of shares. Further, no
dividend or other distribution of the Company’s assets may be made to the Company in respect of the treasury shares.
Shares held in treasury allow the Company to quickly and cost-effectively reissue shares and also gives the Company the opportunity to satisfy
employee share scheme awards. The total number of options to subscribe for Ordinary Shares that were outstanding at 2 March 2026 (being the latest
practicable date prior to publication of this notice) was 8,378,505. The proportion of issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) that they
represented at that time was approximately 2.2 per cent and the proportion of issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) that they will represent
if the full authority to purchase shares (existing and being sought) is used is approximately 2.5 per cent.
The authority given under this Resolution will, unless previously renewed, varied or revoked by the Company in general meeting, expire at the
conclusion of the next AGM of the Company in 2027, or, if earlier, the close of business on 1 July 2027. It is the present intention of the Directors to seek
renewal of this authority annually.
202 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Notice of Annual General Meeting 2026
Continued >
203
Strategic
Report
Corporate
Governance
Group Financial
Statements
Company Financial
Statements
Shareholder
Information
204 Johnson Service Group PLC 2025 Annual Report & Accounts
Directors and Advisors
Directors and Officers
John (Jock) Fyfe Lennox, LLB, CA
Non-Executive Chair
Chair of Nomination Committee
Member of Remuneration Committee
Peter Egan, MBA
Chief Executive Officer
Director responsible for Health, Safety and the Environment
Chair of Sustainability Committee
Chair of Disclosure Committee
Ryan Govender, ACA, CA(SA) (appointed 1 October 2025)
Chief Financial Officer
Member of Sustainability Committee
Member of Disclosure Committee
Christopher (Chris) Francis Girling, MBA, FCA
Independent Non-Executive Director
Senior Independent Non-Executive Director
Chair of Audit Committee
Member of Nomination Committee
Member of Remuneration Committee
Nicola Elizabeth Anne Keach, MA
Independent Non-Executive Director
Member of Audit Committee
Member of Nomination Committee
Member of Remuneration Committee
Kirsty Rowena Homer, MA
Independent Non-Executive Director
Chair of Remuneration Committee
Non-Executive Director responsible for Workforce Engagement
Member of Audit Committee
Member of Nomination Committee
Member of Remuneration Committee
Yvonne May Monaghan, BSc (Hons), FCA (resigned 1 October 2025)
Former Chief Financial Officer
Christopher John Clarkson, LLB (Hons)
General Counsel & Company Secretary
Registered Office
Johnson House
Abbots Park
Monks Way
Preston Brook
Cheshire
WA7 3GH
Advisors
Financial Advisor and Stockbrokers
Investec Bank PLC
30 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7QP
Principal Bankers
Lloyds Bank plc
40 Spring Gardens
Manchester
M2 1EN
National Westminster Bank PLC
10th Floor, The Plaza
100 Old Hall Street
Liverpool
L3 9QJ
AIB Group (UK) plc
92 Ann Street
Belfast
BT1 3HH
Lawyers
Hill Dickinson LLP
No1 St Paul’s Square
Liverpool
L3 9SJ
Registrar and Transfer Office
MUFG Corporate Markets
Central Square
29 Wellington Street
Leeds
LS1 4DL
Independent Auditor
Grant Thornton UK LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
Landmark
St Peter’s Square
1 Oxford Street
Manchester
M1 4PB
Electronic Communications
The Company offers Shareholders the opportunity to receive communications such as notices of Shareholder meetings and the annual
report and accounts electronically. The Company encourages the use of electronic communication as, not only does it help to reduce
the Company’s environmental impact and save on printing and mailing costs, it is also a more convenient and prompt method of
communication.
If you decide to receive communications electronically, you will be sent an email message each time a new Shareholder report or
notice of meeting is published. The email will contain links to the appropriate website where documents can be viewed. It is possible to
change your instruction at any time by amending your details on the register.
If you would like to receive electronic communications, you will need to register your email address by accessing the Shareholder
Services page within the Investor Relations section of the Company’s website at www.jsg.com.
This will link you to the service offered by the Company’s Registrar. If you decide not to register an email address with the Registrar, you
will continue to receive notification in the post each time a new Shareholder report or notice of meeting is published, unless you have
requested to receive these documents in hard copy form.
Those Shareholders who are CREST members and who wish to appoint a proxy or proxies utilising the proxy voting service please refer
to Accompanying Note 6 of the Notice of Annual General Meeting. If you are an institutional investor you may also be able to appoint
a proxy electronically via the Proxymity platform, a process which has been agreed by the Company and approved by the Registrar.
For further information regarding Proxymity, please go to www.proxymity.io and refer to Accompanying Note 7 of the Notice of Annual
General Meeting.
Nominee shareholders are underlying beneficial shareholders who hold their shares through a nominee company. If underlying
shareholders wish to receive Company mailings, then they have the right to request to be put on the beneficial holder’s information
rights register which can be arranged via their nominee provider.
If you have any queries regarding electronic communications, please contact the Company’s Registrar, MUFG Corporate Markets, via
email at shareholderenquiries@cm.mpms.mufg.com or on 0371 664 0300. Calls are charged at the standard geographic rate and will
vary by provider. Calls outside the United Kingdom will be charged at the applicable international rate. Lines are open between
09:00–17:30 (GMT), Monday to Friday excluding public holidays in England and Wales.
Design: sterlingfp.com
hive.agency
Production: sterlingfp.com
This annual report is printed using vegetable inks on paper from an ISO 14001 certified manufacturer.
The paper is made with ECF pulp composed of a mixture of fibre from FSC® certified forests,
rec
y
cled fibres and other controlled sources.
Johnson House, Abbots Park,
Monks Way, Preston Brook,
Cheshire WA7 3GH
T: +44 (0)1928 704 600
F: +44 (0)1928 704 620
enquiries@jsg.com